CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual

CXDI Control Software NE

CXDI Controller RF

Service Manual

For Ver.2.16
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Contents

1. Overview 22

1. CXDI Control Software NE 22

1.1. Overview of CXDI Control Software NE................................................................. 22

1.2. Basic system configuration of CCS-NE.................................................................. 23
1.3. Monitor configurations for CCS-NE........................................................................ 24
1.4. Operating environment for CCS-NE....................................................................... 25
1.4.1. Hardware environment.................................................................................25
1.4.2. Software environment................................................................................... 30
Notes on the software to coexist with CCS-NE...................................................... 31

2. CXDI Controller RF 32

2.1. Overview of CXDI Controller RF............................................................................ 32

2.2. Basic system configuration of CCS-RF.................................................................. 33
2.3. Monitor configurations for CCS-RF........................................................................ 34
2.4. Operating environment for CCS-RF....................................................................... 35
2.4.1. Hardware environment.................................................................................35
2.4.2. Software environment................................................................................... 40
Notes on the software to coexist with CCS-RF....................................................... 41

List of supported resolutions 43

2. Installation 44

1. Overview of Installation 44

1.1. User accounts........................................................................................................ 44

2. Contents of the Installation Disk 45

2.1. System configuration of the installer...................................................................... 45

3. Installation 46

3.1. Starting up the integrated installer......................................................................... 46

3.1.1. Checking the operating environment with the installer................................. 46
3.1.2. Notes on using Windows 8.1 or later............................................................ 47
3.1.3. Starting up the integrated installer................................................................ 48

2
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.2. Updating with the integrated installer..................................................................... 50

3.2.1. Components to be installed and installation checks..................................... 50
3.2.2. Instance created by SQL Server................................................................... 50
3.2.3. Databases to be installed.............................................................................51
3.2.4. Advance processing executed by the integrated installer............................. 51
3.2.5. Installation logs.............................................................................................51
3.3. Installing Tera Term................................................................................................ 52
3.4. Checking and setting the OS environment............................................................. 56
3.4.1. Checking power option settings.................................................................... 57
3.4.2. Turning off defragmentation.......................................................................... 59
3.4.3. Disabling the automatic switching to tablet mode......................................... 60
3.5. Uninstallation.......................................................................................................... 60
3.5.1. Uninstalling CCS...........................................................................................61
3.5.2. Uninstalling the database engine.................................................................. 63
3.5.3. Deleting the installation folder....................................................................... 70
3.5.4. Deleting the registry......................................................................................70

4. Essential Settings 71

4.1. OS network settings............................................................................................... 71

4.2. Registering the CXDI-50RF detector (for CCS-RF only)........................................ 75
4.3. Registering static detectors.................................................................................... 77
4.3.1. Ethernet connection detectors (such as CXDI-40E, CXDI-50, CXDI-55,
and CXDI-60)................................................................................................ 77
4.3.2. Ferry type wireless connection detectors (such as CXDI-70C Wireless,
CXDI-401G Wireless, and CXDI-810C Wireless)......................................... 81
4.3.3. Ferry type wired connection detectors (such as CXDI-401G and
CXDI-501G).................................................................................................. 90
4.3.4. Deleting a registered detector....................................................................... 92
4.4. X-ray generator settings......................................................................................... 92
4.5. HDD/memory settings............................................................................................ 94
4.6. Creating a predetermined workspace.................................................................... 98
4.6.1. Using the predetermined settings................................................................. 98
4.6.2. Using workspace settings other than the predetermined ones..................... 99
4.7. Calibration, performance test, and self-diagnosis................................................ 101
4.7.1. Conducting calibration and performance test............................................. 101
4.7.2. Resetting to the factory default................................................................... 107
4.7.3. Conducting self-diagnosis........................................................................... 107

3
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.8. Phototimer adjustments....................................................................................... 110

4.8.1. Overview of phototimer adjustments.......................................................... 110
4.8.2. Setting AEC protocols................................................................................. 111
4.8.3. Preparations for phototimer adjustment...................................................... 113
4.8.4. Selecting AEC protocols............................................................................. 117
4.8.5. Adjusting the phototimer............................................................................. 117
4.9. License issuance.................................................................................................. 118

5. Other Settings 119

5.1. Use of languages other than Japanese, English (United States), and
Chinese (Simplified)............................................................................................. 119
5.2. Other settings....................................................................................................... 119
5.2.1. Touch panel operations............................................................................... 119
5.2.2. Use of GPU for radiographic image processing......................................... 123
5.2.3. Automatic disconnection detection............................................................. 124
5.2.4. Resending images after CCS is restarted and when erroneous
exposure is detected.................................................................................. 125
5.2.5. Shock detection..........................................................................................125
5.3. Behavior at system shutdown.............................................................................. 127
5.3.1. Restart mode..............................................................................................128
5.3.2. Operation in restart mode...........................................................................131
5.3.3. Operations on the restart mode screen when login authorization is
not valid...................................................................................................... 132

6. Operation in Shell Mode 133

6.1. Setting shell mode startup.................................................................................... 133

6.2. Canceling shell mode startup............................................................................... 133

7. Upgrade 135

7.1. Requirements for an upgrade.............................................................................. 135

7.1.1. Versions that support upgrades.................................................................. 135
7.1.2. Models that support upgrades.................................................................... 135
7.1.3. Editions that support upgrades................................................................... 136
7.2. Downgrade........................................................................................................... 136
7.3. Compatibility with detector models....................................................................... 136

4
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

8. Migration 137

8.1. Migration procedure............................................................................................. 137

8.2. Migration procedure (old version)........................................................................ 142

9. Antivirus Software Setting Procedure 143

9.1. Overview.............................................................................................................. 143

9.2. Common operation policy....................................................................................143
9.2.1. Operating environment...............................................................................143
9.2.2. Virus scans.................................................................................................143
9.2.3. Updating the definition file..........................................................................144
9.3. McAfee................................................................................................................. 145
9.3.1. Access protection........................................................................................145
9.3.2. On-access scan..........................................................................................147
9.4. ESET.................................................................................................................... 150
9.4.1. Antivirus measures.....................................................................................151
9.4.2. Updates......................................................................................................152
9.4.3. Tools...........................................................................................................152
9.4.4. Scheduler....................................................................................................153
9.5. Windows Defender............................................................................................... 153
9.5.1. Enabling and disabling Windows Defender................................................ 154
9.5.2. Settings screen...........................................................................................154
9.5.3. Settings.......................................................................................................155
9.5.4. Updating the definition file..........................................................................156
9.5.5. Scan schedule............................................................................................156

3. Protocols 158

1. Overview of Protocol Creation 158

1.1. Overview of the protocol creation tool.................................................................. 159

1.2. Relationship between protocol and workspace.................................................... 160
1.3. Exposure modes and exposure types.................................................................. 161

2. Protocol Editor 162

2.1. Overview of Protocol Editor.................................................................................. 162

2.2. Functional overview of Protocol Editor................................................................. 163
2.3. Basic screen configuration of Protocol Editor...................................................... 163

5
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.4. Protocol hierarchy................................................................................................ 164

2.4.1. Description of the screen............................................................................164
2.4.2. Creating protocols.......................................................................................166
2.4.3. Deleting and copying protocols................................................................... 173
2.4.4. Adding a workspace to a protocol............................................................... 174
2.4.5. Deleting a workspace from a protocol........................................................ 175
2.4.6. Changing the parameters relating to a protocol workspace....................... 176
2.4.7. AEC protocols.............................................................................................192
2.5. Pre-packed Protocol hierarchy............................................................................. 192
2.5.1. Description of the screen............................................................................192
2.5.2. Creating prepack protocols......................................................................... 192
2.5.3. Changing and deleting prepack protocols.................................................. 194
2.5.4. Setting auto-start protocols......................................................................... 194
2.6. Workspace hierarchy............................................................................................ 194
2.6.1. Description of the screen............................................................................195
2.6.2. Creating workspaces..................................................................................195
2.6.3. Setting Storage Crop common to a workspace.......................................... 198
2.6.4. Changing workspaces................................................................................201
2.6.5. Deleting workspaces...................................................................................201
2.7. View hierarchy...................................................................................................... 201
2.7.1. Description of the screen............................................................................202
2.7.2. Changing the parameters that are set for individual protocol
workspaces at once................................................................................... 203
2.8. Button Layout hierarchy....................................................................................... 204
2.8.1. Description of the screen............................................................................204
2.8.2. Changing trays............................................................................................205
2.8.3. Changing the protocol layout on a tray....................................................... 206
2.9. Image processing parameter list.......................................................................... 206
2.9.1. Radiographic image processing parameters.............................................. 206
Main unit UI...........................................................................................................212
2.9.2. Dynamic image processing parameters..................................................... 212
Main unit UI...........................................................................................................220
2.9.3. CCS vs RD image processing parameter and analysis correspondence
table........................................................................................................... 220
2.10. DICOM body parts and recommended image processing categories................ 228
2.11. Image processing categories and anatomical parts in both English and
Japanese............................................................................................................ 233

6
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. EX2DB/CCR2EX 235

3.1. Overview of EX2DB/CCR2EX.............................................................................. 235

3.2. EX2DB................................................................................................................. 236
3.2.1. Starting up EX2DB......................................................................................236
3.2.2. Exporting protocol information to a protocol sheet..................................... 237
3.2.3. Importing a protocol sheet to the protocol DB............................................ 238
3.2.4. Converting protocol sheets......................................................................... 240
3.2.5. Checking protocol sheets...........................................................................241
3.2.6. Protocol sheet specifications...................................................................... 242
3.3. EX2DB32.exe....................................................................................................... 242
3.3.1. Function......................................................................................................242
3.3.2. Operating environment...............................................................................242
3.3.3. Operating EX2DB32.exe............................................................................243
3.3.4. Converting BodyPart settings into protocol sheets (CCR2EX)................... 243
3.3.5. Conversion specifications...........................................................................244

Appendix 1: Protocol Sheet Definitions 245

1. Protocol worksheet.................................................................................................. 245

1.1. Protocol name................................................................................................245
1.2. Comment.......................................................................................................245
1.3. Mark...............................................................................................................246
1.4. Mark interlock................................................................................................246
1.5. Modality.........................................................................................................246
1.6. DICOM BodyPart...........................................................................................247
1.7. Patient orientation..........................................................................................248
1.8. View position..................................................................................................248
1.9. Laterality........................................................................................................249
1.10. L laterality position.......................................................................................249
1.11. R laterality position.......................................................................................250
1.12. Series description........................................................................................250
2. ProtocolWorkspace worksheet................................................................................ 251
2.1. Group ID........................................................................................................251
2.2. Protocol name................................................................................................251
2.3. Workspace name...........................................................................................252
2.4. Code value.....................................................................................................252
2.5. Code meaning...............................................................................................253
2.6. IsDefault.........................................................................................................253
2.7. Exposure type................................................................................................254

7
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.8. Exposure mode..............................................................................................254

2.9. Film setting mode..........................................................................................255
2.10. Film size.......................................................................................................255
2.11. Film orientation............................................................................................255
2.12. Film layout cells...........................................................................................256
2.13. Film image zoom mode...............................................................................257
2.14. Film fixed ratio.............................................................................................257
2.15. Film layout mode.........................................................................................257
2.16. Film crop type..............................................................................................258
2.17. Storage crop setting mode........................................................................... 258
2.18. Storage crop cropping type.......................................................................... 259
2.19. Storage crop cropping position base........................................................... 259
2.20. Storage crop fixed size................................................................................260
2.21. Storage crop alignment................................................................................260
2.22. Storage crop unit of length........................................................................... 260
2.23. Mask type....................................................................................................261
2.24. Mask size.....................................................................................................261
2.25. Mask unit of length.......................................................................................262
2.26. ImageInfo1 customized setting.................................................................... 262
2.27. ImageInfo1 field value..................................................................................262
2.28. ImageInfo1 transfer value............................................................................263
2.29. ImageInfo2 use customized setting............................................................. 263
2.30. ImageInfo2 Field value................................................................................263
2.31. ImageInfo2 transfer value............................................................................264
2.32. ImageInfo3 customized setting.................................................................... 264
2.33. ImageInfo3 Field value................................................................................264
2.34. ImageInfo3 transfer value............................................................................265
2.35. ImageInfo4 customized setting.................................................................... 265
2.36. ImageInfo4 field value..................................................................................265
2.37. ImageInfo4 transfer value............................................................................266
2.38. Grid type......................................................................................................266
2.39. GridID..........................................................................................................266
2.40. Exp order.....................................................................................................267
2.41. Flip and rotate..............................................................................................267
2.42. Bodypart category........................................................................................267
2.43. Anatomical part............................................................................................268
2.44. Direction.......................................................................................................269
2.45. Dynamic range adjustment whole region..................................................... 269
2.46. Dynamic range adjustment whole region effect........................................... 269
2.47. Dynamic range adjustment bright region..................................................... 270

8
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.48. Dynamic range adjustment bright region effect........................................... 270

2.49. Dynamic range adjustment dark region....................................................... 270
2.50. Dynamic range adjustment dark region effect............................................. 271
2.51. Enhancement...............................................................................................271
2.52. Contrast boost.............................................................................................271
2.53. Edge enhancement......................................................................................272
2.54. Edge frequency............................................................................................272
2.55. Grid suppression..........................................................................................272
2.56. Scatter correction.........................................................................................273
2.57. Scatter correction effect...............................................................................273
2.58. Scatter correction kernel..............................................................................273
2.59. Scatter correction method............................................................................ 273
2.60. LUT base brightness....................................................................................274
2.61. LUT base contrast.......................................................................................274
2.62. LUT curve shape.........................................................................................274
2.63. Noise reduction............................................................................................275
2.64. Noise reduction effect..................................................................................275
2.65. Noise reduction method............................................................................... 275
2.66. Peripheral mask...........................................................................................276
2.67. Exposure area analysis...............................................................................276
2.68. ROI analysis................................................................................................276
2.69. Clipping........................................................................................................277
2.70. Line noise reduction lnr base weight........................................................... 277
2.71. LUT brightness adjustment mode................................................................ 277
2.72. LUT inverse.................................................................................................277
2.73. REX.............................................................................................................278
2.74. MTF improvement........................................................................................278
2.75. P-Value brightness of around...................................................................... 278
2.76. P-Value brightness of film viewer................................................................. 278
2.77. Sharpness adjustment.................................................................................279
2.78. Sharpness adjustment effect.......................................................................279
2.79. Exposure index analysis.............................................................................. 279
2.80. Saturation analysis......................................................................................279
2.81. vscMethod...................................................................................................280
2.82. DR high limit adjuster...................................................................................280
2.83. DR low limit adjuster....................................................................................280
2.84. DR subject maximum value limit.................................................................. 281
2.85. DR subject minimum value limit................................................................... 281
2.86. DR frequency balance.................................................................................281
2.87. CB low limit adjuster....................................................................................281

9
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.88. Edge frequency balance.............................................................................. 282

2.89. CB frequency balance.................................................................................282
2.90. Grid frequency.............................................................................................282
2.91. Filter Order...................................................................................................283
2.92. Discrimination threshold..............................................................................283
2.93. Curve shape pattern....................................................................................284
2.94. Trim ratio of low value..................................................................................284
2.95. Trim ratio of high value................................................................................284
2.96. DR adjustment mode...................................................................................285
2.97. DR inflection value.......................................................................................285
2.98. Brightness optimization................................................................................285
2.99. Brightness optimization limiter of low value................................................. 285
2.100. Color of low dose.......................................................................................286
2.101. High value adjuster of contrast limit........................................................... 286
2.102. Low value adjuster of contrast limit............................................................ 286
2.103. Range compression method...................................................................... 286
2.104. Motion correction.......................................................................................287
2.105. Noise reduction mode................................................................................ 287
2.106. Analysis image conversion........................................................................287
2.107. Subject analysis.........................................................................................288
2.108. Analysis sensitivity.....................................................................................288
2.109. Analysis stabilizer......................................................................................288
2.110. Edge steps of detection.............................................................................289
2.111. DSA............................................................................................................289
2.112. DSA image max value................................................................................289
2.113. DSA image min value.................................................................................290
2.114. DSA image ref value..................................................................................290
2.115. DSA pixel shift padding value.................................................................... 290
2.116. DSA roadmap mask start no...................................................................... 290
2.117. DSA roadmap mask end no....................................................................... 291
2.118. DSA roadmapping coeff.............................................................................291
2.119. DSA roadmapping offset............................................................................291
2.120. DSA subtraction mask start no.................................................................. 291
2.121. DSA subtraction mask addnum................................................................. 292
2.122. DSA subtraction offset...............................................................................292
2.123. DSA pixel shift x value...............................................................................292
2.124. DSA pixel shift y value...............................................................................292
2.125. Injection timing...........................................................................................293
2.126. Tomo auto window ROI size...................................................................... 293
2.127. Tomo auto window rejection...................................................................... 293

10
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.128. Tomo geometry correction factor............................................................... 294

2.129. Tomo noise reduction threshold................................................................. 294
2.130. Tomo noise reduction mode....................................................................... 294
2.131. Tomo noise reduction level........................................................................295
2.132. Tomo normalization gain............................................................................295
2.133. Tomo normalization offset.......................................................................... 295
2.134. Xray storage time.......................................................................................296
2.135. Static drive mode.......................................................................................296
2.136. EIT.............................................................................................................296
2.137. Source image receptor distance................................................................ 297
2.138. Source object distance..............................................................................297
2.139. APRID........................................................................................................297
2.140. Binning.......................................................................................................298
2.141. Sensor area...............................................................................................298
2.142. FPS............................................................................................................299
2.143. Dose mode................................................................................................299
2.144. ADCROI.....................................................................................................299
2.145. Detector rotate angle.................................................................................300
2.146. Grid direction for detector..........................................................................300
2.147. Use limit of frames in each cine exposure................................................. 300
2.148. Limit of frames in each cine exposure....................................................... 301
2.149. Auto play setting mode..............................................................................301
2.150. Auto play mode..........................................................................................301
2.151. Use stitch free rotation............................................................................... 302
2.152. Tomo cut off frequency...............................................................................302
2.153. Tomo reconstruction filter type................................................................... 302
2.154. Tomo reconstruction filter DC.................................................................... 302
2.155. Tomo table operation type......................................................................... 303
2.156. Tomo reconstruction method..................................................................... 303
2.157. Tomo number of slices...............................................................................303
2.158. Tomo slice pitch.........................................................................................303
2.159. Tomo use geometry data...........................................................................304
2.160. Tomo rec window gain...............................................................................304
2.161. Tomo window offset...................................................................................304
2.162. Tomo do noise reduction............................................................................ 304
2.163. Tomo noise reduction base weight............................................................ 305
2.164. Boundary correction protocol setting......................................................... 305
2.165. Upper boundary correction mode.............................................................. 305
2.166. Upper boundary correction effect.............................................................. 305
2.167. Lower boundary correction mode.............................................................. 306

11
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.168. Lower boundary correction effect.............................................................. 306

2.169. Candidate replacement protocols.............................................................. 307
2.170. Short cut of replacement protocol.............................................................. 307
3. Prepack worksheet.................................................................................................. 308
3.1. Group ID........................................................................................................308
3.2. Prepack name................................................................................................308
3.3. Comment.......................................................................................................309
3.4. Code value.....................................................................................................309
3.5. Protocol workspace.......................................................................................309
3.6. Protocol Order...............................................................................................310
4. Button layout worksheet.......................................................................................... 311
4.1. Tray name...................................................................................................... 311
4.2. Tray order...................................................................................................... 311
4.3. PositionX........................................................................................................ 311
4.4. PositionY........................................................................................................312
4.5. Protocol workspace.......................................................................................312
4.6. Prepack..........................................................................................................312
5. Grid worksheet........................................................................................................ 313
5.1. GridID............................................................................................................313
5.2. Grid name......................................................................................................313
5.3. Frequency......................................................................................................313
5.4. Quality............................................................................................................314
6. Workspace worksheet............................................................................................. 315
6.1. Group ID........................................................................................................315
6.2. Workspace name...........................................................................................315
6.3. Position type..................................................................................................316
6.4. Workspace color............................................................................................316
6.5. Detector group...............................................................................................317
6.6. Exposure mode..............................................................................................317
6.7. Storage crop cropping type............................................................................ 317
6.8. Storage crop cropping position base............................................................. 318
6.9. Storage crop fixed size..................................................................................318
6.10. Storage crop alignment................................................................................318
6.11. Storage crop unit of length...........................................................................319
7. Detector catalog worksheet..................................................................................... 320
7.1. Model name...................................................................................................320
7.2. Detector group...............................................................................................320
7.3. Supported dynamic exposure........................................................................ 320

12
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Appendix 2: CCR2EX Protocol Sheet Conversion Function Specifications 321

1. Protocol sheet conversion rules.............................................................................. 321

1.1. Protocol information.......................................................................................321
1.2. Protocol workspace information..................................................................... 328
1.3. Prepack information.......................................................................................370
1.4. Grid information.............................................................................................374
1.5. Workspace information..................................................................................376
1.6. Workspace detector map information............................................................ 381
1.7. System information........................................................................................382
1.8. Detector catalog information..........................................................................385

4. Setting Reference 386

1. Service Tool Functions 386

1.1. Operating environment......................................................................................... 387

1.2. Basic screen configuration................................................................................... 387
1.3. Common specifications........................................................................................ 387
1.4. Login.................................................................................................................... 387

2. Menu selection 389

2.1. X-ray generator and detector settings.................................................................. 390

2.1.1. X-Ray Generator.........................................................................................390
2.1.2. Sensor........................................................................................................394
2.1.3. Grid.............................................................................................................395
2.1.4. AP/LNK.......................................................................................................396
2.1.5. Maintenance Tool........................................................................................396
2.2. DICOM settings.................................................................................................... 397
2.2.1. DICOM Common Setting............................................................................ 397
2.2.1.1. Supplementary notes on DICOM Common Setting................................. 399
2.2.2. MWL............................................................................................................408
2.2.3. MPPS..........................................................................................................421
2.2.4. Storage.......................................................................................................425
2.2.5. Printer.........................................................................................................437
2.2.6. Media output...............................................................................................454
2.2.7. Report.........................................................................................................457
2.3. System setting...................................................................................................... 463
2.3.1. Application Setting......................................................................................463
2.3.2. User Account Management........................................................................497

13
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.3. Annotation settings.....................................................................................501

2.3.4. Log Setting..................................................................................................521
2.3.5. Add-in Setting.............................................................................................522
2.4. Utility Setting........................................................................................................ 522
2.4.1. Protocol Editor............................................................................................522
2.4.2. Protocol Import and Export......................................................................... 522
2.4.3. Data Collection...........................................................................................522
2.4.4. Migration.....................................................................................................523
2.4.5. Image Import and Export............................................................................523
2.4.6. License.......................................................................................................523
2.5. Input Assist Setting............................................................................................... 523
2.5.1. Barcode Reader..........................................................................................523
2.5.2. Magnetic Card Reader................................................................................524

Appendix 1. Overview of the DICOM Standard 531

1. Overview................................................................................................................. 531
2. Acquisition of patient information (Modality Worklist SOP Class)........................... 532
3. Reporting on the progress of study (Modality Performed Procedure Step
SOP Class).............................................................................................................533
4. Storage of captured images on the server (Storage Service Class and Storage
Commitment Service Class).................................................................................... 534
5. Printing of images (Print Management Service Class)............................................ 535
6. Connectivity verification (Verification Service Class).............................................. 536

Appendix 3. Detector Catalog 537

Appendix 4. Printer Catalog 538

1. Overview of the printer catalog............................................................................... 538

2. Data structure.......................................................................................................... 539
2.1. CS Info...........................................................................................................540
3. Setting of the printer catalog...................................................................................541
3.1. Printer catalog name screen..........................................................................541
3.2. Printing parameter setting screen.................................................................. 543
3.3. Film list setting screen...................................................................................544
4. Printer setting procedure using a printer catalog.................................................... 544
5. Printer adjustment with the D-value set (when setting a printer that does not
support the P-value)................................................................................................547

14
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Appendix 5. Gamma Adjustment Tool 553

1. Overview of the Gamma Adjustment Tool............................................................... 553

1.1. Starting the Gamma Adjustment Tool............................................................ 554
2. Setting the monitor (type A)..................................................................................... 558
2.1. Technical description.....................................................................................558
2.2. Notes.............................................................................................................558
2.3. Preparations..................................................................................................559
2.4. Operating procedure......................................................................................559
3. Setting the monitor (type B)....................................................................................567
3.1. Operating procedure......................................................................................567
4. Reference information............................................................................................. 569
4.1. Selection of the monitor.................................................................................569
4.2. DICOM gradation...........................................................................................570

Appendix 6. AP/LNK Configuration Tool 573

1. Overview of the AP/LNK Configuration Tool............................................................ 573

2. Linking procedure.................................................................................................... 574
3. Notes on settings.................................................................................................... 577
4. Setting procedures.................................................................................................. 577
4.1. Using the detector as the child unit................................................................ 578
4.2. Using the detector as the parent unit............................................................. 582
4.3. Enabling multiple X-ray generators and communication settings.................. 587
5. Channel settings..................................................................................................... 591
5.1. Available regions and restrictions.................................................................. 591
5.2. Channel settings............................................................................................591
6. Link controller (reference information).................................................................... 594

Appendix 8. Image Import Export Tool 595

1. Starting the Image Import Export Tool..................................................................... 595

2. Operating procedure for the image export function................................................. 597
2.1. Export data structure.....................................................................................601
3. Operating procedure for the image import function................................................. 602
3.1. Import data structure......................................................................................604
4. Viewing imported images........................................................................................ 604
5. Detailed specifications of the Image Import Export Tool......................................... 605

15
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Appendix 10. Detectors 607

1. Static Detector / Ferry Static Detector..................................................................... 608

1.1. Items that can be set for each different detector........................................... 608
1.2. Receive IP Address (Static Detector)............................................................ 610
1.3. IP address settings (Ferry Static Detector).................................................... 611
1.4. QC grid and embedded grid settings............................................................. 612
1.5. Auto Sleep setting..........................................................................................613
1.6. Image Preview settings..................................................................................614
2. Dynamic Detector (for CCS-RF only)...................................................................... 615
2.1. Sensor Mode setting......................................................................................615
2.2. Power Box.....................................................................................................616

Appendix 11. Password Policy Enhancement 618

1. Overview of the password policy enhancement function........................................ 618

2. Starting the password policy setting tool................................................................. 618
3. Changing the password policy................................................................................ 619
4. What happens when this function is enabled.......................................................... 621
4.1. Checks performed at the start of CCS........................................................... 621
4.2. Image processing privilege authentication..................................................... 621
4.3. Property screen for a user account................................................................ 621

Appendix 12. Original Data Acquisition Function 623

1. Overview of the QC tool.......................................................................................... 623

1.1. Overview........................................................................................................623
1.2. Terms and definitions.....................................................................................624
2. Original data acquisition.......................................................................................... 625
2.1. Overview of original data acquisition............................................................. 625
2.2. Operating procedure and considerations....................................................... 625
2.3. Operation flow of original data acquisition..................................................... 626
2.4. Folder structure..............................................................................................631
2.5. Service tool settings.......................................................................................631

Appendix 13. WS Succession, Protocol Replacement, and Automatic Circular

Mask Adjustment 633

1. Overview................................................................................................................. 633

16
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Appendix N2. Using Second Monitor 635

1. Overview of the second monitor.............................................................................. 635

2. Hardware environment............................................................................................ 635
2.1. Setting the monitor.........................................................................................635
2.2. Video board...................................................................................................636
3. Second monitor setting method.............................................................................. 636
3.1. Establishing the dual monitor configuration................................................... 636
3.2. Setting the second monitor............................................................................637
4. Description of operations when the second monitor is used................................... 639
4.1. Checks performed at the start of CCS........................................................... 639
4.2. Starting the screen saver............................................................................... 639
4.3. Operating specifications of the second monitor screen................................. 639
4.4. Gamma adjustment for the second monitor................................................... 645
4.5. Second monitor display settings.................................................................... 647
5. Image display on the second monitor..................................................................... 648
5.1. Three-step fixed zoom ratios, thresholds, and input range restrictions......... 648
5.2. Image cropping sizes and second monitor display magnifications................ 649

Appendix N3. Using Non Generator Connection 653

1. Overview of Non Generator Connection imaging.................................................... 653

1.1. Flow of imaging in Non Generator Connection mode.................................... 653
1.2. Considerations for imaging in Non Generator Connection mode.................. 654
1.3. Considerations for using the Non Generator Connection mode.................... 656
2. Hardware environment............................................................................................ 657
2.1. Detectors capable of Non Generator Connection.......................................... 657
2.2. Ready indicator..............................................................................................657
3. Non Generator Connection setting method............................................................. 657
3.1. Enabling Non Generator Connection............................................................. 657
4. Operations performed when the Non Generator Connection mode is used........... 659
4.1. Checks performed at the start of CCS........................................................... 659
4.2. Refresh button...............................................................................................660
4.3. Operation of the ready indicator.................................................................... 661
4.4. Sleep warning icons.......................................................................................666
5. Calibration when the Non Generator Connection mode is used............................. 668
5.1. Transition of the calibration screen when the Non Generator Connection
mode is used................................................................................................. 668

17
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Appendix R1. Using a Jog/shuttle Device 675

1. Overview of a jog/shuttle device............................................................................. 675

2. Jog/shuttle device setting method........................................................................... 675
3. Description of the operation of each button of the jog/shuttle device...................... 678
3.1. Name and description of each part................................................................ 678
3.2. Operation features of the jog/shuttle device.................................................. 681

Appendix R2. Using Live Monitor 683

1. Overview of the live monitor.................................................................................... 683

2. Hardware environment............................................................................................ 684
2.1. Setting the monitor.........................................................................................684
2.2. Video board...................................................................................................684
3. Live monitor setting method.................................................................................... 684
3.1. Establishing the dual monitor configuration................................................... 684
3.2. Setting the live monitor..................................................................................685
4. Description of operations when the live monitor is used......................................... 687
4.1. Checks performed at the start of CCS........................................................... 687
4.2. Starting the screen saver............................................................................... 688
4.3. Using the jog/shuttle device........................................................................... 688
4.4. Reference image fixed preview button.......................................................... 688
4.5. Live monitor screen.......................................................................................690
4.6. Reference monitor screen (additional information)........................................ 691
4.7. Preview annotations (when the live monitor is used)..................................... 693
4.8. Live monitor image processing UI................................................................. 694
4.9. Dynamic Image Reproduction Common Settings (System Settings)............ 697
4.10. Dynamic Image Reproduction Settings (Protocol Workspace Settings)...... 698
5. Additional information about live monitor operations............................................... 699
5.1. Information about version upgrading............................................................. 699
5.2. Automatic expansion of the panel buttons..................................................... 700
5.3. Digital cine playback......................................................................................700
5.4. Behavior of the image processing parameters.............................................. 701
5.5. Virtual collimator............................................................................................701
5.6. View position mask........................................................................................701
5.7. Masking.........................................................................................................702
5.8. Free annotations............................................................................................702
5.9. Measurement objects....................................................................................702
5.10. Past study image reference function........................................................... 702

18
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

5. Maintenance 708

1. Overview 708

2. Maintenance by Using Various Tools 709

2.1. Maintenance using the QC tool............................................................................ 709

2.2. Maintenance tool.................................................................................................. 710
2.2.1. Overview of the maintenance tool.............................................................. 710
2.2.2. Starting the maintenance tool..................................................................... 711
2.2.3. Ferry Type FPD maintenance tool.............................................................. 713
2.2.4. CXDI50RF maintenance tool (function available only in CCS-RF)............. 717
2.3. Collection Tool...................................................................................................... 721
2.3.1. Overview of the Collection Tool.................................................................. 721
2.3.2. Starting the Collection Tool......................................................................... 723
2.3.3. Selecting the information to collect............................................................. 724
2.3.4. Refining a search for the images to collect................................................. 725
2.3.5. Collecting QC results..................................................................................728
2.3.6. Setting the output destination for the data to collect................................... 729
2.3.7. Operation during collection......................................................................... 730
2.3.8. Details of collected data..............................................................................731
2.4. DB management tool........................................................................................... 739
2.4.1. Overview of the DB management tool........................................................ 739
2.4.2. Functional overview....................................................................................740
2.4.3. Starting the DB management tool in normal mode..................................... 740
2.4.4. DB management tool operation modes...................................................... 741
2.4.5. Screens and operations for each function.................................................. 742
2.4.6. Log output...................................................................................................751
2.5. Setting the IP addresses of detectors and power boxes...................................... 751
2.5.1. Setting the IP address of the CXDI-50RF power box (only for facilities
where CXDI-50RF is installed)................................................................... 751
2.5.2. Setting the IP addresses of wired connection detectors (CXDI series)...... 752
2.5.3. Setting the IP addresses of wireless connection detectors (CXDI-Wireless
series)............................................................................................................. 752
2.6. Sensor Activation Tool.......................................................................................... 753
2.6.1. Overview of the Sensor Activation Tool...................................................... 753
2.6.2. Functional overview....................................................................................753
2.6.3. Starting the tool...........................................................................................755
2.6.4. Screen and operation.................................................................................755

19
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.6.5. Log output...................................................................................................758

2.6.6. Considerations............................................................................................758

6. Description of Errors 759

1. Definitions of Errors 759

2. Error Indication 760

2.1. Error button and warning button........................................................................... 760

2.2. Error dialog box.................................................................................................... 761

3. Operations Performed When Errors Occur 762

3.1. Operations performed when a FATAL error occurs.............................................. 762

3.2. Operations performed when an ERROR error (immediate display error)
occurs..................................................................................................................763
3.3. Operations performed when an ERROR error (check later error) occurs............ 764
3.4. Operations performed when a WARNING error occurs....................................... 765

4. Error Codes 766

7. Image Processing Techniques 767

1. Overview 767

1.1. Basic Principle of CXDI........................................................................................ 767

1.2. Overview of Image Processing............................................................................ 768

2. Pre-processing 769

2.1. Offset Compensation Processing......................................................................... 769

2.2. Gain Compensation Processing........................................................................... 770

3. Automatic Analysis 771

3.1. Radiation Field Recognition................................................................................. 772

3.2. Amount of Characteristics Analysis...................................................................... 773
3.3. Dynamic Range Analysis..................................................................................... 774
3.4. EI (Exposure Index)............................................................................................. 775

20
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. Diagnosis-use Image Processing 776

4.1. Grid Stripe Reduction Processing........................................................................ 776

4.2. Gray Scale Conversion Processing..................................................................... 777
4.3. Dynamic Range Adjustment Processing.............................................................. 778
4.4. Accentuation Processing...................................................................................... 781
4.5. Noise Reduction Processing................................................................................ 783

8. Glossary 784

Glossary 784

21
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1. Overview

1. CXDI Control Software NE

1.1. Overview of CXDI Control Software NE

CXDI Control Software NE (referred to as CCS-NE in the remainder of this document) is a

software program for use with a high-performance digital X-ray imaging system that can support
the connection of up to eight detectors at the same time.
This software program is installed on a Windows PC, so that the PC can be connected to
detectors, devices, and a hospital network capable of DICOM communication (RIS system (MWL,
MPPS), PACS, and PRINTER) in a configuration such as that shown below.
It also supports communication with an X-ray generator system as an option.
For the PC on which to install CCS-NE (referred to as the Image Capture Computer in the
remainder of this document) and the display, individual sales companies and system integrators
are requested to obtain hardware products that meet the necessary specifications by themselves.

22
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2. Basic system configuration of CCS-NE

(1) Image Capture Computer

Windows PC on which CCS-NE is installed.
(2) FPD Connect Application
Application that communicates with detectors via Ethernet.
A hub is required when multiple detectors are connected.
No hub is required when only one detector is connected.

Note
• The maximum number of detectors whose connections can be recognized
simultaneously by CCS-NE is 8.
• CCS-NE cannot simultaneously recognize detectors for which an identical IP address is
set. When more than one detector is connected simultaneously, a different IP address
needs to be set for each of them.

Reference
• In environments where only detectors capable of Non Generator Connection (e.g.,
CXDI-701 series detectors) are used, Non Generator Connection imaging is supported.
➡➡Refer to "Appendix N3. Using Non Generator Connection" in Part 4.

23
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(3) Gen. Connect Application

Application that communicates with the X-ray generator system as an option.
(4) DICOM System Connect Application
Application that connects to and communicates with DICOM-compliant systems made by
other manufacturers that are installed in the hospital.

1.3. Monitor configurations for CCS-NE

A single monitor configuration and a dual monitor configuration are supported.

(1) Single monitor configuration
Configuration with a single monitor for a single control PC
(2) Dual monitor configuration
Configuration with two monitors for a single control PC

Note
• Use the primary monitor as the main monitor for displaying the CCS-NE screen,
including the user operation window, and the secondary monitor as the second monitor
for displaying high-resolution images.
• The second monitor is supported only in an environment with a GPU capable of
executing radiographic image processing.
• Configurations where three or more monitors are connected are not supported. It is,
however, possible to expand the monitor configuration using a display distributor.
• Use in span mode (function that treats two screens as a single one) is not supported.

➡➡Refer to "Appendix N2. Using Second Monitor" in Part 4.

24
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.4. Operating environment for CCS-NE

CCS-NE operates in the environment below.

1.4.1. Hardware environment

1) Hardware operating requirements for the Image Capture Computer

CPU

Number of cores:
2 or more
Clock:
Intel Core 2 Duo processor (2.0 GHz or higher)
Core i7 2.53 GHz or higher recommended

Reference
• When Windows 8.1 is used, a CPU that supports CMPXCHG16b, PrefetchW, and LAHF/
SAHF is recommended.

Graphic board

If GPU processing is specified for image processing, either of the following GPUs is
recommended:
NVIDIA Quadro K600, Quadro K620
* In Windows 10, the GPU memory requires 2 GB or more, so only Quadro K620 is supported.

Reference
• Combinations with the driver versions of the GPU made by NVIDIA are as listed below.

CCS-NE Driver version

V2.01 or later 296.35 or later

V2.10.2 or later 311.50 or later

V2.13 or later 348.17

V2.16 or later 361.91

Japanese-language download site
http://www.nvidia.co.jp/Download/index.aspx?lang=jp
English-language download site
http://www.nvidia.com/Download/index.aspx?lang=en-us

Additional information
• The driver version can be checked by right-clicking on Desktop, opening the NVIDIA
Control Panel, and selecting [Help] > [System Information].
• When CCS starts up, the driver version is judged. If the version is less than the
judgment value, error F040700012 occurs, and the details of the version are shown in
Additional Info. The 5-digit number at the end is the NVIDIA driver version.

25
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Video board for use in a dual monitor configuration:

The video board must have two DVI output terminals, one for the main monitor and the other
for the second monitor.

Note
• Configurations with two or more video boards installed are not supported.
• NVIDIA Quadro K600 and Quadro K620 each have only one DVI output terminal. In a
dual monitor configuration, two DVI output terminals must be secured by DVI-converting
the Display Port. The second monitor is supported only in an environment with a GPU
capable of executing radiographic image processing.

RAM capacity

4 GB or more, 6 GB or more recommended (Dual/Triple Channel recommended)

HDD capacity

Free space of 50 GB or more

Ethernet

3 ports or more (which may be additionally installed with a hub)

• Interface supporting static detectors
• Interface for hospital DICOM (PACS, Printer, MWL, etc.)
• Interface for an X-ray generator
(required in order to communicate with an X-ray generator system as an option)

Reference
• A serial port is required in order to communicate with the X-ray generator CXDI-GC as
an option. (Alternatively, USB ⇔ serial port conversion can be used.)

USB

Three ports or more besides the ones for the keyboard and the mouse
For use with the touch panel, barcode reader, and infrared communication unit (Ready Indicator)

2) Display operating requirements

Resolution

Expand image view pane Resolution (for a custom DPI setting of 100%)

OFF XGA (1024 x 768) or more, WUXGA (1920 x 1200) or less

ON SXGA (1280 x 1024) or more, WUXGA (1920 x 1200) or less

Note
• To turn ON Expand image view pane, set the custom DPI setting to 100%.
• Do not make the resolution less than 1024 x 768 with the custom DPI setting.

26
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• To display the overlap software in such a way that it does not overlap with a protocol list,
wide monitors must have the resolutions below.
WXGA++ (1600 x 900), WSXGA+ (1680 x 1050), Full HD (1920 x 1080), WUXGA (1920 x
1200)
➡➡Refer to "List of supported resolutions."
• Expand image view pane can be set only with the service tool.
[System Setting] > [Application Setting] > [Examination screen 1] > [Display setting] >
[Expand image view pane]

Monitor size

10.1 inches or more

Reference
• It is recommended that when a monitor is used in a 10.1-inch monitor configuration, [Exam
screen layout] be simple layout mode.
• [Exam screen layout] can be set only with the service tool.
[System Setting] > [Application Setting] > [Examination screen 1] > [Display setting] >
[Exam screen layout]

Custom DPI setting

100, 125, 140, 150%

Note
• If a touch panel is to be used, the custom DPI setting must be adjusted so that "pixel pitch" x
"custom DPI setting" is 0.297 mm or greater to prevent erroneous operations.

Reference
• If the monitor size is small and the resolution is high (for example, Full HD (1920 x 1080)), a
practical custom DPI setting is 140%.

Display color depth

24-bit color (8 bits per RGB channel) or more

Conformance to a standard

Conformance to DICOM GSDF or DICOM P-value LUT (gamma characteristic calibration

function attached)

Reference
• If using a monitor not conforming to the standard, perform gamma adjustment with the
gamma adjustment function.
• A model that corrects the brightness by sensing peripheral light is recommended.

27
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Touch panel

Monitor equipped with touch panel functions

Reference
• The touch panel can be used together with a mouse and a keyboard.

Display for use in a dual monitor configuration

As the second monitor, both DICOM-compliant and consumer monitors are supported.

Reference
• If using a consumer monitor, perform gamma adjustment on the main and second monitors
from System Setting.
To start Gamma Adjustment Tool, go to the service tool, [Application Setting] > [Display],
and click the Adjust monitor gamma button.
➡➡Refer to "Appendix 5. Gamma Adjustment Tool" in Part 4.

Note
• Use in span mode (function that treats two screens as a single one) is not supported.

3) Detectors that can be connected

Supported detectors

Static detectors (which support Ethernet connection):

50G, 50C, 55G, 55C, 40EG, 40EC, 40G Compact, 60G, 60C, 401G, 401C, 401G Compact,
401C Compact, 501G, 501C
Wireless detectors:
70G Wireless, 70C Wireless, 80C Wireless, 401G Wireless, 401C Wireless, 410C Wireless,
701G Wireless, 701C Wireless, 710C Wireless, 801G Wireless, 801C Wireless, 810C Wireless

Reference
• Up to eight detectors can be connected at the same time.
Up to ten detectors can be registered in each of Static Sensor and Ferry Static Sensor.

4) User options (recommended)

UPS (uninterruptible power supply)

It is recommended to introduce a UPS to protect the operating system, user data, data for this
software program, and so on.

28
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Barcode reader

The patient IDs or accession numbers are selected using barcodes from the studies acquired
from the MWM worklist.
Code types:
Code39, Code93, Code128, JAN/EAN-8, JAN/EAN-13, Industrial 2 of 5, Interleaved 2 of 5,
Matrix 2 of 5, MSI, NW7, UPCA, UPCE, RSS, EAN128, Plessey, PDF 417
Interface:
USB (COM port emulation must be possible with a Virtual COM Port driver)
Power supply:
USB bus power

Reference
• It must be specified which of patient IDs or accession numbers the values to be input from
barcodes will be, using the service tool, before starting the system.

Ready Indicator

The ready status of the GUI is indicated by lighting an LED and generating a sound.
Interface:
USB
Power supply:
USB bus power

29
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.4.2. Software environment

Operating system
Windows 7 Professional/Ultimate (64bit) SP1
Windows 8.1 Pro (64bit)
Windows 10 Pro (64bit) Version 1607
Japanese, English (United States), Chinese (Simplified)

Note
• If using other software on the same PC, refer to "Notes on the software to coexist with CCS-
NE."
• No guarantee is made for operation if installation is performed with the language setting on
the [Formats] tab being different from the setting of [Language for non-Unicode programs]
on the [Administrative] tab. These tabs are displayed by clicking [Control Panel] > [Clock,
Language, and Region] > [Region and Language] (in Windows 8.1 or later, [Region]).

Applications
.NET Framework Version 3.5 SP1
.NET Framework Version 4.0 or later
Visual C++ 2008 runtime SP1 (64bit)
Visual C++ 2010 runtime SP1 (64bit)
SQL Server 2014 Express Edition
OS security patches

Note
• Except for .NET Framework Version 3.5 SP1, they are included in the installation disk.
• If .NET Framework Version 3.5(Service Pack not applied) is not installed, it must be installed
first from Windows Update or other sources.
• If .NET Framework 4.0 or later is not installed, .NET Framework 4.5.2, contained in the
installation disk, must be installed beforehand.
• If there are any security patches that must be installed, Canon will conduct operation
verification and announcements will be made from the Service Planning Department to sales
companies.

30
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Notes on the software to coexist with CCS-NE

1. Guarantee of operation
If any other software is to be used on the PC on which CCS-NE runs, an operation check must
be performed on CCS-NE at the sale company. If you have any questions or problems about the
operation check, contact Canon.

2. Specifications of the operating environment

Depending on the use of the coexisting software, the specifications of the necessary operating
environment may be changed.
a. CCS-NE requires a free memory space of at least 4 GB. If using coexisting software, check
that the free memory space resulting from subtracting 4 GB from the memory installed in the
operating environment meets the operating requirements of the coexisting software.
* Generally, the memory installed in the operating environment must be 8 GB or more.
b. On a CPU with minimum specifications, the performance of CCS-NE will decrease due to the
operation of the coexisting software. Based on the results of the operation check, determine
the number of CPU cores and the clock speed that enable CCS-NE to exhibit its sufficient
performance.

3. Startup and switching of the coexisting software in operation in shell mode

a. In operation in shell mode, coexisting software that does not start as a service of the OS
must be set in the batch file to be executed at the start of CCS-NE in such a way that the
coexisting software can start.
Example: If the name of the coexisting software is program.exe
Create a file, C:¥CCS-S¥ccsUser.bat, and write

start program.exe
in the batch file.
b. To switch between the screens of the coexisting software and CCS-NE, use the [Alt] + [Tab]
key combination.
c. Use caution if the coexisting software is terminated accidentally because then CCS-NE must
be restarted.

4. Cautions on having security software on the same PC

For cautions on having CCS-NE and security software on the same PC, refer to "9. Antivirus
Software Setting Procedure" in Part 2.

5. Cautions on having launchers and external applications on the same PC

For cautions on having CCS-NE together with launchers and external applications on the same
PC, refer to the separate manual, "Launcher Setting Procedure."

31
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. CXDI Controller RF

2.1. Overview of CXDI Controller RF

CXDI Controller RF (referred to as CCS-RF in the remainder of this document) is a software

program for use with a high-performance digital X-ray imaging system that can support the
connection of a single dynamic detector and up to eight static detectors at the same time.
This software program is installed on a Windows 7 PC, so that the PC can be connected
to a dynamic detector, static detectors, devices, and a hospital network capable of DICOM
communication (RIS system (MWL, MPPS), PACS, and PRINTER) in a configuration such as
that shown below.
For the PC on which to install CCS-RF (referred to as the Image Capture Computer in the
remainder of this document) and the display, individual sales companies and system integrators
are requested to obtain hardware products that meet the necessary specifications by themselves.

32
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2. Basic system configuration of CCS-RF

(1) Image Capture Computer

Windows 7 PC on which CCS-RF is installed.
(2) FPD Connect Application
Application that communicates with a dynamic detector (50RF) via Gigabit Ethernet. It can
also communicate with a static detector via Ethernet.
A hub is required when multiple static detectors are connected.
No hub is required when only one static detector is connected.

Note
• The maximum number of static detectors whose connections can be recognized
simultaneously by CCS-RF is 8.
• CCS-RF cannot simultaneously recognize detectors for which an identical IP address is
set. When more than one detector is connected simultaneously, a different IP address
needs to be set for each of them.

(3) Gen. Connect Application

Application that communicates with the X-ray generator system.
(4) DICOM System Connect Application
Application that connects to and communicates with DICOM-compliant systems made by
other manufacturers that are installed in the hospital.

33
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3. Monitor configurations for CCS-RF

A single monitor configuration and a dual monitor configuration are supported.

(1) Single monitor configuration
Configuration with a single monitor for a single control PC
(2) Dual monitor configuration
Configuration with two monitors for a single control PC

Note
• Use one monitor as the live monitor for displaying live images during exposure and the
other as the reference monitor for displaying the CCS-RF screen.
• The two monitors must have a resolution of SXGA (1280 × 1024) or above, but not
greater than WUXGA (1920 × 1200), and have the same size and display gradation (24-
bit color or above) settings to ensure that the images displayed on the monitors match in
size and appearance. Using different settings can result in the images displayed on the
two monitors being different in size and appearance.
• Configurations where three or more monitors are connected are not supported. It is,
however, possible to expand the monitor configuration using a display distributor.
• Use in span mode (function that treats two screens as a single one) is not supported.

➡➡Refer to "Appendix R2. Using Live Monitor" in Part 4.

34
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.4. Operating environment for CCS-RF

CCS-RF operates in the environment below.

2.4.1. Hardware environment

1) Hardware operating requirements for the Image Capture Computer

Note
• At present, it is difficult for laptop computers to satisfy the operating requirements below.

CPU

Number of cores:
4 or more
Clock:
Quad Core & 8 thread CPU (2.5 GHz or higher)

Reference
• DELL XPS 9000
CPU: Intel i7-920 (2.66 GHz, 8 MB L3 Cache)

Graphic board

Products made by NVIDIA

NVIDIA Quadro 5000, NVIDIA Quadro K5000, NVIDIA Quadro K5200, NVIDIA Quadro 6000,
NVIDIA GeForce GTX 460, NVIDIA GeForce GTX 560, NVIDIA GeForce GTX 560 Ti, NVIDIA
GeForce GTX 660, NVIDIA GeForce GTX 660 Ti, NVIDIA GeForce GTX 750 Ti, NVIDIA
GeForce GTX 760
VRAM:
2048 MB or more
Slot:
PCI Express x16 (for graphics) x 1

35
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• Combinations with the driver versions of the GPU made by NVIDIA are as listed below.

CXDI Control Software RF Quadro GeForce

V2.01 or later 296.35 or later 296.10 or later

V2.10.2 or later 311.50 or later 314.22 or later

V2.13 or later 348.17 347.88

• Driver versions that support V2.16 or later are as listed below.

Video board Driver version

NVIDIA Quadro 5000

348.17
NVIDIA Quadro 6000

NVIDIA GeForce GTX 460

NVIDIA GeForce GTX 560 347.88

NVIDIA GeForce GTX 560Ti

NVIDIA Quadro K5000

361.91
NVIDIA Quadro K5200

NVIDIA GeForce GTX 660

NVIDIA GeForce GTX 660Ti

361.91
NVIDIA GeForce GTX 750Ti

NVIDIA GeForce GTX 760

Japanese-language download site

http://www.nvidia.co.jp/Download/index.aspx?lang=jp
English-language download site
http://www.nvidia.com/Download/index.aspx?lang=en-us

Additional information
• The driver version can be checked by right-clicking on Desktop, opening the NVIDIA
Control Panel, and selecting [Help] > [System Information].
• When CCS starts up, the driver version is judged. If the version is less than the
judgment value, error F040700012 occurs, and the details of the version are shown in
Additional Info. The 5-digit number at the end is the NVIDIA driver version.

36
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Video board for use in a dual monitor configuration:

The video board must have two DVI output terminals, one for the live monitor and the other
for the reference monitor.

Note
• Configurations with two or more video boards installed are not supported.

RAM capacity

DDR2/3 6 GB (2 GB x 3) or more, DDR2/3 8 GB (4 GB x 2, 2 GB x 4) or more recommended (Dual/

Triple Channel recommended)

HDD capacity

Free space of 50 GB or more (initial capacity: 200 GB or more)

Type:
SATA2 or later or SSD

Note
• A RAID 0 configuration, which was part of the operating requirements in terms of writing
speed, is no longer necessary due to the increased speed of today's HDDs and the growing
popularity of SSDs.
• The acceptable HDD configurations are a single SATA2 drive, single SSD, and a
combination of SATA2 drive and SSD. (A single SSD configuration is recommended.) If
selecting a combination of SATA2 drive and SSD, make sure that the HDD is set as the
storage location for dtstore and DB Backup and that the SSD is set as the storage location
for all other files.
• As long as the HDD operating requirements are satisfied, there are no regulations regarding
the use of a RAID 1 configuration. Whether it is appropriate to use RAID 1 must be decided
by the sales company that supplies the Image Capture Computer.

Ethernet

4 ports or more (internal port x 1 + PCI or Express Card x 3)

An NIC connection is required for a detector.
• Interface supporting static detectors
• Interface supporting dynamic detectors
Intel Gigabit CT (PCI Express)
Intel Pro/1000 PT (PCI Express)
Intel Pro/1000 GT (PCI)
Intel I350-T2 (PCI Express)
• Interface for hospital DICOM
• Interface for an X-ray generator

Reference
• A serial port is required in order to communicate with the X-ray generator CXDI-GC as
an option. (Alternatively, USB ⇔ serial port conversion can be used.)

37
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

USB

Three ports or more besides the ones for the keyboard and the mouse
For use with the barcode reader, jog/shuttle device, and infrared communication unit (Ready
Indicator)

2) Display operating requirements

Resolution

Expand image view pane Resolution (for a custom DPI setting of 100%)

OFF SXGA (1280 x 1024) or more, WUXGA (1920 x 1200) or less

ON SXGA (1280 x 1024) or more, WUXGA (1920 x 1200) or less

Note
• To turn ON Expand image view pane, set the custom DPI setting to 100%.
• Do not make the resolution less than 1280 x 1024 with the custom DPI setting.
➡➡Refer to "List of supported resolutions."

Monitor size

19 inches or more

Display color depth

24-bit color (8 bits per RGB channel) or more

Conformance to a standard

Conformance to DICOM GSDF or DICOM P-value LUT (gamma characteristic calibration

function attached)

Reference
• If using a monitor not conforming to the standard, perform gamma adjustment with the
gamma adjustment function.
• A model that corrects the brightness by sensing peripheral light is recommended.

Touch panel

A display equipped with a touch panel is preferred, but DICOM monitors supporting UXGA that
are equipped with a touch panel are not currently available on the market.

Display for use in a dual monitor configuration

As live monitors, only DICOM-compatible monitors are supported.

As reference monitors, consumer monitors are also supported.
Gamma adjustment can be performed only on consumer monitors.

38
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Note
• Use in span mode (function that treats two screens as a single one) is not supported.

3) Detectors that can be connected

Supported detectors

Dynamic and static detectors (which support Ethernet connection):

50RF (dynamic detector), 50G, 50C, 55G, 55C, 40EG, 40EC, 40G Compact, 60G, 60C,
401G, 401C, 401G, 401C Compact, 501G, 501C
Wireless detectors:
70G Wireless, 70C Wireless, 80C Wireless, 401G Wireless, 401C Wireless, 410C Wireless,
701G Wireless, 701C Wireless, 710C Wireless, 801G Wireless, 801C Wireless, 810C Wireless

Reference
• A single dynamic detector and up to eight static detectors can be connected at the same
time.
Up to ten static detectors can be registered.

4) User options (recommended)

UPS (uninterruptible power supply)

It is recommended to introduce a UPS to protect the operating system, user data, data for this
software program, and so on.

Barcode reader

The patient IDs or accession numbers are selected using barcodes from the studies acquired
from the MWM worklist.
Code types:
Code39, Code93, Code128, JAN/EAN-8, JAN/EAN-13, Industrial 2 of 5, Interleaved 2 of 5,
Matrix 2 of 5, MSI, NW7, UPCA, UPCE, RSS, EAN128, Plessey, PDF 417
Interface:
USB (COM port emulation must be possible with a Virtual COM Port driver)
Power supply:
USB bus power

Reference
• It must be specified which of patient IDs or accession numbers the values to be input from
barcodes will be, using the service tool, before starting the system.

Jog/shuttle device

ShuttleXpress made by Contour Design

39
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Ready Indicator

The ready status of the GUI is indicated by lighting an LED and generating a sound.
Interface:
USB
Power supply:
USB bus power

2.4.2. Software environment

Operating system
Windows 7 Professional/Ultimate (64bit) SP1
Japanese, English (United States), Chinese (Simplified)

Note
• No guarantee is made for operation if any applications that are not directly related to CCS-
RF (such as Office and antivirus software) are installed.
• No guarantee is made for operation if installation is performed with the language setting
on the [Formats] tab being different from the setting of [Language for non-Unicode
programs] on the [Administrative] tab. These tabs are displayed by clicking [Control
Panel] > [Clock, Language, and Region] > [Region and Language] (in Windows 8.1 or
later, [Region]).

Applications
.NET Framework Version 3.5 SP1
.NET Framework Version 4.0 or later
Visual C++ 2008 runtime SP1 (64bit)
Visual C++ 2010 runtime SP1 (64bit)
SQL Server 2014 Express Edition
Windows 7 security patches

Note
• Except for .NET Framework 3.5 SP1, they are included in the installation disk.
• If .NET Framework 3.5(Service Pack not applied) is not installed, it must be installed first
from Windows Update or other sources.
• If .NET Framework 4.0 or later is not installed, .NET Framework 4.5.2, contained in the
installation disk, must be installed beforehand.
• If there are any security patches that must be installed, Canon will conduct operation
verification and announcements will be made from the Service Planning Department to
sales companies.

40
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Notes on the software to coexist with CCS-RF

1. Guarantee of operation
If any other software is to be used on the PC on which CCS-RF runs, an operation check must
be performed on CCS-RF at the sales company. If you have any questions or problems about
the operation check, contact Canon.

2. Specifications of the operating environment

Depending on the use of the coexisting software, the specifications of the necessary operating
environment may be changed.
a. CCS-RF requires a free memory space of at least 8 GB. If using coexisting software, check
that the free memory space resulting from subtracting 8 GB from the memory installed in the
operating environment meets the operating requirements of the coexisting software.
b. On a CPU with minimum specifications, the performance of CCS-RF will decrease due to the
operation of the coexisting software. Based on the results of the operation check, determine
the number of CPU cores and the clock speed that enable CCS-RF to exhibit its sufficient
performance.

3. Startup and switching of the coexisting software in operation in shell mode

a. In operation in shell mode, coexisting software that does not start as a service of the OS
must be set in the batch file to be executed at the start of CCS-RF in such a way that the
coexisting software can start.
Example: If the name of the coexisting software is program.exe
Create a file, C:¥CCS-D¥ccsUser.bat, and write

start program.exe
in the batch file.
b. To switch between the screens of the coexisting software and CCS-RF, use the [Alt] + [Tab]
key combination.
c. Use caution if the coexisting software is terminated accidentally because then CCS-RF must
be restarted.

4. Cautions on having security software on the same PC

If installing CCS-RF and security software on the same PC, pay attention to the following points:
a. If the files to configure or generate CCS-RF are monitored by the security software, it could
lead to degradation of the performance. For the real-time scan and manual scan of the
security software, the folders below must be excluded from the virus check.

CCS-RF installation folder C:¥CCS-D

SQL Server installation folder C:¥Program Files (x86)¥Microsoft SQL Server

* If image and other files are set so that they will be output to folders other than the CCS-RF installation folder,
exclude the folders from the check as well.
b. If CCS-RF is used for imaging, and a real-time scan or manual scan of the security software
is executed or the security software is updated, the performance may be seriously degraded,
possibly leading to unexpected errors. While imaging, do not execute such processing.

41
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

5. Cautions on having launchers and external applications on the same PC

For cautions on having CCS-RF together with launchers and external applications on the same
PC, refer to the separate manual, "Launcher Setting Procedure."

42
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

List of supported resolutions

The resolutions supported by CCS-NE and CCS-RF are decided with a combination of Expand
image view pane, monitor resolution (number of pixels), and custom DPI setting.
The following is a list of supported resolutions.

43
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Installation

1. Overview of Installation
This chapter describes the installation of CCS-NE and CCS-RF.
The table below gives the definition of the term used in this chapter.

Term Definition

Refers to the folder below, in which CCS.exe is installed.

CCS installation folder
[system drive]:¥CCS-S (or CCS-D)

1.1. User accounts

(1) User accounts for logging in to a Windows operating system

The integrated installer creates the following user accounts in the OS.

Password validity
User name Password Group
period

For administrators cxdiadmin canonadmin Administrators Unlimited

For general users cxdi canonuser Administrators Unlimited

The account for administrators is used to specify various settings during the installation
process. The account for general users is used for users to log on automatically when they
operate the system.

Note
• The created accounts will remain undeleted even after the software is uninstalled.

(2) Default accounts for CCS-NE and CCS-RF

The following user accounts are created as default ones when the software is installed.

User name Password Target user

CxdiService Canonsrvc Service engineers (dealer)

CxdiUser Admin User administrator

44
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Contents of the Installation Disk

2.1. System configuration of the installer

The CCS-NE and CCS-RF installation disk contains the components required to operate VC++
run-time, SQL Server, and so on. By executing the integrated installer (Setup.exe), all of these
components can be installed. Tera Term, which is necessary for the maintenance of detectors,
can also be installed from the integrated installer.
[Chart 2.1 Configuration of the integrated installer]

45
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. Installation
To proceed with installation, you must be logged on as a user with administrator privileges.
Before starting the setup, check whether you are logged on as a user with administrator
privileges.

3.1. Starting up the integrated installer

3.1.1. Checking the operating environment with the installer

When the installation disk is inserted, the integrated installer (Setup.exe) starts up automatically.
Before starting up, the integrated installer checks whether the OS environment meets the
operating environment requirements in the following order.

1. Whether the UAC (User Access Control) function is disabled or not.

If the UAC function is not disabled, a dialog box appears asking whether to disable the UAC
function.
If you select the No button here, a message appears.
If you select the Yes button, the UAC function is disabled and the OS restarts.
* If you disabled the UAC with the installer and then enabled the UAC, right-click "DisableUAC.exe" in the
installation folder and disable the UAC as an administrator.

2. Whether other applications are running or not.

3. Whether the OS is supported.

• Windows 7 (64-bit Edition)
• Windows 8.1 (64-bit Edition)
• Windows 10 (64-bit Edition)
If the OS is not one of the above, a message appears.

4. Whether .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 is installed or not.

If .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 is not installed, a dialog box appears asking whether to install
.NET Framework 3.5 SP1.
If you select the No button here, a message appears.
If you select the Yes button, .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 is installed.
* If SQL Server 2014 is to be used, .NET Framework 4.0 or later must be installed.
If .NET Framework 4.0 or later is not installed, a dialog box appears prompting you to install .NET Framework
4.5.2, supplied with the software. Click the OK button to install .NET Framework 4.5.2.

46
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• The integrated installer (Setup.exe) operates only in an environment where .NET Framework
2.0 or later is installed. (If the OS is Windows 7 Service Pack 1, .NET Framework 3.5.1 is
pre-installed.)
• If the OS is the 32-bit Edition, not the 64-bit Edition, a message appears indicating
incompatibility.
• The only OS language versions supported are Japanese, English (United States), and
Chinese (Simplified).
• To satisfy the performance of the OS, Windows 7 requires that Service Pack 1 (referred to
as SP1 in the remainder of this document) be applied. The integrated installer does not have
a function for checking whether SP1 has been applied or not.
At the start of CCS, whether SP1 has been applied or not is checked, and if SP1 (or higher)
has not been applied, an alert appears indicating "This software requires Windows 7
Service Pack 1 or higher." The software can still be used if you close the alert by clicking
the OK button, but you are requested to apply SP1 if you have not done so.

3.1.2. Notes on using Windows 8.1 or later

Note the following when newly installing Windows 8.1 or later.
• Software environment
In Windows 8.1 or later, it is necessary to enable .NET Framework 3.5 before installing CCS-
NE.
• If connecting to the Internet
From [Control Panel], select [Programs and Features] > [Turn Windows features on
or off], and turn on the [.NET Framework 3.5 (includes .NET 2.0 and 3.0)] check box.

47
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• If not connecting to the Internet

Insert the OS installation medium into the drive, and enter the following command line
from the command prompt.
DISM/Online/Enable-Feature/FeatureName:NetFx3/All/LimitAccess/
Source:d:¥sources¥sxs
(This example assumes that the installation medium is inserted into drive "d:". Replace "d:"
as appropriate according to the PC environment.)
• Setup of a logon script
Usually, Windows 8.1 is set up so that a logon script is executed five minutes after logon. If
you specify boot.bat as the logon script for use when using CXDI-401G/C Wireless, CXDI-
701G/C Wireless, and CXDI-801G/C Wireless, you must make changes so that the logon
script can be executed immediately after logon.
From [Run], enter "gpedit.msc". Select [Computer Configuration] > [Administrative
Templates] > [System] > [Group Policy] > [Configure Logon Script Delay], and set it to
[Disabled].

3.1.3. Starting up the integrated installer

After the check described in 3.1.1. reveals that the necessary operating environment is satisfied,
the integrated installer starts up.

48
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• In the description of the procedure, the CCS-NE screen is shown on the left, and the CCS-
RF screen is shown on the right, unless otherwise specified.

1. When the setup start screen appears, click the Install button.
[Fig.3.1.3.-1 Integrated installer start screen]

The installers of the various components are called, and the components are installed in
sequence. The integrated installer displays the component being installed.
[Fig.3.1.3.-2 Display of the component being installed (CCS-NE)]

2. When installation is completed and the screen shown below appears, click the Finish button.
[Fig.3.1.3.-3 Setup completion screen]

49
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.2. Updating with the integrated installer

3.2.1. Components to be installed and installation checks

The following components can be installed by the integrated installer, but whether they are
installed or not depends on the status of the PC.
The following describes the points to check as installation conditions.

1. VC++ 2008 runtime SP1 64-bit Edition/VC++ 2010 runtime SP1 64-bit Edition
Whether the key is registered in the registry is checked; if not registered, it will be installed.

2. MSMQ service
Whether it is registered in the registry is checked; if not registered, it will be installed.

3. Telnet Client service

If telnet.exe cannot be found in the System32 folder, it will be installed.

4. SQL Server 2005 Uninstall Pack

If SQL Server 2005 Express Edition SP4 is installed, a backup of the Database will be made
first to upgrade it to SQL Server 2014 Express Edition, and then SQL Server 2005 Express
Edition SP4 will be uninstalled.

5. SQL Server 2014 Express Edition

Whether it is registered in the registry is checked; if not registered, it will be installed. If a
backup of the Database is made in step 4, the backup of the Database will be restored.
* If, after performing step 4, an error occurs in step 5, SQL Server 2005 Express Edition SP4 may not have been
uninstalled correctly. Click OS > [Control Panel] > [Programs] > [Programs and Features], and then manually
uninstall the related components and execute the integrated installer.
• Microsoft SQL Server 2005
• Microsoft SQL Server Native Client
• Microsoft SQL Server Management Objects Collection
• Microsoft SQL Server Setup Support Files (English)

6. Database
If it is not found, the Database will be installed. For an upgrade from a previous version, the
Database will be upgraded to the same version as that of the installer.

7. CCS-NE and CCS-RF

The version of the installed CCS is checked against the version of the installer. If the installed
version is the same as the version of the installer, the software will not be installed.

3.2.2. Instance created by SQL Server

SQL Server creates the instance with the name of CANONDRSYSTEM during installation.

50
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.2.3. Databases to be installed

The database installer installs the files listed below in [system drive]:¥CCS-S (or CCS-D)¥DB.

Database name Data (mdf) Transaction log (ldf)

CLIENT CLIENT.mdf CLIENT.mdf

EXAM EXAM.mdf EXAM_log.ldf

MPPS MPPS.mdf MPPS_log.ldf

PRINT PRINT.mdf PRINT_log.ldf

PROTOCOL PROTOCOL.mdf PROTOCOL_log.ldf

STORE STORE.mdf STORE_log.ldf

3.2.4. Advance processing executed by the integrated installer

During installation, the integrated installer starts the CCS environment setting tool (CCSSetEnv.
exe) to make changes to the OS settings. The changes differ depending on the OS. For details,
refer to the separate manual, "CCS Environment Setting Tool Service Manual."

Reference
• The integrated installer does not make the network jumbo packet settings or Windows Aero
settings.
• For those items whose settings are reflected when the PC is restarted, the PC will not be
restarted by the integrated installer because the PC is restarted at least once after the
software has been installed due to operation in the shell mode.

3.2.5. Installation logs

The integrated installer and the database installer keep installation logs.
• Integrated installer
Output: [system drive]¥ProgramData¥CCS¥InstallLog
File name: {CCS} Installer_YYYYMMDD_hhmmss.log
• Database installer
Output: [system drive]¥ProgramData¥CCS¥InstallLog
File name: DBSetup_YYYYMMDDhhmmss.log
• Setup.msi installer (CCS main body)
Output: [system drive]¥ProgramData¥CCS¥InstallLog
File name: CXDI_MSI_Setup_YYYYMMDD_hhmmss.log

51
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.3. Installing Tera Term

The Tera Term installation file is included in the CCS-NE and CCS-RF installation disk. The
installation can be performed from the startup screen of the installer.

1. Insert the installation disk to start the integrated installer.

2. Click [Start Tera Term Setup.].

(The CCS-RF screen is shown below. [Start Tera Term Setup.] appears at the same position
on the CCS-NE screen as well.)
[Fig.3.3.-1 Initial screen of the integrated installer]

3. On the Tera Term setup start screen, click the Next button.
[Fig.3.3.-2 Tera Term setup start screen]

52
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. On the license agreement screen, check the contents, select [I accept the agreement], and
click the Next button.
[Fig.3.3.-3 License agreement display screen]

5. On the screen to select the destination location for Tera Term, change the destination location
as needed, and click the Next button.
[Fig.3.3.-4 Destination selection screen]

53
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

6. On the screen to select the components to install, check that [Standard installation] is
selected, and click the Next button.
There are no other necessary components. Do not change the settings.
[Fig.3.3.-5 Component selection screen]

7. On the language selection screen, select [English] and click the Next button.
[Fig.3.3.-6 Language selection screen]

54
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

8. Set the name to be registered on the start menu, as needed, and click the Next button.
[Fig.3.3.-7 Screen to set the name to be registered on the start menu]

9. Set the destination for the shortcut, as needed, and click the Next button.
[Fig.3.3.-8 Screen to set the destination for the shortcut]

55
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

10. When the installation settings are listed, check them. If they are OK, click the Install button.
[Fig.3.3.-9 Installation setting confirmation screen]

Installation will be started and completed in about one second.

11. Click the Finish button.

Complete the installation. Close the screen of the integrated installer by clicking the Cancel
button.
[Fig.3.3.-10 Installation completion screen]

3.4. Checking and setting the OS environment

To ensure that CCS operates normally, check and set the OS environment after installation.

1. Checking power option settings

It is necessary to make the settings for each cxdiadmin and cxdi user.

56
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Turning off defragmentation

Make the settings so that defragmentation is not automatically executed while CCS is
running.

3. Disabling the automatic switching to tablet mode

Make the settings so that the system does not automatically switch to tablet mode.

3.4.1. Checking power option settings

Previously, when [Power saver] or [Balanced] was selected as the power plan of the PC, the
performance of CCS deteriorated. In CCS V2.00 or later, the power option setting is selected
automatically when CCS starts up.
➡➡Refer to "Power Options setting when CCS starts up" in V2.00 New Function Descriptions.
1. For CCS-RF only
When CCS-RF starts up, the power plan of the OS is set to [High performance].

Reference
• The setting can be checked on the power plan selection screen, which is displayed by
clicking OS > [Control Panel] > [Hardware and Sound] > [Power Options].
[Fig.3.4.1.-1 Power Options confirmation screen]

• For CCS-NE, it is recommended to set the power plan of the OS to [High performance]
as well, so as not to deteriorate the performance.
Because CCS-NE is also designed to be used for operation in environments such as
health screening vans, [High performance] is not selected when CCS starts up. Select
it on the power plan selection screen.

57
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Common to CCS-NE and CCS-RF

When CCS starts up, [Allow hybrid sleep], included in the Sleep settings on the Advanced
settings tab of Power Options of the OS, is set to [Off].

Reference
• The setting can be checked by clicking [Sleep] > [Allow hybrid sleep] on the Advanced
settings tab of Power Options, which is displayed by clicking OS > [Control Panel]
> [Hardware and Sound] > [Power Options] > [Change plan settings] > [Change
advanced power settings].
[Fig.3.4.1.-2 Advanced settings screen of Power Options]

58
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.4.2. Turning off defragmentation

Usually, the OS is set so that defragmentation is conducted periodically. If defragmentation
is executed while CCS is running, the performance will be degraded. Thus, set the disk
defragmenter schedule to off.

Reference
• The defragmenter schedule can be checked on the Disk Defragmenter screen, which is
displayed by clicking OS > [Control Panel] > [System and Security] > [Defragment your
hard drive].
[Fig.3.4.2.-1 Contents of the Disk Defragmenter schedule]

• Click the Configure schedule... button to display the [Modify Schedule] screen, and
change the schedule to off. Use the same procedure to turn off the schedule for all the disks
installed in the PC.
[Fig.3.4.2.-2 Modifying the defragmenter schedule]

59
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.4.3. Disabling the automatic switching to tablet mode

Windows 10 is equipped with a function for automatically switching to tablet mode, ideal for touch
operation, when it detects the attachment or detachment of the keyboard from a 2 in 1 type PC
such as Surface. CCS does not have a GUI suitable for tablet mode, so if such a PC is used, it is
recommended to lock it to desktop mode.
The PC can be locked to desktop mode with the procedure below.

Reference
• These settings are retained for each Windows login user. Thus, to make these settings, log
in as the user "cxdi" before entering shell mode.

1. Open the Windows 10 [Settings] screen, and select [System] > [Tablet mode].

2. Make the settings as on the screen below.

[Fig.3.4.3.-1 Tablet mode setting screen (Windows 10 Version 1607)]

3.5. Uninstallation

Uninstallation is not recommended, except when necessary, because multiple components are
installed by the integrated installer.

Reference
• If it is necessary to restore the environment, create a package for migration with the data
collection tool before proceeding with uninstallation.

60
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.5.1. Uninstalling CCS

To uninstall CCS, use [Uninstall a program] on [Control Panel].

Reference
• This operation does not delete the database.

1. On [Control Panel], click [Uninstall a program].

[Fig.3.5.1.-1 Control Panel]

61
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. From the list on the [Programs and Features] screen, select "CXDI Controller RF (or CXDI
Control Software NE)" and click the Uninstall button.
[Fig.3.5.1.-2 Programs and Features]

When "CXDI Controller RF (or CXDI Control Software NE)" is deleted from the list on the
[Programs and Features] screen, the uninstallation of CCS is completed.

62
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.5.2. Uninstalling the database engine

The database engine must be handled with utmost care because it contains patient information.

3.5.2.1. Stopping the SQL Server (CANONDRSYSTEM) service

1. Select [Control Panel] > [System and Security] > [Administrative Tools].
[Fig.3.5.2.1.-1 Control Panel]

63
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. From the list, select [Services].

[Fig.3.5.2.1.-2 Administrative Tools]

3. Right-click [SQL Server (CANONDRSYSTEM)] and select [Properties].

[Fig.3.5.2.1.-3 List of services]

64
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. Change [Startup type] to [Manual] and click the Stop button.

[Fig.3.5.2.1.-4 Service properties]

5. Check that the service status changes to Stopped, and click the OK button.
[Fig.3.5.2.1.-5 Stopping the service]

65
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

6. Return to the [Services] screen and check that the [Started] indication has disappeared from
the [Status] field of [SQL Server (CANONDRSYSTEM)].
[Fig.3.5.2.1.-5 Stopping the service]

66
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.5.2.2. Deleting SQL Server (CANONDRSYSTEM)

1. From the list on the [Programs and Features] screen, select [Microsoft SQL Server 2014
(64-bit)], and click [Uninstall/Change].
[Fig.3.5.2.2.-1 Programs and Features]

2. Select [Remove].
[Fig.3.5.2.2.-2 SQL Server 2014 Setup]

67
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. On the [Select Instance] screen, select [CANONDRSYSTEM], and click the Next button.
[Fig.3.5.2.2.-3 Select Instance]

4. On the [Select Features] screen, select all items with the Select All button, and click the
Next button.
[Fig.3.5.2.2.-4 Select Features]

68
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

5. On the [Ready to Remove] screen, click the Remove button.

[Fig.3.5.2.2.-5 Ready to Remove]

When [Succeeded] appears under [Status] for all items, the uninstallation of Microsoft SQL
Server 2014 (64-bit) is completed.
[Fig.3.5.2.2.-6 Complete]

69
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

6. From the list on the [Programs and Features] screen, uninstall the programs below
sequentially.
Microsoft SQL Server 2014 Transact-SQL ScriptDom
Microsoft SQL Server 2014 Setup (English)
SQL Server Browser for SQL Server 2014
Microsoft VSS Writer for SQL Server 2014
Microsoft SQL Server 2012 Native Client
Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Setup Support Files
Microsoft ODBC Driver 11 for SQL Server
This completes the uninstallation of the database engine.

3.5.3. Deleting the installation folder

Even after the program itself and the database engine are uninstalled, the files will still remain
undeleted. Delete the installation folder from Explorer.
• CCS-RF
⇒ root folder (usually C:¥)¥CCS-D¥folder
• CCS-NE
⇒ root folder (usually C:¥)¥CCS-S¥folder

3.5.4. Deleting the registry

Start the registry editor, and delete the following key:
"HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE¥SOFTWARE¥Canon Inc"

70
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. Essential Settings
This chapter describes the settings necessary from the time the physical connections (such
as connections between detector units, power boxes, and X-ray generator) are completed until
operation. For details of the physical connections, refer to the service manuals of the detector
units concerned.
Unless otherwise instructed, use the service tool to make the settings. For details of the service
tool, refer to Part 4, "Setting Reference."

4.1. OS network settings

Set the LAN ports to use to communicate with detector units.

Note
• Use a different LAN port to connect each of the following:
»» CXDI-50RF detector unit
»» Ethernet connection detector, Ferry type wireless connection detector, and Ferry type
wired connection detector
»» DICOM connection (hospital LAN)

1. Click [Control Panel] > [Network and Internet] > [View network status and tasks].
[Fig.4.1.-1 Control Panel]

71
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Click [Local Area Connection] under [View your active networks].

[Fig.4.1.-2 Network and Sharing Center]

3. Click the Properties button.

[Fig.4.1.-3 Local Area Connection Status]

72
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. Select [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] and click the Properties button.
[Fig.4.1.-4 Local Area Connection Properties]

5. Set the IP address and the subnet mask.

Item to be set Setting

192.168.100.10
(LAN port to use to communicate with an Ethernet connection detector,
Ferry type wireless connection detector, or Ferry type wired connection
detector)

192.168.104.129
IP address
(LAN port to use to install a single 50RF power box for a single CXDI-
50RF detector unit)
192.168.105.129
(Additional LAN port to use to install another 50RF power box for a single
CXDI-50RF detector unit)

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0

Reference
• Set other items as needed.

Set the jumbo frame for the LAN port to use to communicate with the CXDI-50RF detector
unit.

73
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

6. On the [Local Area Connection Properties] screen, click the Configure button.
[Fig.4.1.-6 Local Area Connection Properties]

7. Open the [Advanced] tab, select "Jumbo Frame" from [Property], and set a value of 4500
bytes or greater for [Value].

Reference
• The name of the setting to select from [Property] differs from one product to another.
On the Intel PRO/1000PT setting screen below, it is called [Jumbo Packet].

[Fig.4.1.-7 Advanced tab]

Proceed to set the connections for the hospital LAN and, as needed, for the X-ray generator.

74
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.2. Registering the CXDI-50RF detector (for CCS-RF only)

The settings are required only if CCS-RF is installed and the CXDI-50RF detector is installed.

1. After the CXDI-50RF system connections are completed, turn on the power to the 50RF
power box.

2. Start up the service tool, and log in using the service account.
To start up the service tool, execute "ServiceTool.exe" in the CCS folder.
[Fig.4.2.-1 Service tool login screen]

3. On the service tool menu, click [Sensor].

4. On the [Detector] screen, open [Dynamic Detector] > [Power Box] tab. Click the ADD
button.
[Fig.4.2.-2 Dynamic Detector tab of the service tool]

75
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

5. In the [PowerBox Add] dialog box, enter the necessary settings.

• Power Box Name: Any name (single-byte alphanumeric characters)
• Target IP Address: 192.168.104.130 (normal address)
• Local IP Address: 192.168.104.129 (normal address)
• Image Receive IP Address: Same IP address as Local IP Address

Reference
• The Target IP Address field is set by default (IP address at the time of shipment of the
power box).
• In the Local IP Address field, enter the IP address of the PC that is set as described in
"4.1. OS network settings."
• Up to four power boxes can be registered. If multiple power boxes are to be used or any
IP address conflicts with the IP address of the hospital LAN, the Target IP Address must
also be changed. In such a case, change the IP address of the power box concerned,
referring to "2.5. Setting the IP addresses of detectors and power boxes" in Part 5.

6. After entering all items, click the OK button.

[Fig.4.2.-3 Power box addition dialog box]

7. Open the [Registered Detectors] tab, and click the ENROLL button.
Information about the 50RF detector is displayed if its connection is detected.

8. Check that the detector serial number in [snsSerial] is correct, and click the OK button.
[Fig.4.2.-4 Dialog box displaying 50RF detector information]

When the OK button is clicked, the settings are saved and the 50RF detector is registered.
When the [End] dialog box appears indicating that the registration is completed, click the OK
button.

76
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

[Fig.4.2.-5 Detector registration completion dialog box]

9. Check that the 50RF detector is now registered on the list on the [Registered Detectors]
tab.

Reference
• If the detector is not displayed on the list on the [Registered Detectors] tab after the
registration completion, restart the service tool and check again to see if it is displayed.
• If registration fails, check the physical system connections and IP address settings, and
repeat the steps.
• If CCS is updated, the detector firmware and FPGA may need to be updated. For
details, refer to the New Function Descriptions for the version concerned and "NE_RF_
Combination list," which describes the compatibility between software and firmware.

4.3. Registering static detectors

4.3.1. Ethernet connection detectors (such as CXDI-40E, CXDI-50, CXDI-55, and

CXDI-60)

1. After completing system connections, turn on the power to the power box.

2. Start up the service tool, and log in using the service account.
To start up the service tool, execute "ServiceTool.exe" in the CCS folder.
[Fig.4.3.1.-1 Service tool login screen]

3. On the service tool menu, click [Sensor].

77
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. On the [Detector] screen, open [Static Detector] > [Receive IP Address] tab. Click the
ADD button.
[Fig.4.3.1.-2 Receive IP Address tab of the service tool]

5. In the [Add receive IP address] dialog box, enter the IP address of the detector.
[Fig.4.3.1.-3 Detector addition dialog box]

78
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• If the detector to register is the first one and it is to be connected without changing its IP
address from the one at the time of shipment (192.168.100.11), click the OK button. The
IP address will be added to the list on the [Receive IP Address] tab.
• To register another detector, click the ADD button again, and enter the IP address of the
detector. The IP addresses of up to four detectors can be added to the list.
[Fig.4.3.1.-4 If the IP addresses of multiple detectors are added]

6. Open the [Registered Detectors] tab, and click the ENROLL button.
When the detector is recognized, the information about the detector, whose connection is
detected, is displayed.

79
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

7. Check that the detector serial number in [snsSerial] is correct, and click the OK button.
[Fig.4.3.1.-5 Dialog box displaying detector information]

When the OK button is clicked, the detector information is registered in the database. When
the dialog box appears indicating that the registration is completed, click the OK button. The
setting procedure is now completed.
[Fig.4.3.1.-6 Detector registration completion dialog box]

8. Check that the detector is now registered in the list on the [Registered Detectors] tab.

Reference
• If the detector is not displayed on the list on the [Registered Detectors] tab after the
registration completion, restart the service tool and check again to see if it is displayed.
• If registration fails, check the physical system connections and IP address settings, and
repeat the steps.

80
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.3.2. Ferry type wireless connection detectors (such as CXDI-70C Wireless, CXDI-
401G Wireless, and CXDI-810C Wireless)
To register a Ferry type wireless connection detector, perform the link operation. In this case, the
registration status of other detectors is referenced, and the IP address is allocated automatically.
For this reason, if installing this type of detector in combination with detectors whose IP
addresses are to be allocated manually, such as Ethernet-connected detectors and Ferry type
wired connection detectors, you are recommended to register the Ferry type wireless connection
detector after setting all such detectors.

Note
• For the CXDI-70C Wireless detector that does not support 5 GHz, it is not possible to
establish the infrared link that uses the infrared data communication unit if the firmware
version is not 0x01150000 or later. For details, refer to "7.3. Compatibility with detector
models."

1. Referring to the service manual of the CXDI-Wireless series, install the access point and the
link module (infrared data communication unit or Ready Indicator).
The connection port information for the infrared data communication unit installed here will be
required in step 3, so make a note of it.

Reference
• The CXDI-701 series detectors, which are capable of Non Generator Connection, are
supported by V2.10 or later. For details of the system configuration for Non Generator
Connection, refer to the service manual of CXDI-701 series detectors. Reference
information is also provided in "Appendix N3. Using Non Generator Connection" in Part 4.

Important
• Charge the battery of the wireless detector fully before starting installation.
• At CISCO access points, known bugs in the AP firmware are fixed. Referring to Service
Information SIDR-12-004, apply the revised version of the AP firmware beforehand.

2. Set the access point network.

Start up the service tool using the service account, and click [AP/LNK] to start the AP/LNK
configuration tool.

3. Make the setting for using the link function, set the wireless profile (such as ESSID)
necessary for wireless communication, and set the access point.

Reference
• For details of the setting procedures and precautions, refer to "Appendix 6. AP/LNK
Configuration Tool" in Part 4.
• For details of the settings for the detector AP capable of Non Generator Connection,
refer to "Appendix 6 4.2. Using the detector as the parent unit" in Part 4.

81
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. Perform the link operation.

With the link operation, the Ferry type wireless connection detector is registered, and the IP
address and other information are registered for the detector. The database registered in the
service tool is referenced, and an IP address after 192.168.100.11 that is different from the IP
addresses of the detectors previously registered is automatically allocated to the detector.

Reference
• For details of the link operation, refer to "Recognizing the detector" in the service
manual of the CXDI-Wireless series or "Appendix 6. AP/LNK Configuration Tool" in Part
4.

5. Check that the Ferry type wireless connection detector on which the link operation has been
performed is now registered in the service tool of CCS.
On the service tool menu, click [Sensor].

On the [Detector] screen, select [Ferry Static Detector] > [Registered Detectors], and
then check that the Ferry type wireless connection detector is registered on the list.
To use a wired connection, set [Use wired option] to [ON] on the [IP] tab of the registered
detector, and enter the IP address manually. After the entry, click the OK button to complete
the settings, and then perform the link operation again.

82
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• On the setting tabs of various detectors (QC grid, IP, Auto Sleep, and Image Preview) at the
bottom of the screen, make settings, referring to "Appendix 10. Detectors" in Part 4.
• Due to CCS updates, the detector firmware and FPGA may need to be updated. For
details, refer to the New Function Descriptions for the version concerned and the "NE_RF_
Combination list," which describes the compatibility between software and firmware.
• To switch from the 5 GHz band to the 2.4 GHz band, change the setting with the AP/LNK
Configuration Tool, and perform the link operation.
• If using a 2.4 GHz/5 GHz-compatible wireless detector outdoors in a country where the 5
GHz band cannot be used outdoors, use the AP/LNK Configuration Tool to disable the 5
GHz band and set only 2.4 GHz band channels before operation.
• In a system containing both a wireless detector not compatible with the 5 GHz band and a
2.4 GHz/5 GHz-compatible wireless detector, set 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band channels in each
detector insofar as possible to avoid signal interference before operation.

See below for details of the installation of the infrared data communication unit.
The following describes the method for installing the Canon-specified infrared data
communication unit (ACT-IR224UN-LN115-LE made by ACTiSYS) (in a Windows 7 PC).

1. Insert the CD (shown on the left in the photo) provided with the product into the CD drive of
the PC.

Note
• Do not insert the infrared data communication unit into a USB port until the driver
installation is completed.

83
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. When an operation confirmation screen is opened, run the installation program.

The simple manual file is copied and the driver is installed.

The command screen appears first, and the manual is copied.

84
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Then the driver installer screen appears.

3. Click the Next button.

4. When the license agreement screen appears, select [I accept the terms of the license
agreement], and click the Next button.

85
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

A progress bar appears while the installation is underway.

5. When installation is completed, click the Finish button.

86
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

6. Insert the infrared data communication unit into a USB port of the PC.
When the unit is recognized, the port number is displayed.
This port number serves as the value to be set for the COM port of the AP/LNK Configuration
Tool, so make a note of it.

Note
• If the unit is inserted into another USB port, the port number will change, and therefore
the AP/LNK Configuration Tool settings must be made again.

87
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• The installation completion display will disappear in a few seconds. If you fail to confirm
the number while the display is shown, check it by selecting [Control Panel] > [Hardware
and Sound] > [Device Manager].
The infrared data communication unit is recognized as "Prolific USB-to-Serial Comm
Port" under [Ports (COM & LPT)].

88
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Note
• If using the infrared data communication unit (ACT-IR224UN-LN115-LE made by ACTiSYS)
in Windows 8.1 or Windows 10, install the device driver carefully.
Product with a new chip
A product whose serial number begins with "TA" contains a new chip. You can install the
device driver simply by connecting the infrared data communication unit to the PC.
Product with an old chip
A product whose serial number does not begin with "TA" contains an old chip. The
device driver of the latest version does not support an old chip, so install the old device
driver of V1.5.0.
Keep in mind that if Internet access is available, Windows Update will be carried out
automatically, and therefore the device driver will be updated to the latest version.
Before installing the device driver, go to [Control Panel], select [System] > [Advanced
system settings] > [Hardware] > [Device Installation Settings] dialog box, select [No,
let me choose what to do], and select [Never install driver software from Windows
Update.].

For detailed information, refer to the manual of ACTiSYS, as well as the installation guide
attached to the device driver.
Manual:
http://www.actisys.com/Manuals/IRx24UN-Lx_Lx-LE-Manual-v1.3.4-140324.pdf
V1.5.0 device driver:
http://www.actisys.com/Drivers/IR224UN/ACT-IR224UN-Li-Win8-3264bit-
TechSupportPack-20130402.zip

89
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.3.3. Ferry type wired connection detectors (such as CXDI-401G and CXDI-501G)

1. After completing system connections, turn on the power to the power box.

Note
• If multiple detectors are to be connected, the IP addresses of the detectors must be
changed beforehand. For details of how to change the IP addresses, refer to the service
manuals of the detectors (such as CXDI-401G and CXDI-501G) to use.

2. Start up the service tool, and log in using the service account.
To start up the service tool, execute "ServiceTool.exe" in the CCS folder.

3. On the service tool menu, click [Sensor].

4. On the [Detector] screen, open the [Ferry Static Detector] tab. Click the ENROLL button.

5. When the [Enroll IP Address] dialog box appears, enter "192.168.100.10" in the [Local IP
Address] (IP address of the PC) field and "192.168.100.11" in the [Target IP Address] (IP
address of the detector to be registered) field, and click the OK button.

Note
• Change the value to enter in the [Target IP Address] field according to the IP address
of the detector to be registered.
[Fig.4.3.3.-1 IP address input dialog box]

When the detector is recognized, the information about the detector, whose connection
is detected, is displayed.

6. Check that the detector serial number in [snsSerial] is correct, and click the OK button.
The detector information is registered in the database. When the [End] dialog box appears
indicating that the registration is completed, click the OK button. The setting procedure is now
completed.

90
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

[Fig.4.3.3.-2 Detector registration completion dialog box]

7. Select [Ferry Static Detector] > [Registered Detectors] tab, and check that the detector is
now registered on the list.

Reference
• If the detector is not displayed on the list on the [Registered Detectors] tab after the
registration completion, restart the service tool and check again to see if it is displayed.
• If registration fails, check the physical system connections and IP address settings, and
repeat the steps.
• On the setting tabs of various detectors (QC grid, Embedded grid, IP, and Auto Sleep) at
the bottom of the screen, make settings, referring to "Appendix 10. Detectors" in Part 4.
[Fig.4.3.3.-3 Detector registration screen (example: CXDI-501G registration screen)]

91
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.3.4. Deleting a registered detector

To delete a detector registered on [Dynamic Detector], [Static Detector], or [Ferry Static
Detector], select the detector to be deleted from the [Registered Detectors] list on the Detector
tab concerned, and click the DEL button.
The message "Are you sure to delete this item?" appears. Click the OK button to delete it.

Note
• A detector associated with a workspace cannot be deleted. In such a case, the following
message appears:
"Cannot delete this item. It is in use by the workspace setting."

4.4. X-ray generator settings

Make the settings for communication between the X-ray generator and the PC, for the overlap
software, and so on.
To display the X-ray generator setting screen, click [X-Ray Generator] on the service tool menu.
[Fig.4.4.-1 X-ray generator setting screen]
• CCS-NE

92
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• CCS-RF

For details of X-ray generator settings, refer to "2.1. X-ray generator and detector settings" in Part
4.

Reference
• For details of connections with CXDI-GC, refer to the option manual about X-ray generator
communication.

93
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.5. HDD/memory settings

The settings for automatic HDD data deletion and for memory can be made on this screen.

1. On the service tool menu, click [Application setting] > [HDD/Memory].

[Fig.4.5.-1 HDD/Memory setting screen]
• CCS-NE

• CCS-RF

94
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Make the settings under [Auto delete].

• Auto Delete Start From
Set the remaining free hard disk space at which the automatic deletion of captured images
is to start.
Range:
• CCS-NE: 2 to 2147483647
• CCS-RF: 2 (or the maximum size that can be stored with a single image capturing,
whichever is higher) to 2147483647
Unit: GB
Default: 20
• Full Auto Delete Size
Set the hard disk memory size subject to automatic deletion.
Range: Mini Auto Delete Size + 1 to 2147483647
Unit: GB
Default: 10
• Mini Auto Delete Size
Set the hard disk memory size subject to automatic deletion in cases such as during an
examination.
Range: 1 to Full Auto Delete Size - 1
Unit: GB
Default: 4

Reference
• In a version earlier than V2.01, even when the number of studies exceeded 20000, auto
deletion did not start if the remaining free HDD space did not meet the start condition
(Auto Delete Start From (default: 20 GB)). For this reason, the past study list display and
the search performance sometimes deteriorated.
In V2.01 or later, in addition to the Auto Delete Start From setting, the number of studies
(sum of pending studies and past studies) stored in the DB is added as an auto deletion
condition. If the number of studies exceeds 20000, auto deletion (deletion of images
captured) is performed on the HDD memory that is set for [Full Auto Delete Size]
(default: 10 GB) when the system is shut down. Images not targeted for auto deletion
(such as protected images and images with no commitment) are not deleted.
For details, refer to Part 4, "Setting Reference."

3. Make the settings under [Memory Setting] (for CCS-RF only)

• System Memory Size
Set the size of the memory used by the system. By changing the value, the size is split
equally into the number of fluoroscopic and digital cine frames.
Range: 6.0 to 64.0 (in 0.5 increments)
Unit: GB
Default: 8.0
Recommended setting: Same size as the size of the memory provided for the PC

95
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• Fluoro frame number

Set the number of frames to be allocated for fluoroscopic exposure in the size of the
memory used by the system. By changing the number of frames, the remaining memory
size is allocated to the number of digital cine frames.
Unit: Frame
Default: 108
• Digital-cine frame number
Set the number of frames to be allocated for digital cine exposure in the size of the
memory used by the system. By changing the number of frames, the remaining memory
size is allocated to the number of fluoroscopic frames.
Unit: Frame
Default: 108

Reference
• When the number of digital cine exposure frames is changed, a warning is displayed
because this change will affect the setting for the number of digital cine exposure
frames that has been set for each protocol.

96
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• Depending on the PC, not all the installed memory may be recognized due to any of the
following problems.
»» BIOS supports only less than 4 GB.
»» An on-board device or another board previously installed in a port occupies the main
memory.
»» The memory is not recognized due to a memory defect.
It can be determined whether these problems have occurred by checking the total physical
memory size recognized on Task Manager. By comparing the total memory size recognized
with the size of the installed memory, the size of the memory not recognized can be
determined.
[Fig.4.5.2. Performance tab display of Task Manager (Windows 7)]

If the physical memory is 4 GB or more and is smaller than the installed memory, adjust the
memory setting of the service tool to the physical memory.
If less than 4 GB is displayed as the physical memory, it means that the memory is
insufficient. It is recommended that more memory be added.
If the memory cannot be increased even by adding more memory, it is probable that BIOS
supports only less than 4 GB. Take measures such as updating BIOS.

97
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.6. Creating a predetermined workspace

Immediately after a detector is recognized, no workspace is associated with it, and therefore
no initial detector setting work (such as calibration) can be performed. Create a workspace
according to the operating environment.

4.6.1. Using the predetermined settings

Set the properties of a workspace.

1. On the service tool menu, click [Protocol Editor], and open [Workspace].

2. Place a check mark next to a detector displayed on the [Detector] list, and click the OK
button.
The confirmation dialog box appears.
[Fig.4.6.1.-2 Confirmation dialog box]

Click the OK button, and the detector and the position type will be associated and the
workspace will be defined.
The workspace association settings are now completed.
Referring to "4.7. Calibration, performance test, and self-diagnosis," proceed to make settings.

98
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.6.2. Using workspace settings other than the predetermined ones

Add the workspace settings to use.

1. On the service tool menu, click [Protocol Editor], and open [Workspace].

2. Click the Add button.

The [New workspace] dialog box appears.
[Fig.4.6.2.-1 Workspace addition dialog box]

3. Enter the name of the workspace in the [Workspace name] field, and select the position to
set from the [Position type] field.
[Workspace color] can be edited only if [Position type] is set to [Cassette]. (V2.12 new
function s11111)

4. Place a check mark next to a detector displayed on the [Detector] list.

5. Click the OK button.

99
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

6. When the selection dialog box below appears, select whether to use the existing protocols,
and click the OK button.
[Fig.4.6.2.-2 Selecting whether to use the existing protocols]

[Making the connection between this workspace and protocols by using existing
workspace setting]
The existing protocols will be used.
[No, just registering workspace]
Only the workspace will be set, and the existing protocols will not be used.

Note
• If this option is selected, no protocols will be set. Referring to the protocol manual, set
the necessary protocols before proceeding to the next setting.

With the above steps, the detector and the position type are associated, and the workplace is
defined.
The workspace association settings are now completed.
If any predetermined workspaces are not necessary, delete them.
Referring to "4.7. Calibration, performance test, and self-diagnosis," proceed to make settings.

Reference
• For CCS-NE only, Non Generator Connection can be enabled from the [X-Ray generator
setting] screen of the service tool. If Non Generator Connection has been enabled,
associate only detectors capable of Non Generator Connection (such as CXDI-701 series
and CXDI-801 series detectors) with the workspace. It is not possible to use CCS if a
detector other than those capable of Non Generator Connection remains associated with
the workspace.
For details of enabling Non Generator Connection, refer to "Appendix N3. Using Non
Generator Connection" in Part 4.

100
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.7. Calibration, performance test, and self-diagnosis

Exit the service tool and start up CCS. Using the QC Tool button on the system setup screen,
conduct calibration, performance test, and self-diagnosis.

4.7.1. Conducting calibration and performance test

Conduct calibration (creation of detector correction data) and performance test (detector
maintenance and control) when installing the system. Conduct calibration first and then check
the correction results in the performance test.
The operating procedures for calibration and performance test are almost the same, so in the
following description, the calibration screen is used.

Note
• Due to the risk of exposure to X-rays, be absolutely sure to check that no other individuals
are in the vicinity when conducting calibration and performance test.
• The privilege for calibration control is required to conduct calibration.
• Before conducting calibration, remove the grids from the detectors.
• Conduct the performance test in the same environment (X-ray exposure dose and exposure
range) and in the same position (orientations of and distance between the detector and the
X-ray tube) as those for calibration.
• It is recommended that calibration and performance test be conducted regularly once a
year.

1. Click the Calibration button or the Performance Test button, and select a detector from the
available detectors/workspaces list.

101
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• If calibration has not been implemented, an error will be displayed when CCS is started,
because there is no calibration data.
Click the OK button, and click the QC Tool button on the system setup screen, and
execute calibration.

102
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Click the Start button.

Calibration or performance test is started.

Reference
• Different steps are taken for a dynamic detector and a static detector.
»» For a dynamic detector (CXDI-50RF)
Mode 1 (radiographic images): Number of Images = 4
Mode 2 (radiographic images): Number of Images = 4
Mode 3 (dynamic image): Number of Frames = 30
Mode 4 (dynamic images): Number of Frames = 30
»» For a static detector (static detector other than CXDI-50RF)
Mode 1 (radiographic images): Number of Images = 4

To check the calibration or performance test history, click the History button. To close the
dialog box, click the OK button.

103
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. Start image capturing.

Check that [Ready] appears in the system status indicator, and then press the exposure
switch or the exposure pedal of the X-ray generator.

104
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

For the image displayed after calibration, when the detector is calibrated for the first time, an
image without gain correction is displayed. For the second and subsequent calibrations, an
image with gain correction is displayed.

4. When calibration image capturing is completed, click the Edit button to display Exposure
Memo.

105
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

5. Enter the exposure conditions of the X-ray generator (or click [ ∧ ] or [ ∨ ] to increment or
decrement the value), and click the OK button.

Note
• If no entries are made for the exposure conditions or if any value outside the input range
is input, a warning screen appears.
If an error occurs in the image check results
Check the detailed information about the calibration results on the image check
result list.
To redo calibration, change the settings of the X-ray generator on the basis of the
detailed information, and click the Retry button.

6. Click the Next button.

Set the detector and the X-ray generator to the ready status.

7. Repeat calibration or performance test.

Repeat steps 3 to 6 until all calibrations or performance tests are completed.

8. When calibration or performance test is completed, click the End button.

9. In the QCT confirmation dialog box that appears, click the OK button.

10. On the calibration or performance test start screen, click the Exit QC button.
Exit the QC tool.

106
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.7.2. Resetting to the factory default

A detector with internal calibration data (for example, CXDI-710C Wireless) can have its post-
exposure calibration data reset to the factory default.

1. On the system setup screen, click the QC Tool button, and then click the Calibration button.

2. On the available detectors/workspaces list, click the targeted detector.

3. Click the Reset to factory default button.

4.7.3. Conducting self-diagnosis

With self-diagnosis, the detectors and power boxes are inspected using test patterns, etc. It is
recommended to conduct self-diagnosis about once a month.

1. From the QC Tool button on the system setup screen, click the Self-diagnosis button.

107
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. On the available detectors/workspaces list, click the targeted detector.

3. Click the Start button.

Self-diagnosis starts. The diagnosis results are displayed on the diagnosis result list. The
diagnosis items specified here cannot be changed.

108
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• Different test items apply for a dynamic detector and a static detector.
»» For a dynamic detector (CXDI-50RF)
Test A, test B, test E, test F
»» For a static detector compatible with Ferry (such as CXDI-70, 80, 401, 501, 701, or
801)
Test A, test B, test E
»» For a static detector incompatible with Ferry (such as CXDI-40E, 50, 55, or 60)
Test B, test C, test D, test E

To check the self-diagnosis history, click the History button. To close the dialog box, click the
OK button.

4. Click the Exit QC button.

You will be back to the system setup screen.

109
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.8. Phototimer adjustments

4.8.1. Overview of phototimer adjustments

The exposure dose must be set to an optimum value to obtain the best diagnostic image quality
while minimizing the radiation dose to the patient. The radiation dose is measured with the
phototimer installed in the detector, and when the radiation dose reaches the optimum value,
X-ray exposure is terminated. This function is called Automatic Exposure Control (AEC).
This section describes the method of adjusting the phototimer using Exposure Index (EI),
displayed on the examination screen.

Note
• This work requires several adjustments between the inside of the X-ray generator and AEC.
To ensure that the work proceeds smoothly, discuss with the person responsible for the
X-ray generator in advance.
• If the existing protocols are used, protocols for AEC calibration (referred to as AEC protocols
in the remainder of this document) are prepared for phototimer adjustment purposes. When
installing the phototimer, make adjustments using these protocols.
• Do not use AEC protocols for general imaging purposes.

110
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.8.2. Setting AEC protocols

This section describes how to place AEC protocols on the tray from the service tool.

1. From the service tool menu, select [Protocol Editor] to start Protocol Editor.

2. From the tree view on the left side of the screen, select [Button Layout], and select the tray
on which to place AEC protocols.
Example: Selecting "DEMOTRAY50"

3. Click the Edit button.

111
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. Expand the AEC protocols, put the desired protocol workspace on the tray on the right side of
the screen by dragging and dropping it, and click the OK button.

Reference
• To delete a protocol button that has been placed, double-click it.
• Removing the check mark next to [Visible] at the top right of the screen causes the
[Protocol selection screen tray] tab during imaging to disappear.

5. On the [Protocol Editor] screen, click the OK button.

112
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Note
• Do not use AEC protocols for general imaging purposes.

4.8.3. Preparations for phototimer adjustment

1. Start CCS.

2. Conduct calibration.

3. Activate EI display on the examination screen.

Method of checking the EI display settings

1. Click the (system setup button) to open the system setup screen.

113
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Click the [Annotation] tab.

3. Confirm that the EI is displayed at the bottom right.

If the EI appears, the EI display settings have been made correctly. Click the Cancel button,
and open the [EXAM] screen.
If the EI is not displayed at the bottom right, activate the EI display with the operation
described below.

114
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. Click the radio button at the bottom right.

5. Click [EI] on the list.

115
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

6. Click the Add button.

The EI is added to the list.

7. Confirm that the EI is displayed at the bottom right, and click the OK button.
Return to the [EXAM] screen.

116
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.8.4. Selecting AEC protocols

1. On the [EXAM] screen, make an entry to [Patient ID], and click the Set button.

2. Click the Search by Category button, and open the tray on which AEC protocols have been
placed as described in "4.8.2. Setting AEC protocols."

3. Click the AEC protocol button.

4. Click the Start Exam button.

4.8.5. Adjusting the phototimer

Important
• It is recommended to leave phototimer adjustments to the X-ray generator manufacturer
concerned. Usually, have the X-ray generator manufacturer perform adjustments equivalent
to film-screen and/or storage phosphor system adjustments.

1. Prepare acrylic sheets with thicknesses of 5 cm, 10 cm, and 20 cm for phototimer
adjustments.

117
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Expose each acrylic sheet to the X-ray at 70 kV, 100 kV, and 120 kV.

Note
• To display the EI value on CXDI correctly, acrylic sheets must be exposed to the X-ray
in such a way that at least the entire 4 x 4 [inch] area at the center of the detector is
contained. For this reason, prepare acrylic sheets that can cover this area and the entire
detection field of the phototimer, and expose the entire surfaces of the acrylic sheets.

3. Adjust the phototimer to indicate the EI as on the list below.

At this step, the spectral sensitivity according to kV settings is to be adjusted.

Detector EI

CXDI-40EG, CXDI-40G Compact, CXDI-401G, CXDI-401G Compact, CXDI-50G,

CXDI-55G, CXDI-501G, CXDI-60G, CXDI-70G Wireless, CXDI-701G Wireless, 480
CXDI-801G Wireless

CXDI-40EC, CXDI-401C, CXDI-401C Compact, CXDI-410C Wireless, CXDI-50C,

CXDI-55C, CXDI-501C, CXDI-60C, CXDI-70C Wireless, CXDI-80C Wireless,
280
CXDI-701C Wireless, CXDI-710C Wireless, CXDI-801C Wireless, CXDI-810C
Wireless, CXDI-50RF

4. Adjust the exposure using the option buttons (such as the H.S button, L.S button, + (plus)
button, and - (minus) button) on the X-ray generator to determine the optimum exposure.
The L.S button gives an exposure approximately 1.25 times higher. Each body part may
require an additional adjustment individually using the option buttons as needed.

4.9. License issuance

For CCS V2.14 or later, a license management system is introduced.

For the procedure for issuing licenses, refer to the separate manual, "CXDI Software License
issue service manual."

118
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

5. Other Settings

5.1. Use of languages other than Japanese, English (United States),

and Chinese (Simplified)

If wishing to use a language not supported by CCS (language other than Japanese, English
(United States), and Chinese (Simplified)) and customize the system language in that language,
use the English-language Ultimate edition (for Windows 8.1 or later, the Pro edition) as the OS.
In the Ultimate edition, additional languages can be installed, and the display language of the
operating system can be changed with [Control Panel] > [Clock, Language, and Region].
For details, refer to Microsoft's support site.

Note that even when this setting is made, the display language in CCS will remain in English.
If wishing to customize the display language in CCS, contact Canon.

Notes on the language setting during installation

• At the CCS setup stage, make sure that [Format] on the Formats tab matches [system
locale] on the Administrative tab. These tabs are displayed by selecting [Control Panel]
> [Clock, Language, and Region] > [Region and Language] (for Windows 8.1 or later,
[Region]). If [Format] does not match [system locale], the annotation captions and other
characters may be garbled depending on the combination of these settings.
(Example: Current system locale → English, Format → Japanese)
• Changing the format after CCS setup does not pose a problem, but do not change the system
locale.

5.2. Other settings

Settings other than the ones described up to Part 4 may be required depending on the equipment
configuration and requirements at the installation location.
For details of the settings for the service tool, refer to Part 4, "Setting Reference." For details of
the settings that can be made from the GUI of CCS, refer to the user's manual.

Due to a large number of functions available, separate manuals are provided according to setting
location and role.
Refer also to the New Function Descriptions and other documents issued for each version
release.

5.2.1. Touch panel operations

In V2.00 or later, if a touch panel is to be used (especially for CCS-NE), it is recommended to
change the custom DPI setting in Windows from 100% to 125% so that the pixel pitch x custom
DPI setting becomes 0.297 mm or greater to prevent erroneous operations.
This section describes how to change it in detail.

Reference
• The screens used for the description may differ from the ones you view depending on the
version used.

119
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1. Determine the pixel pitch by visiting the website of the monitor's manufacturer or by referring
to the specifications provided.
(Examples)

Panel type 15 17 19

UXGA 1600 x
Maximum display resolution XGA 1024 x 768 SXGA 1280 x 1024
1200

Display area (H) x (V) [mm] 304.1 x 228.1 337.9 x 270.3 386.1 x 289.6

Pixel pitch (H) x (V) [mm] 0.297 x 0.297 0.264 x 0.264 0.241 x 0.241

2. Check the value of the custom DPI setting from the table below.
For a 17-inch SXGA (1280 x 1024) monitor and a 19-inch UXGA (1600 x 1200) monitor, the
custom DPI setting must be set to 125% so that the pixel pitch x custom DPI setting becomes
0.297 or greater.

(2)
(1) Pixel
Size Aspect Maximum display Custom Resolution
pitch (1) x (2)
[inch] ratio resolution DPI (equivalent value)
[mm]
setting

15 4:3 XGA (1024 x 768) 0.297 100% 0.297 1024 x 768

SXGA
17 5:4 0.264 125% 0.330 1024 x 819.2
(1280 x 1024)

UXGA
19 4:3 0.241 125% 0.302 1280 x 960
(1600 x 1200)

3. Select [Control Panel] > [Appearance and Personalization] > [Display], and set the
custom DPI setting to 125%.
To reflect this setting, log off and then log on again.

120
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

For Windows 10 or later

Set it to 125% on [Change the size of text, apps, and other items] displayed by
selecting the [Start] menu > [Settings] > [System] > [Display].
To reflect this setting, sign out and then sign in again.

Reference
• Example) For a 21.5-inch monitor with a maximum display resolution of 1920 x 1080 and
pixel pitch of 0.248 mm
»» If the custom DPI setting is 100%
The pixel pitch x custom DPI setting is 0.248 mm.

»» If the custom DPI setting is 125%

The pixel pitch x custom DPI setting is 0.310 mm, which is greater than 0.274 mm.

Other information

If using the APR-Editor for CXDI-GC with a touch panel monitor, the scroll bar is so thin and the
▼ button of the combo box is also so small that it is hard to perform touch operations.
It is possible to change settings in Windows to make the displays larger, with the method below.
Changing the settings does not affect the size of the scroll bar of CCS itself.

121
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1. Select [Control Panel] > [Appearance and Personalization] > [Personalization] > [Window
Color].

2. Select [Advanced appearance settings...], select [Scrollbar] under Item, and change the
size.
Operations are easier to perform when the default size of 17 is changed to 35 or so.

For Windows 8.1 or later

In Windows 8.1 or later, the above settings are not available, but the display of the scroll bar can
be increased with the method below.

1. Press the Windows key and the R key to start [Run].

Alternatively, right-click on the [Start] menu and click [Run] to start it.

122
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Enter "regedit" in the [Open] field, and click the OK button.

The [Registry Editor] screen appears.

3. In the folder tree on the left side of the [Registry Editor] screen, click [HKEY_CURRENT_
USER] > [Control Panel] > [Desktop] > [WindowMetrics] in this order, and double-click
[ScrollWidth].
The [Edit String] dialog box appears.

4. Enter data in [Value data], and click the OK button.

The initial value is "-255". Increasing this negative value causes the scroll bar to increase in
width.
To reflect this setting, sign out and then sign in again.

5.2.2. Use of GPU for radiographic image processing

In V2.01 or later, the processing of radiographic image using the GPU is supported. This
processing was previously carried out with the CPU.
For CCS-NE, the service tool enables selection between CPU processing and GPU processing.
For GPU processing in CCS-NE, two modes are available: "GPU speed priority" mode, in which
images are displayed with the conventional image quality in the 2nd preview; and "GPU image
quality priority" mode, in which images are displayed with high definition.
For CCS-RF, GPU processing is always performed, and it is the same operation as "GPU image
quality priority" mode in CCS-NE.
For the settings that can be made, refer to Part 4, "Setting Reference."
➡➡Refer to "Use of GPU for radiographic image processing" in V2.01 New Function Descriptions.
Checks performed at the start of CCS when GPU processing is selected

1. GPU architecture
A check is performed to see if the condition for the GPU architecture (Compute capability 2.0
or above for Windows 7 and Windows 8.1, and 3.0 or above for Windows 10) is met.
If the condition is not met, a dialog box appears announcing the Fatal Error below. After you
click the OK button, the system setup screen opens, causing the system to enter a state in
which the examination screen cannot be displayed.

123
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. GPU driver version

A check is performed to see if the GPU driver version is supported.
The error code that applies if the driver version is not correct is the same as that described in
"1. GPU architecture," except that a description of information is added for Additional Info.
The supported GPU driver version differs depending on the version on the CCS side. See
below for details.
➡➡For CCS-NE, refer to "1.4.1. Hardware environment" in Part 1.
➡➡For CCS-RF, refer to "2.4.1. Hardware environment" in Part 1.
3. GPU memory space
A check is performed to see if the condition for the GPU memory (2 GB or more) is met when
the OS of CCS-RF or CCS-NE is Windows 10 or when [Higher quality] is set for image
stitching.
If the condition is not met, the following warning dialog box appears.
• When the OS of CCS-RF or CCS-NE is Windows 10

• When [Higher quality] is set for image stitching

5.2.3. Automatic disconnection detection

In V2.02 or later, it is possible to set the automatic disconnection detection function, which
automatically switches operation to the disconnected status if an Ethernet disconnection is
detected during RIS connection, and returns operation to the status prior to the detection of
the disconnection if an Ethernet connection is detected. The automatic disconnection detection
function is enabled if a LAN card subject to automatic disconnection detection is set up using the
service tool.
For details of the settings to make, refer to Part 4, "Setting Reference."

Note
• Network disconnections of the PC on the RIS or PACS side cannot be detected.
• Be careful not to specify the LAN card in a detector as the LAN card to be monitored.
➡➡Refer to "Automatic Disconnection Detection" in V2.02 New Function Descriptions.

124
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

On Line/Off Line button status change diagram

5.2.4. Resending images after CCS is restarted and when erroneous exposure is
detected
In V2.12 or later, it is possible to transfer images from the detector when CCS is restarted after
it is terminated abnormally before completing the reception or storage of image data after
exposure, and also when erroneous exposure is detected.
No settings need be made using the service tool.
➡➡Refer to "Resending images after the CCS is restarted or when misirradiation is detected" in
V2.12 New Function Descriptions.

5.2.5. Shock detection

CXDI-410C Wireless, CXDI-710C Wireless, and CXDI-810C Wireless detectors can detect and
record shocks. CCS notifies the user of the shock data detected by the detectors in an error
dialog box (Warning).

125
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Shock detection error dialog box

Shock data has three stages, 0 for small shocks, 1 for large shocks, and 3 for free falls. By
default, only free falls are set for notification.
To change the settings, place ShockSensorSetting.xml in the CCS installation folder, and change
the value of ThresholdOfShowAlert.
Example of setting ShockSensorSetting.xml (If wishing to notify of 1: large shocks or
above)

<?xml version="1.0"?>
<ShockSensorSetting xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"
xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema">
<ThresholdOfShowAlert>1</ThresholdOfShowAlert>
<TimeIntervalOfSkipNotifyError>3000</TimeIntervalOfSkipNotifyError>
</ShockSensorSetting>

In the error dialog box, the detector name will appear as additional information, but the detector
name is not indicated on the detector itself. For this reason, when using this function, you are
recommended to apply detector name labels to the detectors.

126
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

5.3. Behavior at system shutdown

When the Shutdown button is clicked while CCS is running, the shutdown confirmation dialog
box appears.
[Shutdown confirmation dialog box]

When the Restart and Other Options button is clicked, only the application is closed, and the
restart mode screen is displayed.

127
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

5.3.1. Restart mode

The items displayed on the restart mode screen differ depending on the user who is logged into
CCS.
➡➡Refer to "Startup time improvements (addition of "Restart and other Options" button)" in V2.00
New Function Descriptions.
• If the login user is CxdiAdmin or CxdiService
[Screen displayed when the system enters restart mode]

If the login user is the default service engineer (CxdiAdmin or CxdiService), the buttons listed
below appear.
CXDI Restart
Restarts CCS.
PC Sleep
Sets the PC to the sleep status. When released from the sleep status, the PC returns to
restart mode.
PC Hibernate
Sets the PC to the hibernate status. When released from the hibernate status, the PC
returns to restart mode.
PC Restart
Restarts the PC.
Shutdown
Shuts down the PC.
ServiceTool Start
Starts the service tool. While the service tool is running, it is prohibited to operate the
various restart mode buttons. The buttons can be operated after the service tool is closed.
Log off
Logs you off from the OS.
Exit
Exits restart mode. When the shell is running, this button does not appear.

128
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• If the login user is other than CxdiAdmin or CxdiService and the login authorization is
valid
[Screen displayed when the system enters restart mode]

If the login user is other than the default service engineer and the login authorization is valid,
the buttons listed below appear.
CXDI Restart
Restarts CCS.
PC Sleep
Sets the PC to the sleep status. When released from the sleep status, the PC returns to
restart mode.
PC Hibernate
Sets the PC to the hibernate status. When released from the hibernate status, the PC
returns to restart mode.
PC Restart
Restarts the PC.
Shutdown
Shuts down the PC.

129
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• If the login authorization is not valid

[Screen displayed when the system enters restart mode]

The Start CXDI with login button is added to the screen for "If the login user is other than
CxdiAdmin or CxdiService and the login authorization is valid."
Start CXDI with login
Starts CCS with the login authorization being valid.
For details, refer to "5.3.3. Operations on the restart mode screen when login
authorization is not valid."
When the shell is running and the login authorization is not valid, the For Service button is
added to the screen for "If the login user is other than CxdiAdmin or CxdiService and the login
authorization is valid."
For Service
Starts the service tool. This button has the same effect as the ServiceTool Start button.

Reference
• When [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [Del] keys are pressed in restart mode while the system is running
in shell mode, the Windows screen logoff, user switching, and shutdown are displayed,
and various functions are enabled.

130
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

5.3.2. Operation in restart mode

1. The PC must be shut down once a day, for instance, at the end of the work day.
If the PC is not shut down in this way, the CCS operation may slow down or stop, the PC may
not enter sleep or hibernate mode properly, and/or the PC may not be able to restart.
By continuing to operate the system without shutting it down, the system resources may be
gradually wasted.

2. The PC must not be set to sleep or hibernate mode by using its power button.
Otherwise, CCS may not be able to restart properly, and in a worst-case scenario, the PC
may need to be restarted by forcibly shutting it down.
Even for versions that can sleep and hibernate, do not enter these modes by pressing the
power button of the PC, as in conventional versions.

3. If the PC does not recover from a symptom even by using [CXDI Restart] due to, for example,
an error, restart the PC.
It can happen that unless the PC is restarted, the PC cannot recover from a symptom.

4. When installing the system for the first time or upgrading it, be absolutely sure to verify the
sleep and hibernate statuses in the installation environment (by clicking the PC Sleep button
and PC Hibernate button), and check in particular that the connection with the external
equipment recovers properly.
Whether to display the PC Sleep button and the PC Hibernate button can be specified by
editing the bga.ini file in the CCS installation folder. Some PC environments and graphic
boards provided by sales companies may not support the sleep or hibernate status. For this
reason, when installing a PC, check whether the PC to be installed can recover properly
from the sleep and hibernate statuses. If the PC cannot recover or if these statuses are to be
made unavailable to users other than service engineers, hide the display of these buttons.
Whether to display the PC Restart button can also be specified in the same way.

[DisplaySetting]

PC_Sleep=1 Hide → 0, display → 1 (default: display)

PC_Hibernate=1 Hide → 0, display → 1 (default: display)

PC_Restart=1 Hide → 0, display → 1 (default: display)

131
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

5.3.3. Operations on the restart mode screen when login authorization is not valid
➡➡Refer to "Prevention of Erroneous Deletion of Images" in V2.10 New Function Descriptions.
If login authorization (a service tool setting) is disabled, the Start CXDI with login button
appears.

Reference
• Login authorization can be set by selecting the following:
Service Tool > [System Setting] > [Application Setting] > [Screen saver] > [Login]

When the Start CXDI with login button is clicked, the login screen appears with user name and
password input fields.
After login on the login screen, you will return to Cxdiuser (user prior to login on the login screen)
when you change to restart mode again, as shown below. Then the restart mode screen to be
displayed if the login authorization is disabled is displayed.

Reference
• Even if a role with no "Delete study" privilege is created beforehand and is set as a role
of Cxdiuser, the Start CXDI with login button is displayed in the mode without login
authorization. Thus, you can delete studies manually if you log in as a user who has the
"Delete study" privilege.
If [Enable login] is set to off with the service tool, the [User Administration] tab does not
appear on the CCS system screen. This tab appears, however, if you start the login screen
with the Start CXDI with login button and log in.

132
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

6. Operation in Shell Mode

After installation using the integrated installer of CCS is completed and the system is installed
correctly, the subsequent operation is performed by a general user (cxdi).
In normal operation, after the user turns on the power to the PC and the OS starts up, processes
ranging from Windows login to CCS system startup must be performed automatically.
This installer contains the utilities for configuring the settings for the general user after
installation. The following describes the procedure for automatic login and automatic CCS startup
setting (shell mode startup).

6.1. Setting shell mode startup

1. Log in to Windows as a cxdi user.

2. Double-click SelectOSOperation.bat in the CCS installation folder.

3. When the [Select OS Operation] message box appears, click the No button.

4. The confirmation dialog box appears again. To continue, click the Yes button.

5. Double-click ccsShell.bat, which is in the same folder.

When this batch file is executed, the shell mode startup setting will be completed. From the
subsequent startups, automatic login will be performed.
The desktop will not be displayed.

Note
• If, in step 1, you log in as a cxdiadmin user by mistake, be sure to log off and log in as a cxdi
user. If you perform step 2 and after as a cxdiadmin user, OS operation restrictions will be
imposed on the user with the administrator privilege, making it impossible for you to perform
the operation for releasing from shell mode.

6.2. Canceling shell mode startup

1. On the restart mode screen, press the [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [Delete] keys to display the user
selection screen.
Alternatively, the user selection screen can also be displayed by first restarting the system
and then continuing to press the [Shift] key on the OS starting up screen to cancel automatic
logon.

2. Log on as a cxdiadmin user.

3. Double-click SelectOSOperation.bat in the CCS installation folder.

4. When the [Select OS Operation] message box appears, click the Yes button.

5. The confirmation dialog box appears again. To continue, click the Yes button.

6. Log off.

133
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

7. Log on as a cxdi user.

If you log on here, you will be automatically logged off, and will return to the screen that
appeared before the logon.

8. Log on as a cxdi user again.

Check that shell mode startup has been canceled.

134
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

7. Upgrade
To upgrade a previous version of CCS, execute the integrated installer of a new version in the
state in which the previous version of CCS is installed.
There is no need to uninstall the previous version of CCS.
Before upgrading the software, you are recommended to make backups of the database and so
on as needed.

Note
• After an upgrade, the operating requirements will be changed. For details of the operating
requirements, refer to the New Function Descriptions (service manual reports) of the version
concerned.

7.1. Requirements for an upgrade

CCS can start an upgrade process only if all of the following items are satisfied.
• Versions that support upgrades
• Models that support upgrades
• Editions that support upgrades

7.1.1. Versions that support upgrades

If the CCS version to upgrade to is newer than the installed CCS version, it is possible to
upgrade to that version. It is not, however, possible to upgrade from a version older than V2.10 to
V2.14 or later.

Reference
• It is possible to upgrade from a version older than V2.10 to V2.14 or later by first upgrading
to V2.10.

7.1.2. Models that support upgrades

If the CCS model to upgrade to is the same as the installed CCS model, it is possible to upgrade
to that model. It is not possible to upgrade from one model to another, such as from CCS-NE to
CCS-RF.

CCS model to upgrade to

CCS-NE CCS-RF

CCS-NE ✔ ×
Installed CCS model
CCS-RF × ✔

135
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

7.1.3. Editions that support upgrades

In the table below, ✔ indicates that an upgrade is possible, and × indicates that an upgrade is not
possible.

CCS edition to upgrade to

Product Product
Demonstration
version version
version
(no license) (licensed)

Product version
✔ ✔ ×
(no license)

Product version
Installed CCS edition × ✔ ×
(licensed)

Demonstration
× × ✔
version

7.2. Downgrade

It is not possible to downgrade CCS.

7.3. Compatibility with detector models

When upgrading CCS, pay attention to the compatibility with detector models.
For details of the combinations of CCS with the firmware, PLD codes, and FPGA codes of
detectors, refer to the separate manual, "NE_RF_Software Combination List."

136
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

8. Migration
This chapter describes the procedure to follow if it is necessary to migrate the CCS environment
to another PC for reasons such as hardware faults.

8.1. Migration procedure

This section describes the restoration procedure using the migration tool.
For a CCS version older than V2.16, it was necessary to manually back up the database, copy
the calibration data, copy the setting files, and restore them at the source for migration. This can
be automatically performed by using the migration tool.

Note
• If the CCS version (including the patch level) or model differs between the source for
migration and the target location for migration, it is not possible to migrate the environment.
• If optional software is installed at the source for migration, install the optional software at the
target location for migration as well. If the option configuration differs, it is not possible to
migrate the environment.
• It is not possible to migrate study information, captured images, DB backup files, or various
log files.
• If any settings dependent on the OS or hardware differ between the source for migration
and the target location for migration, the settings must be made again after migration.
Example): IP address, MAC addresses, image storage, backup paths

Procedure

1. Check to see if the database has an error.

Check that on the source PC for migration, the DB Management Tool does not start in fault
recovery mode. If the database has any other error, do not migrate the environment.

2. On the source PC for migration, use the Collection Tool to collect the package for migration in
Migration Mode.
Back up the database, calibration files, and setting files.
For the operation method, refer to "2.3.1. Overview of Collection Tool" in Part 5.

3. On the target PC for migration, install the same versions of CCS and optional software as
those on the source for migration.

137
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. Select the service tool on the target PC for migration > [Utility Setting] > [Migration].
[Fig.8.2.-1 Starting the migration tool]

5. Click the Browse button and specify the folder of the package collected in step 2.
[Fig.8.2.-2 Selecting the collected package]

138
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

6. Click the Start button.

A check is performed to see if the selected collected package has any problems. If any
problems are found in the check, an error dialog box appears, and the migration process is
interrupted.

Reference
• Error message list

Message Description

This message appears if a package in which the

Cannot acquire the system
registry information for the source PC for migration
environment information of
is not collected is referenced. It is not possible to
the source for Migration.
perform a check, so migration is interrupted.*1

The database backup file of This message appears if the database backup file is
the system is not found. not found.*1

The system of the source for

This message appears if the CCS versions or models
Migration is different from
do not match.*2
the system already installed.

The version of the source

database for Migration is This message appears if the database versions do
different from that of the not match.*2
database already installed.

A package whose data

This message appears if a package in which an error
failed to be collected is
occurred in the collection in step 1 is referenced.*1
specified.

This message appears if the optional software

configurations do not match. Install the displayed
optional software onto the target PC for migration.
The options to be checked are as listed below.
CXDI DSA Function
The optional software CXDI Tomosynthesis Function
configuration or the version CXDI WORKFLOW NE
varies between the source
for Migration and the target One Shot LL for CXDI Series
location for Migration. Scatter Correction for CXDI Series
CXDI STUDIX
CXDO DAPCOM
Cgbig3.dll
CXDI Idisp

139
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
*1 Collect the package for migration again and retry. If the error still occurs, some sort of
problem may have occurred in the environment of the source PC for migration. Do not
migrate the environment.
*2 Check to see if the target PC for migration and the source PC for migration have the
same environment. CCS version, model, and database information is contained in the
following registry key.
»» Registry key
• HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE¥SOFTWARE¥Canon Inc¥CXDI Controller
»» Names
• DBModelName (CCS model)
• DBVersion (database version)
• Version (CCS version)

7. Click the Yes button to start migration.

If no problems are found in the check on the collected package, the following dialog box
appears. Click the Yes button to start migration.
[Fig.8.2.-3 Migration start confirmation dialog box]

When migration is started, migration results appear according to the progress of the
processing.
[Fig.8.2.-4 Migration progress display screen]

140
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

DB Migration (database migration)

The PROTOCOL DB in the collected package is being restored. If the WORKFLOW
option is installed, WORKFLOW DB is also restored.
QC Migration (calibration file migration)
All the calibration files in the collected package are copied to the target location for
migration. If no calibration files exist, this processing is skipped.
Setting Files Migration (setting file migration)
All the setting files in the collected package are copied to the target location for migration.
Any setting files that cannot be migrated due to differences from the drive configuration of
the target PC for migration, for example, are placed on the desktop.

8. When migration is completed, click the Finish button.

To read the database again, the service tool is also terminated in conjunction.

9. Start the service tool, and check the settings dependent on the OS and the hardware.

10. Start CCS and check that it operates normally (in the same way as the source PC for
migration).

Reference
• To migrate study information and captured images, use the Image Import Export Tool. For
details of the operation method, refer to "Appendix 8. Image Import Export Tool" in Part 4.

141
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

8.2. Migration procedure (old version)

This section describes the procedure for migrating the environment without using the migration
tool.

Procedure

1. On the source PC for migration, use the DB Management Tool to back up all the databases.
For details of the operation method, refer to "2.4. DB Management Tool" in Part 5.

2. Back up various data on the source PC for migration.

Back up the following files and folders.
• Various setting files
Files in the CCS root folder that have the .xml, .ini, and .config extensions
• Captured image files
All files in the folder that is set as the CCS image storage location
The default is (CCS root folder¥dtstore).
• Calibration data
QCOutputData in the CCS root folder and all files in the SnsPBInf folder

3. On the target PC for migration, install the same versions of CCS and optional software as
those on the source for migration.

4. Copy all the data backed up in step 2 into the same folder on the target PC for migration.

5. On the target PC for migration, use the DB Management Tool to restore the databases that
were backed up in step 1.

6. On the target PC for migration, start the service tool, and check the settings dependent on
the OS and the hardware.

7. Start CCS and check that it operates normally in the same way as the source PC for
migration.

142
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

9. Antivirus Software Setting Procedure

9.1. Overview

CXDI Control Software NE V2.16 supports McAfee, ESET, and Windows Defender as antivirus
software that can coexist with CCS.
This chapter describes the notes on using antivirus software, as well as settings.

9.2. Common operation policy

9.2.1. Operating environment

By letting antivirus software coexist on the same PC, the CCS performance may decrease. To
minimize the impact on CCS, check the recommended specifications of the antivirus software to
use, and consider the PC environment.

9.2.2. Virus scans

Virus scan methods can be largely divided into the following two methods.

Scan method Overview

At the point when a file on the PC is accessed, the file is immediately

inspected to detect viruses in real time.
Real-time scan McAfee: On-access scan
ESET: Real-time inspection
Windows Defender: Real-time protection

A target for inspection is selected manually and scanned. By setting

a schedule, the scan can be automatically executed with prescribed
timing.
Manual scan McAfee: On-demand scan
ESET: Computer inspection (smart inspection, custom inspection, etc.)
Windows Defender: Scan Now (quick, full, and custom)

The execution environment of CCS is usually set in what is called shell mode, in which the
desktop of the OS is not displayed, and the end user cannot scan manually by operating the UI of
the antivirus software. As for manual scans, therefore, the end user can only use periodic scans
that are automatically executed by setting a schedule.

To prevent virus infection, install antivirus software first and then execute a full scan to check that
the current system is not infected with viruses, and ensure with a real-time scan that a secure
environment is maintained. Depending on the network connection environment and other factors,
the pattern files may not always be kept to the latest state. In that case, it may not be possible to
detect all viruses even if a real-time scan is performed. It is, therefore, recommended to make
such settings that even unknown viruses can be detected using a heuristic function.

To minimize the impact of scan processing on CCS, ensure that no scan is executed during the
operation of CCS. When executing a periodic scan, in particular, set a schedule after checking
the time period in which the user does not operate CCS.

143
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

As for a real-time scan, exclude the folder that stores image files and the folder that contains
the program from the scan. For details of the setting method, refer to the item for the antivirus
software concerned.

Depending on the license type of the antivirus software, a validity period may be set. The license
type must be decided by the person in charge of installation so that it meets the operation policy
of the hospital.

9.2.3. Updating the definition file

There are two ways to update the virus definition file: online and offline. If the execution
environment of CCS is connected to the Internet or the hospital server, the definition file can be
updated online.
If the environment is not connected to the Internet or the hospital antivirus software server, the
definition file must be updated offline.
Fig.1 Updating the definition file

9.2.3.1. Online update

If updating the definition file online, make sure that the update does not affect the operation of
CCS and that the update is not executed during the operation of CCS.
The service engineer will not cause any problems because he or she will never perform an online
update during the actual operation of CCS on site. If you automatically perform an online update,
check the time period in which the user does not operate CCS as with a periodic scan before
setting an update schedule. For information about setting an update schedule with McAfee and
ESET, refer to the manual of each software product.

144
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

9.2.3.2. Offline update

If the virus definition file cannot be acquired online, download the virus definition file to another
PC that has an Internet connection environment, copy the file to a USB memory stick or other
medium, and install the file to the execution environment of the CCS to update the existing file.
These operations require work of canceling shell mode, and must always be performed by a
service engineer. For details of how to update the virus definition file offline, refer to the manual
of the software product concerned.

9.3. McAfee

This section describes the items to be set when using McAfee.

Reference
• The description uses the screen of McAfee VirusScan Enterprise + AntiSpyware Enterprise
8.8 as an example.

9.3.1. Access protection

In installing and executing CCS, McAfee access protection must be partially disabled. This
section describes the procedure.

9.3.1.1. Setup screen

The following describes how to display the access protection setup screen.

1. In the taskbar, right-click (McAfee icon), and select [Manage Features] > [VirusScan
Enterprise].
The [VirusScan Console] screen appears.

2. Double-click [Access Protection].

The [Access Protection Properties] screen appears.

145
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

9.3.1.2. Access protection setting values

Remove the check marks next to the following items on the setup screen so that they are not
blocked.
Table 1 Settings to be disabled in access protection

Category Rule

Anti-spyware Standard
Protect Internet Explorer favorites and settings
Protection

Prevent installation of new CLSIDs, APPIDs and TYPELIBs

Anti-spyware Maximum
Protection Prevent all programs from running files from the [Temp]
folder

Prevent user rights policies from being altered

Anti-virus Standard Protection
Prevent Windows Process spoofing

Prevent svchost executing non-Windows executables

Anti-virus Maximum Protection
Prevent alteration of all file extension registrations

Make all shares read-only

Anti-virus Outbreak Control
Block read and write access to all shares

Common Standard Protection Prevent modification of McAfee files and settings

Prevent programs registering to autorun

Prevent programs registering as a service

Common Maximum Protection Prevent creation of new executable files in the Windows
folder

Prevent creation of new executable files in the Program

Files folder

146
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

9.3.2. On-access scan

The only settings necessary for an on-access scan are scan exclusion settings. This section
describes how to make exclusion settings, as well as what to exclude.

9.3.2.1. Setup screen

1. In the taskbar, right-click (McAfee icon), and select [Manage Features] > [VirusScan
Enterprise].
The [VirusScan Console] screen appears.

2. Double-click [On-Access Scanner].

The [On-Access Scan Properties] screen appears.

147
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. On the [On-Access Scan Properties] screen, select [All Processes] and select the
[Exclusions] tab.

148
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. Click the Exclusions... button.

The window for setting what to exclude appears.

5. Click the Add button, and set exclusion items.

149
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

9.3.2.2. Setting exclusions

To exclude CCS-related files from the on-access scan, add the folders indicated in Table 2 as
exclusions. For each item, place a check mark next to [Also exclude subfolders], and place a
check mark next to [On read] and [On write] under [When to exclude].
Table 2 Folders to exclude

Folder to exclude

C:\CCS-S\ or C:\CCS-D\

Image storage folder (if it has been changed from the default)

C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\

C:\Program Files (x86)\Microsoft SQL Server\

9.4. ESET

This section describes the items to be set when using ESET.

Reference
• The description uses the screen of ESET Endpoint Antivirus 6.3 as an example.

The advanced settings for ESET are in a hierarchical structure such as that shown in Fig.2. The
items on the third and subsequent layers are described in table format. The setting table contains
only the required items. Set those that are not contained as needed according to the operation
status at the installation location.
Fig.2 Advanced setup screen

150
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

9.4.1. Antivirus measures

9.4.1.1. Antivirus measures

Item Setting

BASIC

Enable detection of potentially unwanted applications ON

Enable detection of potentially unsafe applications

ON
* OFF if using a remote desktop connection

Enable detection of suspicious applications ON

Enable Anti-Stealth technology ON

EXCLUSIONS
C:¥CCS-S¥*.*
C:¥Program Files¥Microsoft SQL Server¥*.*
C:¥Program Files (x86)¥Microsoft SQL Server¥*.*
Image storage folder (if it has been changed from the default)

9.4.1.2. Startup inspection

Startup inspection may affect the startup performance of CCS. From [TOOLS] on the main setup
screen, turn [System startup file check] off to disable it. For details, refer to "9.4.4. Scheduler."

151
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

9.4.2. Updates
Make such settings to achieve operation suitable for online or offline updates. For details, refer to
the manual of ESET.

9.4.3. Tools

9.4.3.1. Tools

Item Setting

ESET LIVEGRID

Participate in ESET LiveGrid (recommended) OFF

MICROSOFT WINDOWS UPDATE

Notify about Microsoft Windows system updates No updates

MICROSOFT NAP

Enable Microsoft NAP support OFF

9.4.3.2. Presentation mode

Presentation mode is enabled if an application is executed full screen. In an environment in
which CCS is executed in shell mode, therefore, scheduled tasks cannot be executed. In a non-
offline update operation case, disable this setting.

Item Setting

Presentation mode

Enable Presentation mode when running applications in full-screen mode

OFF
automatically

152
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

9.4.4. Scheduler

Under [TOOLS] > [Scheduler] on the main screen, the following settings are registered as
defaults.
• Log maintenance
• Regular automatic update
• Automatic update after dial-up connection
• Automatic update after user logon
• Automatic startup file check (after user logon)
• Automatic startup file check (after successful update of the virus signature database)
• Automatic first scan
Except "Automatic first scan," the items may affect CCS operation, so remove the check mark
next to them. If performing a periodic update online, add a separate task and check the use
status of the end user, and set the schedule so that the update is executed in the time period in
which CCS is not operated.

9.5. Windows Defender

This section describes the settings to make to use Windows Defender. Windows Defender is
antimalware software installed as standard in Windows Vista or later. Windows 7 or earlier had
only an antispyware function. In Windows 8 or later, the function is integrated with Microsoft
Security Essentials, with the addition of functions for antivirus software such as virus detection
and rootkit detection.

Note
• Windows Defender will be automatically disabled if an antivirus software product of another
company is installed. In Windows 10, there are cases in which it will not be disabled. In such
cases, it must be enabled or disabled with the procedure below.

153
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

9.5.1. Enabling and disabling Windows Defender

In the CCS installer, Windows Defender is disabled. To use Windows Defender, you must enable
it again. The procedure for enabling and disabling Windows Defender is as described below.

1. Right-click "ConfigWinDef.bat", located in the CCS installation folder, and select [Run as
administrator].

2. A command prompt opens. To enable it, enter "1". To disable it, enter "2". Press the [Enter]
key.

* To use Windows Defender in Windows 7, select [Control Panel] > [System and Security] > [Administrative
Tools] > [Services] before step 3, open Windows Defender properties, and set the startup type to [Automatic].

3. Restart the PC to apply the settings.

Windows 8.1 or later automatically starts Windows Defender.
The registry key to be changed in "ConfigWinDef.bat" is as below (common to Windows 7,
Windows 8.1, and Windows 10).
Key: HKLM¥SOFTWARE¥Policies¥Microsoft¥Windows Defender
Item name: DisableAntiSpyware (DWORD value)
Value: 0x0000000 (enable), 0x00000001 (disable)

Reference
• Windows 7Windows Defender offers only an antispyware function. If you need a virus
detection function, you are recommended to use McAfee or ESET.

9.5.2. Settings screen

Execute [Settings] > [Update and security] on the startup menu and select [Windows
Defender], and the following screen will appear.

154
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Fig.3 Windows Defender settings screen

9.5.3. Settings
The settings to make to use the real-time protection of Windows Defender are as listed below.
Table 3 Windows Defender settings

Item Setting

Real-time protection On

Cloud-based Protection Off

Automatic sample submission Off

Folder
C:¥CCS-S or C:¥CCS-D
Exclusions C:¥Program Files¥Microsoft SQL Server
C:¥Program Files (x86)¥Microsoft SQL Server
Image storage folder (if it has been changed from the default)

Enhanced notifications Off

155
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

9.5.4. Updating the definition file

9.5.4.1 Online update

Usually, the Windows Defender definition file is updated in Windows Update. (This is also
true if an update is executed from the Windows Defender update tab.) In the CCS execution
environment, Windows Update is disabled, and the definition file cannot be updated as part of
Windows Update.
The definition file can only be updated offline. Refer to "9.5.4.2 Offline update."

9.5.4.2 Offline update

With this method, the definition file is downloaded, copied to the CCS execution environment,
and installed. This method cannot be used in shell mode, so only the service engineer can use it.

1. On a PC that can be connected to a network, display the site below.

https://www.microsoft.com/security/portal/definitions/adl.aspx

2. Download "mpam-fe.exe," the 64-bit edition definition file of Windows Defender in Windows
10 and Windows 8.1.

3. Copy the downloaded "mpam-fe.exe" to the target PC, and execute "mpam-fe.exe."

9.5.5. Scan schedule

Windows Defender scans are of three types, "quick," "full," and "custom." Each of them has
features such as the following.

A check is performed on those locations that are highly likely to be infected

Quick scan
with malicious software and unwanted software.

A check is performed on all files on the hard disks and all running
Full scan programs. A full scan may take one hour or more depending on the system
configuration.

Custom scan A check is performed only on selected locations and files.

Windows 10 (Ver1607) enables you to schedule the Windows Defender quick scan. The setting
procedure is as described below.

Reference
• In a version earlier than Ver1607, a quick scan is executed as part of automatic maintenance.
By specifying the automatic maintenance execution time, you can schedule a quick scan.

1. Right-click the Windows button, and from the menu that appears, select [Computer
Management].

156
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. From the tree on the left side, select [System Tools] > [Task Scheduler] > [Task Scheduler
Library] > [Microsoft] > [Windows] > [Windows Defender].
Fig.4 Windows Defender scheduling

3. Double-click [Windows Defender Scheduled Scan] on the task list.

4. Select the [Triggers] tab, and click the New button.

The [New Trigger] window appears. Schedule the scan by considering the time in which
CCS is not operated.
Fig.5 Trigger settings

157
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. Protocols

1. Overview of Protocol Creation

This chapter describes the following functions, which are related to creating, editing, and
managing protocols.
The term protocol refers to an exposure technique, such as chest front view and abdomen side
view. A protocol is selected by the operator to decide on image processing parameters and X-ray
exposure conditions when taking X-rays using CCS.
1. Protocol Editor
2. EX2DB
3. CCR2EX

Reference
• Examples in this chapter are based on the service tool of CCS-RF. When using CCS-NE,
refer only to the portions related to static detectors.
• The number of characters that can be input and the character types are mentioned in the
descriptions of input items. The character types are the following three.
General:
Not subject to any particular restrictions.
Numerical value:
The type such as integer and decimal is indicated together with a range.
DICOM:
Single-byte alphanumeric characters can be input. The backslash (¥) and control
characters cannot be input.
The character categories are based on the VR of DICOM, and for LT, LO, SH, ST, and
UT, characters other than single-byte alphanumeric characters can also be input.
The table below gives the meanings and definitions of the terms used in this chapter.

Term Meaning

Protocol An exposure technique.

Workspace An exposure environment.

A combination of exposure technique and exposure

Protocol workspace
environment.

Prepack protocol A set of multiple protocols with the workspace used selected.

A group of protocols used automatically when an exam is

Auto-start protocol started with no protocols specified on the CCS main unit side.
The structure is identical to that of a prepack protocol.

An Office Open Xml format Excel file (xlsx) in which the

setting items relating to protocols are contained and which
Protocol sheet
can be imported by EX2DB. Office Excel 2007 or later is
required as the environment.

158
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.1. Overview of the protocol creation tool

At present, there is no clear-cut procedure for the work of creating the protocols required for
installation. After understanding the features of the three functions described in this chapter, the
sales companies and the dealers are requested to follow their own procedure to create protocols
and introduce them on site.
1. Protocol Editor
This tool is used to create and edit protocols, create and edit workspaces, and edit image
processing parameters.
Protocol Editor starts up when [Protocol Editor] is clicked from [Utility Setting] of the
service tool. For details, refer to "2. Protocol Editor."
2. EX2DB
This function outputs the protocol database of CCS to Excel files called protocol sheets, and
inputs Excel files to the protocol database. All items that can be set from Protocol Editor
can be input to Excel files. Even after they are output from the protocol database, they can be
edited and re-imported.
EX2DB starts up when [Protocol Import and Export] is clicked from [Utility Setting] of the
service tool. For details, refer to "3. EX2DB/CCR2EX."
3. CCR2EX
This tool converts the BodyPart-related settings, which were used with the previously
available control software CCR, into protocol data, and outputs the data as Excel files so that
they can be imported by EX2DB. CCR2EX is not included in the installation software, and
must be downloaded from the CXDI website. For details of CCR2EX, refer to "3. EX2DB/
CCR2EX."

Reference
• In CCS V2.0 or later, Protocol Convert Tool and Protocol Import Tool are integrated into
EX2DB. EX2DB is a tool supplied with CCS V1.3 or later, so if protocols are to be imported
from CCS V1.3 or earlier to CCS V2.0 or later, upgrade the import source CCS and use
EX2DB. For details, refer to "3. EX2DB/CCR2EX."

159
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2. Relationship between protocol and workspace

The relationship between protocol and workspace is shown in the outline below.

• A protocol is a unit in which to perform the imaging of a single body part.

• In a workspace, the detector used for imaging and the detector usage type (patient posture)
used during imaging are set.
• A protocol can have multiple workspaces, and must have at least one workspace.
• One of the workspaces that a protocol has must be set as its default workspace.
• The parameters under a workspace are to be set for each protocol workspace. They become
valid when the workspace is selected during imaging.
• For details of each parameter, refer to the relevant description on the subsequent pages.

160
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.3. Exposure modes and exposure types

The term exposure mode refers to a type of imaging in a single exposure unit including not only
the method for acquiring images with a detector but also the control over equipment such as a
generator and a stand. An exposure mode is set for a protocol workspace.
An exposure type is a combination of exposure modes executable with a protocol.
The exposure mode and the exposure type that are to be set for a protocol workspace are
determined with the modality of the DICOM attributes that are set for the protocol and the
detector group settings that are made for the workspace. More specifically, they are determined
with the relationships given in the two tables below.

Modality Detector Group Exposure type that can be set

Static
Static detector
Stitch

DX Static

Detector that supports dynamic images Positioning Fluoro

Stitch

Static detector Static

Static

RF Positioning Fluoro
Detector that supports dynamic images
RF

Tomosynthesis

XA Detector that supports dynamic images Angio

Exposure type Exposure mode that can be executed

Static Radiography

Positioning Fluoro Radiography Fluoro (images not to be saved)

RF Radiography Fluoro Cine

Stitch Radiography Stitch (image stitching only)

Tomosynthesis Fluoro Cine Tomosynthesis

Angio RoadMap/Fluoro DSA/DA

* For CCS-NE, the exposure type is fixed to Static or Stitch and the exposure mode is fixed to Radiography or Stitch
because only a combination of static sensor and DX as modality is supported.

161
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Protocol Editor

2.1. Overview of Protocol Editor

Protocol Editor is used to manage the exposure techniques (protocols) used with CCS. It
enables you to manage and adjust the various parameters associated with protocols, such as
X-ray exposure conditions, DICOM attributes, and image processing conditions. Select created
protocols from the protocol selection screen of CCS when taking X-rays.
CCS protocol selection screen

162
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2. Functional overview of Protocol Editor

The Protocol Editor functions are divided into five categories.

Category Functional overview

Protocol management Adding, editing, and deleting protocols

Prepack protocol management Adding, editing, and deleting prepack protocols

Workspace management Adding, editing, and deleting workspaces

View management Editing various types of parameters at once

Protocol button management Placing protocol buttons and editing tray information

2.3. Basic screen configuration of Protocol Editor

The GUI of Protocol Editor consists of three areas, Tree view, List view, and Property view. In
the Tree view, the five categories (Protocol, Pre-packed Protocol, Workspace, View, and Button
Layout) are displayed. In the List view, the items displayed in the Tree view are listed. In the
Property view, the detailed parameters for the item selected from the List view are displayed.
[Protocol Editor] screen

163
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Note
• If you click the Cancel button on the [Protocol Editor] screen, any changes made are
discarded, and the screen returns to the status before the changes.
• The operations below are, however, reflected immediately after performed. Clicking the
Cancel button does not undo the operations.
»» Adding and deleting protocols
»» Adding and deleting prepack protocols
»» Adding and deleting workspaces
• By creating backups with the database management tool before editing with Protocol Editor,
you can restore the data to the state that existed at the time of the backups.

2.4. Protocol hierarchy

In the Protocol hierarchy in the Tree view, you can reference registered protocols, add and delete
protocols, change the parameters that protocols have, and add workspaces to protocols.

2.4.1. Description of the screen

2.4.1.1. When a protocol is selected from the Tree view

• List view
A list of protocols is displayed here.
• Property view
Property tab:
The parameters to set for the protocol selected from the Tree view are displayed here.

164
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Dependency tab:
The parameters for the prepack protocol that has, as an element, the protocol selected
from the Tree view are displayed here.

2.4.1.2. When a workspace is selected from the Tree view

• List view
All the workspaces that are possessed by the higher-order protocol of the workspace
selected from the Tree view are displayed here.
• Property view
Property tab:
Some of the parameters that are set for the protocol workspace consisting of the
workspace selected from the Tree view and its higher-order protocol are displayed here.
Grid condition tab:
The parameters of the grid that are set for the protocol workspace consisting of the
workspace selected from the Tree view and its higher-order protocol are displayed here.
Storage crop tab:
The parameters relating to the storage crop that are set for the protocol workspace
consisting of the workspace selected from the Tree view and its higher-order protocol are
displayed here for each Exposure mode tab. They are not displayed if the exposure type
of the protocol is Stitch.
Film crop tab:
The parameters relating to the film crop that are set for the protocol workspace consisting
of the workspace selected from the Tree view and its higher-order protocol are displayed
here for each Exposure mode tab.
Mask tab:
The parameters relating to the mask that are set for the protocol workspace consisting
of the workspace selected from the Tree view and its higher-order protocol are displayed
here for each Exposure mode tab. They are not displayed if the exposure type of the
protocol is Angio or Stitch.
Dependency tab:
The parameters relating to the prepack protocol that has, as an element, the protocol
workspace consisting of the workspace selected from the Tree view and its higher-order
protocol are displayed here.

165
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Workspace tab:
The parameters possessed by the workspace selected from the Tree view are displayed
here.
Candidate replacement protocols tab:
The candidate replacement protocols that are set for the protocol workspace consisting
of the workspace selected from the Tree view and its higher-order protocol are displayed
here.

2.4.1.3. When an exposure mode is selected from the Tree view

• List view
All the exposure modes that are set for the protocol workspace consisting of the higher-order
workspace of the exposure mode selected from the Tree view and its higher-order protocol
are displayed here.
• Property view
IP Parameter tab:
The image processing parameters that are set for the protocol workspace consisting of
the higher-order workspace of the exposure mode selected from the Tree view and its
higher-order protocol are displayed here.
➡➡For details of the image processing parameters, refer to "2.9. Image processing
parameter list."
X-ray Parameter tab:
The settings related to long exposure and X-ray generator communication are displayed
here.
➡➡For details, refer to "2.4.6.8. Changing the parameters on the X-ray Parameter tab."

2.4.2. Creating protocols

Note
• Creating a protocol requires a workspace. If no workspace is available, refer to "2.6.
Workspace hierarchy."
• Up to 20000 protocols can be registered.

1. With Protocol selected from the Tree view, click the Add button in the List view.
The wizard appears.

166
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Enter parameters.
Enter the parameters below by following the wizard, which consists of four steps.
Wizard screen 1/4: Entering protocol attribute information

If [Modality] is set to [RF] If [Modality] is set to [DX]

Property
Protocol name
Set a protocol name.
Character type: DICOM
Number of characters: 64
Comment
Character type: General
Number of characters: 128
Mark Placement
L:
When you place a check mark next to it, the L mark is automatically placed at the
position specified for [Preset position] on the captured image.
R:
When you place a check mark next to it, the R mark is automatically placed at the
position specified for [Preset position] on the captured image.
Mark Inter lock:
When you place a check mark next to it, the L and/or R mark placed on the captured
image are associated with DICOM output information.
Depending on the [Modality] setting for [DICOM Attribute], the specifications differ
as below.
If [Modality] is set to [XA], this item is hidden.

167
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• If set to [DX]
The mark is associated with the DICOM Laterality attribute (0020, 0062).
• If the L mark is placed, an L is stored in (0020, 0062).
• If the R mark is placed, an R is stored in (0020, 0062).
• If the L and R marks are placed, a B is stored in (0020, 0062). (B stands for
Both.)
• If neither L nor R mark is placed, a U is stored in (0020, 0062). (U stands for
Unpaired.)
• If set to [RF]
The mark is associated with the DICOM Laterality attribute (0020, 0060).
• If the L mark is placed, an L is stored in (0020, 0060).
• If the R mark is placed, an R is stored in (0020, 0060).
• If the L and R marks are placed, blank is stored in (0020, 0060).
• If neither L nor R mark is placed, blank is stored in (0020, 0060).
DICOM Attribute
Modality:
Select from DX, RF, and XA (default: DX).
Body part:
Select from the selection field (default: de-selected).
Patient orientation:
Select from the selection field (default: DX: L¥F, RF: de-selected).
Laterality:
Select from the selection field (default: L).
Hidden if [Mark Inter lock] is selected from [Mark Placement] in wizard screen 1/4.
If [Modality] is set to [XA], this item is hidden.
View Position:
Select from the selection field (displayed only if [Modality] is set to [DX]).
Series description:
Character type: DICOM
Number of characters: 64
Depending on the [Modality] setting, the protocol icons displayed on the GUI of CCS differ
as shown below.

⇐ Protocol for which [Modality] is set to [RF]

⇐ Protocol for which [Modality] is set to [DX]

168
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• [Body part] is equivalent to DICOM Body Part Examined (0018, 0015).
• For details of the recommended relationships between [Body part] and image
processing parameters for radiographic images, refer to the table in "2.10. DICOM body
parts and recommended image processing categories."

Wizard screen 2/4: Entering workspace information

Default workspace
Select the workspace to use as the default workspace.
Workspace information
The information about the workspace selected for [Default workspace] is displayed here.
(Read-only)
Position type:
The position type of the selected workspace is displayed here.
Detector group:
The detector group associated with the selected workspace is displayed here.

Note
• If the detector next to which you placed a check mark in the Detector pane is not
displayed, close the wizard, select the Workspace hierarchy from the Tree view, and set
the detector for the Default workspace from the [Property] tab in the Property view. If
the [PowerBox] tab exists at this time, make the power box settings as well.

169
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Source image receptor distance (SID)

Character type:
Numerical value
Range:
Integers from 1 to 9999 or blank
Enter the distance between the X-ray tube and the detector.
Source object distance (SOD)
Character type:
Numerical value
Range:
Integers from 1 to 9999 or blank
Enter the distance between the X-ray tube and the patient.
Exposure type
The executable exposure modes differ depending on the exposure type setting. Set
[Exposure type] appropriately according to the installation environment.
For CCS-NE, [Static] or [Stitch] can be set as the exposure type.

Exposure type Exposure mode

Static Radiography

Fluoro
Positioning Fluoro
Radiography

Cine (digital-cine)
Fluoro
RF
Radiography
Tomosynthesis

Radiography
Stitch
Stitch (stitching of captured images)

XA Angio (angiography)

Depending on the exposure type setting, the protocol icons displayed on the GUI of CCS
differ as shown below.

Protocol for which [Exposure type] is set to

⇐
[Stitch]

170
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Protocol for which [Exposure type] is set to

⇐
[Positioning Fluoro]

Grid detectability type

The grid detection type according to the detector is displayed here.
Existence or nonexistence:
Detects whether the grid is installed or not.
Grid ID:
Detects the grid ID.
Embedded Grid:
Indicates that the grid is an embedded one, but does not detect the grid.
Undetectable:
Does not detect the grid.
Grid ID
Select the ID of the grid used. If a setting other than None is selected here, [Grid
information] below appears. If the setting differs from the grid detection results, a warning
appears. This is not displayed when [Grid detectability type] is set to [Embedded Grid].
Grid information
Information about the grid that is set is displayed here.
Grid name:
Name of the selected grid.
Grid frequency:
Grid frequency (lines/mm) of the selected grid.
Grid quality:
The effectiveness of grid line suppression is adjusted here. The setting is fixed to "3".

171
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Wizard screen 3/4: Setting of image processing parameters

If [Exposure type] ≠ [Stitch] If [Exposure type] = [Stitch]

Number of images
Specify the number of images to capture during stitch imaging.
This input item is displayed only if [Stitch] is selected for [Exposure type].
Target exposure index (EIt)
Character type:
Numerical value
Range:
Integers from 1 to 10000 or blank
This is the target value of EI, which is an index indicating the dose attained by the
detector.
It is hidden if the exposure mode is Angio or Tomosynthesis.
This value should be set for each site, and the user should be responsible for its
setting.
Set an appropriate EIt value while referencing past images and EI. It is necessary to
set the lowest possible value at which image diagnosis is possible to minimize the
X-ray exposure of the patient.
Image processing condition
Select the body part to image and the orientation.
Determine the image processing algorithm to apply to captured images.
The body part name displayed in bold is the value recommended for the body part
selected from wizard screen 1/4.

Reference
• For details of the body parts recommended for the selected body part, refer to "2.10.
DICOM body parts and recommended image processing categories."

172
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Direction
Select the imaging direction.
Determine the image processing algorithm to apply to captured images.
Select from Other, Front, and Lateral. (Default: Other)
Wizard screen 4/4: Checking the information input to the wizard

On the last screen of the wizard, check the settings, and click the Finish button. The created
protocol appears in the Protocol hierarchy in the Tree view.

Reference
• You can set and change some of the parameters of the created protocol workspace. For
details, refer to "2.4.6. Changing the parameters relating to a protocol workspace."

2.4.3. Deleting and copying protocols

With a protocol selected from the Tree view, click the Delete or Copy button in the List view.
Copying protocols
A protocol generated by copying is added at the lowermost part of the list.
A protocol generated by copying has the same settings as those of the source protocol,
except the Code value setting.
A protocol generated by copying has its name automatically set.
Example) If the source protocol name is TEST_PROTOCOL
⇒ TEST_PROTOCOL Copy2

173
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

If a protocol is copied in either of the following cases, the Protocol Name dialog box appears,
and you must set a protocol name manually.
• The number part at the end of the source protocol name is greater than 999999999.
• The number of characters in the new protocol name will be greater than 64.

Reference
• If you select more than one protocol from the List view, you cannot click the Delete or Copy
button.
• The deletion and copying are reflected immediately after performed. Clicking the Cancel
button does not undo them.

2.4.4. Adding a workspace to a protocol

1. From the Tree view, select the workspace possessed by the protocol to which you want to
add a workspace, and click the Add button.
The [Add workspace] screen is displayed.
2. From the Workspace name list, select the workspace you want to add to the protocol.
3. Set the parameters for the protocol workspace.
4. Click the OK button.
The workspace is added.

Workspace name
Select the workspace to add.

174
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Workspace information (read-only)

The information about the workspace selected for Workspace name is displayed here.
Position type:
The position type of the selected workspace is displayed here.
Detector group:
The detector group associated with the selected workspace is displayed here.
Detector:
The detector associated with the selected workspace is displayed here.
Code value
Character type:
DICOM
Number of characters:
64 (per code value)
Up to 50 of them can be registered, each separated by a comma.
Each code value must be unique in not only this workspace but also other protocol
workspaces.
Code meaning
Character type:
DICOM
Number of characters:
64
If you set multiple code values, the code meaning applies to all the code values.
Default workspace
To set the workspace to add as the default workspace of the protocol, place a check mark
next to it.
Other parameters
For details of other parameters, refer to "2.4.2. Creating protocols" and "2.4.6. Changing
the parameters relating to a protocol workspace."

2.4.5. Deleting a workspace from a protocol

1. From the Tree view, select the workspace you want to delete, and click the Delete button.
2. Click the Yes button when the following message appears: [Do you want to remove this
workspace? All buttons associated to this workspacesetting will be removed].

Reference
• If the selected workspace is the default, the default workspace selection dialog box appears.
• The deletion and copying are reflected immediately after performed. Clicking the Cancel
button does not undo them.

175
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.4.6. Changing the parameters relating to a protocol workspace

2.4.6.1. Changing the parameters on the Property tab

1. From the Tree view, select a workspace, and in the Property view, click the [Property] tab.
The [Property] tab appears.
2. Change parameters.
Change any of the parameters that can be changed, which are enclosed in red frames.
3. Click the Apply button.
The parameter changes are saved.
[Property tab (Exposure type = RF)]

176
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

[Property tab (Exposure type = Stitch)]

• Default workspace
To set the workspace as the default workspace, place a check mark next to it.
When you set the workspace as the default workspace, the workspace is displayed as
the default when you place a check mark next to Select by Workspace on the body part
search screen on the Protocol Editor screen of CCS.
This can be changed if multiple workspaces are displayed in the List view.
• Code value / Code meaning
Set and edit code values and code meanings.
Each code value must be unique in all protocols.
Up to 50 of them can be registered.
• Custom Field Preset
Make a selection for the custom field function, which is used to add any character string
for each image.
To use the system common settings, select [System setting]. To use the custom fields
inherent to the protocol workspace, select [Customized setting], and select a character
string from the selector.

Reference
• Make the system common custom field settings from the service tool [Menu
selection] > [System Setting] > [Application Setting] > [Select list] > [Description
List].

• Auto Play Setting

This can be set only for those protocols for which [Exposure type] is set to one of [RF],
[Positioning Fluoro], [Angio], and [Tomosynthesis].
It can be set for each Exposure mode tab.
System setting:
Use the system common settings.

177
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Customized setting:
Use the Auto Play Setting settings inherent to the protocol workspace.
The selectable items are as described below.
No show:
After dynamic image capturing is stopped, images are not displayed.
LIH:
After dynamic image capturing is stopped, LIH (last frame) is displayed.
Auto Play:
After dynamic image capturing is stopped, dynamic images are automatically played
repeatedly.

Reference
• Make the system common [Auto Play Setting] settings from the service tool [Menu
selection] > [System Setting] > [Application Setting] > [Dynamic image] >
[Display setting].

• Use Free Rotation Function in Stitch window

This can be set and changed only for those protocols for which [Exposure type] is set to
[Stitch].
When you place a check mark next to it, free rotation can be used for source images
inside the stitch window with CCS.
For details of other parameters, refer to "2.4.2. Creating protocols" and "2.4.4. Adding a
workspace to a protocol."

2.4.6.2. Changing the parameters on the Grid condition tab

1. From the Tree view, select a workspace, and in the Property view, click the [Grid condition]
tab.
The [Grid condition] tab appears.
2. Change parameters.
Change any of the parameters that can be changed, which are enclosed in red frames.

178
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. Click the Apply button.

The parameter changes are saved.

• Grid ID
Change the setting of the grid used.
You can select a registered grid ID.
• Grid information (read-only)
Information about the selected grid is displayed here.

Reference
• Set the grid from [Grid] of the service tool.

2.4.6.3. Changing the parameters on the Storage crop tab

1. From the Tree view, select a workspace, and in the Property view, click the [Storage crop]
tab.
The [Storage crop] tab appears.
2. Change parameters.
Change any of the parameters that can be changed, which are enclosed in red frames.

179
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. Click the Apply button.

The parameter changes are saved.

You can select which setting to use for each Exposure mode tab.
• Workspace setting
Use the workspace common settings.
• Customized setting
Use the Storage Crop settings inherent to the protocol workspace.

Reference
• This is not displayed if [Exposure type] is set to [Stitch].
To change the workspace common settings, select a workspace from the Workspace
hierarchy, and make settings on the [Storage crop] tab in the Property view.
• For a description of the [Customized setting] setting items, refer to "2.6.3. Setting
Storage Crop common to a workspace."

2.4.6.4. Changing the parameters on the Film crop tab

1. From the Tree view, select a workspace, and in the Property view, click the [Film crop] tab.
The [Film crop] tab appears.
2. Change parameters.
Change any of the parameters that can be changed, which are enclosed in red frames.

180
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. Click the Apply button.

The parameter changes are saved.

You can select which setting to use for each Exposure mode tab.
• Film crop type
Specify the area within the Crop area that is to be printed if the Crop area is larger than
the Film size when the film is to be printed.
This setting can be made only when the [Radiography] tab is selected.
Top aligned:
The film is placed in the top part of the Crop area before printing.
Center aligned:
The film is placed in the center part of the Crop area before printing.
Bottom aligned:
The film is placed in the bottom part of the Crop area before printing.

181
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• The orange lines indicate the area to be printed, and are not actually shown on the
display.
• For [Top aligned] and [Bottom aligned], the area to be printed is aligned with the
external edge of the Crop area.

• Setting
Select which setting to use for each Exposure mode tab.
System setting:
Use the system common settings.
Customized setting:
Use the Film Crop settings inherent to the protocol workspace.
Film:
Film size and printing direction
Image zoom mode:
Image reduction method
Fit ⇒ Adjustment is made so that the Crop area fits the Film.
Fix Ratio ⇒ The Crop area is reduced at any magnification.
Layout:
Film selection method
Auto ⇒ The Film template is selected automatically in line with the Crop area,
and the Crop area is laid out and printed.
Fixed ⇒ The Crop area is laid out and printed on the specified Film template.

Reference
• To change the system common settings, make settings from the service tool [Menu
selection] > [DICOM Setting] > [Printer] > [Film Output Setting] > [Exposure
mode output setting].
• To edit the layout, make settings from CCS [System Settings] > [Connection
Settings] > [Printer] > [Layout Template].

2.4.6.5. Changing the parameters on the Mask tab

1. From the Tree view, select a workspace, and in the Property view, click the [Mask] tab.
The [Mask] tab appears.
2. Change parameters.
Change any of the parameters that can be changed, which are enclosed in red frames.

182
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. Click the Apply button.

The parameter changes are saved.

You can select which setting to use for each Exposure mode tab.
• Type:
Specify the shape of the mask.
You can select between Exposed area and Circle.
Default: Exposed area
• Mask Size (The diameter of a circle):
Specify the mask size.
You can make the setting only when Type is Circle.
For the unit, you can select between mm and inch. (Default: mm)
The range of mask sizes that can be entered can be calculated from the following formula.

Minimum Maximum

64*Detector pixel pitch/1000

mm 999
Rounded to the nearest whole number.

64*Detector pixel pitch/1000/25.4

inch 99.99
Rounded off to two decimal places.

Reference
• This is not displayed when [Exposure type] is set to [Angio] or [Stitch].

183
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.4.6.6. Changing the parameters on the Candidate replacement protocols tab

1. In the Tree view, select a workspace, and in the Property view, click the [Candidate
replacement protocols] tab.
The [Candidate replacement protocols] tab appears.
2. Change parameters.
Change any of the parameters that can be changed, which are enclosed in red frames.
3. Click the Apply button.
The parameter changes are saved.

• Edit:
The candidate replacement protocols edit window appears. Edit the candidate
replacement protocols.
For details, refer to "Candidate replacement protocols edit window" below.
• Short cut:
From the candidate replacement protocols that have been set from Edit, set the protocol
for which to register a short cut.
For the protocol for which a short cut is registered, protocol replacement is performed
instantly without changing to the protocol replacement screen in CCS.
You can register only one short cut.

184
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Candidate replacement protocols edit window

This window is displayed by clicking the Edit button on the [Candidate replacement
protocols] tab.

• From the protocol list on the left-hand side of the screen, drag and drop a candidate
replacement to add it to the layout.
• Only radiographic image protocols are displayed on the list.
• From the text box at the upper part of the screen, you can search for a protocol name.
• For deletion from the layout, double-click the object to delete or press the Delete key with
the object selected.
• You cannot select protocols that are already placed.

185
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.4.6.7. Changing the contents of the IP Parameter tab

1. Select Exposure mode, displayed in the Tree view, and in the Property view, click the [IP
Parameter] tab.
In the Property view, the [IP Parameter] tab appears.

2. Change image processing parameters.

If the settings displayed in the Detail IP parameter pane are character strings or numerical
values, you can bring the cursor to the character string or numerical value you want to
change, double-click it, and change the setting. For details of image processing parameters,
refer to "2.9. Image processing parameter list."
3. Check the changes, and click the Apply button.
The parameters are changed.

186
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• In the Detail IP parameter pane, preset image processing parameters are displayed by
default, according to the Category, Anatomical Part, and Direction combination displayed
in the Anatomical Part select pane.
• To return the image processing parameters to the preset values or to change the
Category, Anatomical Part, and Direction combination, click the Reset button.
• If Exposure mode is Tomosynthesis, only the Detail IP parameter pane is displayed.
• You can edit the Target exposure index (EIt) only if Exposure mode is Radiography.

Method for making settings in the exposure field recognition algorithm for circular
exposure
Under the [Analysis] item, set [Exposure Area Analysis] to -4 or -5.
-4: Circular exposure field recognition
Recognize an exposure field using a cylindrical aperture (circular exposure field).

-5: Circular fixed area

Recognize a fixed circular area as the exposure field.

• The default of [Exposure Area Analysis] is 0. For details, refer to Service Information
MBGN-135D28.
• For details of presetting the mask type for each protocol workspace, refer to "V2.12 New
Function s12041."
• For details of circular masks, refer to "V2.12 New Function s12040."
2.4.6.8 Changing the parameters on the X-ray Parameter tab
1. Select Exposure mode, displayed in the Tree view, and in the Property view, click the [X-ray
Parameter] tab.
In the Property view, the [X-ray Parameter] tab appears.
2. On the X-ray exposure parameter edit GUI, change parameters, and click the Set button.
The changes appear in [APR-ID].
3. Check the changes, and click the Apply button.
The parameter changes are saved.

Reference
• Basically, the X-ray exposure parameter edit GUI is created by SI vendors in accordance
with the environment in which CCS is used, so no detailed GUI specifications are defined
here.
• This is not displayed when Exposure mode is Stitch or Tomosynthesis.

187
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Screen displayed when Radiography is selected

Descriptions of the method for displaying the X-ray exposure parameter edit GUI and of
parameters, such as the ones shown on the following two screens, are provided in the X-ray
generator communication (CXDI-GC) service manual.
[X-ray Parameter tab (Exposure type = RF)]

[X-ray Parameter tab (Exposure type = Stitch)]

188
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• Static drive mode

By making the radiographic image drive equivalent to dynamic image drive while the
detector that supports dynamic images is taking dynamic images, the time required to
change from radiographic imaging to fluoroscopy is reduced.
Fast:
400 msec accumulation mode
Ultrafast:
200 msec accumulation mode
You can set and change it if the following conditions are met.
• The detector used in the workspace supports dynamic images.
• For the detector used in the workspace, StaticDriveModeSelectable is on.
• Protocol for which [Exposure type] is [Stitch], [Positioning Fluoro], or [RF].
• [Radiography] is selected from Exposure mode.
• Long exposure
Set the maximum exposure time.
If a check mark is placed:
Long exposure with an exposure time of up to 3000 msec
If a check mark is removed:
Normal exposure with an exposure time of up to 1000 msec
You can set and change it if the following conditions are met.
• The detector used in the workspace supports long exposure.
• Protocol for which [Exposure type] is [Static] or [Stitch].
• [Radiography] is selected from Exposure mode.
Screen displayed when Fluoro is selected

189
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• Imaging Area
This area is used for detector imaging.
• Binning Size
This function reads all the charges collected from the neighboring photo-detectors
together.
For 2 x 2 binning, the charges of four photo-detectors are brought together and treated as
a single pixel. As compared with 1 x 1 binning, the images appear rougher but the data
volume is reduced to one-fourth.
When you select [AUTO], displayed as a selection option when you select [Cine] for
Exposure mode, the Binning Size is determined from the Imaging Area and fps values.
• Frame Rate
This is the number of times the screen is rewritten per unit time.
If the frame rate is 30 fps, the screen is rewritten 30 times a second. The higher this
value, the smoother the screen display.
• ADC ROI
This is a specific area used to calculate the average dose of the X-rays to which the
detector is exposed.
ADC (Auto Dose Control) performs feedback control in such a way that the average X-ray
dose to which ADC-ROI is exposed is kept at the target value.
When you select Auto, the specified ADC-ROI size, which corresponds to the Imaging
Area size, is set as shown below. For details of ADC, refer to the Service Manual of the
50RF.

Imaging Area size ADC-ROI size to be set with Auto

14 inches x 17 inches 6 inches x 6 inches

14 inches x 14 inches 6 inches x 6 inches

12 inches x 12 inches 6 inches x 6 inches

9 inches x 9 inches 4 inches x 4 inches

• Dose Mode
This table is used to calculate the feedback voltage Vf of ADC.
The X-ray dose can be controlled with the setting of Dose Mode. When Low-Low is
specified, for example, the X-ray dose to which the detector is exposed will be reduced.

190
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Screen displayed when Cine is selected

• Limit of frames
Set the limit on the number of images captured during digital-cine imaging.
System setting
Use the system common settings.
User setting
Use an inherent value for the protocol workspace that has the selected Exposure
mode.

Reference
• You can check the system common Limit of frames setting from the service tool [Menu
selection] > [System Setting] > [Application Setting] > [HDD/Memory] > [Memory
Setting] > [Digital-cine frame number].
• [Imaging Area], [Binning Size], [Frame Rate], [ADC ROI], and [Dose Mode] are the
same as those that are displayed when you select Fluoro.

191
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.4.7. AEC protocols

The AEC protocols, which are used in AEC adjustments during detector installation, are
displayed at the bottom of the Protocol hierarchy in the Tree view. The AEC protocols are created
automatically when workspaces are created, and deleted automatically when workspaces are
deleted.

2.5. Pre-packed Protocol hierarchy

In the Pre-packed Protocol hierarchy in the Tree view, you can reference registered prepack
protocols, add and delete prepack protocols, and change the parameters that prepack protocols
have. In a prepack protocol, up to 30 protocols can be listed together.

2.5.1. Description of the screen

When you select Pre-packed Protocol in the Tree view, a list of prepack protocols appears in the
List view. In the Property view, the [Property] tab of the prepack protocol selected from the List
view appears.

2.5.2. Creating prepack protocols

1. With Pre-packed Protocol selected from the Tree view, click the Add button in the List view.
The [New prepacked protocol] screen appears.
2. Enter the setting items.
• Protocol name
Character type: DICOM
Number of characters: 64

192
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• Code value
Character type: DICOM
Number of characters: 64 (per code value)
Up to 50 of them can be registered, each separated by a comma.
Each code value must be unique in not only this prepack protocol but also other
protocol workspaces.
• Comment
Character type: General
Number of characters: 128
• Registered protocol selector
Select the protocols to prepack, and click the Add button.
• Prepacked protocol list
To change the position of a protocol to prepack in the sequence, select the protocol,
and click the Up button or the Down button.
To remove a protocol from the protocols to prepack, select the protocol, and click the
Remove button.

3. Click the OK button.

The entries are reflected.

Reference
• Up to 50000 prepack protocols can be registered.

193
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.5.3. Changing and deleting prepack protocols

1. From the Tree view or the List view, select a prepack protocol.
2. To delete it, click the Delete button in the List view.
To change it, change the parameters.
Change the parameters displayed on the [Property] tab in the Property view.
3. Click the Apply button.
The changes are reflected.

Reference
• The deletion is reflected immediately after performed. Clicking the Cancel button does not
undo the deletion.

2.5.4. Setting auto-start protocols

Provided that protocols are set as auto-start protocols, if the orders received in cases where
medical examination automatic packs, RIS, Studix, or magnetic cards are used do not include
protocols or if orders are created manually, those auto-start protocols can be allocated
automatically to such orders and the examinations can be started. The upper limit on the number
of such protocols is 30.
1. From the Tree view, select [Auto-start Protocol].
On the [Property] tab in the Property view, the Auto-start protocol edit screen appears.

Reference
• For the auto-start protocols to take effect, select the service tool [Menu selection] > [System
Setting] > [Application Setting] > [Protocol], and set [Automatically apply protocol] to
ON.
• An auto-start protocol is virtually the same as a prepack protocol in structure, but it differs in
the following points.
»» Code values cannot be specified.
»» Protocol names cannot be specified.
»» Permitted even if any associated protocols are not available.

2.6. Workspace hierarchy

In the Workspace hierarchy in the Tree view, you can reference registered workspaces, add and
delete workspaces, and change the parameters that workspaces have.

194
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.6.1. Description of the screen

When you select Workspace from the Tree view, a list of workspaces appears in the List view. In
the Property view, the [Property] tab and the [Storage crop] tab of the workspace selected from
the List view appear, and the [PowerBox] tab appears according to the detector group of the
workspace.

2.6.2. Creating workspaces

Before creating a workspace, register the detectors to connect to the workspace from [Sensor]
of the service tool.
Up to 20 workspaces can be registered.
1. With Workspace selected from the Tree view, click the Add button in the List view.
The [New workspace] screen appears.

2. Enter the setting items.

• Workspace name
Set a workspace name.
Character type: General
Number of characters: 64

195
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• Position type
Set a detector usage type (patient posture).
You can select from Cassette, Stand, Table, and Universal.
• Detector group
Set the type of the detector to connect to the workspace.
• Detector
Set the detector to use for imaging.
A list of registered detectors is displayed here.
You can select a detector that matches in detector group.
• PowerBox
This is displayed only if a detector group or a detector for which a power box can be set is
selected.
You can select a registered power box.
• PowerBox information (read-only)
Information about the selected power box is displayed here.
3. Click the OK button.
A workspace is created.
4. On the [Auto Append Workspace] screen, select whether to add the workspace to
protocols.

If you select (1)

The created workspace is added to all the protocols that have the workspace selected
from the list.
If you select (2)
The created workspace is simply registered, and not added to any protocols.
5. Click the OK button.
The selection is reflected.

Note
• If you start up CCS when a workspace exists in which no detectors or power boxes are
registered, a warning screen appears and CCS automatically shuts down.

196
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• If you select (1) in step 4 (existing workspace settings are used to make associations with
the protocol), the newly created workspace settings, image processing parameters, and
X-ray exposure parameters are as follows.
»» Exposure type

Existing workspace setting Workspace to be added New workspace setting

Exposure type Static/dynamic detector Exposure type

Static
Static Static
Dynamic

Static
Stitch Stitch
Dynamic

Static Static
Positioning Fluoro
Dynamic Positioning Fluoro

No associations made with

Static
RF protocols

Dynamic RF

No associations made with

Static
Angio protocols

Dynamic Angio

No associations made with

Static
Tomosynthesis protocols

Dynamic Tomosynthesis

»» Default Workspace
For a workspace under creation, Default Workspace is set to OFF.

197
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
»» GridID
The GridID that is set for the existing workspace setting is carried over to the new
workspace setting.
As an exception, if the Grid detectability type of the existing workspace setting is
Embedded grid and the Grid detectability type of the detector associated with the
workspace under creation is not Embedded grid, the grid ID is None.
The details of the Grid detectability type can be checked from Grid Type in
DetectorCatalog.
GridType = 0 in DetectorCatalog > Grid detectability type = Grid ID

Grid detectability type = Existence or

GridType = 1 in DetectorCatalog >
nonexistence

GridType = 2 in DetectorCatalog > Grid detectability type = Embedded Grid

GridType = 3 in DetectorCatalog > Grid detectability type = Undetectable

»» Settings on the Storage crop tab

They are the workspace common settings, and the setting items for Customized setting
are reset to the default values.
»» Image processing parameters that are set for Exposure type
The image processing parameters that are set as existing workspace settings are copied
to the new workspace settings.
»» Long exposure settings

Existing workspace setting Workspace to be added New workspace setting

Whether the detector

Long exposure setting Long exposure setting
supports long exposure

Yes
1000 1000
No

Yes 3000
3000
No 1000

You can determine whether the detector supports long exposure by checking if Long
Radiography is 0 (not support) or 1 (support), which can be accessed by selecting the
service tool [X-ray Generator and Sensor] > [Sensor] > [Detector Catalog] tab. (At
present, only the CXDI-60 series detectors do not support it.)
Other settings are copied from the existing workspace settings.

2.6.3. Setting Storage Crop common to a workspace

When you create a workspace, the Storage Crop common to the entire workspace is created at
the same time, and you can change its default values.
1. From the Tree view or the List view, select a workspace.
In the Property view, the [Storage crop] tab appears.

198
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Change the settings for each Exposure mode.

Change the settings on the tab for each Exposure mode under the [Storage crop] tab.
When you select the [Radiography] tab
• Initial position after exposure
Set the crop area for the image immediately after it is captured.
All area:
The crop frame is made as large as the entire image.
Exposed area:
The crop frame is set to a rectangle with the smallest area that circumscribes the
exposure field area.
Fixed Size:
The crop frame is set to any user area specified below.

Reference
• The broken lines indicate the exposure field area, and are not actually shown on the
display.
• The green crop area can be modified on the examination screen.

• Fixed crop base

Specify the fixed crop base area for placing the fixed crop frame.
Exposed area:
The fixed crop base area is set to a rectangle with the smallest area that circumscribes
the exposure field area.
All area:
The fixed crop base area is extended to cover the entire image.
• Alignment
Specify the position at which to place the fixed crop frame with respect to the fixed crop
base area.
Top aligned:
The top edge of the fixed crop frame is aligned with the top edge of the fixed crop
base area.

199
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Middle aligned:
The center of the fixed crop frame is aligned with the center of the fixed crop base
area.
Bottom aligned:
The bottom edge of the fixed crop frame is aligned with the bottom edge of the fixed
crop base area.
• Fixed Size (Width, Height)
Specify the size of the fixed crop frame.
You can specify each of Width and Height.
They can be specified in millimeters, inches, and pixels.

Reference
• Fixed crop base, Alignment, and Fixed Size (Width, Height) are used when Initial
position after exposure is set to Fixed Size or when the fixed crop button ( ) is
clicked on the examination screen or past image display screen of CSS.
• Fixed crop base, Alignment, and Fixed Size (Width, Height) function as follows.
When [Fixed crop base] is set to [Exposed area]

When [Fixed crop base] is set to [All area]

* The broken lines indicate the exposure field area, and are not actually shown on
the display.
* The green frame represents the fixed crop frame.

200
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

When the [Fluoro], [Cine], or [Tomosynthesis] tab is selected

• Initial position after exposure
Set the crop area for the image immediately after it is captured.
Collimator area:
The area acquired from the X-ray generator is set as the crop frame.
Sensor readout area:
The Sensor readout area is set as the crop frame.
3. Click the Apply button.
The parameter changes are saved.

Reference
• These tabs are displayed if the detector used in the workspace supports dynamic images.

2.6.4. Changing workspaces

1. From the Tree view or the List view, select a workspace.
2. Change setting items.
Change changeable items that are displayed on the [Property] tab, [Storage crop] tab, or
[PowerBox] tab in the Property view.
3. Click the Apply button.
The changes are reflected.

2.6.5. Deleting workspaces

1. From the Tree view or the List view, select a workspace.
2. In the List view, click the Delete button.
The selected workspace is deleted.

Note
• When a workspace is deleted from the Workspace hierarchy, any protocol that has only the
workspace will also be deleted together.
• The deletion is reflected immediately after performed. Clicking the Cancel button does not
undo the deletion.

2.7. View hierarchy

In the View hierarchy in the Tree view, you can reference the parameters that are set for
each registered protocol workspace, and easily change the parameters for multiple protocol
workspaces at once.

201
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

View configuration
Protocol workspace View:
The parameters of protocol workspaces are listed here, and can be changed.
For details, refer to "2.4.6. Changing the parameters relating to a protocol workspace."
Static IP View:
The image processing parameters for radiographic images in protocol workspaces are listed
here, and can be changed.
For details, refer to "2.4.6.7. Changing the contents of the IP Parameter tab" and "2.9. Image
processing parameter list."
Dynamic IP View:
The image processing parameters for dynamic images in protocol workspaces are listed
here, and can be changed.
For details, refer to "2.4.6.7. Changing the contents of the IP Parameter tab" and "2.9. Image
processing parameter list."

Reference
• In the Property view in the View hierarchy, the settings can be changed only for the
parameters that can be input.
• If you select multiple protocol workspaces from the List view, those parameters for which
Multiple Values is indicated in the Property view have parameter settings that are different
between the selected protocol workspaces.
• If you select multiple protocol workspaces from the List view, the settings of those
parameters that cannot be set for multiple Exposure modes are hidden in the Property view.
• If you select multiple protocol workspaces from the List view and change the values of
parameters that can be input, the changes will be applied to all the selected protocol
workspaces.

2.7.1. Description of the screen

2.7.1.1. When Protocol workspace View is selected from the Tree view
List view
Displayed here are the parameters relating to Detector group, Exposure type, and Grid that
are set for protocol workspaces.
Property view
Property tab:
Some of the parameters that are set for the protocol workspace selected from the List
view are displayed here, and can be changed.

202
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Grid condition tab:

The parameters relating to Grid that are set for the protocol workspace selected from the
List view are displayed here, and can be changed.
Storage crop tab:
The parameters relating to Storage crop that are set for the protocol workspace selected
from the List view are displayed here, and can be changed.
The parameters for protocols for stitch are not displayed.
Film crop tab:
The parameters relating to Film crop that are set for the protocol workspace selected from
the List view are displayed here, and can be changed.

2.7.1.2. When Static IP View or Dynamic IP View is selected from the Tree view
List view
Displayed here are the Exposure mode, Category, Anatomical Part, Direction, and EIt that
are set for protocol workspaces.
Property view
Property tab:
The image processing parameters for radiographic images that are displayed when
Exposure mode is set to Radiography are displayed here, and can be changed.

2.7.1.3 When Dynamic IP View is selected from the Tree view

List view
Displayed here are the Exposure mode, Category, Anatomical Part, and Direction that are set
for protocol workspaces.
Property view
Property tab:
The image processing parameters for dynamic images that are displayed when Exposure
mode is set to Fluoro, Cine, Tomosynthesis, RoadMap / Fluoro, or DSA / DA are
displayed, and can be changed.

2.7.2. Changing the parameters that are set for individual protocol workspaces at
once

2.7.2.1. Changing parameters other than image processing parameters

1. From the Tree view, select Protocol workspace View, and from the List view, select one or
more protocol workspaces for which to change the parameters.
2. Change parameters.
In the Property view, display the [Property] tab, [Grid condition] tab, [Storage crop] tab,
[Film crop] tab, or [Mask] tab, and change parameters.
3. Click the Apply button.
The changes are reflected.

2.7.2.2. Changing image processing parameters

1. From the Tree view, select Static IP View or Dynamic IP View, and from the List view, select
one or more protocol workspaces for which to change the parameters.

203
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Change parameters.
In the Property view, change parameters.
3. Click the Apply button.
The changes are reflected.

2.8. Button Layout hierarchy

In the Button Layout hierarchy in the Tree view, you can manage the category tabs on which
protocol buttons are laid out.

2.8.1. Description of the screen

2.8.1.1. Tray list/Tray view screen

When you select [Button Layout] from the Tree view, the Tray list/Tray view screen appears.

Tray list:
The names of the registered 50 trays are displayed here.
Tray view:
The protocols placed on the tray selected from the Tray list are displayed here.

204
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.8.1.2. Edit Button Tray screen

When you select a tray from the Tray list and click the Edit button, the [Edit Button Tray] screen
appears.

The layout of the protocols on the registered tray selected from the Tray list/Tray view screen is
displayed.
When you bring the cursor to the protocol list and right-click it, the menu for opening and closing
all protocols appears.

2.8.2. Changing trays

2.8.2.1. Changing the tray display sequence

1. From the Tray list on the Tray list/Tray view screen, select a tray.
2. Click the Up button or Down button to change the sequence.
3. Click the Apply button.
The changes are reflected.

2.8.2.2. Changing the tray name and tray display settings

1. From the Tray list on the Tray list/Tray view screen, select a tray and click the Edit button.
The [Edit Button Tray] screen appears.
2. Enter a tray name for [Tray name] on the [Edit Button Tray] screen.
The character type of a tray name is general, and the number of characters is 16.
If you do not want to display the tray, remove the check mark next to [Visible].
3. Click the OK button.
The [Edit Button Tray] screen closes, and the changes are reflected on the Tray list/Tray
view screen.

205
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. Click the Apply button.

The parameter changes are saved.

2.8.3. Changing the protocol layout on a tray

1. From the Tray list on the Tray list/Tray view screen, select a tray and click the Edit button.
The [Edit Button Tray] screen appears.
2. Change the protocol layout on the tray.
If adding protocols
From the list of protocols on the [Edit Button Tray] screen, drag the low-level workspace
of the protocol you want to add, and drop it onto the tray.
If canceling the protocol layout
Double-click a protocol on the tray, or select it and press the [Del] key.
If moving the position of a protocol
Drag and drop a protocol to the desired position on the tray.
3. Click the OK button.
The [Edit Button Tray] screen closes, and the changes are reflected on the Tray list/Tray
view screen.
4. Click the Apply button.
The parameter changes are saved.

Reference
• On a tray, you can lay out up to 48 protocols on a single tab and up to 48 x 50 = 2400
protocols on 50 tabs.

2.9. Image processing parameter list

2.9.1. Radiographic image processing parameters

Given below is a list of categories and values of the image processing parameters displayed in
the service tool, as well as the correspondences between the individuals authorized to perform
the operations concerned and the parameters that can be operated.
Items with a ✔ in the U column can be operated from the GUI of CCS by general users.
Items with a ✔ in the S column can be operated from the service tool by service engineers.
The correlation with the GUI of main unit CCS is indicated in the "Main unit UI" column. The
numbers in this column correspond to the numbers that are assigned to the GUI of CCS in
separate figures.
The "Value" column contains the default values of the prescribed protocols that are created when
the system is installed for the first time.

206
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Table 2-1 Radiographic image processing parameter list

Numerical
Main
value
Category Item name Value U S unit Remarks
input
UI
range

Rotate [0
Flip Rotate *3 ✔
degree]

0, 90, 180,
✔
Angle [degree] 0 270, -90, ✔ (1)
*4
-180, -270

✔
Horizontal Flip On ✔ (2)
*4

✔
Vertical Flip Off ✔ (3)
*4
Geometry
0: Fit
1 to 4: HQ
display
depending
on the
High Quality Mode 0 ✔
zoom
level
99: Pixel-
to-pixel
display

Exposure Area
0 -5 to 20 ✔ *6
Analysis

Exposure Index
Analysis 0 -1 to 20 ✔ *6
Analysis

ROI Analysis 0 -5 to 20 ✔ *6

Saturation Analysis 0 0 to 20 ✔ *6

Body part-
Category ✔ ✔ (5)
dependent

Anatomical Body part-

Anatomical Part ✔ ✔ (6)
Part dependent

Body part-
Direction ✔ ✔ (7)
dependent

On / Off Off ✔ *6

dirFixClipEnd 1.0136 *6
Clipping
dirFixClipout 1.1764 *6

dirFixClipStart 0.922 *6

207
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Numerical
Main
value
Category Item name Value U S unit Remarks
input
UI
range

(Bright Region) On / Body part-

✔ ✔ (20)
Off dependent

Body part-
(Bright Region) Effect 1 to 20 ✔ ✔ (21)
dependent

(Dark Region) On / Body part-

✔ ✔ (18)
Off dependent

Body part-
(Dark Region) Effect 1 to 20 ✔ ✔ (19)
dependent

(Whole Region) On /
Off ✔ ✔ (28)
Off 22064-PA1.1-1

(Whole Region)
Dynamic 1 1 to 20 ✔ ✔ (29)
Effect 22064-PA1.1-2
Range
Adjustment normMaxSlopeLimit
3 *6
22064-PA1.1-3

normMinSlopeLimit
0.3 *6
22064-PA1.1-4

spDmAcLimit 0.1 *6

spDmBaseWeight 1 *6

spDmBgDensLimit 2.6 *6

spDmFittingMode 1 *6

spDmMaxSlopeLimit 1 *6

spDmMinSlopeLimit 0.01 *6

Body part-
On / Off ✔ ✔ (14)
dependent

Body part-
Contrast Boost 0 to 20 ✔ ✔ (17)
dependent

Body part-
Enhancement Edge Enhancement 0 to 20 ✔ ✔ (15)
dependent

Body part-
Edge Frequency 1 to 7 ✔ ✔ (16)
dependent

spEmAcLimit 0.1 *6

spEmCbLimit 15.0 *6

Line Noise lnrBaseWeight 1.0 0.0 to 1.0 ✔ *6

Reduction lnrgRadius 16 *6

208
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Numerical
Main
value
Category Item name Value U S unit Remarks
input
UI
range

Grid Body part-

On / Off *2 ✔ ✔ (24)
Suppression dependent

On / Off Off ✔ ✔ (30)

Effect 5 1 to 10 ✔ ✔ (31)
Scatter
Correction 0 or
Kernel 0 ✔ *6
greater

mode 0 0 to 2 ✔

Body part-
Base Brightness 1 to 29 ✔ ✔ (10)
dependent

Body part-
Base Contrast 1 to 29 ✔ ✔ (11)
dependent

0 (read
Brightness *1 (12)
only)

Brightness Body part-

✔ ✔ (9)
LUT Adjustment mode dependent

0 (read
Contrast *1 (13)
only)

Body part-
Curve Shape ✔ ✔ (8)
dependent

Inverse Off ✔ ✔ (4)

Body part-
REX 0 to 65535 ✔ ✔
dependent

MTF
On / Off On ✔ *6
Improvement

Body part-
On / Off ✔ ✔ (22)
dependent

Body part-
Effect 1 to 10 ✔ ✔ (23)
dependent
Noise
Reduction Method 0 0 to 2 ✔ *6

spDnEps 2.0 *6

spDnMode 1 *6

spDnProcUpperDens 3.2 *6

Peripheral Body part-

On / Off ✔ ✔ (25)
Mask dependent

209
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Numerical
Main
value
Category Item name Value U S unit Remarks
input
UI
range

On / Off On On *6

0 or
Brightness of Around 0 ✔ *6
P-Value greater

Brightness of Film 0 or
3000 ✔ *6
Viewer greater

Sharpness On / Off Off ✔ ✔ (26)

Adjustment Effect 1 1 to 3 ✔ ✔ (27)

210
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Numerical
Main
value
Category Item name Value U S unit Remarks
input
UI
range

lapLv 10 *6

linLogLatMin *5 0.5 *6

lonLogLatMax *5 32767 *6

linLogLatDepth *5 16 *6

anaAreaRatio 0.9 *6

dilateMode 0 *6

densMode 0 *6

outValueMode 0 *6

weightMode 1 *6

vscMethod 0 0 to 5 ✔ *6

BC:
Boundary
Others Correction
Structural
BC Protocol Setting Off ✔
reduction
processing
for One
Shot LL

BC Mode(Upper) 5 0 to 5 ✔

Effective
when BC
BC Effect(Upper) 0 0 to 10 ✔ Mode
(Upper) =
4.

BC Mode(Lower) 5 0 to 5 ✔

Effective
when BC
BC Effect(Lower) 0 0 to 10 ✔ Mode
(Lower) =
4.
*1: This item cannot be edited. The value can be operated on the main unit side, but the operated value cannot be
saved as the protocol default. The value cannot be edited with the service tool, either.
*2: This item is linked to the grid conditions in the protocol workspace settings. If the Grid ID in the protocol grid
conditions is [None], this item is automatically set to Off. Even if this item is changed from On → Off or from Off →
On, the Grid ID in the protocol grid conditions is not changed.
*3: The input ranges are as follows:
Rotate [0 degree]
Rotate [90 degree]
Rotate [180 degree]
Rotate [270 degree]

211
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Flip & Rotate [0 degree]

Flip & Rotate [90 degree]
Flip & Rotate [180 degree]
Flip & Rotate [270 degree]
*4: This cannot be edited with the service tool.
*5: The value in the detector catalog is set. The value is applied only if no value is set in the detector catalog.
*6: This is to be changed only when Canon issues instructions for the change. It must not be changed without such
instructions.

Main unit UI
The following figures show the GUI of CCS. The numbers correspond to the numbers in the
"Main unit UI" column.

2.9.2. Dynamic image processing parameters

Given below is a list of categories and values of the image processing parameters displayed in
the service tool, as well as the correspondences between the individuals authorized to perform
the operations concerned and the parameters that can be operated.
Items with a ✔ in the U column can be operated from the GUI of CCS by general users.
Items with a ✔ in the S column can be operated from the service tool by service engineers.
The correlation with the GUI of main unit CCS is indicated in the "Main unit UI" column. The
numbers in this column correspond to the numbers that are assigned to the GUI of CCS in
separate figures.
The "Value" column contains the default values of the prescribed protocols that are created when
the system is installed for the first time.

212
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Table 2-2 Dynamic image processing parameter list

Value Numerical
value Main
Category Item name Digital- U S Remarks
Fluoro input unit UI
cine range

Rotate [0 Rotate [0
Flip Rotate *2 ✔
degree] degree]

0, 90,
180, 270, ✔
Angle [degree] 0 0 ✔ (1)
-90, -180, *3
-270
Geometry
✔
Horizontal Flip On On ✔ (2)
*3

✔
Vertical Flip Off Off ✔ (3)
*3

PixelToPixel Off Off ✔ (27)

On / Off On On ✔ ✔ (11)

Edge Body part- Body part-

0 to 20 ✔ ✔ (12)
Enhancement dependent dependent

Edge
5 5 1 to 7 ✔ ✔ (13)
Frequency

Body part- Body part-

Contrast Boost 0 to 20 ✔ ✔ (25)
dependent dependent

Enhancement CB Low Limit 0.0 to

1 1 ✔ *8
Adjuster 10.0

Edge Steps of Body part- Body part- -1 to

✔ *8
Detection dependent dependent 65535

Edge
Body part- Body part-
Frequency 0 to 99 ✔ *8
dependent dependent
Balance [0]

CB Frequency Body part- Body part-

0 to 99 ✔ *8
Balance dependent dependent

213
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Value Numerical
value Main
Category Item name Digital- U S Remarks
Fluoro input unit UI
cine range

(Bright Region) Body part- Body part- (22)

✔ ✔
On / Off dependent dependent *5

(Bright Region) Body part- Body part-

1 to 20 ✔ ✔ (24)
Effect dependent dependent

(Dark Region) Body part- Body part- (21)

✔ ✔
On / Off dependent dependent *5

(Dark Region) Body part- Body part-

1 to 20 ✔ ✔ (23)
Effect dependent dependent

DR Low Limit 0.0 to

Dynamic 2 2 ✔ *8
Adjuster 10.0
Range
Adjustment DR High Limit 0.0 to
1 1 ✔ *8
Adjuster 10.0

DR Subject
0.0 to
Minimum 2 2 ✔ *8
10.0
Value Limit

DR Subject
0.0 to
Maximum 1 1 ✔ *8
10.0
Value Limit

DR Frequency Body part- Body part-

0 to 99 ✔ *8
Balance dependent dependent

Body part- Body part-

On / Off *1 ✔ ✔ (15)
dependent dependent

GridDirection- Null / True

Null Null ✔ (26)
OnGUI *6 / False
Grid
Grid
Suppression 4 4 0.1 to 20 ✔ *8
Frequency

Discrimination Body part- Body part-

1 to 15 ✔ *8
Threshold[0] dependent dependent

Filter Order[0] 7 7 ✔ *8

214
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Value Numerical
value Main
Category Item name Digital- U S Remarks
Fluoro input unit UI
cine range

Exposure Area Body part- Body part-

0 to 14 ✔ *8
Analysis dependent dependent

Analysis
Body part- Body part-
Image 0 to 2 ✔ *8
dependent dependent
Conversion

Subject Body part- Body part-

Image Analysis 0 to 11 ✔ *8
Analysis dependent dependent
Area
Body part- Body part-
Roi Analysis 0 to 4 ✔ *8
dependent dependent

Analysis Body part- Body part-

0 to 10 ✔ *8
Sensitivity dependent dependent

Analysis True /
True True ✔ *8
Stabilizer False

Body part- Body part-

Category ✔ ✔ (16)
dependent dependent

Anatomical Anatomical Body part- Body part-

✔ ✔ (17)
Part Part dependent dependent

Body part- Body part-

Direction ✔ ✔ (18)
dependent dependent

215
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Value Numerical
value Main
Category Item name Digital- U S Remarks
Fluoro input unit UI
cine range

Base Body part- Body part-

1 to 29 ✔ ✔ (19)
Brightness dependent dependent

Body part- Body part-

Base Contrast 1 to 29 ✔ ✔ (20)
dependent dependent

Brightness *4 0 0 -10 to 10 ✔ ✔ (5)

Brightness
On On ✔ ✔ (7)
Optimization

Color of low
Black Black ✔ ✔ (4)
dose

Contrast *4 0 0 -10 to 10 ✔ ✔ (6)

Body part- Body part-

Curve Shape ✔ ✔ (14)
dependent dependent

Range
Body part- Body part-
Compression 0 to 1 ✔ *8
dependent dependent
Method

High Value
0 to
Adjuster of 0 0 ✔ *8
65535
Contrast Limit

LUT Low Value

0 to
Adjuster of 1 1 ✔ *8
65535
Contrast Limit

Curve Shape Body part- Body part-

0 to 99 ✔ *8
Pattern[0] dependent dependent

Trim Ratio of Body part- Body part-

0.0 to 1.0 ✔ *8
Low Value dependent dependent

Trim Ratio of Body part- Body part-

0.0 to 1.0 ✔ *8
High Value dependent dependent

DR Adjustment
1 1 0 or 1 ✔ *8
Value

DR Inflection Body part- Body part-

0.0 to 1.0 ✔ *8
Value dependent dependent

Brightness
Optimization Body part- Body part-
-1.0 to 1.0 ✔ *8
Limiter of Low dependent dependent
Value

Brightness
Optimization
0 0 -1.0 to 1.0 ✔ *8
Limiter of High
Value

216
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Value Numerical
value Main
Category Item name Digital- U S Remarks
Fluoro input unit UI
cine range

On / Off On On ✔ ✔ (8)

Body part- Body part-

Effect 1 to 15 ✔ ✔ (9)
dependent dependent
Noise Motion Body part- Body part-
Reduction 1 to 15 ✔ ✔ (10)
Correction dependent dependent

Noise
Reduction 3 3 0 to 4 ✔ *8
Mode

Peripheral
On / Off Off Off On / Off ✔ *8
Mask

217
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Value Numerical
value Main
Category Item name Digital- U S Remarks
Fluoro input unit UI
cine range

Mask Use On On On / Off ✔ ✔ (28)

Pixel Shift X
0 0 -20 to 20 ✔ ✔ (29)
Value

Pixel Shift Y
0 0 -20 to 20 ✔ ✔ (30)
Value

DSA
1 to
Subtraction 30 6 ✔ ✔ (31)
65535
Mask Start No

DSA Image 0 to
65535 65535 ✔ *8
Max Value 65535

DSA Image 0 to
0 0 ✔ *8
Min Value 65535

DSA Image 0 to
32000 32000 ✔ *8
Ref Value 65535

DSA Pixel
Shift Padding 0 0 0.0 to 1.0 ✔ *8
Value
DSA *7 Digital-
DSA RoadMap 1 to cine
30 N/A ✔ *8
Mask Start No 65535 not
used.

Same
DSA RoadMap 1 to
65535 N/A ✔ as *8
Mask End No 65535
above.

DSA
1 to
Subtraction 1 1 ✔ *8
65535
Mask AddNum

DSA
Subtraction 0.5 0.5 0.0 to 1.0 ✔ *8
Offset

Digital-
DSA
0.0 to cine
RoadMapping 1 N/A ✔ *8
40.0 not
Coeff
used.

DSA Same
RoadMapping 0.5 N/A 0.0 to 1.0 ✔ as *8
Offset above.

218
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Value Numerical
value Main
Category Item name Digital- U S Remarks
Fluoro input unit UI
cine range

Tomosynthesis
Auto Window N/A 10 1 to 12 ✔ *8
ROI Size

Tomosynthesis
Auto Window N/A 0.01 0 to 0.1 ✔ *8
Rejection

Tomosynthesis
Geometry
N/A 0 -20 to 20 ✔ *8
Correction
Factor

Tomosynthesis
Noise
Tomosynthesis N/A 2.0 0 to 2.0 ✔ *8
Reduction
Threshold

Tomosynthesis
Noise
N/A 0 0 to 1 ✔ *8
Reduction
Mode

Tomosynthesis
Normalization N/A 1.0 0.1 to 5.0 ✔ *8
Gain

Tomosynthesis
Normalization N/A 0.5 0.1 to 5.0 ✔ *8
Offset
*1: This item is linked to the grid conditions in the protocol workspace settings. If the Grid ID in the protocol grid
conditions is [None], this item is automatically set to Off. Even if this item is changed from On → Off or from Off →
On, the Grid ID in the protocol grid conditions is not changed.
*2: The input ranges are as follows:
Rotate [0 degree]
Rotate [90 degree]
Rotate [180 degree]
Rotate [270 degree]
Flip & Rotate [0 degree]
Flip & Rotate [90 degree]
Flip & Rotate [180 degree]
Flip & Rotate [270 degree]
*3: This cannot be edited with the service tool.
*4: This item cannot be edited. The value can be operated on the main unit side, but the operated value cannot be
saved as the protocol default. The value cannot be edited with the service tool, either. The value is fixed.
*5: There are restrictions: If Range Compression Method is 0, this is not displayed on the main unit UI and [Bright
Region] and [Dark Region] cannot be set to On with the service tool.
*6: This item is reversed by operating the check box of the main unit UI. This does not mean that the On/Off setting
of the check box matches the value of this item.
*7: This is displayed only if Anatomical Part is Angiography.
*8: This parameter must not be changed at the discretion of the service engineer.

219
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Main unit UI
The following figures show the GUI of CCS. The numbers correspond to the numbers in the
"Main unit UI" column.

2.9.3. CCS vs RD image processing parameter and analysis correspondence table

2.9.3.1. Image processing parameter correspondence table

CCS RD

Function Remarks
Level Parameter Function Parameter
name

Gradation Brightness -
1 -
processing Contrast -

220
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

CCS RD

Function Remarks
Level Parameter Function Parameter
name

ON / OFF ON / OFF

Edge Edge
Enhancement Enhancement
enhancement enhancement
processing processing
Contrast
Contrast boost
boost

ON /
ON / OFF (high
OFF (low
density)
brightness)

Low brightness
2 Dynamic Low Dynamic Maximum
= 21 - Maximum
range brightness range density
density
adjustment adjustment
processing ON / OFF processing ON / OFF (low
(high
density)
brightness)

High Minimum
brightness density

Noise ON / OFF Noise ON / OFF

reduction reduction
processing Effect processing Effect

221
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

CCS RD

Function Remarks
Level Parameter Function Parameter
name

Category Category
Anatomical
Area
part Analysis method
Orientation

LUT type {SA/SB/

SC/LN} = Curve
shape {standard
LUT type Curve shape letter S/bone area
letter S #3/chest
area letter S #2/
Gradation straight line}
processing
Base brightness
Gradation Base Corresponding = 30 -
processing brightness density Corresponding
density

Base contrast Contrast

REX value REX

3
Brightness Auto
adjustment adjustment/REX
mode adjustment

Enhancement Edge Enhancement

Edge frequency
processing frequency processing

Grid line Grid

ON / OFF ON / OFF
suppression suppression

Peripheral Peripheral
mask ON / OFF mask ON / OFF
processing processing

ON / OFF ON / OFF Refer to separate

table (separate
Effect Dose- Strength tab).
Sharpness
dependent
adjustment Automatically set
sharpness
processing by NE according
- adjustment Type
to the anatomical
part category.

High-density
Clipping ON / OFF ON / OFF
clipping
4 MTF
improvement ON / OFF - -
processing

222
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.9.3.2. Sharpness adjustment correspondence table

RD CCS
Strength
0 1 2 3
OFF ON/effect 1 ON/effect 1 ON/effect 1 ON/effect 1
ON / OFF
ON OFF/effect 1 ON/effect 1 ON/effect 2 ON/effect 3

2.9.3.3. Analysis method correspondence table

CCS RD

Area Orientation Analysis method Remarks

Background present, auto

Front
ROI (front of head)
Skull
Background present, auto
Side
ROI (side of head)

Background present, auto

Front
ROI (ear area)
Organ of hearing
Background present, auto
Side
ROI (ear area)

Background present, auto

Front
ROI (paranasal sinus)
Paranasal sinus
Background present, auto
Side
ROI (paranasal sinus)

Background present, auto

Front
ROI (nasal bone)
Nasal bone
Background present, auto
Side
ROI (nasal bone)

Background present, auto

Front
ROI (mandible)
Jawbone
Background present, auto
Side
ROI (mandible)

223
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

CCS RD

Area Orientation Analysis method Remarks

Background present, auto

Not provided in NE.
ROI (front of chest)

Background present, auto

Front Not provided in NE.
ROI#2 (front of chest)

Background present, auto

Chest
ROI#3 (front of chest)

Background present, auto

Not provided in NE.
ROI (side of chest)
Side
Background present, auto
ROI#2 (side of chest)

Background present, auto

Front ROI#2 (front of chest of
young child)
Chest of young child
Background present,
Side auto ROI (side of chest of
young child)

Background present, auto

Front ROI (front of chest of
newborn baby)
Chest of newborn baby
Background present,
Side auto ROI (side of chest of
newborn baby)

Background present, auto

Not provided in NE.
ROI (abdomen)
Front
Background present, auto
ROI#2 (abdomen)
Abdomen
Background present, auto
Not provided in NE.
ROI (abdomen)
Side
Background present, auto
ROI#2 (abdomen)

Background present, auto

Front ROI#3 (front of cervical
vertebrae)
Cervical vertebrae
Background present, auto
Side ROI#3 (side of cervical
vertebrae)

224
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

CCS RD

Area Orientation Analysis method Remarks

Background absent, auto

Front ROI (front of thoracic
vertebrae)

Background absent, auto

Thoracic vertebrae ROI (side of thoracic Not provided in NE.
vertebrae)
Side
Background absent, auto
ROI#2 (side of thoracic
vertebrae)

Background absent, auto

Front
ROI#2 (lumbar vertebrae)
Lumbar vertebrae
Background absent, auto
Side
ROI#2 (lumbar vertebrae)

Background present, auto

Front
ROI#4 (collarbone)
Collarbone (clavicle)
Background present, auto
Side
ROI#4 (collarbone)

Background present, auto

Front
ROI#2 (shoulder joint)
Shoulder joint
Background present, auto
Side
ROI#2 (shoulder joint)

Background present, auto

Front
ROI (shoulder bone)
Shoulder bone (scapula)
Background present, auto
Side
ROI (shoulder bone)

Background present, auto

Front
ROI (rib)
Rib
Background present, auto
Side
ROI (rib)

Background present, auto

Front
ROI (sternum)
Sternum
Background present, auto
Side
ROI (sternum)

Background present, auto

Front
ROI#2 (pelvis)
Pelvis
Background present, auto
Side
ROI#2 (pelvis)

225
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

CCS RD

Area Orientation Analysis method Remarks

Background present, auto

Front
ROI (front of sacrum)
Sacrum Background present,
Side auto ROI (oblique side of
sacrum)

Front -
Ilium
Side -

Background present, auto

Front
ROI (front of coccyx)
Coccyx Background present,
Side auto ROI (oblique side of
coccyx)

Front -
Pubic bone (pubis)
Side -

Background present, auto

Front
ROI#2 (upper arm)
Humerus
Background present, auto
Side
ROI#2 (upper arm)

Background present, auto

Front
ROI#2 (elbow joint)
Elbow joint
Background present, auto
Side
ROI#2 (elbow joint)

Background present, auto

Front
ROI#3 (forearm)
Antebrachium
Background present, auto
Side
ROI#3 (forearm)

Background present, auto

Front
ROI#2 (wrist joint)
Wrist joint
Background present, auto
Side
ROI#2 (wrist joint)

Background present, auto

Front
ROI#2 (hand)
Hand
Background present, auto
Side
ROI#2 (hand)

226
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

CCS RD

Area Orientation Analysis method Remarks

Background present, auto

Front
ROI#4 (front of hip joint)
Hip joint
Background present, auto
Side
ROI#3 (side of hip joint)

Background present, auto

Front
ROI#3 (thighbone)
Thighbone (femur)
Background present, auto
Side
ROI#3 (thighbone)

Background present, auto

Not provided in NE.
ROI (knee joint)
Front
Background present, auto
ROI#2 (front of knee joint)
Knee joint
Background present, auto
Not provided in NE.
ROI (knee joint)
Side
Background present, auto
ROI#2 (side of knee joint)

Background present, auto

Front
ROI#3 (lower leg)
Tibia and fibula (leg)
Background present, auto
Side
ROI#3 (lower leg)

Background present, auto

Front
ROI#2 (ankle joint)
Ankle joint
Background present, auto
Side
ROI#2 (ankle joint)

Background present, auto

Front
ROI#2 (foot)
Foot
Background present, auto
Side
ROI#2 (foot)

Upper digestive tract Front -

(upper gastrointestinal) Side -

Lower digest tract (lower Front -

gastrointestinal) Side -

Liver, biliary tract and Front -

pancreas Side -

227
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

CCS RD

Area Orientation Analysis method Remarks

Front -
Urinary organ
Side -

Front -
Myelo
Side -

2.10. DICOM body parts and recommended image processing

categories

The table below gives the correspondences between the DICOM body parts and recommended
categories and anatomical parts.

Reference
• If, when creating a new protocol, one of the body parts is selected in the DICOM Body part
column on wizard screen 1/4, the recommended category and anatomical part are displayed
in bold on wizard screen 3/4 and selected automatically. If there are multiple options for
Category and Anatomical Part that are recommended for a particular DICOM body part, the
options with the asterisks (*) will be selected automatically.

Stitch (Category:
Static, RF, Positioning Fluoro
DICOM BodyPart Stitch)

Category Anatomical Part Anatomical Part

(Blank) Other Unknown Unknown

ABDOMEN Chest/Abdomen Abdomen Unknown

Chest/Abdomen *Abdomen *Whole Spine,

ABDOMENPELVIS
Pelvis Pelvis Unknown

ADRENAL Chest/Abdomen Abdomen Unknown

ANKLE Lower-Extremity Ankle Unknown

Chest/Abdomen *Chest
AORTA Unknown
Chest/Abdomen Abdomen

Upper-Extremity *Humerus
ARM Unknown
Upper-Extremity Forearm

AXILLA Rib Cage Shoulder Unknown

Spine Thoracic Spine

BACK Unknown
Spine *Lumbar Spine

228
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Stitch (Category:
Static, RF, Positioning Fluoro
DICOM BodyPart Stitch)

Category Anatomical Part Anatomical Part

Chest/Abdomen Abdomen
BLADDER Unknown
Pelvis *Pelvis

BRAIN Skull Skull Unknown

BREAST Chest/Abdomen Chest Unknown

BRONCHUS Chest/Abdomen Chest Unknown

BUTTOCK Pelvis Pelvis Unknown

CALCANEUS Lower-Extremity Foot Unknown

CALF Lower-Extremity Leg Unknown

CAROTID Spine Cervical Spine Unknown

CEREBELLUM Skull Skull Unknown

*Whole Spine,
CSPINE Spine Cervical Spine
Unknown

Spine *Cervical Spine *Whole Spine,

CTSPINE
Spine Thoracic Spine Unknown

CERVIX Pelvis Pelvis Unknown

Skull *Nose Sinus

CHEEK Unknown
Skull Nose

CHEST Chest/Abdomen Chest Unknown

Chest/Abdomen *Chest *Whole Spine,

CHESTABDOMEN
Chest/Abdomen Abdomen Unknown

Chest/Abdomen *Chest
*Whole Spine,
CHESTABDPELVIS Chest/Abdomen Abdomen
Unknown
Pelvis Pelvis

CIRCLEOFWILLIS Skull Skull Unknown

CLAVICLE Rib Cage Clavicle Unknown

COCCYX Pelvis Coccyx Unknown

COLON Chest/Abdomen Abdomen Unknown

CORNEA Skull Skull Unknown

CORONARYARTERY Chest/Abdomen Chest Unknown

229
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Stitch (Category:
Static, RF, Positioning Fluoro
DICOM BodyPart Stitch)

Category Anatomical Part Anatomical Part

DUODENUM Chest/Abdomen Abdomen Unknown

EAR Skull Ear Unknown

ELBOW Upper-Extremity Elbow Unknown

*Whole Spine,
WHOLEBODY Other Unknown
Unknown

ESOPHAGUS Spine Cervical Spine Unknown

Upper-Extremity Humerus

Upper-Extremity Forearm
EXTREMITY *Full Leg, Unknown
Lower-Extremity *Femur

Lower-Extremity Leg

EYE Skull Nose Sinus Unknown

EYELID Skull Nose Sinus Unknown

FACE Skull Nose Sinus Unknown

FEMUR Lower-Extremity Femur *Full Leg, Unknown

FINGER Upper-Extremity Hand Unknown

FOOT Lower-Extremity Foot *Full Leg, Unknown

GALLBLADDER Chest/Abdomen Abdomen Unknown

HAND Upper-Extremity Hand Unknown

HEAD Skull Skull Unknown

HEADNECK Skull Skull Unknown

HEART Chest/Abdomen Chest Unknown

HIP Lower-Extremity Hip Joint *Full Leg, Unknown

HUMERUS Upper-Extremity Humerus Unknown

ILEUM Chest/Abdomen Abdomen Unknown

ILIUM Pelvis Ilium Unknown

IAC Skull Ear Unknown

JAW Skull Mandible Unknown

JEJUNUM Chest/Abdomen Abdomen Unknown

KIDNEY Chest/Abdomen Abdomen Unknown

230
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Stitch (Category:
Static, RF, Positioning Fluoro
DICOM BodyPart Stitch)

Category Anatomical Part Anatomical Part

KNEE Lower-Extremity Knee *Full Leg, Unknown

LARYNX Spine Cervical Spine Unknown

LEG Lower-Extremity Leg Full Leg

LIVER Chest/Abdomen Abdomen Unknown

*Whole Spine,
LSPINE Spine Lumbar Spine
Unknown

*Whole Spine,
LSSPINE Spine Lumbar Spine
Unknown

LUNG Chest/Abdomen Chest Unknown

MAXILLA Skull Mandible Unknown

Chest/Abdomen *Chest
MEDIASTINUM Unknown
Spine Thoracic Spine

MOUTH Spine Cervical Spine Unknown

NECK Spine Cervical Spine Unknown

NECKCHEST Chest/Abdomen Chest Unknown

*Whole Spine,
NECKCHESTABDOMEN Chest/Abdomen Chest
Unknown

Other *Unknown

Spine Cervical Spine

*Whole Spine,
NECKCHESTABDPELV Chest/Abdomen Chest
Unknown
Chest/Abdomen Abdomen

Pelvis Pelvis

NOSE Skull Nose Unknown

ORBIT Skull Nose Sinus Unknown

OVARY Pelvis Pelvis Unknown

PANCREAS Chest/Abdomen Abdomen Unknown

PAROTID Chest/Abdomen Abdomen Unknown

PATELLA Lower-Extremity Knee Unknown

PELVIS Pelvis Pelvis Unknown

PENIS Pelvis Pelvis Unknown

231
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Stitch (Category:
Static, RF, Positioning Fluoro
DICOM BodyPart Stitch)

Category Anatomical Part Anatomical Part

PHARYNX Spine Cervical Spine Unknown

PROSTATE Pelvis Pelvis Unknown

RECTUM Pelvis Pelvis Unknown

RIB Rib Cage Rib Unknown

SSPINE Pelvis Sacrum Unknown

SCALP Skull Skull Unknown

SCAPULA Rib Cage Scapula Unknown

SCLERA Skull Skull Unknown

SCROTUM Pelvis Pelvis Unknown

SHOULDER Rib Cage Shoulder Unknown

SKULL Skull Skull Unknown

*Whole Spine,
SPINE Spine Lumbar Spine
Unknown

SPLEEN Chest/Abdomen Abdomen Unknown

STERNUM Rib Cage Sternum Unknown

STOMACH Chest/Abdomen Abdomen Unknown

SUBMANDIBULAR Skull Mandible Unknown

TMJ Skull Mandible Unknown

TESTIS Pelvis Pelvis Unknown

THIGH Lower-Extremity Femur *Full Leg, Unknown

*Whole Spine,
TSPINE Spine Thoracic Spine
Unknown

Spine Thoracic Spine *Whole Spine,

TLSPINE
Spine *Lumbar Spine Unknown

THUMB Upper-Extremity Hand Unknown

THYMUS Chest/Abdomen Chest Unknown

THYROID Spine Cervical Spine Unknown

TOE Lower-Extremity Foot Unknown

TONGUE Skull Mandible Unknown

232
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Stitch (Category:
Static, RF, Positioning Fluoro
DICOM BodyPart Stitch)

Category Anatomical Part Anatomical Part

TRACHEA Chest/Abdomen Chest Unknown

URETER Chest/Abdomen Abdomen Unknown

URETHRA Pelvis Pelvis Unknown

UTERUS Pelvis Pelvis Unknown

VAGINA Pelvis Pelvis Unknown

VULVA Pelvis Pelvis Unknown

WRIST Upper-Extremity Wrist Unknown

ZYGOMA Skull Nose Sinus Unknown

2.11. Image processing categories and anatomical parts in both

English and Japanese

English Japanese

Category Anatomical Part Category Anatomical Part

Other Unknown その他 不明

Skull 頭蓋骨
Ear 聴器
Skull Nose Sinus 頭蓋骨 副鼻腔
Nose 鼻骨
Mandible 顎骨

Chest 胸部
Child Chest 小児胸部
Chest/Abdomen 胸部 / 腹部
Infant Chest 新生児胸部
Abdomen 腹部

Cervical Spine 頸椎
Spine Thoracic Spine 脊椎 胸椎
Lumbar Spine 腰椎

Clavicle 鎖骨
Shoulder 肩関節
Rib Cage Scapula 胸郭 肩甲骨
Rib 肋骨
Sternum 胸骨

233
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

English Japanese

Category Anatomical Part Category Anatomical Part

Pelvis 骨盤
Sacrum 仙骨
Pelvis Ilium 骨盤 腸骨
Coccyx 尾骨
Pubis 恥骨

Humerus 上腕骨
Elbow 肘関節
Upper-Extremity Forearm 上肢 前腕骨
Wrist 手関節
Hand 手

Hip Joint 股関節

Femur 大腿骨
Knee 膝関節
Lower-Extremity 下肢
Leg 下腿骨
Ankle 足関節
Foot 足

Upper Gastrointestinal 上部消化管

Lower Gastrointestinal 下部消化管
Contrast
Hepato Biliary Pancreatic 造影 肝胆膵
Medium
Urinary 泌尿器
Myelo 脊髄腔

Whole Spine 全脊椎

Stitch Full Leg スティッチ 下肢全長
Unknown 不明

Unknown 不明
Brain 脳
Chest 胸部
Angiography 血管造影
Abdomen 腹
Leg 下腿骨
Arm 腕

234
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. EX2DB/CCR2EX

3.1. Overview of EX2DB/CCR2EX

EX2DB is an application used to export the protocol information registered in the protocol
DB managed by CCS to protocol sheets (Excel files with the .xlsx extension) or to import
protocol sheets to the protocol DB. You can also convert protocol sheet versions, perform input
verification, and convert CCR information (CCR2EX).

Table 1 EX2DB function list

Function Overview Remarks

Exports the protocol information

Protocol If you start the application from
registered in the protocol DB and
information export EX2DB32.exe, you cannot use
any related information to protocol
function this function.
sheets.

Protocol If you start the application from

Imports information from protocol
information import EX2DB32.exe, you cannot use
sheets to the protocol DB.
function this function.

Converts protocol sheets into a

Version conversion
format readable by the installed
function
EX2DB.

Verifies the effectiveness of the

Input verification Performs verification even during
information input to the specified
function importing.
protocol sheets.

235
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Function Overview Remarks

CCR information Imports the BodyPart settings If you start the application from
conversion function used in the existing control the service tool, you cannot use
(CCR2EX) software CCR to protocol sheets. this function.

Performs authorization to check if If you start the application from

Login function the login user has the privilege to the service tool, you cannot use
use EX2DB32.exe. this function.

EX2DB32.exe is not supplied with the integrated installer.

Reference
• The importing of protocol sheets with different versions is not supported regardless of
whether the versions are higher or lower. Protocol sheets exported using a different version
of EX2DB can be imported by using the version conversion function of the installed EX2DB.
• Protocol sheets exported with EX2DB V1.30 are treated as those of CCS-NE.
• Protocol sheets created with the CCR information conversion function are treated in the
same way as those that are output by CCS-NE V1.30.1.

3.2. EX2DB

3.2.1. Starting up EX2DB

Click the service tool [Menu selection] > [Utility Setting] > [Protocol Import and Export] to
start EX2DB.

236
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.2.2. Exporting protocol information to a protocol sheet

1. Select the [Export] tab, and click the Browse button.

2. Specify an output file, and click the Export button.

Wait until the export processing is completed.
When all the processes on the processing condition display screen are completed ( icon),
a protocol sheet to which the contents of the protocol DB are output is created.
* The processes on the processing condition display screen differ depending on the processing to execute.

3. Click the OK button.

237
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• Protocol information in the protocol database (all radiographic image and dynamic image
protocols except AEC protocols, QC protocols, and automatically provided protocols), as
well as detector information, workspace information, and other related information, is output
to the protocol sheet.

3.2.3. Importing a protocol sheet to the protocol DB

1. Select the [Import] tab, and click the Browse button.
2. Specify an input file.

3. Make selections from [Protocol to be imported] and [Option].

In [Protocol to be imported], workspace and exposure type combinations are displayed.
Place a check mark next to the combination you want to import. Select the method for
importing the selected combination, too.
4. Click the Import button.
5. In the backup confirmation dialog box, click the Yes button.
If you have not backed up the DB before importing, click the No button, and back up the DB.
Wait until the import processing is completed.
When all the processes on the processing condition display screen are completed ( icon),
the importing to the protocol DB is completed.
If any item in the input file contains an error, the relevant process on the processing condition
display screen fails ( icon), and an error information screen appears. By referring to the
error information displayed on the screen and the Excel input rules in "Appendix 1: Protocol
Sheet Definitions," correct the error.

238
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

* The screen below indicates that there are multiple locations where "CD_0001" is set for the Code value item in
the ProtocolWorkspace sheet.

6. Click the OK button.

Note
• Do not import protocols when pending exams are present.
If protocols are imported with EX2DB, the protocols registered in the DB thus far are
cleared, and new protocols are re-created. Even if the protocols to import include a protocol
that has the same name as that of any existing protocol, that protocol is treated as a
completely different protocol.
This requires care in the following case.
1. An exam is started with a protocol before importing, and is suspended before imaging is
performed.
2. A protocol with the same name as that of the protocol is imported.
3. The suspended exam is resumed.
In such a case, even when an attempt is made to resume the exam in 3, the exam cannot be
resumed because the DB does not contain the previous protocol. In such a case, you must
delete the previous protocol with Edit Exam, select another protocol, and resume the exam.
• In V2.16 or later, protocol sheets with different models can be imported.
If you are to import protocol sheets from CCS-NE to CCS-RF, you can import all data. If you
are to import protocol sheets from CCS-RF to CCS-NE, you can import only the protocol
data associated with static detectors, because dynamic detectors are not supported.

239
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.2.4. Converting protocol sheets

You can convert protocol sheets exported with EX2DB V1.30.1.0 or later into a format readable
by the installed EX2DB.
1. Select the [Version conversion] tab, and click the Browse button.

2. Specify an input file.

Reference
• If the sheet version of the specified file is the latest, the message "The specified file
does not need to be converted because it is the latest version." appears, and the
Convert button is disabled.

3. Click the Convert button.

Wait until the version conversion is completed.
When all the processes on the processing condition display screen are completed ( icon),
the conversion is completed.
If any item in the input file contains an error, the relevant process on the processing condition
display screen fails ( icon), and an error information screen appears.
4. Click the OK button.

240
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Note
• To convert a protocol sheet exported with V1.30.0, the following corrections are necessary.
1. Change the value of I1 (cell in row 1 and column I) on the ProtocolWorkspace sheet to
[Exposure type].
2. Change the value of J1 (cell in row 1 and column J) on the ProtocolWorkspace sheet to
[Exposure mode].
3. Change the value of E1 (cell in row 1 and column E) on the Workspace sheet to
[Exposure mode].
• To convert a protocol sheet of V1.40 or earlier, the following correction is necessary.
Move the Peripheral mask column of the ProtocolWorkspace sheet to the right of the Noise
reduction effect column.
• In V2.16 or later, protocol sheets with different models can be subject to version conversion.
The protocol sheet resulting from conversion will have the same model as that of the original
file.
(The model may differ from the model in the installed CCS.)

3.2.5. Checking protocol sheets

This function checks if the protocol sheet specified as an input file can be imported to the version
of the installed CCS. EX2DB32.exe checks if the protocol sheet can be imported to CCS of the
same version as that of the tool.
1. Select the [Check] tab, and click the Browse button.

2. Specify an input file.

3. Click the Check button.
Wait until the input verification processing is completed.
If all the processes on the processing condition display screen are completed ( icon), it is
judged that the input verification is completed normally.

241
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

If any item in the input file contains an error, the relevant process on the processing condition
display screen fails ( icon), and an error information screen appears. By referring to the
error information displayed on the screen and the Excel input rules in "Appendix 1: Protocol
Sheet Definitions," correct the error.
4. Click the OK button.

Note
• Even if the input verification is judged to have completed normally, importing may fail
depending on the situation at the time of importing.

3.2.6. Protocol sheet specifications

A protocol sheet is an Open XML format Excel file that consists of the sheets listed below. For
details of each sheet, refer to "Appendix 1: Protocol Sheet Definitions."

Sheet name Overview

Protocol Contains protocol and DICOM information.

Contains the associations between protocols and workspaces, as well

Protocol workspace
as information used for imaging.

Prepack Contains prepack protocol information.

Contains the layout positions of protocol buttons, as well as tab

Button layout
information.

Grid Contains grid information.

Workspace Contains workspace information.

Detector catalog Contains detector catalog information.

3.3. EX2DB32.exe

In V2.16 or later, this is created as a support tool.

3.3.1. Function
This tool enables you to perform the following even in an environment where CCS is not installed:
version conversion and input verification, which can be performed with EX2DB; and the existing
CCR2EX processing. This tool is supplied from the CXDI support site.

3.3.2. Operating environment

• Windows 7 Professional, Windows 8.1 Pro, Windows 10 Pro
• .NET Framework 3.5 or later
• Microsoft Office Excel 2007 *
* This is not essential for executing EX2DB32.exe, but is necessary for referencing and editing protocol sheets.

Reference
• Both system types, x86 (32-bit) and x64 (64-bit), are supported.

242
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.3.3. Operating EX2DB32.exe

1. Execute EX2DB32.exe to start EX2DB32.
2. In the [Login] dialog box, fill in the [User name] and [Password] fields.
Use the user name and the password for use by CCS-RF and CCS-NE sales companies that
are given in this service manual or the login name and the password for use by dealers.

For details of version conversion and input verification, refer to "3.2. EX2DB."

3.3.4. Converting BodyPart settings into protocol sheets (CCR2EX)

This function extracts the information that is set in the area buttons from the ini files used with
the existing control software CCR, converts it into CCS protocol information, and outputs it to
editable protocol sheets. This function has been supplied as CCR2EX in the past.
1. Select the [CCR2EX] tab, and click the Browse button for [Bodypart folder].
2. Specify the folder path on which the CCR file to convert is located.
CCR files necessary for conversion include essential files and optional files.
The essential files are as below:
• BodyPartCmn.ini
• BodyPartxx.ini (1 to 4 files)
• ccrnvst.ini
• Menupara.ini
The optional files are as below.
• chMwm.ini: Required if DMW_PS2 is used.
• SETORDER.txt: Required if the SETORDER function is used.
• cgbig3.ini: Required if CXDI-GC is used.
3. Click the Browse button for [Output file].

243
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. Specify an output file.

5. Click the Convert button.

Wait until the CCR information conversion processing is completed.
When all the processes on the processing condition display screen are completed ( icon),
a protocol sheet to which the BodyPart settings are output is created.
6. Click the OK button.

Note
• BodyPart in CCR V7.00 or later is supported.
• For BodyPart using standard frequency processing, MLT (F), or MLT (M), the settings of
MLT (S) that are in ini files are converted.
(For conversion from standard frequency processing, MLT (F), and MLT (M), some of the
image processing parameters will not be converted with appropriate values. If the image
processing parameters are not appropriate during imaging with CCS-RF or CCS-NE,
retakes will be necessary, which is considered to result in a major risk of putting a burden
on the patient. For this reason, it must definitely be checked that appropriate imaging can be
performed with the image processing parameters beforehand (by actually capturing some
images and checking them).)
• The VPT and SMPTE buttons are not reflected on the protocol sheet because they involve
BodyPart information for executing functions specific to CCR.
• Protocol sheets created with CCR2EX are treated in the same way as those that are output
by CCS-NE v1.30.1.

3.3.5. Conversion specifications

Refer to "Appendix 2: CCR2EX Protocol Sheet Conversion Function Specifications."

244
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Appendix 1: Protocol Sheet Definitions

The definitions contained here are for describing the protocol sheets for V2.16.

1. Protocol worksheet

1.1. Protocol name

Column name Protocol name

Description Protocol name

Excel input rule No. of characters: 64 or less

Essential input; duplicates not allowed (duplicates with prepack

protocols allowed).

If the value includes trailing spaces

EX2DB verification rule • The trailing spaces are removed before the data is imported.
• Processing results are logged (added to V2.14 or later).

An import error occurs if the value contains a backslash (\) (added

to V2.12 or later).

Remarks

1.2. Comment

Column name Comment

Description Comment to add to a protocol

Excel input rule No. of characters: 128 or less

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks

245
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.3. Mark

Column name Mark

Description Laterality marker

• If Modality is DX
L/R/B/U
• If Modality is RF
Excel input rule
L / R / B / None
• If Modality is XA
L / R / B / None

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks

1.4. Mark interlock

Column name Mark interlock

Setting for indicating whether to link the laterality markers to Image

Description
Laterality (0020, 0062) of the DICOM output.

Excel input rule TRUE / FALSE

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

If DX, the markers are output to Image Laterality (0020, 0062).

Remarks
If RF or XA, the markers are output to Laterality (0020, 0060).

1.5. Modality

Column name Modality

Description Modality type

Excel input rule DX / RF / XA

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks

246
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.6. DICOM BodyPart

Column name DICOM BodyPart

Description DICOM body part

ABDOMEN / ABDOMENPELVIS / ADRENAL / ANKLE / AORTA

/ ARM / AXILLA / BACK / BLADDER / BRAIN / BREAST /
BRONCHUS / BUTTOCK / CALCANEUS / CALF / CAROTID /
CEREBELLUM / CSPINE / CTSPINE / CERVIX / CHEEK / CHEST
/ CHESTABDOMEN / CHESTABDPELVIS / CIRCLEOFWILLIS /
CLAVICLE / COCCYX / COLON / CORNEA / CORONARYARTERY
/ DUODENUM / EAR / ELBOW / WHOLEBODY / ESOPHAGUS /
EXTREMITY / EYE / EYELID / FACE / FEMUR / FINGER / FOOT
/ GALLBLADDER / HAND / HEAD / HEADNECK / HEART / HIP
/ HUMERUS / ILEUM / ILIUM / IAC / JAW / JEJUNUM / KIDNEY
Excel input rule
/ KNEE / LARYNX / LEG / LIVER / LSPINE / LSSPINE / LUNG
/ MAXILLA / MEDIASTINUM / MOUTH / NECK / NECKCHEST
/ NECKCHESTABDOMEN / NECKCHESTABDPELV / NOSE /
ORBIT / OVARY / PANCREAS / PAROTID / PATELLA / PELVIS
/ PENIS / PHARYNX / PROSTATE / RECTUM / RIB / SSPINE /
SCALP / SCAPULA / SCLERA / SCROTUM / SHOULDER / SKULL
/ SPINE / SPLEEN / STERNUM / STOMACH / SUBMANDIBULAR
/ TMJ / TESTIS / THIGH / TSPINE / TLSPINE / THUMB / THYMUS
/ THYROID / TOE / TONGUE / TRACHEA / URETER / URETHRA
/ UTERUS / VAGINA / VULVA / WRIST / ZYGOMA / (Blank)

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks

247
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.7. Patient orientation

Column name Patient orientation

Description Patient orientation

• If Modality is DX
L¥F / R¥F / P¥F / A¥F / LP¥F / LA¥F / RA¥F / RP¥F / H¥L / H¥R
/ H¥P / H¥A / H¥LP / H¥LA / H¥RA / H¥RP / R¥H / L¥H / A¥H
/ P¥H / RA¥H / RP¥H / LP¥H / LA¥H / F¥R / F¥L / F¥A / F¥P /
F¥RA / F¥RP / F¥LP / F¥LA
Excel input rule • If Modality is RF
"No value" can be specified in addition to the selection options
for DX.
• If Modality is XA
"No value" can be specified in addition to the selection options
for DX.

EX2DB verification rule Essential for DX.

Remarks

1.8. View position

Column name View position

Description View position

• If Modality is DX
No value / AP / PA / LL / RL / RLD / LLD / RLO / LLO
• If Modality is RF
Excel input rule
No value
• If Modality is XA
No value

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks

248
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.9. Laterality

Column name Laterality

Description Image laterality

• If Modality is DX and Mark interlock is TRUE

U
• If Modality is DX and Mark interlock is FALSE
L/R/B/U
• If Modality is RF and Mark interlock is TRUE
Excel input rule
None
• If Modality is RF and Mark interlock is FALSE
L / R / None
• If Modality is XA
No value

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks

1.10. L laterality position

Column name L laterality position

Description L mark layout position

TopLeft / TopCenter / TopRight / MiddleLeft / MiddleCenter /

Excel input rule
MiddleRight / BottomLeft / BottomCenter / BottomRight

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks Enumerated value

249
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.11. R laterality position

Column name R laterality position

Description R mark layout position

TopLeft / TopCenter / TopRight / MiddleLeft / MiddleCenter /

Excel input rule
MiddleRight / BottomLeft / BottomCenter / BottomRight

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks Enumerated value

1.12. Series description

Column name Series description

Description Series description

Excel input rule No. of characters: 64 or less

An import error occurs if the value contains a backslash (\) (added

EX2DB verification rule
to V2.12 or later).

Remarks

250
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. ProtocolWorkspace worksheet

2.1. Group ID

Column name Group ID

Description Number indicating the protocol workspace group.

Excel input rule Integer value of 0 or above

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Any items that have the same Group ID are registered as a single
protocol workspace.
Group ID, Protocol name, Workspace name, Exposure type,
Exposure mode...
Line 1: 0, Test Protocol, 50RF, RF, Radiography...
Remarks
Line 2: 0, Test Protocol, 50RF, RF, Fluoro...
Line 3: 0, Test Protocol, 50RF, RF, Cine...
Line 4: 1, Test Protocol, 50G, Static, Radiography...
A single RF protocol is set in lines 1 to 3, and a single Static
protocol is set in line 4.

2.2. Protocol name

Column name Protocol name

Description Protocol name

Excel input rule Value defined for Protocol name on the Protocol worksheet

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks

251
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3. Workspace name

Column name Workspace name

Description Workspace name

Excel input rule Value defined for Workspace name on the Workspace worksheet

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks

2.4. Code value

Column name Code value

Description Code value associated with the protocol

None
Excel input rule
* To set multiple values, separate each with a comma (,).

No. of characters: 0 to 64 each

* When multiple values are set, an import error occurs if they include a value with
no characters (added to V2.12 or later).

For any value that includes trailing spaces (added to V2.12 or later)
• The trailing spaces are removed before the data is imported.
• Processing results are logged (2.14).

An import error occurs if any value contains a backslash (\) (added

to V2.12 or later).

EX2DB verification rule If more than 50 values are set for a single protocol workspace, an
import error occurs (added to V2.12 or later).

If upgrading to V2.01 or later, move the Code value and Code

meaning on the Protocol sheet to the ProtocolWorkspace sheet
(added to V2.12 or later).
In the protocol workspace in which the protocol to be moved is
used:
• If there is a line in which IsDefault is TRUE, move the Code value
and Code meaning to this line (start line of the same Group ID).
• If there is no line in which IsDefault is TRUE, move them to the
start line in which the protocol is used.

Remarks

252
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.5. Code meaning

Column name Code meaning

Description Code meaning associated with the protocol

None
Excel input rule
To set multiple values, separate each with a comma (,).

No. of characters: 64 or less

EX2DB verification rule An import error occurs if any value contains a backslash (\) (added
to V2.12 or later).

When multiple Code meanings are set, they are assigned to Code
Remarks
values in order (blanks can also be set) (added to V2.12 or later).

2.6. IsDefault

Column name IsDefault

Flag indicating the protocol to be used as the default when the code
Description
value posted from RIS is converted into a protocol

Excel input rule TRUE / FALSE

Essential input
Only one protocol workspace can be set to TRUE, using the same
protocol (Protocol name).
EX2DB verification rule
If, at the time of additional registration, TRUE is set for the same
protocol in the DB and the protocol sheet, the value on the protocol
sheet is changed to false internally.

Remarks

253
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.7. Exposure type

Column name Exposure type

Description Exposure type of the protocol

Detector supporting Detector not supporting

Modality
dynamic images dynamic images

Static / Stitch /
DX Static / Stitch
Excel input rule Positioning Fluoro

Static / RF / Positioning
RF Static
Fluoro / Tomosynthesis

XA Angio No value

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks

2.8. Exposure mode

Column name Exposure mode

Description Exposure modes included in the exposure type

Exposure type Exposure mode

Static Radiography

Stitch Radiography / Stitch

RF Radiography / Fluoro / Cine

Excel input rule
Positioning Fluoro Radiography / Fluoro

Angio DA / DSA / RoadMap / Fluoro

Tomosynthesis (added to
Fluoro / Cine / Tomosynthesis
V2.12 or later)

Essential input
EX2DB verification rule Checks for the consistency between Exposure type and Exposure
mode.

Remarks

254
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.9. Film setting mode

Column name Film setting mode

Description Film setting mode

Excel input rule SystemCommon / Customized

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks

2.10. Film size

Column name Film size

Description Film size (FilmSizeID of the printer)

Excel input rule No. of characters: 64 or less

Film sizes (FilmDefinition.FilmSize) not registered in the DB of the

EX2DB verification rule
import destination are not allowed.

Remarks

2.11. Film orientation

Column name Film orientation

Description Film orientation

Excel input rule Portrait / Landscape

Essential if Film size is specified.

EX2DB verification rule Combinations of film size (FilmDefinition.FilmSize) and film
orientation (FilmDefinition.Orientation) not registered in the DB of
the import destination are not allowed.

Remarks

255
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.12. Film layout cells

Column name Film layout cells

Description Film layout

Excel input rule

Essential input
Layouts other than N x N and N x M are not allowed.
EX2DB verification rule
Numerical values for both the number of rows and the number of
columns: 1 to 10

• Enter the number of rows and the number of columns, using a

comma as the delimiter.
»» Row, Column
• The border width is fixed to 2.
• During importing or upgrading, layouts other than N x N and N x
M are replaced in accordance with the following rules.

If Exposure mode is Radiography or Stitch 1 x 1 (1, 1)

If Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, DA, DSA,

Remarks RoadMap, or Tomosynthesis (added to V2.12
or later) 5 x 5 (5, 5)

If Exposure mode is Fluoro or Cine

If a layout is replaced, the original layout information is added to
the comment of the relevant cell.
If the original layout information cannot be acquired, it is not
added to the comment.
During importing or upgrading, any comments added to cells are
not reflected.

256
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.13. Film image zoom mode

Column name Film image zoom mode

Method for zooming in on images laid out on the film (fit or fixed
Description
magnification ratio)

Excel input rule Fit / FixedRatio

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks

2.14. Film fixed ratio

Column name Film fixed ratio

Specifies the magnification of the images laid out on the film (unit:
Description
%).

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 100

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Film image zoom mode is FixedRatio

Fixed to 100 if Film image zoom mode is Fit and Film fixed ratio is
Remarks
not input (cannot be converted to a numerical value).

2.15. Film layout mode

Column name Film layout mode

Description Method for laying out images on the film

If Exposure mode is not Stitch

• AutoLayout / FixedLayout
Excel input rule
If Exposure mode is Stitch
• FixedLayout

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks

257
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.16. Film crop type

Column name Film crop type

Description Cropping position of images laid out on the film

Excel input rule Top / Middle / Bottom

Essential input only if Exposure mode is Radiography (added to

V2.12 or later).
EX2DB verification rule
If it is not Radiography, the input value is set if it is input, and if none
is input, Top (default value) is set.

Remarks

2.17. Storage crop setting mode

Column name Storage crop setting mode

Description Mode for setting cropping for storage

Excel input rule SystemCommon / Customized

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure type is not Stitch.

Remarks

258
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.18. Storage crop cropping type

Column
Storage crop cropping type
name

Description Method for specifying the cropping area for storage

Exposure type

Other than RF and

RF Angio
Angio

Fixed / AllArea /
Fixed / AllArea /
Radiography CollimatorArea / -
CollimatorArea
SensorReadoutArea

CollimatorArea / CollimatorArea /
Fluoro CollimatorArea
SensorReadoutArea SensorReadoutArea

Excel input
rule CollimatorArea / CollimatorArea /
Cine -
SensorReadoutArea SensorReadoutArea
Exposure
mode
Tomosynthesis
CollimatorArea /
(added to - -
SensorReadoutArea
V2.12 or later)

DA - CollimatorArea -

DSA - CollimatorArea -

RoadMap - CollimatorArea -

Stitch - - -

EX2DB
verification Essential input if Exposure type is not Stitch.
rule

Remarks

2.19. Storage crop cropping position base

Column name Storage crop cropping position base

Description Method for specifying the fixed cropping area for storage

If Exposure type is not Stitch and Exposure mode is Radiography

Excel input rule
AllArea / CollimatorArea

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only for Radiography if Exposure type is not Stitch.

Remarks

259
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.20. Storage crop fixed size

Column name Storage crop fixed size

Description Size of the cropping area for storage

Excel input rule

Essential only for Radiography if Exposure type is not Stitch (added

to V2.12 or later).
The verification rules for Width and Height differ depending on the
setting of Storage crop unit of length.

Storage crop unit of length Verification rule

EX2DB verification rule pixel Integer: lower limit to upper limit

mm Integer: lower limit to upper limit

inch Decimal (two decimal places):

lower limit to upper limit
(For details of the lower limit and the upper limit, refer to Storage
crop in the protocol function edit specification.)

Enter the width and the height, using a comma as the delimiter.
Remarks
Width, Height

2.21. Storage crop alignment

Column name Storage crop alignment

Description Specifies the position of the cropping area for storage.

Excel input rule Top / Middle / Bottom

EX2DB verification rule Essential only for Radiography if Exposure type is not Stitch.

Remarks

2.22. Storage crop unit of length

Column name Storage crop unit of length

Description Specifies the unit of the cropping area for storage.

Excel input rule pixel / inch / mm

EX2DB verification rule Essential only for Radiography if Exposure type is not Stitch.

Remarks

260
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.23. Mask type

(Added to V2.12 or later)

Column name Mask type

Description Shape (type) of the mask

If ExposureType is Stitch or Angio: ExposedArea

Excel input rule
If ExposureType is not Stitch or Angio: ExposedArea / Circle

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

ExposedArea: exposure field

Remarks Circle: circular
For an upgrade, ExposedArea is assumed.

2.24. Mask size

(Added to V2.12 or later)

Column name Mask size

Description Diameter size of the circular mask

Excel input rule Numerical value (decimal): 0 to 999

Essential only if Mask type is Circle.

The verification rules differ depending on the setting of Mask unit of
length.

Mask unit of length Verification rule

EX2DB verification rule
mm Integer: lower limit to upper limit

inch Decimal (two decimal places): lower

limit to upper limit
(For details of the lower limit and the upper limit, refer to 12041-
P4.2.7.2.5-13 in the protocol function edit specification.)

Remarks For an upgrade, blank.

261
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.25. Mask unit of length

(Added to V2.12 or later)

Column name Mask unit of length

Description Sets the unit of the mask area.

Excel input rule mm / inch

EX2DB verification rule Essential only if Mask type is Circle.

Remarks For an upgrade, blank.

2.26. ImageInfo1 customized setting

Column name ImageInfo1 customized setting

Description Setting mode of ImageInfo.1 in the custom field

Excel input rule TRUE / FALSE

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks For System setting, FALSE; for Customized setting, TRUE.

2.27. ImageInfo1 field value

Column name ImageInfo1 field value

Description Item name used for ImageInfo.1 in the custom field

Excel input rule No. of characters: 64 or less

EX2DB verification rule

Null characters are put if, during importing, ImageInfo1 use

Remarks
customized setting is true and ImageInfo1 field value is blank.

262
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.28. ImageInfo1 transfer value

Column name ImageInfo1 transfer value

Description DICOM output value used for ImageInfo.1 in the custom field

Excel input rule No. of characters: 64 or less

EX2DB verification rule

Null characters are put if, during importing, ImageInfo1 use

Remarks
customized setting is true and ImageInfo1 transfer value is blank.

2.29. ImageInfo2 use customized setting

(Added to V2.13 or later)

Column name ImageInfo2 use customized setting

Description Setting mode of ImageInfo.2 in the custom field

Excel input rule TRUE / FALSE

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks For System setting, FALSE; for Customized setting, TRUE.

2.30. ImageInfo2 Field value

Column name ImageInfo2 field value

Description Item name used for ImageInfo.2 in the custom field

Excel input rule No. of characters: 64 or less

EX2DB verification rule

Null characters are put if, during importing, ImageInfo2 use

Remarks
customized setting is true and ImageInfo2 field value is blank.

263
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.31. ImageInfo2 transfer value

Column name ImageInfo2 transfer value

Description DICOM output value used for ImageInfo.2 in the custom field

Excel input rule No. of characters: 64 or less

EX2DB verification rule

Null characters are put if, during importing, ImageInfo2 use

Remarks
customized setting is true and ImageInfo2 transfer value is blank.

2.32. ImageInfo3 customized setting

(Added to V2.13 or later)

Column name ImageInfo3 use customized setting

Description Setting mode of ImageInfo.3 in the custom field

Excel input rule TRUE / FALSE

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks For System setting, FALSE; for Customized setting, TRUE.

2.33. ImageInfo3 Field value

Column name ImageInfo3 field value

Description Item name used for ImageInfo.3 in the custom field

Excel input rule No. of characters: 64 or less

EX2DB verification rule

Null characters are put if, during importing, ImageInfo3 use

Remarks
customized setting is true and ImageInfo3 field value is blank.

264
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.34. ImageInfo3 transfer value

Column name ImageInfo3 transfer value

Description DICOM output value used for ImageInfo.3 in the custom field

Excel input rule No. of characters: 64 or less

EX2DB verification rule

Null characters are put if, during importing, ImageInfo3 use

Remarks
customized setting is true and ImageInfo3 transfer value is blank.

2.35. ImageInfo4 customized setting

(Added to V2.13 or later)

Column name ImageInfo4 customized setting

Description Setting mode of ImageInfo.4 in the custom field

Excel input rule TRUE / FALSE

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks For System setting, FALSE; for Customized setting, TRUE.

2.36. ImageInfo4 field value

(Added to V2.13 or later)

Column name ImageInfo4 field value

Description Item name used for ImageInfo.4 in the custom field

Excel input rule No. of characters: 64 or less

EX2DB verification rule

Null characters are put if, during importing, ImageInfo4 use

Remarks
customized setting is true and ImageInfo4 field value is blank.

265
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.37. ImageInfo4 transfer value

(Added to V2.13 or later)

Column name ImageInfo4 transfer value

Description DICOM output value used for ImageInfo.4 in the custom field

Excel input rule No. of characters: 64 or less

EX2DB verification rule

Null characters are put if, during importing, ImageInfo4 use

Remarks
customized setting is true and ImageInfo4 transfer value is blank.

2.38. Grid type

Column name Grid type

Description Grid/no grid

Excel input rule ON / OFF

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Except for the 40GC and other detectors with embedded grids, be
sure to specify the GridID if Grid type is ON.
If GridID is left blank, the grid is set to None on the UI after
importing. If Grid suppression is ON at this time, the GridInfoID =1
Remarks grid parameter (GridFrequency = 0, GridQuality =0) is transferred
internally. Because this parameter value cannot be used for grid
line suppression, processing is performed with the grid parameter
converted to an appropriate value on the image processing module
side.

2.39. GridID

Column name GridID

Description Number for identifying the grid

Excel input rule Value defined for GridID on the Grid worksheet

EX2DB verification rule If Grid type is OFF, GridID must not have been specified.

If none is input, the default grid is set (None is set on the UI, with
Remarks
GridInfoID = 1, internally).

266
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.40. Exp order

Column name Exp order

Description Imaging order

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 4

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure type is Stitch.

If Exposure mode is Stitch, 0 is specified.

Remarks If Exposure mode is Radiography, the order of the partial images to
capture in a range from 1 to 4 is specified with sequential numbers.

2.41. Flip and rotate

Column name Flip and rotate

Description Flips and rotates images.

Rotate_0 / Rotate_90 / Rotate_180 / Rotate_270 / FlipAndRotate_0

Excel input rule
/ FlipAndRotate_90 / FlipAndRotate_180 / FlipAndRotate_270

Essential input if Exposure mode is not Tomosynthesis (added to

EX2DB verification rule
V2.12 or later).

When the data is imported from Excel files, the following changes
Remarks are made: [Rotate_0] → [FlipAndRotate_0] / [FlipAndRotate_90] →
[Rotate_90].

2.42. Bodypart category

Column name Bodypart category

Description Body part category

If Exposure type is not Stitch or Angio

• ContrastMedium / Skull / Chest_Abdomen / Spine / Rib_Cage /
Excel input rule Pelvis / UpperExtremity / LowerExtremity / Other
If Exposure type is Stitch
• Stitch

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks

267
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.43. Anatomical part

Column name Anatomical part

Description Body part

Bodypart category Anatomical part

Other Unknown

Skull / Ear / Nose Sinus / Nose /

Skull
Mandible

Chest_Abdomen Chest /
Chest / Child Chest / Infant
Child Chest / Infant Chest /
Chest / Abdomen
Abdomen

Cervical Spine / Thoracic Spine

Spine
/ Lumbar Spine

Clavicle / Shoulder / Scapula /

Rib_Cage
Rib / Sternum

Excel input rule Pelvis / Sacrum / Ilium / Coccyx

Pelvis
/ Pubis

Humerus / Elbow / Forearm /

Upper_Extremity
Wrist / Hand

Hip Joint / Femur / Knee / Leg /

Lower_Extremity
Ankle / Foot

Upper Gastrointestinal / Lower

Contrast_Medium Gastrointestinal / Hepato Biliary
Pancreatic / Urinary / Myelo

Unknown / Whole Spine / Full

Stitch
Leg

Unknown / Brain / Chest /

Angiography
Abdomen / Leg / Arm

Essential input if Exposure mode is not Tomosynthesis (added to

EX2DB verification rule
V2.12 or later).

Remarks

268
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.44. Direction

Column name Direction

Description Direction

Excel input rule Other / Front / Lateral

Essential input if Exposure mode is not Tomosynthesis (added to

EX2DB verification rule
V2.12 or later).

Remarks

2.45. Dynamic range adjustment whole region

(Added to V2.12 or later)

Column name Dynamic range adjustment whole region

Flag indicating whether to perform dynamic range adjustment of the

Description
whole region

Excel input rule ON / OFF

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Radiography or Stitch.

Remarks OFF if blank during importing or upgrading

2.46. Dynamic range adjustment whole region effect

(Added to V2.12 or later)

Column name Dynamic range adjustment whole region effect

Description Adjusts the dynamic range for the whole region.

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 20

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Radiography or Stitch.

Remarks 1 if blank during importing or upgrading

269
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.47. Dynamic range adjustment bright region

Column name Dynamic range adjustment bright region

Flag indicating whether to perform dynamic range (bright region)

Description
adjustment

Excel input rule ON / OFF

Essential input if Exposure mode is not Tomosynthesis (added to

EX2DB verification rule
V2.12 or later).

Remarks

2.48. Dynamic range adjustment bright region effect

Column name Dynamic range adjustment bright region effect

Description Dynamic range (bright region) adjustment

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 20

Essential input if Exposure mode is Radiography or Stitch (added to

EX2DB verification rule
V2.12 or later).

Remarks

2.49. Dynamic range adjustment dark region

Column name Dynamic range adjustment dark region

Flag indicating whether to perform dynamic range (dark region)

Description
adjustment

Excel input rule ON / OFF

Essential input if Exposure mode is not Tomosynthesis (added to

EX2DB verification rule
V2.12 or later).

Remarks

270
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.50. Dynamic range adjustment dark region effect

Column name Dynamic range adjustment dark region effect

Description Dynamic range (dark region) adjustment

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 20

Essential input if Exposure mode is not Tomosynthesis (added to

EX2DB verification rule
V2.12 or later).

Remarks

2.51. Enhancement

Column name Enhancement

Description Flag indicating whether to perform enhancement processing

Excel input rule ON / OFF

Essential input if Exposure mode is not Tomosynthesis (added to

EX2DB verification rule
V2.12 or later).

Remarks

2.52. Contrast boost

Column name Contrast boost

Description Contrast boost

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 20

Essential input if Exposure mode is not Tomosynthesis (added to

EX2DB verification rule
V2.12 or later).

Remarks

271
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.53. Edge enhancement

Column name Edge enhancement

Description Edge enhancement

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 20

Essential input if Exposure mode is not Tomosynthesis (added to

EX2DB verification rule
V2.12 or later).

Remarks

2.54. Edge frequency

Column name Edge frequency

Description Edge frequency

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 7

Essential input if Exposure mode is not Tomosynthesis (added to

EX2DB verification rule
V2.12 or later).

Remarks

2.55. Grid suppression

Column name Grid suppression

Description Flag indicating whether to perform grid line suppression

• If Grid type is ON
ON / OFF
Excel input rule
• If Grid type is OFF
OFF

Essential input if Exposure mode is Radiography, Stitch, Fluoro,

EX2DB verification rule
Cine, or DA.

Remarks

272
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.56. Scatter correction

Column name Scatter correction

Description Flag indicating whether to perform scatter correction processing

Excel input rule ON / OFF

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Radiography.

Remarks

2.57. Scatter correction effect

Column name Scatter correction effect

Description Scatter correction processing

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 10

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Radiography.

Remarks

2.58. Scatter correction kernel

Column name Scatter correction kernel

Description Scatter correction kernel parameter index

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 65535

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Radiography.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.59. Scatter correction method

Column name Scatter correction method

Description Scatter correction noise artifact reduction processing

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 2

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Radiography.

Remarks Always hidden.

273
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.60. LUT base brightness

Column name LUT base brightness

Description Base brightness

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 29

Essential input if Exposure mode is not Tomosynthesis (added to

EX2DB verification rule
V2.12 or later).

Remarks

2.61. LUT base contrast

Column name LUT base contrast

Description Base contrast

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 29

Essential input if Exposure mode is not Tomosynthesis (added to

EX2DB verification rule
V2.12 or later).

Remarks

2.62. LUT curve shape

Column name LUT curve shape

Description LUT curve

• If Exposure mode is Radiography or Stitch

SA / SB / SC / LN
Excel input rule
• If Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, DA, DSA, or RoadMap
LN / SS / ST / SU / SV / SW / SX / SY / SZ

Essential input if Exposure mode is not Tomosynthesis (added to

EX2DB verification rule
V2.12 or later).

Remarks

274
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.63. Noise reduction

Column name Noise reduction

Description Flag indicating whether to perform noise reduction

Excel input rule ON / OFF

Essential input if Exposure mode is not Tomosynthesis (added to

EX2DB verification rule
V2.12 or later).

Remarks

2.64. Noise reduction effect

Column name Noise reduction effect

Description Noise reduction processing

• If Exposure mode is Radiography or Stitch

Numerical value: 1 to 20
Excel input rule
• If Exposure mode is DSA or RoadMap
DynamicIPCond.IPCondition. DSA_NoiseReduction_Effect

Essential input if Exposure mode is not Tomosynthesis (added to

EX2DB verification rule
V2.12 or later).

Remarks

2.65. Noise reduction method

Column name Noise reduction method

Description New noise reduction processing

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 2

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Radiography or Stitch.

0 is set for an upgrade from V2.15 or earlier.

Remarks
Always hidden.

275
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.66. Peripheral mask

Column name Peripheral mask

Description Flag for determining whether to display the peripheral mask

Excel input rule ON / OFF

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Radiography or Stitch.

Remarks

2.67. Exposure area analysis

Column name Exposure area analysis

Description Exposure field recognition algorithm

• If Exposure mode is Radiography or Stitch

Numerical value: -5 to 20
Excel input rule • If Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or Tomosynthesis or if
Exposure type is Angio (added to V2.12 or later)
Numerical value: 0 to 65535

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks Always hidden.

2.68. ROI analysis

Column name ROI analysis

Description Automatic brightness adjustment algorithm

• If Exposure mode is Radiography or Stitch

Numerical value: -5 to 20
Excel input rule • If Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or Tomosynthesis or if
Exposure type is Angio (added to V2.12 or later)
Numerical value: 0 to 65535

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks Always hidden.

276
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.69. Clipping

Column name Clipping

Description High-density clipping processing

Excel input rule ON / OFF

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Radiography or Stitch.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.70. Line noise reduction lnr base weight

Column name Line noise reduction lnr base weight

Description Line noise reduction processing effect (70C only)

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.0 to 1.0

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks Always hidden.

2.71. LUT brightness adjustment mode

Column name LUT brightness adjustment mode

Description Brightness adjustment mode

Excel input rule Auto / REX

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Radiography or Stitch.

Remarks

2.72. LUT inverse

Column name LUT inverse

Description

Excel input rule ON / OFF

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks

277
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.73. REX

Column name REX

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 65535

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Radiography or Stitch.

Remarks

2.74. MTF improvement

Column name MTF improvement

Description Sharpness adjustment

Excel input rule ON / OFF

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks Always hidden.

2.75. P-Value brightness of around

Column name P-Value brightness of around

Reflected ambient light of reading room environment at design

Description
stage

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.0 or above

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks Always hidden.

2.76. P-Value brightness of film viewer

Column name P-Value brightness of film viewer

Description Brightness of X-ray film viewer at design stage

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.0 or above

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks Always hidden.

278
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.77. Sharpness adjustment

Column name Sharpness adjustment

Description Flag for determining whether to adjust the sharpness

Excel input rule ON / OFF

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks

2.78. Sharpness adjustment effect

Column name Sharpness adjustment effect

Description Sharpness adjustment

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 3

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks

2.79. Exposure index analysis

Column name Exposure index analysis

Description EI calculation algorithm

Excel input rule Numerical value: -1 to 20

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks Always hidden.

2.80. Saturation analysis

Column name Saturation analysis

Description Saturation detection algorithm

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 20

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks Always hidden.

279
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.81. vscMethod

(Added to V2.11 or later)

Column name vscMethod

Description VS detection artifact correction method

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 5

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Radiography or Stitch.

0 for an upgrade from a sheet V2.10 or earlier.

Remarks
Always hidden.

2.82. DR high limit adjuster

Column name DR high limit adjuster

Maximum effect yielded by high-brightness side dynamic range

Description
adjustment processing

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.0 to 10.0

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.83. DR low limit adjuster

Column name DR low limit adjuster

Maximum effect yielded by low-brightness side dynamic range

Description
adjustment processing

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.0 to 10.0

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

Remarks Always hidden.

280
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.84. DR subject maximum value limit

Column name DR subject maximum value limit

Maximum effect yielded by high-brightness side dynamic range

Description
adjustment processing

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.0 to 10.0

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.85. DR subject minimum value limit

Column name DR subject minimum value limit

Maximum effect yielded by low-brightness side dynamic range

Description
adjustment processing

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.0 to 10.0

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.86. DR frequency balance

Column name DR frequency balance

Description Characteristics of dynamic range adjustment

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 99

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.87. CB low limit adjuster

Column name CB low limit adjuster

Description Maximum effect of contrast boost processing

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.0 to 10.0

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

Remarks Always hidden.

281
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.88. Edge frequency balance

Column name Edge frequency balance

Description Characteristics of edge enhancement

Excel input rule

Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

EX2DB verification rule Number of elements fixed to 7.
Numerical values in the input range for elements: 0 to 99

Values for the 7 elements are input, using commas (,) as delimiters.
Remarks Any elements exceeding the seventh element are ignored.
Always hidden.

2.89. CB frequency balance

Column name CB frequency balance

Description Characteristics of contrast boost

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 99

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.90. Grid frequency

Column name Grid frequency

Description Number of grids

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.1 to 20

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

Remarks Always hidden.

282
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.91. Filter Order

Column name Filter Order

Description

Excel input rule

Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

EX2DB verification rule Number of elements fixed to 2.
Numerical values in the input range for elements: 1 to 7

Values for the 2 elements are input, using commas (,) as delimiters.
Remarks Any elements exceeding the second element are ignored.
Always hidden.

2.92. Discrimination threshold

Column name Discrimination threshold

Description Grid suppression effect

Excel input rule

Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

EX2DB verification rule Number of elements fixed to 2.
Numerical values in the input range for elements: 1 to 15

Values for the 2 elements are input, using commas (,) as delimiters.
Remarks Any elements exceeding the second element are ignored.
Always hidden.

283
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.93. Curve shape pattern

Column name Curve shape pattern

Description Curve shape index

Excel input rule

Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

EX2DB verification rule Number of elements fixed to 9.
Numerical values in the input range for elements: 0 to 99

Values for the 9 elements are input, using commas (,) as delimiters.
Remarks Any elements exceeding the ninth element are ignored.
Always hidden.

2.94. Trim ratio of low value

Column name Trim ratio of low value

Description Ratio for clipping the histograms from the minimum value side

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.0 to 1.0

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.95. Trim ratio of high value

Column name Trim ratio of high value

Description Ratio for clipping the histograms from the maximum value side

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.0 to 1.0

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

Remarks Always hidden.

284
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.96. DR adjustment mode

Column name DR adjustment mode

Description Dynamic range adjustment algorithm

Excel input rule 0/1

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.97. DR inflection value

Column name DR inflection value

Description Inflection point of dynamic range adjustment

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.0 to 1.0

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.98. Brightness optimization

Column name Brightness optimization

Description

Excel input rule ON / OFF

Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, DA, DSA, or

EX2DB verification rule
RoadMap.

Remarks Hidden if no dynamic image protocol (including PF) exists.

2.99. Brightness optimization limiter of low value

Column name Brightness optimization limiter of low value

Description Brightness optimization limiter

Excel input rule Numerical value: -1.0 to 1.0

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

Remarks Always hidden.

285
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.100. Color of low dose

Column name Color of low dose

Description

Excel input rule Black / White

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

Remarks Hidden if no dynamic image protocol (including PF) exists.

2.101. High value adjuster of contrast limit

Column name High value adjuster of contrast limit

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 65535

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.102. Low value adjuster of contrast limit

Column name Low value adjuster of contrast limit

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 65535

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.103. Range compression method

Column name Range compression method

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 1

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

Remarks Always hidden.

286
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.104. Motion correction

Column name Motion correction

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 15

Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, DA, DSA, or

EX2DB verification rule
RoadMap.

Remarks Hidden if no dynamic image protocol (including PF) exists.

2.105. Noise reduction mode

Column name Noise reduction mode

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 4

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.106. Analysis image conversion

Column name Analysis image conversion

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 65535

Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, DA, DSA, or

EX2DB verification rule
RoadMap.

Remarks Always hidden.

287
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.107. Subject analysis

Column name Subject analysis

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 65535

Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, DA, DSA, or

EX2DB verification rule
RoadMap.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.108. Analysis sensitivity

Column name Analysis sensitivity

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 65535

Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, DA, DSA, or

EX2DB verification rule
RoadMap.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.109. Analysis stabilizer

(Added to V2.11 or later)

Column name Analysis stabilizer

Description Analysis value flicker suppression processing

Excel input rule ON / OFF

Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, DA, DSA, or

EX2DB verification rule
RoadMap.

ON for an upgrade from a sheet V2.10 or earlier.

Remarks
Always hidden.

288
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.110. Edge steps of detection

Column name Edge steps of detection

Specifies the strength of the edges detected. A lower value results

in the detection of a lower edge, but increases the possibility of
Description
erroneous detection of noise. For -1, enhancement processing
equivalent to that of a version earlier than V2.0 is performed.

Excel input rule Numerical value: -1 to 65535

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.111. DSA

Column name DSA

Description

Excel input rule TRUE / FALSE

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is DSA or RoadMap.

Remarks Hidden if no XA protocols are registered.

2.112. DSA image max value

Column name DSA image max value

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 65535

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is DSA or RoadMap.

Remarks Always hidden.

289
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.113. DSA image min value

Column name DSA image min value

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 65535

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is DSA or RoadMap.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.114. DSA image ref value

Column name DSA image ref value

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 65535

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is DSA or RoadMap.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.115. DSA pixel shift padding value

Column name DSA pixel shift padding value

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.0 to 1.0

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is DSA or RoadMap.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.116. DSA roadmap mask start no

Column name DSA roadmap mask start no

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 65535

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is RoadMap.

Remarks Always hidden.

290
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.117. DSA roadmap mask end no

Column name DSA roadmap mask end no

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 65535

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is RoadMap.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.118. DSA roadmapping coeff

Column name DSA roadmapping coeff

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.0 to 40.0

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is RoadMap.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.119. DSA roadmapping offset

Column name DSA roadmapping offset

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.0 to 1.0

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is RoadMap.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.120. DSA subtraction mask start no

Column name DSA subtraction mask start no

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 65535

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is DSA or RoadMap.

Remarks Hidden if no XA protocols are registered.

291
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.121. DSA subtraction mask addnum

Column name DSA subtraction mask addnum

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 65535

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is DSA or RoadMap.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.122. DSA subtraction offset

Column name DSA subtraction offset

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.0 to 1.0

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is DSA or RoadMap.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.123. DSA pixel shift x value

Column name DSA pixel shift x value

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: -20 to 20

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is DSA or RoadMap.

Remarks Hidden if no XA protocols are registered.

2.124. DSA pixel shift y value

Column name DSA pixel shift y value

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: -20 to 20

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is DSA or RoadMap.

Remarks Hidden if no XA protocols are registered.

292
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.125. Injection timing

Column name Injection timing

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: -100 to 100

Essential input if Exposure type is Angio and Exposure mode is DA

EX2DB verification rule
or Fluoro.

Remarks Hidden if no XA protocols are registered.

2.126. Tomo auto window ROI size

(Added to V2.12 or later)

Column name Tomo auto window ROI size

Description Auto Window ROI size

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 12

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only if Exposure mode is Tomosynthesis.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.127. Tomo auto window rejection

(Added to V2.12 or later)

Column name Tomo auto window rejection

Description Auto Window histogram rejection area

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.00 to 0.10

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only if Exposure mode is Tomosynthesis.

Remarks Always hidden.

293
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.128. Tomo geometry correction factor

(Added to V2.12 or later)

Column name Tomo geometry correction factor

Description Geometric data correction factor during reconstruction

Excel input rule Numerical value: -20 to 20

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only if Exposure mode is Tomosynthesis.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.129. Tomo noise reduction threshold

(Added to V2.12 or later)

Column name Tomo noise reduction threshold

Description Noise estimation parameter

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 2.0

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only if Exposure mode is Tomosynthesis.

Remarks Always hidden.

2.130. Tomo noise reduction mode

(Added to V2.12 or later)

Column name Tomo noise reduction mode

Description Toggles the noise reduction processing method.

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 1

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only if Exposure mode is Tomosynthesis.

Remarks Always hidden.

294
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.131. Tomo noise reduction level

(Added to V2.12 or later)

Column name Tomo noise reduction level

Description Noise reduction processing decomposition level

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 10

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only if Exposure mode is Tomosynthesis.

Remarks Always displayed.

2.132. Tomo normalization gain

(Added to V2.12 or later)

Column name Tomo normalization gain

Description float-ushort normalization coefficient (Gain)

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.1 to 5.0

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only if Exposure mode is Tomosynthesis.

Remarks Always displayed.

2.133. Tomo normalization offset

(Added to V2.12 or later)

Column name Tomo normalization offset

Description float-ushort normalization coefficient (Offset)

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.1 to 5.0

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only if Exposure mode is Tomosynthesis.

Remarks Always displayed.

295
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.134. Xray storage time

Column name Xray storage time

Description

Excel input rule 200 / 400 / 1000 / 3000

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only if Exposure mode is Radiography.

Depending on the combination of Xray storage time and Static drive

Remarks mode, the entered Xray storage time may not be set as-is, but is
registered in the DB as a corrected value.

2.135. Static drive mode

Column name Static drive mode

Determines whether to enable long exposure for radiographic

Description
images using RF protocols.

Excel input rule Fast / Ultrafast

Essential input only if the detector supports dynamic images,

EX2DB verification rule Exposure type is RF, Stitch, or Positioning Fluoro, and Exposure
mode is Radiography.

Remarks

2.136. EIT

Column name EIT

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 10000

EX2DB verification rule

-1 is set in the database if EIT is not used, but it is left blank if it

Remarks is output to an Excel file. The blank at the reading stage will be
replaced with -1.

296
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.137. Source image receptor distance

Column name Source image receptor distance

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 9999

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks

2.138. Source object distance

Column name Source object distance

Description

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 9999

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks

2.139. APRID

Column name APRID

Description

Excel input rule No. of characters: 2048 or less

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks

297
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.140. Binning

Column name Binning

Description

• If Exposure type is Radiography

_1x1
• If Exposure mode is Fluoro or RoadMap
Excel input rule
_2x2
• If Exposure mode is Cine, DA, DSA, or Tomosynthesis
_1x1/ _2x2 (added to V2.12 or later)

Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro or Cine in a workspace

that uses a detector that performs Ferry communication.
EX2DB verification rule
It is checked whether the Binning size, Sensor area, and FPS
combination is correct.

Remarks

2.141. Sensor area

Column name Sensor area

Description

• If Exposure type is Radiography

_14X17
Excel input rule • If Exposure mode is Cine, Fluoro, DA, DSA, RoadMap, or
Tomosynthesis (added to V2.12 or later)
_14X17/_14X14/ _12X12/ _9x9

Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA in a

workspace that uses a detector that performs Ferry communication.
It is checked whether the Binning, Sensor area, and FPS
EX2DB verification rule
combination is correct.
It is checked whether the Sensor area and ADCROI combination is
correct.

Remarks

298
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.142. FPS

Column name FPS

Description

Excel input rule 0.25 / 0.33 / 0.5 / 1 / 2 / 4 / 5 / 7.5 / 10 / 15 / 20 / 30

Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA in a

workspace that uses a detector that performs Ferry communication.
EX2DB verification rule
It is checked whether the Binning, Sensor area, and FPS
combination is correct.

If Exposure type is Radiography or Tomosynthesis, FPS is fixed to 0,

Remarks and the Excel value is ignored (added to V2.12 or later).
Hidden if no dynamic image protocol (including PF) exists.

2.143. Dose mode

Column name Dose mode

Description

Low_low_Level / Low_Level / Middle_Level / High_Level / High_

Excel input rule
high_Level

EX2DB verification rule

If Exposure type is Radiography, the Excel value is ignored.

Remarks
Hidden if no dynamic image protocol (including PF) exists.

2.144. ADCROI

Column name ADCROI

Description

Excel input rule _14 / _12 / _10 / _8 / _6 / _4 / _2 / _1 / Auto

Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, or DA in a

workspace that uses a detector that performs Ferry communication.
EX2DB verification rule
It is checked whether the Sensor area and ADCROI combination is
correct.

If Exposure mode is Radiography or Tomosynthesis, ADCROI is

fixed to "NULL," and the Excel value is ignored (added to V2.12 or
Remarks later).
Hidden if no dynamic image protocol (including PF) exists.

299
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.145. Detector rotate angle

Column name Detector rotate angle

Description

Excel input rule Angle_0 / Angle_90 / Angle_180 / Angle_270

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks

2.146. Grid direction for detector

Column name Grid direction for detector

Direction of the grid with respect to the detector. This parameter

is used when you perform grid line suppression for dynamic
Description
images. For radiographic images, the direction can be detected
automatically, so this parameter is ignored.

Excel input rule Angle_0 / Angle_90

EX2DB verification rule

If NULL, the grid direction is treated as Angle_90, so Angle_90

must be set for exporting.
Remarks
NULL is set immediately after the first installation or after protocols
are added.

2.147. Use limit of frames in each cine exposure

Column name Use limit of frames in each cine exposure

Description

Excel input rule ON / OFF

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Cine or DA.

Remarks Hidden if no dynamic image protocol (including PF) exists.

300
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.148. Limit of frames in each cine exposure

Column name Limit of frames in each cine exposure

Upper limit on the number of frames to be collected during dynamic

Description
image capturing

Excel input rule Numerical value: 2 or above

Essential input if Exposure mode is Cine or DA.

EX2DB verification rule Value registered in SysSetting [Section=MemoryMng,
Key=CineModeConfig] of the import destination, or less

Depending on whether the import destination setting involves the

use of a live monitor, the value given above is subject to change
(because the distribution of the memory used for dynamic imaging
changes depending on whether the live monitor is ON or OFF).
If the live monitor is ON, the number of frames of the protocols
Remarks registered in the database may exceed the number of frames that
can actually be used. If, in this state, an attempt is made to import
the exported protocol sheet as-is, an error results. In this case,
the protocol sheet can be imported by referencing the error and
correcting the value so that it comes within the specified range.
Hidden if no dynamic image protocol (including PF) exists.

2.149. Auto play setting mode

Column name Auto play setting mode

Description

Excel input rule SystemCommon / Customized

Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, DA, or

EX2DB verification rule
Tomosynthesis (added to V2.12 or later).

Remarks Hidden if no dynamic image protocol (including PF) exists.

2.150. Auto play mode

Column name Auto play mode

Description

Excel input rule NoShow / LIH / AutoPlay

Essential input if Exposure mode is Fluoro, Cine, DA, or

EX2DB verification rule
Tomosynthesis (added to V2.12 or later).

Remarks Hidden if no dynamic image protocol (including PF) exists.

301
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.151. Use stitch free rotation

Column name Use stitch free rotation

Description Determines whether to enable the use of stitch free rotation.

Excel input rule ON / OFF

EX2DB verification rule Essential input if Exposure mode is Stitch.

Remarks During upgrading, all settings are output with "ON."

2.152. Tomo cut off frequency

Column name Tomo cut off frequency

Description Cut off frequency

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.1 to 0.5

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only if Exposure mode is Tomosynthesis.

Remarks Hidden if no Tomosynthesis protocols are registered.

2.153. Tomo reconstruction filter type

Column name Tomo reconstruction filter type

Description Reconstruction filter type

Excel input rule Chesler / Shepp&Logan / RAMP / None

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only if Exposure mode is Tomosynthesis.

Remarks Hidden if no Tomosynthesis protocols are registered.

2.154. Tomo reconstruction filter DC

Column name Tomo reconstruction filter DC

Description Reconstruction filter DC component

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.000 to 0.020

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only if Exposure mode is Tomosynthesis.

Remarks Hidden if no Tomosynthesis protocols are registered.

302
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.155. Tomo table operation type

Column name Tomo table operation type

Description Table operation type

Excel input rule D2RS / CINC_Jigu

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only if Exposure mode is Tomosynthesis.

Remarks Hidden if no Tomosynthesis protocols are registered.

2.156. Tomo reconstruction method

Column name Tomo reconstruction method

Description Reconstruction method

Excel input rule FilteredBackProjection / ShiftAdd

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only if Exposure mode is Tomosynthesis.

Remarks Hidden if no Tomosynthesis protocols are registered.

2.157. Tomo number of slices

Column name Tomo number of slices

Description Number of slices

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 300

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only if Exposure mode is Tomosynthesis.

Remarks Hidden if no Tomosynthesis protocols are registered.

2.158. Tomo slice pitch

Column name Tomo slice pitch

Description Slice pitch

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.1 to 10000.0

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only if Exposure mode is Tomosynthesis.

Remarks Hidden if no Tomosynthesis protocols are registered.

303
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.159. Tomo use geometry data

Column name Tomo use geometry data

Description Determines whether to use geometry data.

Excel input rule TRUE / FALSE

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only if Exposure mode is Tomosynthesis.

Remarks Hidden if no Tomosynthesis protocols are registered.

2.160. Tomo rec window gain

Column name Tomo rec window gain

Description Amplification value of window adjustment

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.1 to 5.0

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only if Exposure mode is Tomosynthesis.

Remarks Hidden if no Tomosynthesis protocols are registered.

2.161. Tomo window offset

Column name Tomo window offset

Description Correction value of window adjustment

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.1 to 5.0

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only if Exposure mode is Tomosynthesis.

Remarks Hidden if no Tomosynthesis protocols are registered.

2.162. Tomo do noise reduction

Column name Tomo do noise reduction

Description Turns noise reduction ON and OFF.

Excel input rule ON / OFF

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only if Exposure mode is Tomosynthesis.

Remarks Hidden if no Tomosynthesis protocols are registered.

304
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.163. Tomo noise reduction base weight

Column name Tomo noise reduction base weight

Description Noise reduction processing effect

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0.167 to 0.667

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only if Exposure mode is Tomosynthesis.

Remarks Hidden if no Tomosynthesis protocols are registered.

2.164. Boundary correction protocol setting

Column name Boundary correction protocol setting

Determines whether to use the protocol settings of structural

Description
reduction processing.

Excel input rule ON / OFF

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks Always hidden.

2.165. Upper boundary correction mode

Column name Upper boundary correction mode

Description Structural reduction setting (Upper) mode

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 5

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks Always hidden.

2.166. Upper boundary correction effect

Column name Upper boundary correction effect

Description Structural reduction setting (Upper)

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 10

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks Always hidden.

305
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.167. Lower boundary correction mode

Column name Lower boundary correction mode

Description Structural reduction setting (Lower) mode

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 5

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks Always hidden.

2.168. Lower boundary correction effect

Column name Lower boundary correction effect

Description Structural reduction setting (Lower)

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 10

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks Always hidden.

306
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.169. Candidate replacement protocols

Column name Candidate replacement protocols

Description Candidate replacement protocol list

Excel input rule

GroupID-PositionX-PositionY format (example: 1-1-1, 2-1-2, 3-2-1)

GroupID:
Value defined for the ProtocolWorkspace sheet.Group ID
column.
Static for the ExposureType column of the PW that has the
relevant GroupID
PositionX:
EX2DB verification rule
Numerical value 0 to 3
PositionY:
Numerical value 0 to 11
If multiple values are set, the following verifications are also
performed.
• All GroupIDs are unique.
• All PositionX and PositionY combinations are unique.

Remarks To set multiple values, separate each with a comma (,).

2.170. Short cut of replacement protocol

Column name Short cut of replacement protocol

Description Sets a replacement protocol short cut.

Excel input rule Value defined for the ProtocolWorkspace sheet.Group ID column.

EX2DB verification rule The Group ID must be set in Candidate replacement protocols.

Remarks

307
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. Prepack worksheet

3.1. Group ID

Column name Group ID

Description Number indicating the prepack protocol group

Excel input rule Integer value of 0 or above

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

The Group ID is added to prepack protocols including dynamic

image protocols.
Any items that have the same Group ID are registered as a single
prepack protocol.
Group ID, Prepack name, Protocol workspace...
Remarks Line 1: 0, Test Prepack ProtocolA, 1...
Line 2: 0, Test Prepack ProtocolA, 2...
Line 3: 1, Test Prepack ProtocolB, 1...
Line 4: 1, Test Prepack ProtocolB, 3...
A single prepack protocol is set in lines 1 and 2, and another one is
set in lines 3 and 4.

3.2. Prepack name

Column name Prepack name

Description Prepack protocol name

Excel input rule No. of characters: 64 or less

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks

308
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.3. Comment

Column name Comment

Description Comment to add to the prepack protocol

Excel input rule No. of characters: 128 or less

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks

3.4. Code value

Column name Code value

Description Code value for the prepack protocol

None
Excel input rule
* To set multiple values, separate each with a comma (,).

No. of characters: 64 or less; duplicates not allowed (added to V2.14

or later).
* When multiple values are set, an import error occurs if they include a value with
no characters.
If the value includes trailing spaces
EX2DB verification rule The trailing spaces are removed before the data is imported (added
to V2.12 or later).Processing results are logged (added to V2.14 or
later).An import error occurs if any value contains a backslash (¥)
(added to V2.12 or later).
If more than 50 values are set for a single prepack protocol, an
import error occurs (added to V2.12 or later).

Remarks

3.5. Protocol workspace

Column name Protocol workspace

Description

Excel input rule Value defined for the ProtocolWorkspace sheet.Group ID column.

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks

309
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.6. Protocol Order

Column name ProtocolOrder

Description Order of protocols inside the prepack protocol

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 30

EX2DB verification rule

If there are any missing protocols or the protocols are not arranged
in ascending order, they are rearranged in ascending order and
Remarks moved forward.
EX: 1, 30, 10 → 1, 2(10), 3(30)

310
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. Button layout worksheet

4.1. Tray name

Column name Tray name

Name of the tab on which the protocol buttons of the CCS main unit
Description
are laid out

Excel input rule No. of characters: 64 or less

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks

4.2. Tray order

Column name Tray order

Description Order of tabs on which the protocol buttons are laid out

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 50

EX2DB verification rule Tray order, PositionX, or PositionY duplicates not allowed.

Remarks

4.3. PositionX

Column name PositionX

Description Layout position of buttons on the horizontal axis on tabs

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 3

EX2DB verification rule Tray order, PositionX, or PositionY duplicates not allowed.

Remarks

311
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.4. PositionY

Column name PositionY

Description Layout position of buttons on the vertical axis on tabs

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 11

EX2DB verification rule Tray order, PositionX, or PositionY duplicates not allowed.

Remarks

4.5. Protocol workspace

Column name Protocol workspace

Description ID indicating the protocol to be laid out

Excel input rule Value defined for the ProtocolWorkspace sheet.Group ID column.

EX2DB verification rule The value can be set only for either Protocol workspace or Prepack.

Remarks

4.6. Prepack

Column name Prepack

Description ID indicating the protocol to be laid out

Excel input rule Value defined for the Prepack sheet.Group ID column.

EX2DB verification rule The value can be set only for either Protocol workspace or Prepack.

Remarks

312
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

5. Grid worksheet

5.1. GridID

Column name GridID

Description Grid ID

Excel input rule No. of characters: 4

Essential input
EX2DB verification rule Only hexadecimal characters allowed.
Duplicates not allowed.

Remarks

5.2. Grid name

Column name Grid name

Description Grid name

Excel input rule No. of characters: 128 or less

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks

5.3. Frequency

Column name Frequency

Description Grid frequency

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 to 20

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks

313
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

5.4. Quality

Column name Quality

Description Grid quality

Excel input rule Numerical value: 1 to 3

EX2DB verification rule

Remarks

314
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

6. Workspace worksheet

6.1. Group ID

Column name Group ID

Description Identification number allocated to each workspace

Excel input rule Numerical value: 0 or above

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Any items that have the same Group ID are registered as a single
workspace.
Group ID, Workspace name, Position type, Exposure mode...
Line 1: 0, Test RF Workspace, Table, Radiography...
Line 2: 0, Test RF Workspace, Table, Fluoro...
Remarks
Line 3: 0, Test RF Workspace, Table, Cine...
Line 4: 1, Test Static Workspace, Cassette, Radiography...
Line 5: 2, Test Wireless Workspace, Cassette, Radiography...
A single workspace is set in lines 1 to 3, and another one is set in
lines 4 and 5 each.

6.2. Workspace name

Column name Workspace name

Description Workspace name

Excel input rule No. of characters: 64 or less

Essential input
Duplicates not allowed (added to V2.12 or later).

EX2DB verification rule If the value includes trailing spaces (added to V2.12 or later)
• The trailing spaces are removed before the data is imported
(added to V2.14 or later).
• Processing results are logged.

Remarks

315
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

6.3. Position type

Column name Position type

Description Workspace position setting (posture)

Excel input rule Cassette / Stand / Table / Universal

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks

6.4. Workspace color

(Added to V2.12 or later)

Column name Workspace color

Description Sets the workspace color.

Excel input rule Green / LightBlue / Purple / Orange

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only if Position type is Cassette.

In Excel, the cell color is switched according to the selected color.

The default values during upgrading are as follows:

Position type Default value

Remarks Table (Blank)

Stand (Blank)

Universal (Blank)

Cassette Green

316
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

6.5. Detector group

Column name Detector group

Description Detector group of the detector used with the workspace

Group definition character string defined for Detector group on the

Excel input rule
Detector catalog worksheet

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

An error results during importing if a detector group that does not

exist at the import destination is specified.
Remarks
In this case, the detector catalog must be registered beforehand in
the system at the import destination.

6.6. Exposure mode

Column name Exposure mode

Exposure mode to which to apply the setting of the cropping area

Description
for storage

Excel input rule Radiography / Cine / Fluoro

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks

6.7. Storage crop cropping type

Column name Storage crop cropping type

Description Method for specifying the cropping area for storage

• If Exposure mode is Radiography

Fixed / AllArea / CollimatorArea
Excel input rule
• If Exposure mode is Fluoro or Cine
CollimatorArea / SensorReadoutArea

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks

317
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

6.8. Storage crop cropping position base

Column name Storage crop cropping position base

Description Method for specifying the fixed cropping area for storage

• If Exposure mode is Radiography

Excel input rule
AllArea / CollimatorArea

EX2DB verification rule Essential input only for Radiography.

Remarks

6.9. Storage crop fixed size

Column name Storage crop fixed size

Description Size of the cropping area for storage

Excel input rule

Essential only for Radiography.

The upper limit differs depending on the setting of Storage crop unit
of length.
EX2DB verification rule
pixel: 9999
mm: 999
inch: 99.99

Enter the width and the height, using a comma (,) as the delimiter.
Remarks
Width, Height

6.10. Storage crop alignment

Column name Storage crop alignment

Description Specifies the position of the cropping area for storage.

Excel input rule Top / Middle / Bottom

EX2DB verification rule Essential only for Radiography.

Remarks

318
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

6.11. Storage crop unit of length

Column name Storage crop unit of length

Description Sets the unit of the cropping area for storage.

Excel input rule pixel / inch / mm

EX2DB verification rule Essential only for Radiography.

Remarks

319
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

7. Detector catalog worksheet

7.1. Model name

Column name Model name

Description Detector model name

Excel input rule No. of characters: 64 or less

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Input support sheet.

Remarks At the input verification stage, this sheet is not subject to the input
verification because DB values are used.

7.2. Detector group

Column name Detector group

Description Detector group to which the detector belongs

Excel input rule No. of characters: 64 or less

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks

7.3. Supported dynamic exposure

Column name Supported dynamic exposure

Description Flag indicating whether dynamic imaging is supported

Excel input rule TRUE / FALSE

EX2DB verification rule Essential input

Remarks

320
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Appendix 2: CCR2EX Protocol Sheet Conversion Function

Specifications

1. Protocol sheet conversion rules

Protocol sheets to be created from CCR files are divided into the types of information listed
below.
• Protocol information
• Protocol workspace information
• Prepack information
• Grid information
• Workspace information
• Workspace detector map information
• System information
• Detector catalog information

1.1. Protocol information

The data items that each type of information has, as well as the rules for conversion to settings,
are as described below.

Column name Description Version supported

Protocol name Protocol name

Comment Comment associated with the protocol

Mark Laterality marker

Mark interlock Laterality

Code value Code value

Code meaning Code meaning

Modality Modality type

DICOM BodyPart Body part to examine

Patient orientation Patient orientation

View position View position

Laterality Laterality

321
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.1.1. Protocol name

Column name Protocol name

Description Protocol name

Blanks not allowed, character string of 64 or fewer characters,

Input-related conditions
and duplicates not allowed (protocol sheets only).

PartPramName of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]

Acquisition source
section

Conversion rule The value of the acquisition source is copied.

Remarks -

1.1.2. Comment

Column name Comment

Description Comment associated with the protocol

Input-related conditions Character string of 128 or fewer characters

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to blank.

Remarks -

1.1.3. Mark

Column name Mark

Description Laterality marker

Input-related conditions "L" or "R" or "B" or "U"

Acquisition source Laterality of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

Acquired value Setting

0 U

Conversion rule 1 R

2 L

3 B

Remarks -

322
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.1.4. Mark interlock

Column name Mark interlock

Setting that indicates whether to link the laterality marker with

Description
Laterality (0020, 0062)

Input-related conditions "TRUE" or "FALSE"

Acquisition source LinkOrient of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

Acquired value Setting

Conversion rule 1 TRUE

Other FALSE

When the CR outputs of storage are set, this is set to Laterality

Remarks
(0020, 0060), not to Image Laterality.

1.1.5. Code value

Column name Code value

Description Code value associated with the protocol

Character string of 32 or fewer characters; duplicates not

Input-related conditions
allowed.

Acquisition source RisProtclID of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

Conversion rule The value of the acquisition source is copied.

In EX2DB V2.10 or later, changes are made so that the Code

Remarks
value on the Protocol workspace is used.

1.1.6. Code meaning

Column name Code meaning

Description Code meaning associated with the protocol

Input-related conditions Character string of 64 or fewer characters

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to blank.

In EX2DB V2.10 or later, changes are made so that the Code

Remarks
meaning on the Protocol workspace is used.

323
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.1.7. Modality

Column name Modality

Description Protocol modality type

Input-related conditions -

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to "DX."

Remarks -

1.1.8. DICOM BodyPart

Column name DICOM BodyPart

Code of the body part to examine that is set in Body Part

Description
Examined (0018, 0015) of the DICOM output

Blanks not allowed, only values defined by DICOM as Body Part

Input-related conditions
Examined.

BodyPartCode of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]

Acquisition source
section

Acquired value Setting

1 ABDOMEN

2 SKULL

3 CSPINE

4 TSPINE

5 LSPINE

6 COCCYX

Conversion rule 7 CHEST

8 CLAVICLE

9 BREAST

10 ABDOMEN

11 PELVIS

12 HIP

13 SHOULDER

14 ELBOW

324
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Acquired value Setting

15 KNEE

16 ANKLE

17 HAND

18 FOOT

19 EXTREMITY
Conversion rule
20 HEAD

21 HEART

22 NECK

23 LEG

24 ARM

25 JAW

Remarks -

325
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.1.9. Patient orientation

Column name Patient orientation

Information about patient orientation that is set in Patient

Description
Orientation (0020, 0020) of the DICOM output

Input-related conditions Values defined by DICOM as Patient Orientation

(1) Patient_Orientation of ccrnvst.ini file [TRANS] section

(2) Parameter value PO of IpMiscString of BodyPart.ini file
[BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section
(3) PO of MenuPara.ini file [PATIENT_ORIENTATION] section
Acquisition source
(4) BodyPartCode of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]
section
(5) ViewPosCode of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]
section

Table of patterns of settings based on the acquisition source

PO ((4), (5))
(3) value (2) value Setting
value of (3)

0 - - "L¥F"

Value The (2) value is set as-

-
available is.

Value corresponding to
Value
the PO ((4), (5)) value
Other available
Value not of (3) is set.
available Refer to the table of
Value not
patterns of settings
available
based on the (4) value.
Conversion rule
Table of patterns of settings based on the (4) value

(4) value Setting

1 "L¥F"

2 "L¥F"

3 "A¥F"

4 "A¥F"

7 "AL¥F"

8 "AL¥F"

Other "L¥F"

Remarks -

326
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.1.10. View position

Column name View position

Information about the view position that is set in View Position

Description
(0018, 5101) of the DICOM output

Input-related conditions Value defined by DICOM as View Position

ViewPosCode of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]

Acquisition source
section

Acquired value Setting

0 Blank

1 AP

2 PA

3 LL
Conversion rule
4 RL

5 RLD

6 LLD

7 RLO

8 LLO

Remarks -

327
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.1.11. Laterality

Column name Laterality

Laterality information that is set in Image Laterality (0020, 0062)

Description
of the DICOM output

Input-related conditions "L" or "R" or "B" or "U"

LinkOrient or Laterality of BodyPart.ini file

Acquisition source
[BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

LinkOrient value Laterality value Setting

1 - U

0 U
Conversion rule
1 R
0
2 L

3 B

When the CR outputs of storage are set, this is set to Laterality

Remarks (0020, 0060), not to Image Laterality.
If Mark interlock is TRUE, the Mark setting is output to DICOM.

1.2. Protocol workspace information

Version
Column name Description
supported

Group ID Group ID of the protocol workspace

Protocol name Protocol name

Workspace name Workspace name

Code value Code value V2.10

Code meaning Code meaning V2.10

Tray name Tray name

Tray order Tray number

X coordinate of the protocol button

PositionX
position on the tray

Y coordinate of the protocol button

PositionY
position on the tray

IsDefault Default workspace setting

328
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Exposure type Exposure type

Exposure mode Exposure mode

Film setting mode Film setting mode

Film size Film size

Film orientation Film orientation

Film layout cells Film partition layout

Film image zoom mode Film fit style

Film fixed ratio Fixed magnification ratio for the film

Film layout mode Film layout mode

Film crop type Film cropping position alignment

Storage crop setting mode Cropping area setting

Storage crop cropping type Initial area of the cropping area

Storage crop fixed size Fixed size of the cropping area

Storage crop alignment Cropping area position alignment

Storage crop unit of length Unit for the fixed size of the cropping area

Grid type Grid/no grid

GridID Grid ID

Sequence for capturing source images for

Exp order
stitching

Flip and rotate static Flipping/rotation setting

Area analysis Exposure field recognition

Index analysis EI calculation algorithm

Automatic brightness adjustment

ROI analysis
algorithm

Saturation analysis Saturation detection algorithm

Bodypart category Anatomical part category

Anatomical part Anatomical part

Direction Anatomical part orientation

Clipping Clipping processing

Dynamic range adjustment bright Dynamic range adjustment processing

region (bright region) setting

Dynamic range adjustment bright Dynamic range adjustment processing

region effect (bright region)

329
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Dynamic range adjustment dark Dynamic range adjustment processing

region (dark region) setting

Dynamic range adjustment dark Dynamic range adjustment processing

region effect (dark region)

Enhancement Enhancement processing setting

Contrast boost Contrast boost

Edge enhancement Edge enhancement

Edge frequency Edge frequency

Grid suppression Grid line suppression

Line noise reduction Inr base weight Line noise reduction processing effect

LUT base brightness Base brightness

LUT base contrast Base contrast

LUT adjustment mode Brightness adjustment mode

LUT curve shape Type of LUT curve

LUT inverse Negative/positive inversion

LUT REX REX value

MTF improvement MTF improvement processing

Noise reduction Noise reduction processing

Noise reduction effect Noise reduction processing effect

Peripheral mask Peripheral mask processing

P-Value brightness of around Reflected ambient light

P-Value brightness of film viewer Brightness of X-ray film viewer

Xray storage time X-ray storage time

EIT EIT value

Source image receptor distance Source imaging receptor distance

Source object distance Source object distance

APRID APRID

Sharpness adjustment Sharpness adjustment V2.00

Sharpness adjustment effect Sharpness adjustment effect V2.00

Dynamic range adjustment whole Dynamic range adjustment processing V2.10

region (whole region) setting

Dynamic range adjustment whole Dynamic range adjustment processing V2.10

region effect (whole region)

330
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.1. Group ID

Column name Group ID

Description Number generated for each protocol name + workspace

Input-related
Integers; blanks not allowed.
conditions

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule A number is generated internally for each protocol name + workspace.

Remarks -

1.2.2. Protocol name

Column name Protocol name

Description Protocol name

Input-related Blanks not allowed, character string of 64 or fewer characters,

conditions duplicates allowed.

Acquisition source PartPramName of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

Conversion rule The value of the acquisition source is copied.

Remarks -

331
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.3. Workspace name

Column name Workspace name

Description Workspace name

Input-related
Blanks not allowed, character string of 64 or fewer characters.
conditions

(1) SensorType of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartMenu] section

Acquisition source (2) A/D_Bd_Serial_Number of ccrnvst.ini file [SCAN¥CAPTDEVS_X]
section

"Setting A" + "_" + "Setting B" is set. Setting A and Setting B are as
described below.
• Setting A

Value of (1) Setting A

Conversion rule 0 Stand

1 Table

2 Universal

3 Cassette

332
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• Setting B
Based on the value of the two higher digits resulting from first
converting value of (2) into a hexadecimal value and then padding it
with zeros to form an 8-digit value.
* If the value of the two higher digits is 1A or 1B, setting B is based on the value of
(3).

Value of the two

Value of (3) Setting B
higher digits

01 CXDI11

03 CXDI11

02 CXDI12

04 CXDI22

05 CXDI31

07 CXDI40EG

08 CXDI40EC
Conversion rule
10 CXDI50G

11 CXDI50G

12 CXDI50C

13 CXDI60G

14 CXDI55G

15 CXDI40GCompact

16 CXDI55C

17 CXDI60C

26 CXDI401G

27 CXDI401C
1A or 1B
28 CXDI401GCompact

29 CXDI401CCompact

If the same workspace name exists, an Index is added to the end of

Remarks
the workspace name.

333
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.4. Code value

Column name Code value

Description Code value associated with the workspace of the protocol

Character string of 32 or fewer characters; duplicates not allowed

Input-related conditions
(CodeValue on the protocol sheet excluded from the conditions).

Acquisition source RisProtclID of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

Conversion rule The value of the acquisition source is copied.

Duplicates of CodeValue inside protocol workspaces or prepack

Remarks
protocols are not allowed.

1.2.5. Code meaning

Column name Code meaning

Description Code meaning associated with the protocol

Input-related conditions -

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to blank.

Remarks -

1.2.6. Tray name

Column name Tray name

Description Name of the tray on which protocols are laid out

Input-related conditions Character string of 64 or fewer characters

Acquisition source BodyPartName of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX] section

Conversion rule "Acquisition source value" + "_" + "Workspace name" is set.

Remarks -

334
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.7. Tray order

Column name Tray order

Description Tray number corresponding to the tray name

Input-related conditions Integer value (1 to 50)

Acquisition source BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX] section

A number is generated for each [BodyPartX] section name of

Conversion rule
each BodyPart.ini file.

If the tray name is set, blanks are not allowed, and if no tray
Remarks
name is set, blanks are set.

1.2.8. PositionX

Column name PositionX

Description X coordinate of the protocol button position on the tray

Input-related conditions Integer value (0 to 3)

Acquisition source TrayPosT of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

Conversion rule (Acquisition source value - 1)%4

If the tray name is set, blanks are not allowed, and if no tray
Remarks
name is set, blanks are set.

1.2.9. PositionY

Column name PositionY

Description Y coordinate of the protocol button position on the tray

Input-related conditions Integer value (0 to 11)

Acquisition source TrayPosT of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

Conversion rule (Acquisition source value - 1)/4

If the tray name is set, blanks are not allowed, and if no tray
Remarks
name is set, blanks are set.

335
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.10. IsDefault

Column name IsDefault

This identifies the default workspace with the same protocol

Description
name.

Input-related conditions "TRUE" or "FALSE"

Acquisition source -

"TRUE" is set for the data found first with the same protocol
Conversion rule
name; and "FALSE" is set in other cases.

Remarks -

1.2.11. Exposure type

Column name Exposure type

Description Exposure type

Input-related conditions -

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to "Static."

Remarks -

1.2.12. Exposure mode

Column name Exposure mode

Description Exposure mode

Input-related conditions -

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to "Radiography."

Remarks -

336
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.13. Film setting mode

Column name Film setting mode

Description Film setting mode

Input-related conditions "SystemCommon" or "Customized"

PsUseSysInfo of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]

Acquisition source
section

Acquired value Setting

Conversion rule 1 "SystemCommon"

Other "Customized"

Remarks -

1.2.14. Film size

Column name Film size

Description Film size

Input-related conditions Character string of 64 or fewer characters

PsFilmSizeID of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]

Acquisition source
section

337
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Acquired value Setting

14x17in 14INX17IN

14x14in 14INX14IN

A3 A3

11x17in 11INX17IN

11x14in 11INX14IN

10x14in 10INX14IN
Conversion rule 10x12in 10INX12IN

24x30cm 24CMX30CM

A4 A4

8.5x11in 8.5INX11IN

24x24cm 24CMX24CM

8x10in 8INX10IN

The value of the acquisition

Other
source is copied.

The printer catalog with the film size concerned must have been
Remarks
registered in the DB where the values are to be converted.

1.2.15. Film orientation

Column name Film orientation

Description Film orientation

Input-related conditions "None" or "Portrait" or "Landscape"

PsOrientation of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]

Acquisition source
section

Acquired value Setting

0 Portrait
Conversion rule
1 Landscape
Cases where the acquired value is not 0 or 1 are treated as
exceptions.

The printer catalog with the film orientation concerned must have
Remarks
been registered in the DB where the values are to be converted.

338
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.16. Film layout cells

Column name Film layout cells

Description Film partition layout

Input-related conditions Blanks not allowed.

(1) PsMultiFormatLR of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]

section
Acquisition source
(2) PsMultiFormatTB of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]
section

Conversion rule Value (1) + "X" + value (2) is set.

Remarks -

1.2.17. Film image zoom mode

Column name Film image zoom mode

Description Film fit style

Input-related conditions "FixedRatio" or "Fit"

(1) PsPrintMode of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]

section
Acquisition source
(2) PsHandlingBit of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]
section

Value (1) Value (2) Setting

17 FixedRatio
LIFESIZE_MODE
Conversion rule Other FixedRatio

17 Fit
Other
Other FixedRatio

Remarks -

339
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.18. Film fixed ratio

Column name Film fixed ratio

Description Fixed magnification ratio for the film

Input-related conditions Integer (1 to 100); blanks not allowed.

(1) PsPrintMode of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]

section
(2) PsHandlingBit of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]
Acquisition source
section
(3) PsMnifyReq of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]
section

Value (1) Value (2) Setting

17 100
LIFESIZE_MODE
Conversion rule Other Value (3)

17 100
Other
Other 100

Remarks -

1.2.19. Film layout mode

Column name Film layout mode

Description Film layout mode

Input-related conditions "FixedLayout" or "AutoLayout"

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to "FixedLayout."

Remarks -

1.2.20. Film crop type

Column name Film crop type

Description Film cropping position alignment

Input-related conditions "Top" or "Middle" or "Bottom"

340
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(1) PsUseSysInfo of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]

section
(2) PsHandlingBit of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]
Acquisition source
section
(3) ARLIGN_REQX of MenuPara.ini file [PRINT_HANDLING]
section

If value (1) is 1, the "value (2) & 0x000000F0" result is set as the
acquired value.
If value (1) is other than the above, value (3) is set as the
acquired value.

Conversion rule Acquired value Setting

16 "Top"

32 "Middle"

48 "Bottom"

Remarks -

1.2.21. Storage crop setting mode

Column name Storage crop setting mode

Description Cropping area setting

Input-related conditions "SystemCommon" or "Customized"

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to "Customized."

Remarks -

1.2.22. Storage crop cropping type

Column name Storage crop cropping type

Description Initial area of the cropping area

Input-related conditions "Fixed" or "CollimatorArea" or "AllArea"

Acquisition source IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

IpString value Setting

Conversion rule PTR exists. "Fixed"

PTR does not exist. "CollimatorArea"

Remarks -

341
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.23. Storage crop fixed size

Column name Storage crop fixed size

Description Fixed size of the cropping area

Integer + "," + integer format. The integers are in the range of 64

Input-related conditions
and above (dependent on SensorSize and UnitOFLength).

Acquisition source IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

IpString value Setting

3rd parameter value of PTR + ","

Conversion rule PTR exists.
+ 4th parameter value of PTR

PTR does not exist. 64, 64

Remarks -

1.2.24. Storage crop alignment

Column name Storage crop alignment

Description Cropping area position alignment

Input-related conditions "Top" or "Middle" or "Bottom"

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to "Middle."

Remarks -

1.2.25. Storage crop unit of length

Column name Storage crop unit of length

Description Unit for the fixed size of the cropping area

Input-related conditions "pixel" or "inch" or "mm"

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to "pixel."

Remarks -

342
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.26. Grid type

Column name Grid type

Description Grid/no grid

Input-related conditions "ON" or "OFF"

(1) GridParam of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]

Acquisition source section
(2) GridParamSnsIdx of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartMenu] section

1st parameter 2nd parameter 2nd parameter

Setting
value of (1) value of (2) value of (1)

0 or 1 - "ON"
Conversion rule 1
Other - "OFF"

- 0 or 1 "ON"
Other
- Other "OFF"

Remarks -

1.2.27. GridID

Column
GridID
name

Description Grid ID

Input-
Character string. Blank or hexadecimal value resulting from padding the left
related
side with zeros.
conditions

Acquisition (1) GridParam of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

source (2) GridParamSnsIdx of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartMenu] section

343
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1st 2nd 3rd 2nd 3rd

parameter parameter parameter parameter parameter Setting
value of (1) value of (2) value of (2) value of (1) value of (1)

4th
parameter
1 - -
0 or 1 value of
1 (2)
Conversion Other - - "0004"
rule
Other - - - Blank

4th
1 parameter
- - 0 or 1 value of (1)
Other
Other "0004"

- - Other - Blank

Remarks -

1.2.28. Exp order

Column name Exp order

Description Sequence for capturing source images for stitching

Input-related conditions -

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to blank.

Remarks -

1.2.29. Flip and rotate static

Column name Flip and rotate static

Description Flipping/rotation setting

Input-related
("Rotate" or "FlipAndRotate") + "_" + angle (0, 90, 180, or 270)
conditions

Acquisition source IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

344
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

FLP parameter value ROT parameter value

Setting
of the IpString value of the IpString value

0 "Rotate_0"

4 "Rotate_90"
1
5 "Rotate_180"
Conversion rule
6 "Rotate_270"

0 "FlipAndRotate_0"

4 "FlipAndRotate_90"
Other
5 "FlipAndRotate_180"

6 "FlipAndRotate_270"

Remarks -

1.2.30. Area analysis

Column name Area analysis

Description Exposure field recognition algorithm

Input-related conditions Integer (-1 to 20)

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule -

Remarks -

1.2.31. Index analysis

Column name Index analysis

Description EI calculation algorithm

Input-related conditions Integer (-1 to 20)

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule -

Remarks -

345
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.32. ROI analysis

Column name ROI analysis

Description Automatic brightness adjustment algorithm

Input-related conditions Integer (0 to 20)

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule -

Remarks -

1.2.33. Saturation analysis

Column name Saturation analysis

Description Saturation detection algorithm

Input-related conditions Integer (0 to 20)

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule -

Remarks -

1.2.34. Bodypart category

Column name Bodypart category

Description Anatomical part category

Input-related conditions One of the values listed in Conversion rule below

Acquisition source IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

346
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1st parameter value of

Setting
BPC of IpString value

0 Other

1 Chest_Abdomen

2 Chest_Abdomen

3 Skull

4 Spine

5 Spine

6 Spine

7 Pelvis

8 Pelvis

9 Pelvis

10 LowerExtremity

11 LowerExtremity

12 LowerExtremity

13 LowerExtremity
Conversion rule
14 LowerExtremity

15 LowerExtremity

16 Rib_Cage

17 Rib_Cage

18 UpperExtremity

19 UpperExtremity

20 UpperExtremity

21 UpperExtremity

22 UpperExtremity

23 Other

24 Other

25 Other

26 Rib_Cage

27 Chest_Abdomen

28 Spine

347
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1st parameter value of

Setting
BPC of IpString value

29 Spine

30 LowerExtremity

31 LowerExtremity

32 LowerExtremity

33 UpperExtremity

34 UpperExtremity

35 UpperExtremity

36 Spine

37 Spine

38 Chest_Abdomen

39 Rib_Cage

40 Pelvis

41 Pelvis

42 Pelvis
Conversion rule
43 LowerExtremity

44 LowerExtremity

45 LowerExtremity

46 UpperExtremity

47 UpperExtremity

48 Skull

49 Spine

50 Spine

51 Rib_Cage

52 LowerExtremity

53 UpperExtremity

54 Spine

55 Chest_Abdomen

56 Chest_Abdomen

57 Spine

348
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1st parameter value of

Setting
BPC of IpString value

58 Rib_Cage

59 Skull

60 Skull

61 Skull

62 Skull

63 Rib_Cage

64 Rib_Cage

65 Rib_Cage

66 Spine

67 LowerExtremity

Conversion rule 68 Chest_Abdomen

69 Pelvis

70 LowerExtremity

71 Chest_Abdomen

72 Spine

73 LowerExtremity

74 Chest_Abdomen

75 Chest_Abdomen

76 Rib_Cage

77 Skull

78 LowerExtremity

79 Rib_Cage

100 Other

Remarks -

349
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.35. Anatomical part

Column name Anatomical part

Description Anatomical part

Input-related conditions One of the values listed in Conversion rule below

Acquisition source IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

1st parameter value of

Setting
BPC of the IpString value

0 Unknown

1 Chest

2 Abdomen

3 Skull

4 Cervical_Spine

5 Thoracic_Spine

6 Lumbar_Spine

7 Pelvis

8 Sacrum

9 Coccyx

10 Hip_Joint
Conversion rule
11 Femur

12 Knee

13 Leg

14 Foot

15 Ankle

16 Shoulder

17 Scapula

18 Humerus

19 Elbow

20 Forearm

21 Hand

22 Wrist

350
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1st parameter value of

Setting
BPC of the IpString value

23 Unknown

24 Unknown

25 Unknown

26 Clavicle

27 Chest

28 Thoracic_Spine

29 Lumbar_Spine

30 Hip_Joint

31 Femur

32 Leg

33 Humerus

34 Elbow

35 Forearm

36 Cervical_Spine
Conversion rule
37 Thoracic_Spine

38 Abdomen

39 Clavicle

40 Pelvis

41 Sacrum

42 Coccyx

43 Hip_Joint

44 Foot

45 Ankle

46 Hand

47 Wrist

48 Skull

49 Cervical_Spine

50 Lumbar_Spine

51 Rib

351
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1st parameter value of

Setting
BPC of the IpString value

52 Leg

53 Forearm

54 Cervical_Spine

55 Child_Chest

56 Chest

57 Thoracic_Spine

58 Clavicle

59 Nose_Sinus

60 Mandible

61 Nose

62 Ear

63 Shoulder

64 Scapula
Conversion rule
65 Sternum

66 Cervical_Spine

67 Femur

68 Abdomen

69 Pelvis

70 Hip_Joint

71 Chest

72 Cervical_Spine

73 Knee

74 Infant_Chest

75 Child_Chest

76 Shoulder

77 Skull

78 Hip_Joint

79 Clavicle

Remarks -

352
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.36. Direction

Column name Direction

Description Anatomical part orientation

Input-related conditions "Other" or "Front" or "Lateral"

Acquisition source IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

2nd parameter value of

Setting
BPC of the IpString value

Conversion rule 0 Other

1 Front

2 Lateral

Remarks -

1.2.37. Clipping

Column name Clipping

Description Clipping processing

Input-related conditions "ON" or "OFF"

Acquisition source IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

Parameter value of C of
Setting
the IpString value
Conversion rule
0 OFF

Other ON

Remarks -

353
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.38. Dynamic range adjustment bright region

Column name Dynamic range adjustment bright region

Description Dynamic range adjustment processing (bright region) setting

Input-related conditions "ON" or "OFF"

(1) IpMiscString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]

Acquisition source section
(2) IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

Parameter value of 1st parameter

Setting
QAM of (1) value of SPD of (2)

Conversion rule 0 or 1 OFF

Other than 2
2 or 3 ON

2 - OFF

Remarks -

1.2.39. Dynamic range adjustment bright region effect

Column name Dynamic range adjustment bright region effect

Description Dynamic range adjustment processing (bright region)

Input-related conditions Integer (1 to 20)

Acquisition source IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

Conversion rule The 2nd parameter value of SPD is set. (For null, 10 is set.)

Remarks If the MLT (S) function is disabled, SPD is null.

354
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.40. Dynamic range adjustment dark region

Column name Dynamic range adjustment dark region

Description Dynamic range adjustment processing (dark region) setting

Input-related conditions "ON" or "OFF"

(1) IpMiscString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]

Acquisition source section
(2) IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

Parameter value of 1st parameter

Setting
QAM of (1) value of SPD of (2)

Conversion rule 0 or 2 OFF

Other than 2
1 or 3 ON

2 - OFF

Remarks -

1.2.41. Dynamic range adjustment dark region effect

Column name Dynamic range adjustment dark region effect

Description Dynamic range adjustment processing (dark region)

Input-related conditions Integer (1 to 20)

Acquisition source IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

(21 - 2nd parameter value of SPD of the IpString value) is set. (For
Conversion rule
null, 5 is set.)

Remarks -

355
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.42. Enhancement

Column name Enhancement

Description Enhancement processing setting

Input-related conditions "ON" or "OFF"

(1) IpMiscString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

Acquisition source
(2) IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

Parameter 1st parameter 1st parameter

value of QAM value of SPE value of LPS Setting
of (1) of (2) of (2)

0 - OFF
Conversion rule Other than 2
Other - ON

- 0 OFF
2
- Other ON

If the QAM parameter value of (1) is 2, this means MLT (M). (V2.10
supported)
Remarks
If the MLT (S) function is disabled, the 1st parameter value of SPE
is treated as 0.

356
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.43. Contrast boost

Column name Contrast boost

Description Contrast boost

Input-related conditions Integer (0 to 20)

(1) IpMiscString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]

Acquisition source section
(2) IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

Parameter value 2nd parameter

Setting
of QAM of (1) value of LPS of (2)

4th parameter
value of SPE of
Other than 2 -
(2). (For null, 0 is
set.)

1 0

2 1

3 2

4 3

5 4

6 5
Conversion rule
7 6

8 7
2
9 8

10 10

11 11

12 13

13 15

14 17

15 19

16 to 20 20

If the QAM parameter value of (1) is 2, this means MLT (M). (V2.10
Remarks supported)
If the MLT (S) function is disabled, SPE is null.

357
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.44. Edge enhancement

Column name Edge enhancement

Description Edge enhancement

Input-related conditions Integer

(1) IpMiscString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

Acquisition source
(2) IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

Parameter value of QAM of (1) Setting

The 2nd parameter value of

Conversion rule Other than 2 SPE of (2) is set. (For null, 0 is
set.)

2 0

Remarks If the MLT (S) function is disabled, SPE is null.

1.2.45. Edge frequency

Column name Edge frequency

Description Edge frequency

Input-related conditions Integer (1 to 7)

Acquisition source IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

The 3rd parameter value of SPE of the IpString value is set. (For
Conversion rule
null, 5 is set.)

Remarks If the MLT (S) function is disabled, SPE is null.

358
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.46. Grid suppression

Column name Grid suppression

Description Grid line suppression

Input-related conditions "ON" or "OFF"

Acquisition source IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

2nd parameter
Value set for Grid
value of SG of the Setting
type
IpString value
Conversion rule OFF - OFF

0 OFF
ON
Other ON

Remarks -

1.2.47. Line noise reduction Inr base weight

Column name Line noise reduction Inr base weight

Description Line noise reduction processing effect

Input-related conditions Decimal (0 to 1)

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to blank.

Remarks Parameter for 70C only

1.2.48. LUT base brightness

Column name LUT base brightness

Description Base brightness

Input-related conditions Integer (1 to 29)

Acquisition source IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

Conversion rule (30 - 12th parameter value of QID of the IpString value) is set.

Remarks -

359
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.49. LUT base contrast

Column name LUT base contrast

Description Base contrast

Input-related conditions Integer (1 to 19)

Acquisition source IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

Conversion rule 13th parameter value of QID of the IpString value is set.

Remarks -

1.2.50. LUT adjustment mode

Column name LUT adjustment mode

Description Brightness adjustment mode

Input-related conditions "Auto" or "REX"

Acquisition source IpMiscString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

4th parameter value of AM of IpMiscString value Setting

Conversion rule A Auto

R REX

Remarks -

360
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.51. LUT curve shape

Column name LUT curve shape

Description Type of LUT curve

Input-related conditions -

Acquisition source IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

11th parameter value of QID of the IpString value Setting

1 SC

2 LN

3 LN

4 SA
Conversion rule
5 SB

6 SB

7 SC

8 SB

9 SB

Remarks -

1.2.52. LUT inverse

Column name LUT inverse

Description Negative/positive inversion

Input-related conditions "ON" or "OFF"

Acquisition source IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

11th parameter value of QID of the IpString value Setting

Conversion rule 3 ON

Other OFF

Remarks -

361
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.53. LUT REX

Column name LUT REX

Description REX value

Input-related conditions Decimal (0 to 65535)

Acquisition source IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

Conversion rule The parameter value of the SR of the IpString value is set.

Remarks -

1.2.54. MTF improvement

Column name MTF improvement

Description MTF improvement processing

Input-related conditions -

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to blank.

Remarks -

1.2.55. Noise reduction

Column name Noise reduction

Description Noise reduction processing

Input-related conditions "ON" or "OFF"

(1) IpMiscString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]

Acquisition source section
(2) IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

Parameter value 1st parameter

Setting
of QAM of (1) value of SPN of (2)

Conversion rule 0 ON
Other than 2
Other OFF

2 - OFF

If the MLT (S) function is disabled, the 1st parameter value of

Remarks
SPN is treated as 0.

362
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.56. Noise reduction effect

Column name Noise reduction effect

Description Noise reduction processing effect

Input-related conditions Integer (1 to 10)

Acquisition source IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

The 2nd parameter value of SPN of the IpString value is set. (For
Conversion rule
null, 5 is set.)

Remarks If the MLT (S) function is disabled, SPN is null.

1.2.57. Peripheral mask

Column name Peripheral mask

Description Peripheral mask processing

Input-related conditions "ON" or "OFF"

Acquisition source IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

1st parameter value of PM

Setting
of the IpString value
Conversion rule
0 ON

Other OFF

Remarks -

1.2.58. P-Value brightness of around

Column name P-Value brightness of around

Description Reflected ambient light

Input-related conditions Decimal (0 or above)

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to blank.

Remarks -

363
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.59. P-Value brightness of film viewer

Column name P-Value brightness of film viewer

Description Brightness of X-ray film viewer

Input-related conditions Decimal (0 or above)

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to blank.

Remarks -

1.2.60. Xray storage time

Column name Xray storage time

Description X-ray storage time

Input-related conditions 1000 or 3000

Acquisition source msec of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

msec value Setting

Conversion rule 1001 or above 3000

Other 1000

Remarks -

1.2.61. EIT

Column name EIT

Description EIT value

Input-related conditions Integer (1 to 10000, -1 (invalid value))

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to -1.

Remarks -

364
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.62. Source image receptor distance

Column name Source image receptor distance

Description Source imaging receptor distance

Input-related conditions Integer (1 to 9999)

Acquisition source cm of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

Conversion rule (cm value x 10) is set.

Remarks -

1.2.63. Source object distance

Column name Source object distance

Description Source object distance

Input-related conditions Integer (1 to 9999)

PatientImgDist_mm of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPart¥¥PartPramX]

Acquisition source
section

(Source image receptor distance setting - PatientImgDist_mm

Conversion rule
value) is set.

Remarks -

365
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.64. APRID

Column name APRID

Description APRID

Input-related conditions Character string (2048 or fewer characters)

(1) ItemX of cgbig3.ini file [ExpCondToGen] section

Acquisition source
(2) GenProtclID of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

cgbig3.ini
Value (1) Value (2) Setting
file check

File not Fixed to

- -
present blank.

Fixed to
Blank
blank.

Value includes
"AnatomicalCode"
concatenation Refer to *1.
present
File present characters.

Value includes Value (2) + ";"

only numbers. + value (2)

"AnatomicalCode"
- Refer to *2.
not present
*1 If GenProtclID includes concatenation characters
If a value containing a concatenation character (such as a hyphen "-") is set for
GenProtclID in accordance with the RD specifications, the characters after the
Conversion rule concatenation character are not used. For this reason, the value of the number
before the concatenation character that is concatenated with a semicolon ";" is
set as APRID.
Example: If value (2) = 16 -1002, APRID = 16;16.
If value (2) begins with a character string, "0;" is set.
Example: If value (2) = -1002, APRID = 0;
*2 If "AnatomicalCode" is not present
APRID = bodySize = 8; bodySize = 8, kV = value (3), mA = value (4),
ExpTimeMsec = value (5), mAs = value (6), focalSize = value (7), phLeft = value (8),
phCenter = value (9), phRight = value (10), density = value (11),
(3) kV of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartParamX] section
(4) mA of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartParamX] section
(5) msec of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartParamX] section
(6) mAs of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartParamX] section
(7) gcFocalSize of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartParamX] section
(8) gcPtLeft of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartParamX] section
(9) gcPtCenter of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartParamX] section
(10) gcPtRight of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartParamX] section
(11) gcDensity of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartParamX] section
(12) gcAEC of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartParamX] section
(If value (12) ! = 1, values (8) to (11) are set to 0.)

Remarks -

366
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.65. Sharpness adjustment

Column name Sharpness adjustment

Description Sharpness adjustment

Input-related conditions "ON" or "OFF"

Acquisition source IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

1st parameter value 3rd parameter value

of MTF2 of the of MTF2 of the Setting
IpString value IpString value

0 - OFF

1 - ON
Conversion rule
0 OFF

1 ON
2
2 ON

3 ON

Remarks -

367
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.66. Sharpness adjustment effect

Column name Sharpness adjustment effect

Description Sharpness adjustment effect

Input-related conditions Integer (1 to 3)

Acquisition source IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

1st parameter value 3rd parameter value

of MTF2 of the of MTF2 of the Setting
IpString value IpString value

0 - 1

1 - 1
Conversion rule
0 1

1 1
2
2 2

3 3

Remarks -

1.2.67. Dynamic range adjustment whole region

Column name Dynamic range adjustment whole region

Description Dynamic range adjustment processing (whole region) setting

Input-related conditions "ON" or "OFF"

(1) IpMiscString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX]

Acquisition source section
(2) IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

Parameter value of 1st parameter value

Setting
QAM of (1) of RC of (2)

Conversion rule Other than 2 - OFF

0 OFF
2
1 ON

Remarks -

368
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2.68. Dynamic range adjustment whole region effect

Column name Dynamic range adjustment whole region effect

Description Dynamic range adjustment processing (whole region)

Input-related conditions Integer (1 to 20)

Acquisition source IpString of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartX¥PartPramX] section

1st parameter value of RC of

Setting
the IpString value

1 20

2 18

3 16

4 14

5 12
Conversion rule 6 10

7 8

8 6

9 4

10 2

Other than the above 1

(including the case in which
the RC value is not present)

Remarks -

369
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.3. Prepack information

Column name Description Version supported

Group ID Prepack group ID

Prepack name Prepack name

Comment Comment of the prepack

Code value Prepack code value

Code meaning Prepack code meaning

Group IDs of the protocols registered in the

Protocol workspace
prepack

Sequence of protocols registered in the

ProtocolOrder
prepack

Tray name Tray name

Tray order Tray number

PositionX Coordinate X on the tray

PositionY Coordinate Y on the tray

1.3.1. Group ID

Column name Group ID

Description ID allotted to each prepack protocol

Input-related conditions Integers; blanks not allowed.

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Number generated internally for each prepack protocol

Remarks -

370
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.3.2. Prepack name

Column name Prepack name

Description Prepack protocol name

Input-related conditions Character string of 64 or fewer characters

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule PrePackX (X part incremented by 1 for each SetOrder record)

If the SetOrder file does not exist or no records exist, no PrePack

Remarks
record is created.

1.3.3. Comment

Column name Comment

Description Comment associated with the prepack protocol

Input-related conditions Character string of 128 or fewer characters

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to blank.

Remarks -

1.3.4. Code value

Column name Code value

Description Code value associated with the prepack protocol

Character string of 32 or fewer characters; duplicates not allowed

Input-related conditions
(CodeValue on the protocol sheet excluded from the conditions).

Acquisition source 1st value of each record in the SetOrder file

Conversion rule The value of the acquisition source is copied.

Duplicates of CodeValue inside protocol workspaces or prepack

Remarks
protocols are not allowed.

371
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.3.5. Code meaning

Column name Code meaning

Description Code meaning associated with the prepack protocol

Input-related conditions -

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to blank.

Remarks -

1.3.6. Protocol workspace

Column name Protocol workspace

Description Group ID corresponding to the protocol workspace

Input-related conditions Integers; blanks not allowed.

Acquisition source 2nd and subsequent values of each record in the SetOrder file

The GroupID that is set in the protocol in the same workspace

Conversion rule
as the acquisition source value is set.

Remarks -

1.3.7. ProtocolOrder

Column name ProtocolOrder

Description Order number of the protocol that is set in the prepack protocol

Input-related conditions Integer value (1 to 30)

Acquisition source -

Number generated automatically inside the prepack protocol for

Conversion rule
each protocol

Remarks -

372
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.3.8. Tray name

Column name Tray name

Description Tray name

Input-related conditions Character string of 64 or fewer characters

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to blank.

Remarks -

1.3.9. Tray order

Column name Tray order

Description Tray number corresponding to the tray name

Input-related conditions Integer value (1 to 50)

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to blank.

Remarks -

1.3.10. PositionX

Column name PositionX

Description X coordinate of the protocol button position on the tray

Input-related conditions Integer value (0 to 3)

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to blank.

Remarks -

373
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.3.11. PositionY

Column name PositionY

Description Y coordinate of the protocol button position on the tray

Input-related conditions Integer value (0 to 11)

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to blank.

Remarks -

1.4. Grid information

Column name Description Version supported

Grid ID Grid ID

Grid name Grid name

Frequency Grid frequency

Quality Grid quality

1.4.1. Grid ID

Column name Grid ID

Description Grid ID

Input-related conditions Character string of 4 or fewer characters

Acquisition source GridX of BodyPartCmn.ini file [GridNameList] section

Conversion rule The 1st parameter value of the acquisition source is copied.

Remarks A GridID of 0000 is not output to the protocol sheet.

374
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.4.2. Grid name

Column name Grid name

Description Grid name

Input-related conditions Character string of 128 or fewer characters

Acquisition source GridX of BodyPartCmn.ini file [GridNameList] section

Conversion rule The 2nd parameter value of the acquisition source is copied.

Remarks -

1.4.3. Frequency

Column name Frequency

Description Grid frequency

Input-related conditions Decimal (0 to 20)

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to 4.

Remarks -

1.4.4. Quality

Column name Quality

Description Grid quality

Input-related conditions Decimal (1 to 3)

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to 3.

Remarks -

375
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.5. Workspace information

Column name Description Version supported

Group ID Group ID of each workspace

Workspace name Workspace name

Position type Workspace position setting

Detector group Detector group of the workspace

Exposure mode Exposure mode

Storage crop cropping

Initial area of the cropping area
type

Storage crop fixed size Fixed size of the cropping area

Storage crop alignment Cropping area position alignment

Storage crop unit of

Unit for the fixed size of the cropping area
length

1.5.1. Group ID

Column name Group ID

Description Group ID of each workspace

Input-related conditions Integer (0 or above)

Acquisition source BodyPart.ini file

One of the following values is set on the basis of the values after
BodyPart in the BodyPart.ini file name.

XX value of BodyPartXX Setting

1st 1
Conversion rule
2nd 2

3rd 3

4th 4

Remarks -

376
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.5.2. Workspace name

Column name Workspace name

Description Workspace name

Input-related conditions Blanks not allowed, character string of 64 or fewer characters.

Refer to Conversion rule for Workspace name of Protocol

Acquisition source
workspace.

Refer to Conversion rule for Workspace name of Protocol

Conversion rule
workspace.

If the same workspace name exists, an Index is added to the

Remarks
end of the workspace name.

1.5.3. Position type

Column name Position type

Description Workspace position setting

Input-related conditions "Stand" or "Table" or "Universal" or "Cassette"

Acquisition source SensorType of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartMenu] section

Acquisition source value Setting

0 Stand

Conversion rule 1 Table

2 Universal

3 Cassette

Remarks -

377
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.5.4. Detector group

Column name Detector group

Description Detector group of the workspace

Input-related conditions Character string of 64 or fewer characters

(1) A/D_Bd_Serial_Number of ccrnvst.ini file

Acquisition source [SCAN¥CAPTDEVS_X] section
(2) DeviceType of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartMenu] section

Based on the value of the two higher digits resulting from first
converting the acquisition source value into a hexadecimal value
and then padding it with zeros to form an 8-digit value.
* If the value of the two higher digits is 1A or 1B, setting is based on value (2).

Value of the two

Value of (2) Setting
higher digits of (1)

01 11

03 11

02 12

04 22

05 31

07 40EG

08 40EC
Conversion rule 10 50G

11 50G

12 50C

13 60G

14 50G

15 40GCompact

16 50C

17 60C

26 401G

27 401C
1A or 1B
28 401GCompact

29 401CCompact

378
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

The detector catalog with the detector group concerned must

Remarks have been registered in the DB where the values are to be
converted.

1.5.5. Exposure mode

Column name Exposure mode

Description Exposure mode

Input-related conditions -

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to "Radiography."

Remarks -

1.5.6. Storage crop cropping type

Column name Storage crop cropping type

Description Initial area of the cropping area

Input-related conditions "Fixed" or "CollimatorArea" or "AllArea"

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to "CollimatorArea."

Remarks -

1.5.7. Storage crop fixed size

Column name Storage crop fixed size

Description Fixed size of the cropping area

Integer + "," + integer format. The integers are in the range of 64

Input-related conditions
and above (dependent on SensorSize and UnitOFLength).

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to "64, 64."

Remarks -

379
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.5.8. Storage crop alignment

Column name Storage crop alignment

Description Cropping area position alignment

Input-related conditions "Top" or "Middle" or "Bottom"

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to "Middle."

Remarks -

1.5.9. Storage crop unit of length

Column name Storage crop unit of length

Description Unit for the fixed size of the cropping area

Input-related conditions "pixel" or "inch" or "mm"

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to "pixel."

Remarks -

380
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.6. Workspace detector map information

Column name Description Version supported

Workspace name Workspace name

Serial number Serial number

1.6.1. Workspace name

Column name Workspace name

Description Workspace name

Input-related conditions Blanks not allowed, character string of 64 or fewer characters.

1. SensorType of BodyPart.ini file [BodyPartMenu] section

Acquisition source 2. A/D_Bd_Serial_Number of ccrnvst.ini file
[SCAN¥CAPTDEVS_X] section

Refer to Conversion rule for Workspace name of Protocol

Conversion rule
workspace.

If the same workspace name exists, an Index is added to the

Remarks
end of the workspace name.

1.6.2. Serial number

Column name Serial number

Description Serial number of the workspace

Input-related conditions Character string of 64 or fewer characters

A/D_Bd_Serial_Number of ccrnvst.ini file [SCAN¥CAPTDEVS_

Acquisition source
X] section

Conversion rule The value of the acquisition source is copied.

Remarks -

381
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.7. System information

Column name Description Version supported

Exposure mode Exposure mode

Film size Film size

Film orientation Film orientation

Film layout cells Film partition layout

Film image zoom mode Fit style

Film fixed ratio Fixed magnification ratio for the film

Film layout mode Film layout mode

1.7.1. Exposure mode

Column name Exposure mode

Description Exposure mode

Input-related conditions -

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to "Radiography."

Remarks -

1.7.2. Film size

Column name Film size

Description Film size

Input-related conditions Character string of 64 or fewer characters

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to blank.

Remarks -

382
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.7.3. Film orientation

Column name Film orientation

Description Film orientation

Input-related conditions "None" or "Portrait" or "Landscape"

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to "None."

Remarks -

1.7.4. Film layout cells

Column name Film layout cells

Description Film partition layout

Input-related conditions Blanks not allowed.

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to "1X1."

Remarks -

1.7.5. Film image zoom mode

Column name Film image zoom mode

Description Fit style

Input-related conditions "FixedRatio" or "Fit"

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule "FixedRatio"

Remarks -

383
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.7.6. Film fixed ratio

Column name Film fixed ratio

Description Fixed magnification ratio for the film

Input-related conditions Integer (1 to 100); blanks not allowed.

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to 100.

Remarks -

1.7.7. Film layout mode

Column name Film layout mode

Description Film layout mode

Input-related conditions "FixedLayout" or "AutoLayout"

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule Fixed to "FixedLayout."

Remarks -

384
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.8. Detector catalog information

Column name Description Version supported

Model name Detector model name

Detector group to which the detector

Detector group
belongs

1.8.1. Model name

Column name Model name

Description Detector model name

Input-related conditions -

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule -

Remarks -

1.8.2. Detector group

Column name Detector group

Description Detector group to which the detector belongs

Input-related conditions -

Acquisition source -

Conversion rule -

Remarks -

385
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. Setting Reference

1. Service Tool Functions

The functions provided by the service tool are largely divided into 5 main categories, which are
further classified into 25 sub-categories.
Detailed specifications are provided here for each of the functions in the function list below,
excluding those with gray markers .

X-Ray Generator

Sensor

X-ray Generator and Sensor Grid

AP/LNK

Maintenance Tool

DICOM Common Setting

MWL

MPPS

DICOM Setting Storage

Printer

Media output

Report

Application Setting

User Account Management

System Setting Annotation

Log Setting

Add-in Setting

Protocol Editor

Protocol Import and Export

Data Collection
Utility Setting
Migration

Image Import and Export

License

Barcode Reader
Input Assist Setting
Magnetic Card Reader

386
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.1. Operating environment

The service tool runs in the same environments (hardware environment and software
environment) as those for CCS.
➡➡For CCS-NE, refer to "1.4. Operating environment for CCS-NE" in Part 1.
➡➡For CCS-RF, refer to "2.4. Operating environment for CCS-RF" in Part 1.

1.2. Basic screen configuration

The first screen displayed when the service tool is started up is the login screen. Enter the login
name and the password. When the login is authorized, the [Menu selection] screen appears.
From the [Menu selection] screen, you can open the setting screens for using the 25 functions.
Only one setting screen can be displayed at a time; you cannot set multiple setting screens at the
same time. The operation screens for the functions belonging to Sensor, Maintenance Tool, and
Utility Setting appear in separate modal windows.

1.3. Common specifications

Screen display

The default size, which is the minimum size, of the service tool windows is 1024 x 738.
Supported as the font size settings (DPI settings) of the PC are 100% and 125%. The DPI setting
125% is supported only with a monitor resolution of 1280 x 960 or above. (The custom DPI
setting 125% with a monitor resolution of 1024 x 768 is not supported because this is equivalent
to a resolution of 819.2 x 614.4.)

1.4. Login

The service tool starts up when "ServiceTool.exe" in the CCS installation folder (C:¥CCS-S
for CCS-NE and C:¥CCS-D for CCS-RF) is executed. (In V2.00 or later, operation can be
transferred from the shutdown confirmation dialog box to the "restart mode" screen after CCS
is started up with the service account. The service tool can also be started by clicking the
ServiceTool Start button on the screen displayed when operation is transferred to the restart
mode.)
When the service tool is started up, the login screen appears. You can log in with the service
account.
The service tool cannot be started while CCS.exe, DBMgmt.exe, or SnsActv.exe is running. If
an attempt is made to start multiple instances of the service tool, the service tool screen already
displayed will appear in the foreground.
[Fig.1.4.-1 Login screen]

387
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Service account

User name Password Remarks

CxdiAdmin Default service engineer (corporation)

CxdiService Default service engineer (dealer)

For details of the password, refer to "1.1. User accounts" in Part 2.

388
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Menu selection
When login is successful on the login screen, this screen appears.
When you select an item, the corresponding setting screen appears.
[Fig.2.-1 Menu selection screen]

389
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.1. X-ray generator and detector settings

2.1.1. X-Ray Generator

On this screen, make the settings for the generator (X-ray generator) to use. In addition to the IP
address connection settings for the generator and the control PC, you can also make overwrap
software and other settings.
[Fig.2.1.1.-1 X-Ray generator setting screen]
• CCS-NE

390
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• CCS-RF

(1) Detector <-> Generator synchronization settings

Select between [Synchronize the detector with the generator to perform exposure]
and [Non generator connection mode]. If the Add-in Setting [Enable One Shot LL] is
ON, [Non generator connection mode] is disabled.
(2) CCS <-> Generator and DAP meter connection settings
(1) Depending on which item is selected for [Detector <-> Generator synchronization
settings], the setting items displayed differ.
If [Synchronize the detector with the generator to perform exposure] is selected
• Not communicate with the generator and DAP meter
• Communicate with the generator
• Communicate with the generator (CXDI-GC)(*1)
• Communicate with the dose meter (*2)
If [Non generator connection mode] is selected
• Not communicate with the dose meter
• Communicate with the dose meter (*2)
*1: Separate optional software must be installed. For details, refer to the "CXDI-GC
Service Manual."
*2: Separate optional software must be installed. For details, refer to the "CXDI-DC
Service Manual."
(3) Local IP address, Local port
Enter the control PC values.
(4) Target IP address, Target port
Enter the generator values.

391
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(5) Response timeout (ms)

Set the time after which a timeout occurs if there is no response from the generator.
(6) Enable overwrap
If you set it to ON, you can set the following items.
Overwrap module path
Click the Browse button, and specify the overwrap software path.
For CCS-NE, this can be set if [Synchronize the detector with the generator to
perform exposure] is ON and [CCS <-> Generator and DAP meter connection
settings] is [Communicate with the generator].
For CCS-RF, this can be set if [Enable CXDI-GC] is OFF.
Overwrap startup timeout (ms)
Set the startup timeout of the overwrap software.
For CCS-NE, this can be set if [Synchronize the detector with the generator to
perform exposure] is ON and [CCS <-> Generator and DAP meter connection
settings] is [Communicate with the generator].
For CCS-RF, this can be set if [Enable CXDI-GC] is OFF.
Overwrap display time (s)
Set the time after which the overwrap software appears automatically after the Ready
display appears.
(7) Enable image information notifications after the radiography
Set this when communicating with the generator with a method other than CXDI-GC
connection.
For CCS-NE, this is disabled if [Synchronize the detector with the generator to
perform exposure] is ON and [Communicate with the generator] is selected for [CCS
<-> Generator and DAP meter connection settings].
For CCS-RF, this is disabled if [Enable CXDI-GC] is set to ON.
(8) Carrying over exposure condition of the same protocol workspace
When you set it to ON, the exposure conditions of the same protocol workspace are
carried over.
This cannot be set if [Not communicate with the generator] is selected for [CCS <->
Generator and DAP meter connection settings].

Reference
• This can be set only for Cruise communication. A configuration using CXDI-GC
communication is not supported.
• The items to carry over are the APR-ID and the long exposure settings in the exposure
conditions to be posted from CCS to the generator.
• Regardless of whether the setting is ON or OFF, if another protocol is not selected
after exposure, the exposure conditions assumed during the exposure are maintained
as in versions earlier than V2.16.

(9) General exposure (ms)

Set the maximum allowed exposure time during general exposure.

392
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• This can be set only for detectors capable of Non Generator Connection. For other
detectors, the maximum allowed exposure time is fixed (1000 ms).
• For a detector capable of Non Generator Connection, the setting itself is effective
regardless of whether the mode is Generator Connection or Non Generator
Connection, but the effect of shortening the exposure cycle time differs.
• If X-ray exposure is performed for a time longer than the maximum allowed exposure
time that is set here, an image error may occur. Set the maximum allowed exposure
time so that the exposure time does not exceed it.
• If the allowed exposure time is changed from the X-ray generator, whether long
exposure is turned ON or OFF is determined as given in the table below.

Change from the X-ray generator Long exposure

0 to maximum allowed exposure time for general

OFF (general exposure)
exposure

Maximum allowed exposure time for general

exposure + 1 to Maximum allowed exposure time ON
for long exposure

Other than the above Error

(10) Wait for response of fluoro condition change notification

Set this when supporting fluoroscopic condition change sequences.
(11) Enable flip operation from console
When you set it to ON, flip operation from the console is enabled.
(12) Enable subdivisional acquisition
When you set it to ON, [Enable the continuous subdivisional acquisition mode] can
be set.

393
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Enabling/disabling connection and option settings

Operation setting
Connect
Not connect Connect CCS Not connect Connect
CCS CCS with the CCS with CCS with
with the with the generator the dose the dose
generator generator using CXDI- meter meter
GC
Connection
1 Enable Enable Enable
settings

2-1 Enable Enable

2-2 Disable
Enable by
Object Enable by
Disable enabling Disable
control Option enabling
2-3 overwrap Disable
settings software overwrap
software

3 Enable Disable

4 Enable Enable

2.1.2. Sensor

2.1.2.1. Detector settings

The screen on which to manage detectors is displayed modally.
For details of the detector setting screen, refer to "Appendix 10. Detectors."

394
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.1.3. Grid

2.1.3.1. Grid settings

A list of registered grids is displayed on this screen. Grids can be added, edited, and deleted as
needed. The maximum number of grids that can be registered is 20.
[Fig.2.1.3.1.-1 Grid setting screen]

(1) Grid list

A list of registered grids is displayed here.
(2) Delete button
When you click it, a confirmation message appears, and if you permit the deletion, the
relevant grid information is deleted.
If the grid is currently used with a protocol setting, for example, the button is disabled and the
information cannot be deleted.
(3) Add
The [Add grid] dialog box appears.
You cannot add any if the number of registered grids has reached the upper limit of 20.
(4) Edit
You can click it if you select the grid you want to edit from [Grid list].
The [Edit grid] dialog box appears.

395
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.1.3.1.1. Adding and editing grids

You can add and edit grid information.

On the [Grid setting] screen, click the Add button or the Edit button.
[Fig.2.1.3.1.1.-1 Add grid dialog box]

(1) Grid ID
The characters that can be entered are a to f, A to F, and 0 to 9.
If half-size lower-case letters are entered, they are converted into half-size upper-case letters.
The same grid ID as a registered one cannot be entered.

Reference
• Use a grid that conforms to the grid specifications of the detector used. To add a grid from
the [Grid setting] screen, set the grid frequency suitable to the number of lines of the grid
used.
For example, if a 52 lines/cm grid is to be added for a CXDI 70C Wireless detector, set
the grid frequency to 5.2 lines/mm to match the number of grid lines of the actual grid.
For the grids in each protocol workspace, set the correct number of grid lines for grid line
suppression. If the number of lines is incorrect, it may not be possible to output normal
images to PACS.
If a grid that does not meet the specifications is used or an incorrect grid frequency is
set, images with high-frequency components removed, coarse images, and other images
with other imperfections may be output to PACS. Because simplified grid line suppression
is performed on images on the screen of CCS, it is not possible to confirm the adverse
effects at this stage. Such effects can be confirmed only on the images transferred to
PACS after QA processing.

2.1.4. AP/LNK
On this screen, make the settings for using the link function of a Ferry-type wireless
connection detector, settings for the wireless profiles (such as ESSID) necessary for wireless
communication, settings for access points, and so on.
For details of the AP/LNK Configuration Tool, refer to "Appendix 6. AP/LNK Configuration Tool."

2.1.5. Maintenance Tool

For details of the tool, refer to Part 5, "Maintenance."

396
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2. DICOM settings

2.2.1. DICOM Common Setting

On this screen, make DICOM-related settings.
[Fig.2.2.1.-1 DICOM common setting screen]

(1) Character set

Select the language to set for Specific Character Set (0008, 0005).
Specific character set names
• Ascii (ISO_IR 6)
• Chinese (Big5)
• Chinese (GB18030)
• Chinese (GBK)
• Cyrillic
• Greek
• Japanese
• Japanese (hankaku)
• Latin alphabet No.1
• Latin alphabet No.2
• Latin alphabet No.4
• Latin alphabet No.5
• UTF-8
(2) Name input style
Select from [Do not divide], [Divide Half size group into five components], and [Divide
into three groups (Half size, Ideogram, Phonogram)].

397
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

[Divide into three groups (Half size, Ideogram, Phonogram)] can be selected only if
Character set is set to one of the following.
• Chinese (Big5)
• Chinese (GB18030)
• Chinese (GBK)
• Japanese
• Japanese (hankaku)
• UTF-8
(3) On receiving illegal DICOM value
Select between [Output the original value] and [Output the empty value].
(4) Relative X-ray exposure (0018, 1405)
Select from [None], [REX], and [EI].
(5) Entrance dose (mGy)
Select between [Absorbed dose (mGy)] and [Air kerma].
(6) Series instance UID grouping rule
Select between [SPS] and [PW].
If you select [PW], you can select [Vary Series Instance UID for each stitch partial
image].
(7) UID keeping rule
Set the UID keeping rule for resending images.
Select from [Study / Series / SOP], [Study / Series], [Study], and [Renew UID].
[Study / Series / SOP], [Study / Series], and [Study] mean that the same UID as that of the
original image is added at the specified level and that a new UID is issued by CCS at a lower
level.
(8) Output numbering rule
Set the sequence in which series and instance numbers are to be generated.
Select between [By exposure order] and [By display order].
If you set [Assign Instance Numbers to stitched images first] to ON, numbers are
generated from stitched images in the stitch protocol. Captured images follow the output
numbering rule setting.
(9) Max image size (MB)
Set the maximum image size that can be transferred.
If you set [Out exposure index macro] to ON, EI (0018, 1411), EIt (0018, 1412), and DI (0018,
1413) are output as tags.
(10) Radiation mode on fluoro (only for CCS-RF)
Select which of [CONTINUOUS] and [PULSED] to use to output Radiation Mode (0018, 115A)
on fluoroscopic exposure during MPPS output.
(11) Continuous spaces to one space (eg: 'Canon Taro'→'Canon Taro')
When you set it to ON, replacement is performed as in the example.
(12) Space + comma to comma (eg: 'Canon , Taro'→'Canon, Taro')
When you set it to ON, replacement is performed as in the example.
(13) Space to caret (eg: 'Canon Taro'→'Canon^Taro')
When you set it to ON, replacement is performed as in the example.

398
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(14) Comma to caret (eg: 'Canon,Taro'→'Canon^Taro')

When you set it to ON, replacement is performed as in the example.

2.2.1.1. Supplementary notes on DICOM Common Setting

PN convert rule
The PN convert rule is a function for converting the value input from non-DICOM equipment to a
value suitable for output.
Conversion targets:
PN value input manually or from Studix (csv)
Examples: Patient name, referring physician name, reading physician name, and operator
name
Input value conversion:
Spaces and commas to be converted include full-size spaces and full-size commas.
If each setting is ON, the processing priority is as below.
Priority 1: Continuous spaces →one space
Priority 2: Space + comma →comma
Priority 3: Space →caret
Priority 4: Comma →caret
Difference in operation due to the patient input method:

Patient input
Description Example
method

Patient name input at

If all components are blank before input,
Divide into three the start of a manual
all rules apply according to the setting.
groups (Half examination
size, Ideogram, If a value exists for any one component Partial modification
Phonogram) before input, "space →caret" and "comma on the Edit Study
→ caret" apply according to the setting. Information screen

Divide Half size "Continuous space →one space" and

group into five "space ＋ comma → comma" apply
components according to the setting.

Study Instance UID grouping rule

• The Study Instance UID is issued when an examination is started (Start Exam).
• It is not reissued for pending orders when an examination is restarted, and the same UID as
that used when the examination was first started is used as is.
• When RIS is used, the Study Instance UID is not issued. The Study Instance UID received
from RIS is used.
• Using the [UID keeping rule] setting selected from DICOM common settings of the service
tool, Keep or Non Keep can be selected for the Study Instance UID grouping rule used during
past study output, and the rule changes depending on this setting.
* The Keep settings for studies are [Study / Series / SOP], [Study / Series], and [Study], and the same UIDs as
those used when the images are captured are used for the output when the past studies are output.
* The Non Keep setting for studies is [Renew UID], and when past studies are output, the studies are output
using different UIDs from those used when the images are captured.

399
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

During normal transfer

• With "output during examination" or "past study output and Keep setting"
Format: A.B; max. number of digits: 61

Value range Max. number of digits Description

CCS-RF: 1.2.392.200046.100.13
A Fixed 21
CCS-NE: 1.2.392.200046.100.14

GUID issued when images are captured

B GUID 39
(grouped using C# code NewGuid)

• For "past study output and Non Keep setting"

Format: A.B; max. number of digits: 61 (* Same UID even with concurrent output to multiple
transfer destinations)

Value range Max. number of digits Description

CCS-RF: 1.2.392.200046.100.13
A Fixed 21
CCS-NE: 1.2.392.200046.100.14

GUID issued when data is transferred

B GUID 39
(grouped using C# code NewGuid)

During transfer from the image processing adjustment screen

Format: A.B; max. number of digits: 61

Value range Max. number of digits Description

CCS-RF: 1.2.392.200046.100.13
A Fixed 21
CCS-NE: 1.2.392.200046.100.14

GUID issued when data is transferred

B GUID 39
(grouped using C# code NewGuid)

Series Instance UID grouping rule

• Series Instance UIDs are issued when the imaging protocols are selected (Ready).
• Using the [Series UID grouping rule] setting selected from DICOM common settings of the
service tool, [SPS] (for each Scheduled Procedure Step) or [PW] (for each protocol) can be
set for the Series Instance UID grouping rule, and the rule changes depending on this setting.
• When [PW] is selected, the setting for selecting different Series Instance UID for the stitched
images ([Vary Series Instance UID for each stitch partial image]) can be made, and the
rule also changes depending on this setting.
• Using the [UID keeping rule] setting selected from DICOM common settings of the service
tool, Keep or Non Keep can be set for the Series Instance UID grouping rule used during past
study output, and the rule changes depending on this setting.
* The Keep settings for series are [Study / Series / SOP] and [Study / Series], and the same UIDs as those
used when the images are captured are used for the output when the past studies are output.
* The Non Keep settings for series are [Study] and [Renew UID], and when past studies are output, the series
are output using different UIDs from those used when the images are captured.

400
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• Even when a Non Keep setting is selected, the series are output using the same UIDs if the
series are output concurrently to multiple transfer destinations.
• There are four Series Instance UID grouping rules, (1) to (4), as shown in the table below.

PW

Vary Series Instance UID for

SPS
each stitch partial image

OFF ON

When images are captured (3) (1) (1)

Other than stitch Keep (3) (1) (1)

mode When past studies
are output Non
(4) (2) (2)
Keep

When images are captured (3) (1) (2)

Stitch mode
(including source Keep (3) (1) (2)
images for When past studies
stitching) are output Non
(4) (2) (2)
Keep

(1) Format: A.BCD; max. number of digits: 63

Max.
Value range number Description
of digits

CCS-RF: 1.2.392.200046.100.13
A Fixed 21
CCS-NE: 1.2.392.200046.100.14

GUID issued when images are captured (grouped

B GUID 39
using C# code NewGuid)

C 0 (fixed value) 1 Fixed to 0.

D 1 (fixed value) 1 Added for GSPS only.

401
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(2) Format: A.BCD; max. number of digits: 63

Max.
Value range number Description
of digits

CCS-RF: 1.2.392.200046.100.13
A Fixed 21
CCS-NE: 1.2.392.200046.100.14

When Keep is set, GUID issued when images are

captured (grouped using C# code NewGuid)
B GUID 39
When Non Keep is set, GUID issued at output
stage (grouped using C# code NewGuid)

Fixed to 0 if [Vary Series Instance UID for each

stitch partial image] is OFF.
C 0-5 1
Stitches 1 to 5 (max. 4 stitching source images +
1 stitched image); fixed to 0 if other than stitch.

D 1 (fixed value) 1 Added for GSPS only.

(3) Format: A.BCD; max. number of digits: 63

Max.
Value range number Description
of digits

CCS-RF: 1.2.392.200046.100.13
A Fixed 21
CCS-NE: 1.2.392.200046.100.14

GUID (grouped using C# code NewGuid) of oldest

B GUID 39
exposure time in the same SPS

C 0 1 Fixed to 0.

D 1 (fixed value) 1 Added for GSPS only.

(4) Format: A.BCD; max. number of digits: 63

Max.
Value range number Description
of digits

CCS-RF: 1.2.392.200046.100.13
A Fixed 21
CCS-NE: 1.2.392.200046.100.14

New GUID (grouped using C# code NewGuid)

B GUID 39
issued on an SPS-by-SPS basis

C 0 1 Fixed to 0.

D 1 (fixed value) 1 Added for GSPS only.

402
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

SOP Instance UID grouping rule

• Using the [UID keeping rule] setting selected from DICOM common settings of the service
tool, Keep or Non Keep can be set for the SOP Instance UID grouping rule used during past
study output, and the rule changes depending on this setting.
* The Keep setting for SOPs is [Study / Series / SOP], and the same UIDs as those used when the images are
captured are used for the output when the past studies are output.
* The Non Keep settings for SOPs are [Study / Series], [Study], and [Renew UID], and when past studies are
output, the SOPs are output using different UIDs from those used when the images are captured.
During normal transfer
• With "output during examination" or "past study output and Keep setting"
Format: A.B.C; max. number of digits: 63

Max.
Value range number Description
of digits

CCS-RF: 1.2.392.200046.100.13
A Fixed 21
CCS-NE: 1.2.392.200046.100.14

GUID issued when images are captured (grouped

B GUID 39
using C# code NewGuid)

C 1 (fixed value) 1 Added for GSPS only.

• For "past study output and Non Keep setting"

Format: A.B.C; max. number of digits: 63 (* Same UID even with concurrent output to multiple
transfer destinations)

Max.
Value range number Description
of digits

CCS-RF: 1.2.392.200046.100.13
A Fixed 21
CCS-NE: 1.2.392.200046.100.14

GUID issued when data is transferred (grouped

B GUID 39
using C# code NewGuid)

C 1 (fixed value) 1 Added for GSPS only.

During transfer from the image processing adjustment screen

Format: A.B.C; max. number of digits: 63

Max.
Value range number Description
of digits

CCS-RF: 1.2.392.200046.100.13
A Fixed 21
CCS-NE: 1.2.392.200046.100.14

GUID issued when data is transferred (grouped

B GUID 39
using C# code NewGuid)

C 1 (fixed value) 1 Added for GSPS only.

403
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Instance numbers
The Instance Number (0020, 0013) issuance rule differs depending on which of [SPS] and [PW]
is selected for [Series UID grouping rule] and which of [By exposure order] and [By display
order] is selected for [Output numbering rule] from DICOM common settings of the service
tool and how these settings are used in combination.
If [By exposure order] is set
• If the UID grouping setting is [PW] (default), a running number starting from 1 is assigned in
the exposure order within the protocol (in the case of fluoroscopic exposure, when data is
stored).

• If the UID grouping setting is [PW] and [Vary Series Instance UID for each stitch partial
image] is ON, all stitched images (including the source images for stitching) are fixed to 1.
• If the UID grouping setting is [SPS], a running number starting from 1 is assigned in the
exposure order within the same SPS (in the case of fluoroscopic exposure, when data is
stored). If another SPS exists, a running number starting from 1 is assigned again.

• If there are rejected images, numbers are assigned to the rejected images as well regardless
of the UID grouping setting. For this reason, the values sent to the storage have numbers that
are skipped, resulting in numbers missing from the sequences.

404
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

If [By display order] is set

• If the UID grouping setting is [PW] (default), a running number starting from 1 is assigned
in the display order within the protocol (in the case of fluoroscopic exposure, when data is
stored).

• If the UID grouping setting is [PW] and [Vary Series Instance UID for each stitch partial
image] is ON, all stitched images (including the source images for stitching) are fixed to 1.
• If the UID grouping setting is [SPS], a running number starting from 1 is assigned in the
display order within the same SPS (in the case of fluoroscopic exposure, when data is
stored). If another SPS exists, a running number starting from 1 is assigned again.

• If there are rejected images, numbers are assigned to the rejected images as well regardless
of the UID grouping setting. For this reason, the values sent to the storage have numbers that
are skipped, resulting in numbers missing from the sequences.

405
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Series numbers
The Series Number (0020, 0011) issuance rule differs depending on which of [SPS] and [PW] is
selected for [Series instance UID grouping rule] and which of [By exposure order] and [By
display order] is selected for [Output numbering rule] from DICOM common settings of the
service tool and how these settings are used in combination.
If [By exposure order] is set
• If the UID grouping setting is [PW] (default), a running number starting from 1 is assigned in
the exposure order within the same RP (in the case of fluoroscopic exposure, when data is
stored). For this reason, a running number is assigned across protocols. If another RP exists,
a running number starting from 1 is assigned again.

• If the UID grouping setting is [SPS], numbers are assigned on an SPS-by-SPS basis in the
exposure order (in the case of fluoroscopic exposure, when data is stored).

• If there are rejected images, numbers are assigned to the rejected images as well regardless
of the UID grouping setting. For this reason, the values sent to the storage have numbers that
are skipped, resulting in numbers missing from the sequences.

406
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

If [By display order] is set

• If the UID grouping setting is [PW] (default), a running number starting from 1 is assigned
in the display order on the protocol list within the same RP (in the case of fluoroscopic
exposure, when data is stored). If another RP exists, a running number starting from 1 is
assigned again.

• If the UID grouping setting is [SPS], numbers are assigned on an SPS-by-SPS basis in the
display order on the protocol list (in the case of fluoroscopic exposure, when data is stored).

• If there are rejected images, numbers are assigned to the rejected images as well regardless
of the UID grouping setting. For this reason, the values sent to the storage have numbers that
are skipped, resulting in numbers missing from the sequences.

407
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.2. MWL

2.2.2.1. General setting

On this screen, make the connection settings required to use MWL servers. The maximum
number of servers that can be registered is 10.
[Fig.2.2.2.1.-1 General setting screen]

(1) Current MWL server

Specify the currently valid MWL server.
(2) MWL server name List
A list of registered MWL servers is displayed here.
(3) Delete button
Clicking it deletes the relevant MWL server.
For an MWL server currently in use, the button is disabled so that the server cannot be
deleted.
(4) Add
The [Add MWL server] dialog box appears.
You cannot add any if the number of registered MWL servers has reached the upper limit of
10.
(5) Edit
You can click it if you select the MWL server you want to edit from [MWL server name List].
The [Edit MWL server] dialog box appears.

408
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(6) Select as worklist type

When set to ON, this is synchronized with the setting of Study input type of Application
setting.

2.2.2.1.1. Add/Edit MWL server

You can add and edit MWL servers.

Under [General setting] of the [MWL setting] screen, click the Add button or the Edit button.
[Fig.2.2.2.1.1.-1 Add MWL server dialog box]

409
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.2.2. Detail setting

2.2.2.2.1. Detail setting 1

On this screen, set MWL search conditions, various timeout times during communication, and so
on.
[Fig.2.2.2.2.-1 Detail setting 1 tab]

(1) Use wild card for search condition

Place a check mark next to it to search using a wild card (where an "*" is added before and
after the input search string).
You can set the search conditions for the following items.
[AE title], [Station name], [Location], and [Perform physician]
(2) Time range
You can select from [Today], [Day], [Hour], and [All].
For [Day], set how many days before the day concerned (today) the search is to start from. If
you do not set it, the range becomes unlimited.
For [Hour], set how many hours from the current time the search is to start from. If you do not
set it, the range becomes unlimited.
(3) Modality
For CCS-RF, displayed only if angiography capture by add-in is enabled.
If you select XA, only XA becomes selected, and other modalities become unselected.
(4) Maximum PDU length (byte)
Set the maximum length of the data unit handled by the protocol.
(5) Association timeout (s)
Set the number of seconds for the association timeout.

410
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(6) Sending timeout (s)

Set the number of seconds for the transmission timeout.
(7) Receiving timeout (s)
Set the number of seconds for the reception timeout.

2.2.2.2.2. Detail setting 2

On this screen, set MWL acquisition conditions and other options.

[Fig.2.2.2.2.-2 Detail setting 2 tab]

(1) Maximum list number

Set the upper limit on the number of lists to receive.
(2) WorkList update method
When you set [Auto] to ON, lists are automatically updated when you move to the [Worklist]
screen.
When you set [Manual] to ON, lists are updated only when instructed.
When you set [By trigger file] to ON, lists are updated when a trigger file is received.
You can specify and lock a trigger file with the following items.
[Path to save trigger file], [Trigger file name], and [Lock the trigger file during
examination]
(3) Auto show refresh option in worklist
When you set it to ON, the MWL search dialog box appears upon login, while the examination
is pending, and upon completion of the examination.
You can set it to ON when [WorkList update method] is [Auto] or [By trigger file].

411
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(4) Show DICOM Violation Error Dialog on receiving illegal data

When you set it to ON, an error message appears if invalid data is detected when MWL data
is received.
(5) Keep worklist on refresh
When you set it to ON, an additional worklist is acquired.
(6) Enable auto delete after exam
When you set it to ON, automatic deletion after completion of the examination is enabled.
You can set it to ON when you set [Keep worklist on refresh] to ON.
(7) Tag for comment
Set the tag number to be set in the comment.
(8) Tag for Protocol
Set the tag to be used in the protocol specification.
The definitions of tags selectable for Tag for Protocol are as given below.

Tag name Tag number

Scheduled Procedure Step

0040,0100 > 0040,0007
Description

Scheduled Procedure Step Code 0040,0100 > 0040,0008 >

Value 0008,0100

Scheduled Procedure Step Code 0040,0100 > 0040,0008 >

Meaning 0008,0104

Scheduled Procedure Step ID 0040,0100 > 0040,0009

Requested Procedure Description 0032,1060

Requested Procedure Code Value 0032,1064 > 0008,0100

Requested Procedure Code

0032,1064 > 0008,0104
Meaning

Requested Procedure ID 0040,1001

(9) Exam (from MWL) Accession No.

Select from [Read only], [Editable only if Accession No. is empty], and [Always editable].

412
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.2.3. DICOM tag setting

On this screen, specify whether to implement filtering using the DICOM filters when sending or
receiving MWL data.
[Fig.2.2.2.3.-1 DICOM tag setting screen]

(1) Enable DICOM filtering (C-FIND request)

When you set it to ON, filtering is applied to requests to the Worklist Server. (This setting is
used to change the search conditions.)
When you click the DICOM filtering rules button, the DICOM filtering rule setting screen
appears, so that you can set rules.
(2) Enable DICOM filtering (C-FIND response)
When you set it to ON, filtering is applied to the responses received from the Worklist Server.
(This setting is used to change the patient or study information received.)
When you click the DICOM filtering rules button, the DICOM filtering rule setting screen
appears, so that you can set rules.

413
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.2.3.1. DICOM filtering rule setting screen

On this screen, set the DICOM filter to use when sending or receiving data.
[Fig.2.2.2.3.1.-1 DICOM filtering rule setting screen]

(1) Filtering order

Decide on the sequence in which the data is to be filtered.
When you click the Up button, the selected item in the list box is moved up by one.
If the selected item is at the top, you cannot click the button.
When you click the Down button, the selected item in the list box is moved down by one.
If the selected item is at the bottom, you cannot click the button.
(2) DICOM filtering rule
A list of rules that have been set is displayed here. You cannot perform editing operations on
the list.
The sequence of the [Copy source], [Overwrite value], and [Delete] columns changes
depending on the sequence for [Filtering order].
(3) Add
The [Add tag] dialog box appears.
(4) Edit
You can click it if you select the item you want to edit from the [DICOM filtering rule] list.
The [Edit filtering rule] dialog box appears.

414
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(5) Delete duplicate tags which are afterward found

When you set it to ON, and if tags are duplicated on the same hierarchical level not included
in sequences or inside the data elements of individual sequences, the ones found later are
deleted.
Deletion of these tags has the highest priority in the five processes, "copy," "overwrite,"
"delete," "delete same tag," and "cut excess character string."
(6) Cut characters exceed the VR definition length
When you set it to ON, and if data that exceeds the maximum character string length of
the VRs specified by the DICOM rule is found, the excess characters will be cut off. This is
executed only for VRs whose type is CHARACTER.
The process of cutting off excess characters is performed last among the five processes,
"copy," "overwrite," "delete," "delete same tag," and "cut excess character string."

2.2.2.3.1.1. Edit filtering rule

In this dialog box, set the rules to be applied to the selected tags. If Copy from and Overwrite
value have settings and the selected tags do not exist (as when the character set is the ASCII
setting), the tags are generated automatically using a blank tag, and the rules are applied.
[Fig.2.2.2.3.1.1.-1 Edit filtering rule dialog box]

(1) Copy from

The tag number of the copy source that has been set is displayed here. Click the Search
button to specify the tag number of the copy source.
If SQ serves as the VR of the tag being edited, the Search button cannot be clicked.
If you want to delete the tag number, click the Clear button.
(2) Copy only when copy target value is empty
When you set it to ON, copying is performed only when the copy destination tag value is
blank.
You can set it to ON if a tag number is set for [Copy from].

415
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(3) Overwrite value

Enter the value used for overwriting the existing value.
"AUTO" is set as a reserved word only if UI serves as the VR of the tag being edited.
No value can be entered for a VR for which overwriting is not permitted.

Reference
• When "AUTO" is input as the overwrite value for a tag whose VR is UI, the UID
numbers are automatically generated only when there is no value. This will be used
when, for example, a Study Instance UID has not been received.
The actual steps for setting "AUTO" are described below.
1. Place a check mark next to [Delete tag] under [Delete], and enter "AUTO" in
[Overwrite value].
2. Set the filtering order (Filtering order) to the "Delete" →"Overwrite" order.
The formats in which the Study Instance UIDs and Series Instance UIDs are grouped
are changed in V2.00 or later. In V2.00, the UID-related grouping rules are revised,
and the current rules are such that random numeric string GUIDs are used. If "AUTO"
is input, however, different rules apply for grouping the UIDs where time sequences
are used instead.

(4) Blank tag

Place a check mark next to it if you want to output a tag using null characters.
When you set it to ON, [Overwrite value] becomes blank, and no editing is possible.
No value can be entered for a VR for which overwriting is not permitted.
(5) Delete
To delete a tag, place a check mark next to it.

416
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.2.3.1.1.1. Select copy source tag dialog box

When you click the Search button in the [Edit filtering rule] dialog box, the [Select copy
source tag] dialog box appears.
From the list, you can select the tags only for items that can be selected.
Note on items that can be selected: Tags of a numerical value or binary type can be copied if the
VR of the copy source is the same as that of the copy destination but only on the condition that
the VM is the same or that tag 1 is copied to tag 1-n. Any combination can be set for tags of a
CHARACTER type regardless of whether the VR is the same or whether the VM is the same.
[Fig.2.2.2.3.1.1.1.-1 Select copy source tag dialog box]

417
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.2.3.1.2. Add tags

In this dialog box, enter the parameters of the tags to be added to the DICOM filters.
[Fig.2.2.2.3.1.2.-1 Add tag dialog box]

VR correspondence table
The table below lists the VR values and the definitions for whether editing for each of the
columns is permitted.

VR Overwrite Copy Delete tag Add tag Type

AE ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ CHARACTER

AS ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ CHARACTER

AT × ✔ ✔ ✔ BINARY

CS ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ CHARACTER

DA ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ CHARACTER

DS ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ CHARACTER

DT ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ CHARACTER

FL × ✔ ✔ ✔ BINARY

FD × ✔ ✔ ✔ BINARY

IS ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ CHARACTER

LO ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ CHARACTER

LT ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ CHARACTER

OB × ✔ ✔ ✔ BINARY

OF × ✔ ✔ ✔ BINARY

OW × ✔ ✔ ✔ BINARY

PN ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ CHARACTER

SH ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ CHARACTER

SL × ✔ ✔ ✔ BINARY

418
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

VR Overwrite Copy Delete tag Add tag Type

SQ × × ✔ × OTHER

SS × ✔ ✔ ✔ BINARY

ST ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ CHARACTER

TM ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ CHARACTER

UI ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ CHARACTER

UL × ✔ ✔ ✔ BINARY

US × ✔ ✔ ✔ BINARY

UT ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ CHARACTER

2.2.2.4. Log output setting

For details of the DICOM log display tool, refer to the Service Manual Report (CXDI Control
Software NE_10-012 or CXDI Controller RF_10-013).
[Fig.2.2.2.4.-1 Log output setting screen]

(1) Log output level (IHE module)

Use the slider to set the log output level.
(2) Log output level (DICOM library)
Use the slider to set the log output level.

419
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(3) Output dump file during sending

When you set it to ON, dump files are output during transmission.
Dump files are generated in the dat format. They can be displayed using the DICOM log
display tool (DumpViewer.exe).
Example: dolfin_121837584_send_CFindRq-d_il_5_0.dat
(4) Output dump file during receiving
When you set it to ON, dump files are output during reception.
Dump files are generated in the dat format. They can be displayed using the DICOM log
display tool (DumpViewer.exe).
Example: dolfin_121838458_receive_CFindRsp-d_il_5_0.dat

420
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.3. MPPS

2.2.3.1. General setting

On this screen, make the connection settings required for MPPS communication. In V2.00 or
later, you can register multiple MPPS servers. The maximum number of servers that can be
registered is 10.
[Fig.2.2.3.1.-1 General setting screen]

(1) Current MPPS server

Specify the currently valid MPPS server.
(2) MPPS server list
A list of registered MPPS servers is displayed here.
(3) Delete button
Clicking it disables the relevant MPPS server.
(4) Add
The [Add MPPS server] dialog box appears.
You cannot add any if the number of registered MPPS servers has reached the upper limit of
10.
(5) Edit
You can click it if you select the MPPS server you want to edit from [MPPS server list].
The [Edit MPPS server] dialog box appears.

421
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.3.1.1. Add/Edit MPPS server

You can add and edit MPPS servers.

Under [General setting] on the [MPPS setting] screen, click the Add button or the Edit button.
[Fig.2.2.3.1.1.-1 Add MPPS server dialog box]

422
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.3.2. Detail setting

On this screen, make the settings for MPPS communication in the same way as that for the [MWL
communication setting] group box in the MWL detail settings.
[Fig.2.2.3.2.-1 Detail setting screen]

(1) Communication setting

For details of the settings to make here, refer to the setting items of [MWL communication
setting] in "2.2.2.2. Detail setting" for MWL.
(2) Send reject message to MPPS server
By default, it is set to ON.
(3) Sending MPPS Completed
Set the timing to send MPPS Completed.
If connecting to an RIS system that cannot issue a new order unless it receives MPPS
Completed, set it to [Not wait for the image to be sent].

423
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.3.3. DICOM tag setting

On this screen, set the DICOM filters to use when sending or receiving MPPS data.
[Fig.2.2.3.3.-1 DICOM tag setting screen]

(1) Enable DICOM filtering (N-CREATE request)

When you set it to ON, "In Progress" is sent, which means that a study has started.
When you click the DICOM filtering rules button, the DICOM filtering rule setting screen
appears, so that you can set rules.
For details, refer to "2.2.2.3.1. DICOM filtering rule setting screen" for MWL.
(2) Enable DICOM filtering (N-SET Request)
When you set it to ON, "Discontinued" or "Completed" is sent, which means that a study has
been discontinued or completed.
When you click the DICOM filtering rules button, the DICOM filtering rule setting screen
appears, so that you can set rules.
For details, refer to "2.2.2.3.1. DICOM filtering rule setting screen" for MWL.

2.2.3.4. Log output setting

Refer to "2.2.2.4. Log output setting" for MWL.

424
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.4. Storage

2.2.4.1. General setting

On this screen, make the connection settings required to output data to storage. The maximum
number of connection destinations that can be registered is 10.
[Fig.2.2.4.1.-1 General setting screen]

(1) Current storage (Storage 1, Storage 2, Storage 3)

When you set it to ON, transfer is performed using the specified connection destination.
For each storage, you can specify a valid connection destination, but you cannot set the
same connection destination.
(2) Storage list
A list of registered connection destinations is displayed here.
(3) Delete button
Clicking it deletes the relevant connection destination.
(4) Add
The [Add storage] dialog box appears.
You cannot add any if the number of registered connection destinations has reached the
upper limit of 10.
(5) Property
You can click it if you select the connection destination you want to edit from [Storage list].
The [Edit storage] dialog box appears.

425
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.4.1.1. Add/Edit storage

You can add and edit connection destinations.

On each tab, you can specify the settings such as connection destination, storage commitment,
and DICOM tags.
This dialog box appears when you click the Add button or the Property button under [General
setting] on the [Storage setting] screen.
[Fig.2.2.4.1.1.-1 Add storage dialog box]

2.2.4.1.1.1. Connection setting

[Fig.2.2.4.1.1.1.-1 Connection setting tab]

426
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(1) Bits Stored

Select the image bits to output between [12bit] and [16bit].
(2) Output only rejected images
When you set it to ON, only rejected images are output.

Note
• For CCS, linear output is not supported, and images obtained after log conversion are always
output. Thus, even when 16-bit images are output, the image quality will never improve. For
protocols that meet specific conditions(*), however, linear output is performed. (* Refer to
"s11144 DICOM Output of RAW Data" in New Function Descriptions.)

2.2.4.1.1.2. Storage commitment setting

[Fig.2.2.4.1.1.2.-1 Storage commitment setting tab]

(1) Enable storage commitment server

When you set it to ON, storage commitment is enabled, so that you can also set [Called AE
Title], etc.

427
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.4.1.1.3. DICOM tag setting

[Fig.2.2.4.1.1.3.-1 DICOM tag setting tab]

(1) Enable GSPS

When you set it to ON, GSPS is enabled.
(2) Radiography image modality
Select between [DX] and [CR].
(3) Imager pixel spacing (0018, 1164)
Select between [Sensor pixel spacing] and [Corrected pixel spacing].
(4) Pixel spacing (0028, 0030)
Select from [Sensor pixel spacing], [Corrected pixel spacing], and [No output].

Reference
• Note on corrected pixel spacing: The distance from the X-ray light source to the patient
surface is different from the distance to the detector surface, so usually, the following values
are used with PACS for calculation for the conversion of the detector surface distance into
the patient surface distance.
»» Distance Source to Patient (0018, 1111)
»» Distance Source to Detector (0018, 1110)
Some PACSs do not have this calculation function, and in order to calculate the patient
surface distance in PACS, the value equivalent to the pixel size on the patient surface is
calculated and output.

428
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.4.2. Detail setting

On [Detail setting], make the settings for storage communication in the same way as that for
[MWL communication setting] group box in the MWL detail settings.
[Fig.2.2.4.2.-1 Detail setting screen]
If the character set is Japanese (hankaku)

(1) Output settings

This group box is not displayed if the character set of the DICOM common settings is not
"Japanese" or "Japanese (hankaku)."
The display of the setting items in the group box differs depending on the character set
setting. For details, refer to "Correlation between character sets selected as DICOM common
setting and display of output settings."
(2) Enable Japanese extended settings
When you set it to ON, Japanese extended settings are enabled.
(3) 8-bit character
Displayed only if the character set setting is "Japanese (hankaku)."
If the character set setting of the DICOM common settings is changed, [Output] is assumed.
(4) 8-bit character place of PN
Displayed only if the character set setting is "Japanese (hankaku)."
You can set it only if the Japanese extended settings are enabled and 8-bit character is set to
[Output].
(5) Multi byte character
You cannot set it if the Japanese extended settings are off.
If the character set setting of the DICOM common settings is changed, [Output] is assumed.

429
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(6) Character set

In accordance with the output setting, the corresponding character set is displayed.
For details, refer to "Correlation between character sets (0008, 0005) that are output and
output settings."
(7) Draw a fiducial mark indicating the upper left of detectors during printing images
If you select an item other than [None], a fiducial mark indicating the exposure direction is
added to the transfer images.
Specify the size of the fiducial mark indicating the upper left of detectors with [Small],
[Medium], or [Large].
(8) Communication setting
For details of the settings to make here, refer to the setting items of [MWL communication
setting] in "2.2.2.2. Detail setting" for MWL.

Reference
• If the fiducial mark indicating the upper left is enabled
Examples of transfer images for imaging using chest PA

430
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• Protocol settings and mark positioning
»» Example for CXDI-50RF (left) and CXDI-501G (right)

»» Example for CXDI-70C Wireless

431
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference

Correlation between character sets selected as DICOM common setting and display of
output settings

Character set setting

Japanese Japanese (hankaku)

8-bit character setting

(Including 8-bit character place Not displayed Displayed
Output setting of PN)

Multi byte character setting Displayed Displayed

432
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Correlation between character sets (0008, 0005) that are output and output settings

8-bit character
Enable Multi Output
8-bit Output
Japanese byte value*2 Character set
character value*1
extended Output character (Other (0008, 0005)
place of (PN)
settings output than PN)
PN

test= 試験 = test 試験 ISO 2022 IR 13\ISO

OFF - - -
ﾃｽﾄ ﾃｽﾄ 2022 IR 87

test 試験 ISO 2022 IR 13\ISO

ON ﾃｽﾄ = 試験 =
ﾃｽﾄ 2022 IR 87

First OFF ﾃｽﾄ == test ﾃｽﾄ ISO_IR 13

OFF for test 試験 ISO 2022 IR 13\ISO

ﾃｽﾄ ==
PN ﾃｽﾄ 2022 IR 87
ON
test= 試験 = test 試験 \ISO 2022 IR 13\ISO
ON
ﾃｽﾄ ﾃｽﾄ 2022 IR 87

Third OFF test== ﾃｽﾄ test ﾃｽﾄ \ISO 2022 IR 13

OFF for test 試験 \ISO 2022 IR 13\ISO

test== ﾃｽﾄ
ON PN ﾃｽﾄ 2022 IR 87

ON test= 試験 = test 試験 \ISO 2022 IR 87

OFF test== test None

OFF -
OFF for
test== test 試験 \ISO 2022 IR 87
PN

test 試験 ISO 2022 IR 13\ISO

ON test= 試験 =
ﾃｽﾄ 2022 IR 87
OFF for
- OFF test== test ﾃｽﾄ \ISO 2022 IR 13
PN
OFF for test 試験 ISO 2022 IR 13\ISO
test==
PN ﾃｽﾄ 2022 IR 87
*1 Output value if the PN type input value is "test= 試験 = ﾃｽﾄ "
*2 Output value if the input value of a character type (such as SH) other than PN is "test 試験ﾃｽﾄ "

433
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.4.3. DICOM tag setting

On this screen, make the settings for the DICOM filters and the DICOM tag copy used when
sending data to storage.
[Fig.2.2.4.3.-1 DICOM tag setting screen]

(1) Enable DICOM filtering

When you set it to ON, the DICOM filters are enabled.
When you click the DICOM filtering rules button, the DICOM filtering rule setting dialog box
appears, so that you can set rules.
For details of the DICOM filtering rule setting dialog box, refer to "2.2.2.3.1. DICOM filtering
rule setting screen" for MWL.
(2) Enable DICOM tag copy
When you set it to ON, DICOM tag copy is enabled.
When you click the Tag copy rule button, the DICOM tag copy rule setting dialog box
appears, so that you can set rules.
For details of the tag copy rule setting dialog box, refer to "2.2.4.3.1. DICOM tag copy rule
setting dialog box."
(3) RF C-STORE request (only for CCS-RF)
This setting can be made only for CCS-RF.

434
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.4.3.1. DICOM tag copy rule setting dialog box

In this dialog box, edit the copy sources for tag copy. This function is used to copy MWL received
tag data to C-STORE output tags.
[Fig.2.2.4.3.1.-1 DICOM tag copy rule setting dialog box]

(1) Select copy target tag

A list of tags that can be set as copy destinations is displayed here.
(2) Copy source information
If a copy source tag is set for the tag selected from the [Select copy target tag] list, the tag
number of the copy source tag is displayed here.
(3) Clear
You can click it if a copy source tag is set for the tag selected from the [Select copy target
tag] list.
Clicking it deletes the copy source tag.
(4) Search
You can click it if a tag whose [VR] is other than "SQ" and "UN" is selected from the [Select
copy target tag] list.
Clicking it causes the [Select copy source tag] dialog box to be displayed.

435
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.4.3.1.1. Select copy source tag dialog box

[Fig.2.2.4.3.1.1.-1 Select copy source tag dialog box]

(1) Tag list

A list of tags is displayed here.
Tags can be selected only for items that can be selected (refer to Reference). Double-clicking
an item or clicking the OK button causes the tag number to be set in the copy source.
(2) Copy only when copy target value is empty
You can set it if you select a tag number from the tag list.
When you set it to ON, copying is performed only when the copy destination tag value is
blank.

Reference
• Tags with the same VR or VM as a tag being edited can be selected. In addition, this
selection is possible if CHARACTER is the type for both the tag being edited and the copy
destination tag.

2.2.4.4. Log output setting

Refer to "2.2.2.4. Log output setting" for MWL.

436
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.5. Printer

2.2.5.1. General setting

On this screen, make the connection settings required to use the printer. The maximum number
of printers that can be registered is 10.
[Fig.2.2.5.1.-1 General setting screen]

(1) Printer list

A list of registered printers is displayed here.
(2) Delete button
Clicking it deletes the relevant printer settings.
You cannot delete a printer that is set for [Destination printer] in [Film output printer] in [Film
Output Setting].
(3) Add
The [Add printer] dialog box appears.
You cannot add any if the number of registered printers has reached the upper limit of 10.
(4) Property
You can click it if you select the printer you want to edit from [Printer list].
The [Printer property] dialog box appears.

437
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.5.1.1. Add printer

You can add printers to use. Set the required parameters.

[Fig.2.2.5.1.1.-1 Add printer dialog box]

(1) Printer name

Enter a printer name. You cannot add an existing printer name.
(2) Printer model
The model names in the registered printer catalog are displayed here.

438
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.5.1.2. Printer property dialog box

In this dialog box, change printer settings. Make the settings for connections, printing parameters,
and film list, using the respective tabs to make changes to the printer information or output the
settings as catalog files.
[Fig.2.2.5.1.2.-1 Printer property dialog box]

(1) Export catalog

You can save the input data as a catalog file (.xml).
The [Catalog information editing] dialog box appears.

439
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.5.1.2.1. Connection setting

On this screen, change the settings for printer connections. The parameters to be set are the
same as those to be set when a printer is added.
[Fig.2.2.5.1.2.1.-1 Connection setting tab]

(1) Printer name

Enter a printer name. You cannot set an existing printer name.

440
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.5.1.2.2. Printing parameter settings

On this screen, set the parameters for each printer. The printing parameter values of the printer
model specified when the printer was added are copied to serve as the initial values displayed on
the screen.
[Fig.2.2.5.1.2.2.-1 Printing parameter setting tab]

(1) Image display format

Fixed to "STANDARD¥1,1."
(2) Background
Set the density of the border regions.
(3) Min density
Enter the lowest density.
When you set [Output tag] to ON, the lowest density tag is output.
(4) Max density
Enter the highest density.
When you set [Output tag] to ON, the highest density tag is output.
(5) Lightbox illumination (L0) (cd/m)
Enter the brightness (for CCS, lightbox illumination).
(6) Requested decimate/Crop behavior
Set the action to be performed if the images do not fit in the image box.

441
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.5.1.2.3. Film list

On this screen, you can display a list of films that can be used with the printer and print test
charts. The film list is synchronized with the film list registered as described in "2.2.5.4.1.2. Film
list settings."
[Fig.2.2.5.1.2.3.-1 Film list tab]

(1) Film list

A list of registered films is displayed here.
(2) Printing test chart
You can click it if you select an item from the [Film list] list.
The test chart printing dialog box appears.

442
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.5.1.2.3.1. Test chart printing dialog box

You can display a print preview of a selected film in the full-screen display window and print it.
The dialog box is displayed by clicking the Printing test chart button on the Film list tab in the
[Printer property] dialog box.
[Fig.2.2.5.1.2.3.1.-1 Test chart printing dialog box]

(1) Printing
Used to print a test chart.
(2) Image display area
The background is black.
A progress bar is displayed while an image is being generated.
The image is enlarged or reduced in line with the screen size using the ratio of the test chart
image generated.

443
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.5.1.2.3.2. Catalog information editing dialog box

When exporting a printer catalog, you can display and edit the data for [Manufacturer] and
[Printer model name].
If, when a printer catalog is to be imported, the printer model name is the same as a name in an
existing catalog, you can import the catalog after editing the data for [Manufacturer] and [Printer
model name].
[Fig.2.2.5.1.2.3.2.-1 Catalog information editing dialog box]
For exporting

(1) Manufacturer
The name of the manufacturer in the catalog to be imported or exported is displayed, and can
also be edited.
(2) Printer model name
The printer model name in the catalog to be imported or exported is displayed, and can also
be edited.

444
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.5.2. Film Output Setting

On this screen, you can display and edit the output destination for each film, output settings for
each exposure mode, and other output settings common to printers.
[Fig.2.2.5.2.-1 Film Output Setting screen]

(1) Enable printer output

When you set it to ON, printer output is enabled.
You cannot set it to ON if all the [Destination printer] items in [Film output printer] are set
to [(None)].
(2) Film list
A list of registered films is displayed here.
(3) Exposure mode output setting
A list of output settings for each exposure mode is displayed here.
(4) Edit
You can click it if you select an exposure mode from the [Exposure mode output setting]
list.
The [Edit output setting] dialog box appears.
(5) Auto output exposure mode
You can select [Fluoro] and [Digital-cine] only for CCS-RF.
(6) Output ruler
You can select from [None], [mm], and [inch].

445
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(7) Draw a fiducial mark indicating the upper left of detectors during printing images
You can select from [None], [Small], [Medium], and [Large].
If you select an item other than [None], a fiducial mark indicating the exposure direction is
added to the transfer images.
(8) Enable printing preview
When you set it to ON, you can check the print format during print output.

2.2.5.2.1. Edit output setting

On this screen, make the output settings for a selected exposure mode. On the Film Output
Setting screen, you can edit the output settings for each exposure mode.
[Fig.2.2.5.2.1.-1 Edit output setting dialog box]

(1) Film size/orientation

You can select a film size and an orientation registered in the catalog.
(2) Fit style
A fixed magnification ratio applies if the slider value is 1 to 100, and Fit applies if it is 0.
(3) Layout
The thumbnails and border widths of the registered layout are displayed here.
For the correlation between layouts and fit styles, refer to "Correlation between fit styles and
layouts" below.

446
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Exposure mode default values

Exposure mode Layout Fit style

Radiography 1x1 100%

Digital-cine 5x5 Fit

Fluoro 5x5 Fit

Stitch 1x1 Fit

Correlation between fit styles and layouts

Exposure mode Layout Note Fit style

Fixed magnification rate (1 to

Auto layout
Radiography 100%) only

Specified layout No restrictions applicable

Auto layout Fixed to Fit

Digital-cine Only m x n matrix

Specified layout layouts are Fixed to Fit if other than 1 x 1.
displayed.

Auto layout Fixed to Fit

Fluoro Only m x n matrix

Specified layout layouts are Fixed to Fit if other than 1 x 1.
displayed.

No other layouts
Stitch Fixed to 1 x 1 layout. No restrictions applicable
are displayed.

447
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.5.3. Detail setting

On this screen, make the settings for printer communication in the same way as that for the [MWL
communication setting] group box in the MWL detail settings.
Refer to [MWL communication setting] in "2.2.2.2.1. Detail setting 1" for MWL.
[Fig.2.2.5.3.-1 Detail setting screen]

448
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.5.4. Printer catalog name

On this screen, a list of registered printer catalogs is displayed, and catalogs can be edited and
imported.
[Fig.2.2.5.4.-1 Printer catalog name screen]

(1) Catalog list

A list of registered printer catalogs is displayed here.
(2) Delete button
Clicking it deletes the relevant printer catalog.
(3) Property
You can click it if you select a printer catalog from the [Catalog list] list.
The [Catalog property] dialog box appears.
(4) Import
The file selection dialog box appears, so that you can select the catalog (.xml) to import. The
imported catalog is added to the [Catalog list] list.
If you attempt to register a catalog that has the same printer model as that in an existing
catalog, the [Catalog information editing] dialog box appears, so that you can import the
catalog by editing the printer model. You cannot import the catalog with the same printer
model.
You cannot import catalog in the following case, either.
• An input rule infringement is contained in a parameter of the catalog. (For details of the
input rules, refer to "2.2.5.1.2.2. Printing parameter settings.")

449
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.5.4.1. Catalog property dialog box

In this dialog box, you can edit registered printer catalogs. The dialog box has the [Printing
parameter] tab and the [Film list] tab. The initial values are the ones in the imported catalog file.
The values confirmed here are reflected only in the catalog, not in the printing parameters of any
existing printers.
[Fig.2.2.5.4.1.-1 Catalog property dialog box]

450
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.5.4.1.1. Printing parameter settings

On this screen, you can edit the printing parameters of printer catalogs. Even when you edit
the catalog used to add a printer, the printing parameters of any existing printer will remain
unchanged.
Refer to "2.2.5.1.2.2. Printing parameter settings."

Note
• For Min density and Max density, the check is off by default.

[Fig.2.2.5.4.1.1.-1 Printing parameter tab]

451
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.5.4.1.2. Film list settings

You can display a list of printer catalog films and add film settings.
If film settings are added or deleted on this screen, the changes are also linked with the film list
of the printer to which the edited printer model is applied.
[Fig.2.2.5.4.1.2.-1 Film list tab]

(1) Film list

A list of registered films is displayed here.
(2) Delete button
Clicking it deletes the relevant film.
You cannot delete a film that is set for [Destination printer] in [Film output printer] in [Film
Output Setting].
(3) Add
The [Add film] dialog box appears.

452
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.5.4.1.2.1.Add film dialog box

In this dialog box, set the film to add to the catalog.

[Fig.2.2.5.4.1.2.1.-1 Add film dialog box]

(1) Width
Enter the width of the ImageBox.
(2) Height
Enter the height of the ImageBox.

2.2.5.5. Log output setting

Refer to "2.2.2.4. Log output setting" for MWL.

453
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.6. Media output

2.2.6.1. Disk Storage/DICOM disc setting

On this screen, you can display a list of output destination settings for disk storage, and can add,
edit, and delete the settings. You can register up to five transfer destinations. You can also make
various settings for creating PDI (Portable Data for Imaging) format DICOM discs.
[Fig.2.2.6.1.-1 Media output setting screen]

Reference
• Using Disk Storage, storage is enabled for DVD-RAM discs, CD-RW discs, USB storage
devices, hard disk drives, and all other storage media that can be referenced from Explorer.
If you want to specify a network drive, map the network drive first and then specify a path. In
the offline status, data cannot be output to PACS, etc., but it can be stored on discs.

(1) Current output destination

Set a transfer destination. Select [(None)] or a registered transfer destination.
(2) Enable disk storage
When you set it to ON, disk storage is enabled.
You cannot set it to ON if [Current output destination] is [(None)].
This setting and the enable/disable setting of [Enable to create DICOM Disc] are mutually
exclusive; in other words, if one setting is ON, the other setting is OFF.
(3) Disk storage server list
A list of registered transfer destinations is displayed here.

454
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(4) Add
The [Add disk storage] dialog box appears.
You cannot add any if the number of registered transfer destinations has reached the upper
limit of 5.
(5) Edit
You can click it if you select the transfer destination you want to edit from [Disk storage
server list].
The [Edit disc storage] dialog box appears.
(6) Output drive
Select a connected drive.
Select from the letters representing the drives of the disc recorders recognized by the PC.
(7) Enable to create DICOM disc
When you set it to ON, DICOM disc creation is enabled.
You cannot set it to ON if Output drive is set to [(None)].
This setting and the enable/disable setting of [Enable disk storage] are mutually exclusive;
in other words, if one setting is ON, the other setting is OFF.
(8) Enable GSPS
When you set it to ON, GSPS output is enabled.
(9) Eject the disc automatically after recording
When you set it to ON, the disc is automatically ejected after the creation of the disc is
completed.

455
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.6.1.1. Add disk storage/Edit disc storage

On these screens, set the parameters required to add and change the transfer destinations of
MediaStorage. The corresponding screen appears when you click the Add button or the Edit
button on the Media output setting screen.
[Fig.2.2.6.1.1.-1 Add disk storage dialog box]

(1) Disk storage path

The storage destination path is displayed.
Click the Browse button, and specify a storage destination folder.
You cannot enter a UNC path.
(2) Enable GSPS
When you set it to ON, GSPS output is enabled.

456
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.7. Report

2.2.7.1. General setting

On this screen, make the connection settings required to perform report output. The maximum
number of connection destinations that can be registered is 10.
[Fig. 2.2.7.1.-1 General setting screen]

(1) Current storage

When you set it to ON, transfer is performed using the specified connection destination.
(2) Report list
A list of registered connection destinations is displayed here.
(3) Add
The [Add report] dialog box appears.
You cannot add any if the number of registered connection destinations has reached the
upper limit of 10.
(4) Property
You can click it if you select the connection destination you want to edit from [Report list].
The [Edit report] dialog box appears.

457
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.7.1.1. Add/Edit report server

On this screen, you can add and edit connection destinations. You can specify the settings such
as connection destination and storage commitment.
[Fig.2.2.7.1.1.-1 Add/Edit report dialog box]

(1) Connection setting

Refer to "2.2.5.1.2.1. Connection setting" for Printer.
(2) Storage commitment setting
Refer to "2.2.4.1.1.2. Storage commitment setting" for Storage.

458
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.7.2. Detail setting

Detailed settings for storages are displayed here. You can make settings as described in "2.2.4.2.
Detail setting" for Storage.
[Fig.2.2.7.2.-1 Detail setting screen]

(1) Output settings

The settings for output to storage are used, and cannot be edited.
(2) Communication setting
The settings for output to storage are used, and cannot be edited.

459
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.7.3. DICOM tag setting

On this screen, make the settings for the DICOM filters and the DICOM tag copy used when
sending data to storage.
[Fig.2.2.7.3.-1 DICOM tag setting screen]

(1) Enable DICOM filtering

When you set it to ON, the DICOM filters are enabled.
When you click the DICOM filtering rules button, the DICOM filtering rule setting screen
appears, so that you can set rules.
(2) Enable DICOM tag copy
When you set it to ON, DICOM tag copy is enabled.
When you click the Tag copy rule button, the DICOM tag copy rule setting dialog box
appears, so that you can set rules.

460
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.7.4. Log output setting

Detailed settings for storages are displayed in read only mode. You can make settings on the
Log output setting tab on the Storage setting screen.
[Fig.2.2.7.4.-1 Log output setting screen]

461
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Other information
Flow of communication (for reference)

462
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3. System setting

2.3.1. Application Setting

On this screen, make the settings relating to the operation of CCS and the common settings in
the system.
The settings selected from each tab are retained until you exit the service tool.

2.3.1.1. Operation

[Fig.2.3.1.1.-1 Operation setting screen]

(1) Study input type

Set a study input type. If you select [(None)], the study input type will be manual input.
(2) Auto show exam screen on single study
When you set it to ON, and if the number of worklists received with MWL or Studix (CSV) is 1,
the display automatically transfers to the examination screen.
You can set it when you select [MWL] or [Studix (CSV)] for [Study input type].
(3) Use screen keyboard (only for CCS-NE)
When you set it to ON, the screen keyboard can be used.
(4) Keep the previous Input Mode
When you set it to ON, the input mode (full size or half size) of the patient name, patient ID,
and other text boxes is kept.
(5) Start the launcher
When you set it to ON, the launcher starts when starting CCS.
For details, refer to the separate manual, "Launcher Setting Procedure."

463
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(6) Path to save image data

Specify the storage destination of captured images and image-processed images to transfer.
(7) Path to exam log (Manual)
Specify the storage destination used to save examination logs manually.
(8) Enable auto exam log output
When you set it to ON, examination logs are output automatically.
(9) Path to exam log (Auto)
Specify the storage destination used to save examination logs automatically.
You can set it when you set [Enable auto exam log output] to ON.
(10) Time span of a log file
Select the save interval of a single examination log file.
Month: First day to the last day of the month. ExamLogM01.csv,…, ExamLogM12.csv
Week: Monday to Sunday. ExamLogW01.csv,…, ExamLogW54.csv
You can set it when you set [Enable auto exam log output] to ON.
(11) Path to save original data
Specify the storage destination of original data (linear images with their detector
characteristics corrected).
You can implement original data acquisition from the QC tool of CCS.
(12) Patient Info using mode
Select the item to use to input patient names.
This is displayed if you select [Divide into three groups (Half size, Ideogram,
Phonogram)] for [DICOM Setting] → [DICOM Common Setting] → [Name input style].
(13) Patient Info display mode
Select the item to display for patient names in the patient information pane.
This is displayed if you select [Divide into three groups (Half size, Ideogram,
Phonogram)] for [DICOM Setting] → [DICOM Common Setting] → [Name input style].

464
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.1.2. Patient information

On this screen, make the settings relating to patient information.
[Fig.2.3.1.2.-1 Patient information setting screen]

(1) Essential input setting

Set the essential input items of patient information.
Set essential input items to ON.

Reference
• For [Patient info 1], [Patient info 2], and [Patient info 3], the relevant items are
hidden if their fields, mentioned in "2.3.1.13. Select list," are disabled.

(2) Age input

Set the method of inputting the patients' ages.
If you set [Birthday] to ON under [Essential input setting], [Age] under [Age input] is set to
OFF and [Birthday and age] is set to ON.
If you set [Age] to ON under [Essential input setting], [Birthday] under [Age input] is set to
OFF and [Birthday and age] is set to ON.
(3) Patient ID search method
Set the method of searching through the patient list when entering patient IDs.
When you set [Partial match] to ON, [Disable leading zero padding] is disabled and set to
OFF.
When you set [Forward match] to ON, [Disable leading zero padding] is enabled.
(4) Emergency patient name
Set the name for patients under emergency care.

465
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(5) Show Recent Patient List

When you set it to ON, a patient list is displayed.
(6) Show patient information on StartExam
When you set it to ON, patient information is highlighted.
You can set the item to highlight, as well as the font type and font size to apply to highlighting.

Reference
• For [Patient info 1], [Patient info 2], and [Patient info 3] under [Patient
information to display], the relevant items are hidden if their fields, mentioned in
"2.3.1.13. Select list," are disabled.

2.3.1.3. Protocol

[Fig.2.3.1.3.-1 Protocol setting screen]

(1) Automatically apply protocol

When you set it to ON, the function for automatically applying the protocols is enabled.
(2) Show code meaning
When you set it to ON, the code meanings are displayed as the names of the Protocol
buttons.
(3) Select next protocol automatically
When you set it to ON, the next pending imaging protocol is automatically set to Ready after
exposure.
(4) Keep applied operations at protocol replacement.
When you set it to ON, image operations, measurements, and annotations are carried over at
protocol replacement.

466
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(5) Enlarge protocol buttons

When you set it to ON, the Protocol buttons in the examination window are enlarged.
(6) Hide workspace name and enlarge protocol name
When you set it to ON, workspace names are hidden and protocol names are enlarged on
the protocol buttons in the examination window.
(7) Press an incomplete protocol's thumbnail to add the same protocol
When you set it to ON, the function for adding the same protocol by clicking an incomplete
protocol's thumbnail is enabled.
(8) Protocol Selector default
Set the protocol selection method.
Search by category
Searches for protocols from the tray.
Search by body part
Searches for protocols based on a body part.
(9) Category search default
Set the default display for Search by category.
Display the top category
The top tab is always selected during Search by category display.
Display the latest category
The tab selected last is selected during Search by category display.
(10) Body part search result
Select from [Frequently-used protocols], [Recently-used protocols], and [Examination
history].
You cannot set [Frequently-used protocols] if [Recently-used protocols] is OFF.
You cannot set [Recently-used protocols] if [Frequently-used protocols] is OFF.

467
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.1.4. Study information

On this screen, make the settings relating to study information.
[Fig.2.3.1.4.-1 Study information setting screen]

(1) Required input items

Set the essential input items of study information.
Set essential input items to ON.

Reference
• For [Patient info 1], [Patient info 2], and [Patient info 3], the relevant items are
hidden if their fields, mentioned in "2.3.1.13. Select list," are disabled.

(2) Study information title

Select the item to display as a study information title.
For details of the items that can be selected, refer to "Items that can be displayed as a study
information title."
(3) Study information display item
Specify whether to display "items that can be displayed as a study information title."
An item that is set to ON is displayed as part of study information.
Those items that are set as essential items for [Required input items] are set to ON, and
cannot be set to OFF.

Reference
• For [Patient info 1], [Patient info 2], and [Patient info 3], the relevant items are
hidden if their fields, mentioned in "2.3.1.13. Select list," are disabled.

468
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(4) Reject reason is essential

When you set it to ON, the reason for rejection must be entered.
(5) Enable reject in past list
When you set it to ON, the reject function is enabled with past studies.
(6) Enable reject on dynamic protocol (only for CCS-RF)
You can set it when you set [Enable reject in past list] to ON.
Items that can be displayed as a study information title

Item name (Japanese) Item name (English)

Accession No. Accession Number

RP 記述 RP Description

SPS 記述 SPS Description

Study Instance UID Study Instance UID

照会医師名 Referring Physician

検査記述 Study Description

読影医師名 Reading Physician

2.3.1.5. Examination screen

Make the settings relating to the examination screen.

469
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.1.5.1. Examination screen 1

[Fig.2.3.1.5.1.-1 Examination screen 1 setting screen]

• CCS-NE

• CCS-RF

470
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(1) Display the arrangement screen of study information before starting an examination
When you set it to ON, the screen on which to check or input the information required before
an examination is started is displayed.
(2) Sleep detector after exam
When you set it to ON, the detector is set to the sleep mode after the examination ends.
(3) Check grid status when exposure is ready
When you set it to ON, an automatic grid check is performed immediately after exposure
becomes ready.
When you set it to OFF, a warning is displayed only when a grid is inserted in reverse or
halfway or another error that makes it impossible to continue exposures occurs. The grid
status has nothing to do with this setting.
(4) Enable image adjustment of Window Level (WL) and Window Width (WW)
When you set it to ON, you can make image adjustments using the window level and the
window width.
(5) Switch the displayed image with mouse wheel
When you set it to ON, you can switch between preview images by scrolling over an image
with the mouse.
(6) Perform the grid line suppression based on the grid information sent from the X-ray
generator and the detector
When you set it to ON, grid line suppression is performed based on the grid information sent
from the X-ray generator and the detector.
(7) Exam screen layout
Select screen layout mode.
(8) Display item
Set the items to display.
(9) Auto-expanding tools setting
Select an auto-expanding tool, as needed.
(10) Expand image view pane
When you set it to ON, the image view pane is maximized.
If you set [Use live monitor] for [Display], you cannot set it to OFF.
(11) Disable screen transition
When you set it to ON, screen transition is disabled during examination.
You can set it when you set [Expand image view pane] to ON.
(12) Show grid warning
When you set it to ON, grid warnings are displayed. When you set it to OFF, no warnings are
displayed on the examination screen, but the grid name of the detector status is indicated in
red.
(13) Show image analysis error
When you set it to ON, image analysis errors are displayed.
(14) Show the mode to specify an ROI after closing image analysis error
When you set it to ON, the display automatically transfers to the ROI selection mode after the
image analysis error dialog box is closed.
You can set it when you set [Show image analysis error] to ON.

471
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(15) Show virtual collimator

When you set it to ON, the virtual collimator is displayed.
(16) Show an alert for incomplete exam on EndExam
When you set it to ON, an alert for an incomplete examination is displayed.
(17) Show send-to-storage button
When you set it to ON, the Send-to-storage button is displayed.

2.3.1.5.2. Examination screen 2

[Fig.2.3.1.5.2.-1 Examination screen 2 setting screen]

(1) Position
Select the help display position in the image display area.
(2) Timeout
Set the time after which the help display is hidden.
(3) Font
Set the font type and the font size to apply to the measurement object.
(4) Width
Set the line width of the measurement object.
(5) Measuring unit
Set the unit used for measurement values.

472
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(6) Conduct a check of REX at examination

When you set it to ON, a check is performed to see if the range specified with [Upper limit]
and [Lower limit] is exceeded.
When you set it to OFF, the settings for REX check at examination other than this check box
are disabled.
Set [Upper limit] and [Lower limit] to ON, and set the respective values.

Note
• This function is intended to detect extreme REX values to prevent dose errors from
being overlooked. For this reason, set the upper and lower limits on REX values to
sufficient levels not dependent on the dose for any body part.

(7) Unit for editing

Set the unit to use when editing the mask in the examination screen in protocols for which
PW is not set.
(8) Specifying ROI frame
Select between [Specifying Two Points] and [Specifying One Point] for the method of
specifying the ROI range.
When you select [Specifying One Point], you can set the "width," "height," and "unit" of the
ROI frame.
(9) width x height
Set the width and height of the ROI frame when selecting [Specifying One Point].
Select the size unit between mm and inch. When you change the unit, the width and height
fields become blank.
(10) Enable manual cropping area modification
When you set it to ON, manual cropping area modification is enabled.
This takes effect for those protocol workspaces for which the initial cropping area setting is
fixed.
When you set it to OFF, changes to any size other than the fixed size are prohibited.
(11) Enable cropping area modification immediately after exposure
When you set it to ON, you can perform cropping operations without selecting the Crop
button immediately after exposure is performed.
The cropping operation that can be performed by dragging inside the crop frame is "Move."
(12) Adjust the position of left and right sides of crop frame according to the result of
recognizing the lung field
When you set it to ON, the crop frame is subject to position adjustment according to the lung
field recognition results for those protocols that meet the specific conditions(*). (* Refer to
"s22108 Fine-Tuned Chest Cropping" in New Function Descriptions.)
(13) Width of crop frame (pixel)
Set the width of the crop frame.
(14) New area
This is used to set the initial status of the cropping operation to be performed at the transition
to crop mode to "New area."
With "New area," you can either specify an area by clicking two points in the screen area or
specify a new area by dragging.

473
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(15) Move
This is used to set the initial status of the cropping operation to be performed at the transition
to crop mode to "Move."
When you set it to ON, you can move the crop frame by dragging inside the crop frame.
(16) Custom area
Register fixed cropping size presets.
(17) Up
Clicking it moves the selected size up by one.
You cannot click it if the selected size is at the very top.
(18) Down
Clicking it moves the selected size down by one.
You cannot click it if the selected size is at the very bottom.
(19) Add
The Add custom area dialog box appears.
You cannot add any if the number of registered sizes has reached the upper limit of 9.
(20) Edit
You can click it if you select the size you want to edit from [Custom area].
The Edit custom area dialog box appears.

2.3.1.6. Dynamic image (only for CCS-RF)

On this screen, make two sets of settings, one for fluoroscopic exposures and one for digital cine
exposures.

Reference
• For details of the live monitor, refer to "Appendix R2. Using Live Monitor."

474
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.1.7. Static image

On this screen, make the settings relating to static image and stitch exposures.
[Fig.2.3.1.7.-1 Static image setting screen]

(1) Show Stitch Screen automatically after ending every Exam

When you set it to ON, the stitch screen automatically appears after the exposures are
completed.
(2) Send condition set command after an image captured in stitch protocol
When you set it to ON, the condition set command is sent for the second and subsequent
images captured in the stitch protocol.
(3) Creating stitched images
Select between [Higher speed] and [Higher quality].
When you change the setting, the [Improve the quality of transferred images] setting is
also changed accordingly.
Higher speed
Images used for stitching are created at 1/2 size.
Higher quality
Images used for stitching are created at full size.
(4) Improve the quality of transferred images
When you set it to ON, images are re-created at an image quality equivalent to that when
Higher quality is selected, and are transferred and output.
(5) Output stitch partial image
When you set it to ON, stitch partial images are output together with stitched images.

475
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(6) Add the exposure conditions to stitched image

When you set it to ON, the exposure conditions are added to stitched images.
(7) Align images using markers
When you set it to ON, alignment is performed based on the marker detection results.
(8) Use positional information
When you set it to ON, alignment is performed by using positional information.
(9) Fine-tune the position by image analysis
When you set it to ON, fine-tuning of the position is performed based on image analysis.
This is disabled if the Add-in Setting [Enable One Shot LL] is ON.
(10) Image processing (only for CCS-NE)
(11) Image processing algorithm for main monitor
Select from [CPU], [GPU - higher speed], and [GPU - higher quality].
CPU
The 2nd preview image processing is performed by the CPU as in V2.00 or earlier.
GPU - higher speed
The 2nd preview is processed by the GPU and displayed in the conventional image
quality.
GPU - higher quality
The 2nd preview is processed by the GPU and displayed in the high-definition image
quality.
(12) Speed up changing images
When you set it to ON, changing images is speeded up.
(13) Non Generator Connection Mode screen (only for CCS-NE)
(14) Manual Synchronization Mode: Counting time (s)
Set the countdown time for imaging in the manual synchronization mode.
(15) After the detector gets ready, start a countdown automatically
This setting is used in calibration during the use of Non Generator Connection. Basically, the
initial setting need not be changed.
Specify whether to initiate the countdown automatically when the detector becomes ready
after the transition to the manual synchronization mode.
ON:
The countdown is started automatically.
OFF:
The countdown is not started automatically. (It is started manually.)

476
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• Specifications relating to the addition of the exposure conditions
As given in the table below, the exposure conditions are added to stitched images. The
term representative image refers to the image of stitch partial images that retains the EI
value closest to the EI value to be added to stitched images.

Item Tag No. Tag name Value to add

Source imaging
Distance Source to Value of the representative
receptor distance (0018,1110)
Detector image
(SID)

Source object Distance Source to Value of the representative

(0018,1111)
distance (SOD) Patient image

Tube voltage Value of the representative

(0018,0060) KVP
(KVP) image

Value of the representative

Exposure time (0018,1150) Exposure Time
image

X-Ray Tube Current

(0018,1151) Value of the representative
Tube current (mA) X-Ray Tube Current
(0018,8151) image
in μA

(0018,1152) Exposure Value of the representative

mAs
(0018,1153) Exposure in μAs image

Area dose Image and

Value of the representative
product (0018,115E) Fluoroscopy Area
image
(mGycm2) Dose Product

Absorbed dose Entrance Dose in Value of the representative

(0040,8302)
(mGy) mGy image

Entrance Dose in Value of the representative

Air kerma (0040,8302)
mGy image

Exposure Index
(0018,1411) Medium value of the stitch
EI Relative X-ray
(0018,1405) partial image
Exposure

Target Exposure Medium value of the stitch

EIt (0018,1412)
Index partial image

DI value to be calculated
DI (0018,1413) Deviation Index from the EI value or EIt
value to be added

477
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• Specifications relating to GPU image processing
»» Transferred images are always processed by the CPU regardless of this setting.
»» For CCS-NE, if you set [GPU - higher speed], the HQ button is displayed, so that you
can check high-definition images, as needed.
»» In [GPU - higher quality] mode, the HQ button is not displayed, but the pixel-to-pixel
display button is displayed.
»» CCS-RF always operates in [GPU - higher quality] mode.
»» For CCS-RF and CCS-NE, when the setting for using the GPU is made, a check is
performed at CCS startup to see if the graphics card meets the required specifications
and the GPU driver version made by NVIDIA. If the card does not meet them, the Fatal
Error (F040700012) appears. In this case, information is also provided in Additional
Info.
»» For CCS-NE, if the GPU is used, NVIDIA Quadro 600, which is recommended, serves
as the check reference.
»» For CCS-NE, if you set [GPU - higher speed] or [GPU - higher quality], the second
monitor setting items are displayed as described in "2.3.1.9. Display." (For details of the
second monitor, refer to "Appendix N2. Using Second Monitor.")
• Specifications relating to Creating stitched images: Higher quality
»» It is possible to generate stitched images from full size images to generate images with
a resolution (pixel pitch of 125 to 320 μm) higher than the conventional one, with the
image size upper limit being set to 8192 pixels.
»» This function is enabled by clicking the service tool [Application Setting] > [Stitch
setting] and setting [Creating stitched images] to [Higher quality]. This setting is a
general setting for the system and is not protocol-specific one.
»» The [Creating stitched images: Higher quality] setting is not supported by NVIDIA
Quadro 600 or NVIDIA Quadro K600, which has video memory of less than 2 GB. In
this case, the following warning message is displayed at startup:
"The graphics card installed in this PC does not meet software/controller
requirement specifications. When the GPU - higher quality is selected, creating
stitched images may fail. Inform a service engineer of this message."
After the warning, normal operations are possible, but images may not be displayed
during stitch exposures.
»» This function does not apply to stitched images earlier than V2.13.

478
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
»» The following resolutions are anticipated according to detector type and the number of
images to be stitched.

Detector No. of images Anticipated output resolution

2 160 μm
50G/C, 55G/C, 40EC/GC,
3 160 μm
50RF
4 160 μm, 240 μm

2 125 μm

80G/C, 801G/C 3 125 μm, 160 μm

4 160 μm, 200 μm

2 125 μm
501G/C, 401G/C, 70G/C,
3 160 μm
701G/C, 401G/C
4 200 μm, 240 μm

»» If the stitched image size is smaller than 8192 x 8192 and does not exceed 1 GB,
stitched images can be output at the same resolution as the detector pixel pitch. If the
stitched image size does not meet the conditions, the stitched image size is reduced
gradually and the output resolution is changed.

50G/C, 55G/C, 80G/C, 801G/C, 501G/C, 401G/C,

Output resolution
40EC/GC, 50RF 70G/C, 701G/C, 401G/C

125 μm Less than 8192 n/a

8192 or more and

160 μm Less than 8192
less than 10485

10485 or more and

200 μm 8192 or more and less than 10240
less than 13107

13107 or more and

240 μm 10240 or more and less than 12288
less than 15728

15728 or more and

250 μm 12288 or more and less than 12800
less than 16384

320 μm 16384 or more 12800 or more

479
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• Specifications relating to the positioning method
»» Stitched images are displayed by performing automatic brightness adjustment on
captured images based on the results of positioning on the stitch screen. Results of
image quality adjustment made on the captured images are not reflected in the stitched
images. By performing the stitch exposures below, the accuracy of automatic brightness
adjustment on captured images will further improve.
• Use the same tube voltage and dose for captured images.
• Do not put an aperture due to the collimator in the amount of overlap.
• Set the amount of overlap to 1.5 cm or greater.
• Specifications relating to Positioning method - Fine-tune the position by image analysis
»» If you perform stitch positioning by using the positional information sent from the
generator and the information about the default amount of overlap, you must manually
adjust the position gap if there is a gap in the direction vertical to the direction in which
the detector can move due to the accuracy of the equipment. In V2.14 or later, position
adjustment can be performed automatically by analyzing images from positional
information, with no need for marker detection.
»» Position adjustment is performed automatically by analyzing captured images for
stitching by using the positional information from the generator and the information
about the amount of overlap that is set. The search range for position adjustment is ±25
mm in the horizontal direction and ±5 mm in the vertical direction.

480
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.1.8. Screen saver

On this screen, make the settings relating to the screen saver.
[Fig.2.3.1.8.-1 Screen saver setting screen]

(1) Enable login

When you set it to ON, the login screen is displayed.
(2) Enable screen saver
When you set it to ON, the screen saver is enabled.
(3) Wait time
Set the time after which the screen saver is to start up.
(4) Enable auto-logout
When you set it to ON, auto logout is performed. You cannot set it if [Enable login] is OFF.
(5) Enable Automatic shutdown
When you set it to ON, shutdown is performed when the time set for [Wait time (min)]
passes from the transition to the screen saver.
You cannot set it if [Enable screen saver] is OFF.

481
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.1.9. Display
On this screen, make the settings relating to display.

Reference
• For details of gamma adjustment, refer to "Appendix 5. Gamma Adjustment Tool." For details
of the live monitor, refer to "Appendix R2. Using Live Monitor."

[Fig.2.3.1.9.-1 Display setting screen]

• CCS-NE

482
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• CCS-RF

(1) GUI color taste selection

Select GUI color taste.
(2) Second monitor
For details of the second monitor, refer to "Appendix N2. Using Second Monitor."
(3) Use second monitor
When you set it to ON, you can use the second monitor.
You can set the items (4) to (10).
You cannot set them if you select [CPU] for [Image processing algorithm for main
monitor] in "2.3.1.7. Static image."
(4) Second monitor size
Specify the width and height of the second monitor.
After specifying them, be sure to click the Set connected second monitor size button, and
on the screen displayed, click the OK button or the Apply button.

Note
• To use the second monitor, you must register the resolution of the second monitor in
the database of CCS.

For details of installing the second monitor, refer to "Appendix N2. Using Second Monitor."
(5) Display annotations
Select the annotations to display on the second monitor.

483
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(6) Grid suppression algorithm

Select between [Higher speed] and [Higher quality].
Higher speed
Use the simple version for the grid line suppression of the second monitor.
Higher quality
Use the complete version for the grid line suppression of the second monitor.
(7) Show laterality marker
When you set it to ON, the laterality markers are displayed on the second monitor.
(8) Show peripheral mask
When you set it to ON, the peripheral mask is displayed on the second monitor.
(9) Show measurement object
When you set it to ON, the measurement object is displayed on the second monitor.
(10) Adjust monitor gamma
When you click it, the Gamma Adjustment Tool for setting the gamma appears modally.
For details of the gamma adjustment function, refer to "Appendix 5. Gamma Adjustment Tool."
(11) Live monitor
For details of the live monitor, refer to "Appendix R2. Using Live Monitor."
(12) Use live monitor
When you set it to ON, you can use the live monitor.
If you change the setting, the number of fluoroscopic and digital cine frames will be re-
calculated.
(13) Fixed preview mode
When you set it to ON, preview images remain displayed.

484
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.1.10. Output
On this screen, make the settings relating to output.
[Fig.2.3.1.10.-1 Output setting screen]

(1) Online status

Select between [Online] and [Offline].
(2) Data transfer is automatically retried when the system goes online
When the system changes from offline to online, all processes other than those with media
that resulted in transfer errors are retried automatically and set to the idling state. (This has
the same effect as the Retry button in the process viewer.)
(3) Monitored wired LAN
Specify the wired LAN to monitor to detect the disconnection of the wired LAN (Ethernet).
When you set the wired LAN to monitor, the automatic disconnection detection function is
enabled.
(4) Monitored wireless LAN
Specify the wireless LAN to monitor to detect the disconnection of the wireless LAN.
When you set the wireless LAN to monitor, the automatic disconnection detection function is
enabled.
If the wireless LAN to monitor is connected, the connected profile name and the signal
strength are displayed on the On Line / Off Line selector.

If the profile name has the number of characters that exceeds the area in which it is
displayed, an ellipsis (...) is displayed at the end.

485
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(5) Network adapter list

A list of acquired network adapters is displayed here, regardless of their connection statuses.
Network adapter names are acquired when the [Application setting] screen is opened.
(6) Refresh interval (s)
Set the refresh interval of the process viewer.
(7) Process when CXDI starts
When you set it to ON, the output processing is started after CCS starts up.

Reference
• Automatic disconnection detection function
»» If a disconnection is detected in the online or offline mode, operation automatically
transfers to the disconnected status. In this status, no further operations can be performed
until a connection is detected again.
»» If a connection is detected, the status immediately before the disconnection is restored. For
example, if the connection is detected after a disconnection in the online mode, the online
mode will be restored.
»» No disconnection of the PC network can be detected on the RIS or PACS side.
»» Take care not to specify the LAN on the detector side as the wired LAN or wireless LAN to
monitor by mistake.
• Method of editing the profile name of the wireless LAN to monitor
For Windows 7
It can be edited from [Control Panel] > [Network and Internet] > [Network and Sharing
Center] > [Manage wireless networks].
For Windows 8.1 and Windows 10
It can be edited with the netsh command. The procedure is as described below.
1. Open the command prompt
2. Execute netsh wlan export profile
An XML file is output to the current directory.
3. Edit the names in <WLANProfile><name>xxx</name></WLANProfile> in the XML file
Do not edit other parameters.
4. Execute netsh wlan add profile filename="XML_file_name" interface="adapter_name"
Add it as a new profile.
5. Execute netsh wlan delete profile name="profile_name" interface="adapter_name"
Delete any unnecessary profiles.

486
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.1.11. HDD/Memory
On this screen, make the settings relating to the HDD/memory.
[Fig.2.3.1.11.-1 HDD/memory setting screen]

(1) Auto Delete Start From (G)

Set the amount of the remaining free memory on the hard disk at which auto delete is to start.
(2) Full Auto Delete Size (G)
Set the size of the memory on the hard disk that is to be automatically deleted.
(3) Mini Auto Delete Size (G)
Set the size of the memory on the hard disk that is to be automatically deleted during, for
example, examinations.
(4) Memory Setting (only for CCS-RF)
(5) System Memory Size (G)
Set the size of the memory used by the system.
When you change the value, equal amounts of memory are allocated to the number of
fluoroscopic and digital cine frames.
(6) Fluoro frame number
Set the number of frames allocated for fluoroscopic exposures within the size of the memory
used by the system.
When you change the number of frames, the remaining memory size is allocated to the
number of digital cine frames.

487
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(7) Digital-cine frame number

Set the number of frames allocated for digital cine exposures within the size of the memory
used by the system.
When you change the number of frames, the remaining memory size is allocated to the
number of fluoroscopic frames.
Automatic HDD data deletion function
CCS offers a function that, in order to prevent problems due to low HDD memory, deletes images
in the dtstore folder when the amount of the free memory goes below the preset remaining
memory.
When a large number of images are deleted during operation, their deletion takes time to
accomplish, and the operation is stopped during this time. In order to minimize the adverse
effects of this, processing is divided into normal deletion processing and simplified deletion
processing, depending on the operation performed at the time of the detection of the amount of
remaining free memory.
[Figure showing the general concept of HDD memory levels]

488
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• The icon indicating the level of the use of the HDD memory that is displayed on the GUI of
CCS indicates the memory used/free memory.
• Detection timing and processing performed upon detection
The level of the memory remaining on the HDD is detected at the times when the operations
listed below are performed, and when this level is found to be less than the level of the
remaining memory at which data is to be automatically deleted, the automatic deletion
processing is performed.

Automatic deletion
Screen Operation
processing

End Exam Normal deletion

EXAM Suspend Exam Normal deletion

Start Exam Simplified deletion

Past image list Send Exam Normal deletion

Past image display screen Send Exam, Send Image Normal deletion

System screen Shutdown Normal deletion

Stitch screen Stitch Simplified deletion

In V2.01 or later, a new trigger for starting auto deletion, which is different from Auto Delete
Start From, is added. An upper limit for the number of studies (pending study and past study
total) [Study units] stored in the database is provided (upper limit: 20,000 studies). If this
upper limit is exceeded, the auto deletion (deletion of images taken) process is performed
using the value set for Full Auto Delete Size (G) (default: 10) at the time of shutdown. Images
not subject to auto deletion (such as protected images and images with no commitment) are
not deleted.

489
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• Restrictions on operation during deletion processing
In order to avoid inconsistencies where, for instance, deleted studies may be displayed on the
past study list, the following displays become blank when the deletion processing is executed,
and the "Now deleting images. Please wait" alert is displayed:
»» Past study list
»» Image reference list on Image Processing Adjustment - Image selection screen
After the deletion processing is completed, the list is refreshed, and operation can be
performed.
• Conditions under which images are deleted
Images that meet all of the following conditions are subject to deletion.
»» The study with the images concerned is completed.
»» PPS is completed (not applicable if PPS operation is not performed).
»» No active jobs (Storage, Print, and Media Storage) exist. (An "active job" is a job whose
status is other than completed or suspended.)
»» The study with the images concerned is not protected.
»» The images are not displayed on the PAST screen.
»» The images are not displayed on the Image Processing screen.

Correlation between memory settings and auto delete threshold

When the memory used by the system, the number of fluoroscopic frames, or the number
of digital cine frames is changed, the auto delete threshold (minimum value) will be changed
accordingly. The following equations are used to calculate the sizes (rounded up to whole
numbers) accumulated by 1 fluoroscopic exposure and 1 digital cine exposure, and the larger of
the two values is used as the minimum value.

490
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.1.12. Database

[Fig.2.3.1.12.-1 Database setting screen]

(1) DB backup folder

The path of the DB backup folder is displayed.
Click the Browse button, and specify a DB backup folder.
(2) DB backup regularly
When you set it to ON, the database is backed up regularly at the interval set for [Backup
interval (day)].

491
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.1.13. Select list

Of the Select list items, Patient info 1 to 3, Study info 1 to 3, and Image info 1 to 3 are custom
field setting items.
[Fig.2.3.1.13.-1 Select list setting screen]
• For items other than Patient info 1 to 3, Study info 1 to 3, and Image info 1 to 4

• For Patient info 1 to 3, Study info 1 to 3, and Image info 1 to 4

492
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(1) Use this field

This is displayed only if you select a custom field setting item as a Select list item.
When you set it to ON, the custom field selected with a Select list item is enabled.
When the custom field is set to annotation, storing data with this box set to OFF causes the
annotation setting to be released.
(2) Field name
This is displayed only if you select a custom field setting item as a Select list item.
Set the field name of the selected custom field.
It is linked with the prefix of the annotation caption.
(3) Default value
Set the default value to use (item selected with a radio button) when conducting a study for
the Select list item to edit.
It is hidden if you select [Series description] or [Reject reason] as a Select list item.
(4) Item List
Items registered on the Select list item are displayed here.
A header is displayed only if you select a custom field setting item as a Select list item.
(5) Up
Clicking it moves the item selected from the [Item List] list up by one.
You cannot click it if the selected item is at the very top.
(6) Down
Clicking it moves the item selected from the [Item List] list down by one.
You cannot click it if the selected item is at the very bottom.
(7) Add
The Add/Edit item dialog box appears.
You can register up to 100 items. You cannot add any if the number of registered items has
reached the upper limit of 100.
(8) Edit
You can click it if you select the item you want to edit from the [Item List] list.
The Add/Edit item dialog box appears.
(9) Enable free text input
This is displayed only if you select a custom field setting item as a Select list item.
When you set it to ON, text editing is enabled.
(10) Set input value to DICOM transfer value
This is displayed only if you select a custom field setting item as a Select list item.
When you set it to ON, the input values of unregistered items are used as DICOM output
values.
You can set it when you set [Enable free text input] to ON.
(11) Tag to input
This is displayed only if you select one of Patient info 1 to 3 or one of Study info 1 to 3 as a
Select list item.
The number of the tag that is set as an input source is displayed here.

493
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(12) Edit
This is displayed only if you select one of Patient info 1 to 3 or one of Study info 1 to 3 as a
Select list item.
The tag setting dialog box appears, so that you can set an input source tag.
(13) Clear
This is displayed only if you select one of Patient info 1 to 3 or one of Study info 1 to 3 as a
Select list item.
Clicking it clears the input source tag setting.
(14) Enable DICOM input
This is displayed only if you select one of Patient info 1 to 3 or one of Study info 1 to 3 as a
Select list item.
When you set it to ON, the value is acquired from the tag that is set.
You cannot set it if you do not set any input source tag.
(15) Tag to transfer
This is displayed only if you select a custom field setting item as a Select list item.
The number of the tag that is set as an output destination is displayed.
(16) Edit
This is displayed only if you select a custom field setting item as a Select list item.
The tag setting dialog box appears, so that you can set an output destination tag.
(17) Clear
This is displayed only if you select a custom field setting item as a Select list item.
Clicking it clears the output destination tag setting.
(18) Enable DICOM transfer
This is displayed only if you select a custom field setting item as a Select list item.
When you set it to ON, the value is output to the tag that is set.
You cannot set it if you do not set any output destination tag.
The procedure for acquiring Current Patient Location (0038, 0300) from RIS and displaying it as
Study info 2 in the worklist column is described below as an example.
1. Select [Study info 2] from Description List.
1. Set the check box of [Use this field] to ON.
2. Click the Edit button for [Tag to input], and select [Current Patient Location (0038,
0300)].
3. Set the check box of [Enable DICOM input] to ON.
2. Select [DICOM Setting] > [MWL] > [DICOM tag setting] > [C-FIND request], and click the
DICOM filtering rules button.

Reference
• Use "DICOM filtering rules" because Current Patient Location (0038, 0300) is not normally
defined as a C-FIND Request item between CCS and RIS. With such a tag, you must
enable the item using the "DICOM filtering rules" beforehand.

1. Select [Current Patient Location (0038, 0300)] from the DICOM filtering rule list.
2. Click the Edit button, and set the [Blank tag] check box of Overwrite value to ON.

494
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. From the CCS system screen, select [Customize Display] > [Column Headers], and select
a worklist. Set the check box of "Study Info 2," additionally displayed, to ON.
4. Check that "Study Info 2" is added to the study list column on the [Worklist] screen and that
the "Current Patient Location (0038, 0300)" value acquired from RIS is displayed.

2.3.1.13.1. Add/Edit item dialog box

In this dialog box, you can add and edit the items to be registered on Item List for each Select list
setting.
[Fig.2.3.1.13.1.-1 Add/Edit item dialog box]
• For items other than custom field setting items

• For custom field setting items

(1) Item name

Enter an item name.
(2) DICOM transfer value
Set the value to be output for the tag.
This is displayed only if the Select list item being edited is a custom field setting item.

495
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.1.13.2. Tag setting dialog box

In this dialog box, set the output destination tags and input source tags of the custom field setting
items (patient information, study information, and image information).
[Fig.2.3.1.13.2.-1 Tag setting dialog box]

(1) Search tag

By entering a character string, you can search for a tag through the tag list.
You can do a partial match search for a tag number and a tag name.

496
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.2. User Account Management

2.3.2.1. Setting screen

On this screen, make the settings relating to users and roles.
[Fig.2.3.2.1.-1 User account management screen]

(1) Role
A list of existing roles is displayed here.
The service engineer must create roles by combining privileges beforehand according to the
methods whereby the users use these privileges.
(2) User
The existing users are displayed here.
If you log in as CxdiService, an embedded user CxdiAdmin is not displayed.
(3) Add
The [Add user] dialog box appears.
In addition to embedded users, you can register up to 200 users. You cannot add any if the
number of registered users has reached the upper limit of 200.
(4) Property
You can click it if you select a user name from the [User] list.
The [Add/Edit user] dialog box appears.

497
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• Even if you create a role with no "Delete study" privileges beforehand and use it as a
Cxdiuser role, the Start CXDI with login button will be displayed in the mode in which
login authorization is not required. Thus, you can delete studies manually by logging in as
a user with "Delete study" privileges.
To establish the mode in which login authorization is not required, select the service tool >
[System Setting] > [Application Setting] > [Screen saver] > [Login] >, and set [Enable
login] to OFF.
• If [Enable login] is set to OFF with the service tool, the [User Administration] tab does
not appear on the CCS system screen. This tab appears, however, if you start the login
screen with the Start CXDI with login button and log in.

Privileges

Type of privilege

User administrations

System settings

Customize display

Annotation settings

Connection settings

Log administrations

Backup administrations

Protocol administrations

Calibration administrations

Image processing
administrations

Delete study

Embedded roles
The following roles are installed when the system is installed for the first time.

Role name Privilege Description

Services for the person is granted

CanonService All ON
access to all of the role.

Taken to allow access to the

Administrator All ON
necessary role.

Taken to allow access to the

Standard User OFF for user administrations only
necessary role.

498
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Embedded users
The following users are installed when the system is installed for the first time.

User name Operator name Role

CxdiAdmin cxdiAdmin CanonService

CxdiService cxdiService CanonService

Cxdiuser cxdiUser Administrator

2.3.2.1.1. Add/Edit role

[Fig.2.3.2.1.1.-1 Add/Edit role screen]

(1) Role
Enter a role name.
Half-size alphanumeric characters and half-size symbols can be entered.
(2) Comment
Enter a description of the role.
Half-size alphanumeric characters and half-size symbols can be entered.

499
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.2.1.2. Add/Edit user

[Fig.2.3.2.1.2.-1 Add/Edit user dialog box]

(1) User name

Enter a user name.
For an embedded user, you cannot edit it.
(2) Operator name
Enter an operator name.
(3) New password
Enter a password.
For an embedded user, you cannot edit it.
(4) Retype Password (Confirmation)
Enter a password.
For an embedded user, you cannot edit it.
(5) Role
Select the role of the user.
All roles except the embedded role CanonService are displayed.
For an embedded user, you cannot edit it.

500
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.3. Annotation settings

Set the annotations used for preview, printing, storage, and other purposes. You can also set free
annotation, laterality marker, and other settings.
Annotations are set by performing the common operations of adding, deleting, and moving
display items on locations where items are placed (placement locations). When items are added
from the placeable item list to placement locations, they are removed from the placeable item
list and added to the placement locations. Conversely, when display items are deleted from
placement locations, they are added at the bottom of the placeable item list.
The items that can be placed at placement locations may differ depending on the annotation
settings, and they are explained in the following descriptions of the specifications of the setting
screens.

2.3.3.1. Preview annotation

On this tab, edit the items to display as preview annotations.
Unlike the annotation screen of CCS-NE and CCS-RF, the service tool provides the "Lock" check
boxes for individual annotations. Any annotation items for which [Lock] is set to ON are forcibly
displayed.
The list of items that can be set as preview annotations is predetermined on an area-by-area
basis.
[Fig.2.3.3.1.-1 Preview tab of the Annotation setting screen]

(1) Preview tab

Set preview annotations here.

501
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(2) Up
Clicking it moves the item selected from the list view up by one.
You cannot click it if the selected item is at the very top.
Depending on whether the Lock check box is ON or OFF, movement is possible within each
of the areas.
(3) Down
Clicking it moves the item selected from the list view down by one.
You cannot click it if the selected item is at the very bottom.
Depending on whether the Lock check box is ON or OFF, movement is possible within each
of the areas.
(4) Caption
To display a title on the annotation, place a check mark.
(5) Lock
To forcibly display the item, place a check mark.
An item with a check mark placed is displayed at a position justified upward at the top left and
top right and justified downward at the bottom left and bottom right.
If the check box is changed between ON and OFF, the item moves to the Lock on/off
boundary. (It moves to the beginning if there are no locked items.)
The item with a check mark placed cannot be selected or edited using CCS.
(6) Font
Set the font type and the font size to use in the selected area.
(7) Item list
The items that can be set in the selected area are displayed together with check boxes.
If you want to add one of the items to the selected area, place a check mark next to the item,
and click the Add item button. You can also select multiple items. Any items that are already
placed are not displayed here.
(8) Add blank
Click it to add a blank line (item name: blank, Caption: fixed to OFF, and Lock: fixed to OFF)
to the list view in the selected area.

502
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Setting items

Item Default Remarks

Patient ID ON

Patient name ON

Patient name (first Only when "Divide into three groups" is

component) set for the name display mode

Patient name (second Only when "Divide into three groups" is

component) set for the name display mode

Patient name (third Only when "Divide into three groups" is

component) set for the name display mode

Birthday

Top left Age

Sex

Height

Weight

Only when the Patient info 1 field is

PatientInfo.1
enabled in the Select list setting

Only when the Patient info 2 field is

PatientInfo.2
enabled in the Select list setting

Only when the Patient info 3 field is

PatientInfo.3
enabled in the Select list setting

503
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Item Default Remarks

Accession No. ON

Acquisition time ON

Total exposure time ON

Total area dose product

ON
(mGycm2)

Total area dose product

(µGym2)

Total absorbed dose (mGy) ON

Total absorbed dose (µGy)

Total air kerma (mGy) ON

Total air kerma (µGy)

HDD free space ON

Acquisition date

Study description

Patient orientation

Bottom Reference Physician

left Name

Reference physician name Only when "Divide into three groups" is

(first component) set for the name display mode

Reference physician name Only when "Divide into three groups" is

(second component) set for the name display mode

Reference physician name Only when "Divide into three groups" is

(third component) set for the name display mode

Reading Physician Name

Reading physician name Only when "Divide into three groups" is

(first component) set for the name display mode

Reading physician name Only when "Divide into three groups" is

(second component) set for the name display mode

Reading physician name Only when "Divide into three groups" is

(third component) set for the name display mode

Operator name

Only when "Divide into three groups" is

Operator (first component)
set for the name display mode

Operator name (second Only when "Divide into three groups" is

component) set for the name display mode

504
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Item Default Remarks

Operator name (third Only when "Divide into three groups" is

component) set for the name display mode

Institution name

Only when the Study info 1 field is

Bottom StudyInfo.1
enabled in the Select list setting
left
Only when the Study info 2 field is
StudyInfo.2
enabled in the Select list setting

Only when the Study info 3 field is

StudyInfo.3
enabled in the Select list setting

Tube voltage ON

Exposure time ON

Tube current ON

mAs ON

Frame No. ON RF only

Binning ON RF only

FPS ON RF only

SOD

SID
Top
right Series number

Instance number

BodyPart

View position

Series description

Only when the Image info 1 field is

ImageInfo.1
enabled in the Select list setting

Only when the Image info 2 field is

ImageInfo.2
enabled in the Select list setting

Only when the Image info 3 field is

ImageInfo.3
enabled in the Select list setting

505
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Item Default Remarks

Area dose product

ON
(mGycm2)

Area dose product

(µGym2)

Absorbed dose (mGy) ON

Absorbed dose (µGy)

Air kerma (mGy) ON

Air kerma (µGy)

Bottom
right REX ON

EI ON

DI ON

EIt

Window Width (WW)

Window Level (WL)

Magnification for Print

Output

506
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.3.2. Film box annotation

On this tab, edit the items to display as film box annotations.
There are six areas that can be set (top left, top center, top right, bottom left, bottom center, and
bottom right). The list of items that can be set is the same for all the areas.
[Fig.2.3.3.2.-1 FilmBox tab of the Annotation setting screen]

(1) FilmBox tab

Set film box annotations here.
(2) Up
Clicking it moves the item selected from the list view up by one.
You cannot click it if the selected item is at the very top.
(3) Down
Clicking it moves the item selected from the list view down by one.
You cannot click it if the selected item is at the very bottom.
(4) Caption
To display a title on the annotation, place a check mark.
(5) Font
Set the font type and the font size to use in the selected area.
(6) Item list
The items that can be set in the selected area are displayed together with check boxes.
If you want to add one of the items to the selected area, place a check mark next to the item,
and click the Add item button. Any items that are already placed are not displayed here.

507
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(7) Add blank

Click it to add a blank line (item name: blank and Caption: fixed to OFF) to the end of the list
view in the selected area.
(8) FreeText1
Enter free text for the setting item.
(9) FreeText2
Enter free text for the setting item.
Setting items

Default display
Item Remarks
position

Patient ID Top left

Patient name Top left

Patient name Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
(second component) name display mode

Patient name (third Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
component) name display mode

Patient name (first Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
component) name display mode

Birthday

Age

Sex

Height

Weight

Only when the Patient info 1 field is enabled in the

PatientInfo.1
Select list setting

Only when the Patient info 2 field is enabled in the

PatientInfo.2
Select list setting

Only when the Patient info 3 field is enabled in the

PatientInfo.3
Select list setting

Accession No.

Study date

Study time

Study description

Reference Physician
Name

508
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Default display
Item Remarks
position

Reference physician
Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
name (second
name display mode
component)

Reference physician
Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
name (third
name display mode
component)

Reference physician
Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
name (first
name display mode
component)

Reading Physician
Name

Reading physician
Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
name (second
name display mode
component)

Reading physician
Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
name (third
name display mode
component)

Reading physician
Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
name (first
name display mode
component)

Operator name

Operator name Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
(second component) name display mode

Operator name (third Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
component) name display mode

Operator (first Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
component) name display mode

Institution name Bottom center

Comment

FreeText1

FreeText2

Only when the Study info 1 field is enabled in the

StudyInfo.1
Select list setting

Only when the Study info 2 field is enabled in the

StudyInfo.2
Select list setting

Only when the Study info 3 field is enabled in the

StudyInfo.3
Select list setting

509
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.3.3. Image box annotation

On this tab, edit the items to display as image box annotations.
There are four areas that can be set (top left, top right, bottom left, and bottom right). The list of
items that can be set is the same for all the areas.
[Fig.2.3.3.3.-1 ImageBox tab of the Annotation setting screen]

(1) ImageBox tab

Set image box annotations here.
For details of the setting screen, refer to "2.3.3.2. Film box annotation."
Setting items

Default display
Item Remarks
position

Patient ID

Patient name

Patient name Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
(second component) name display mode

Patient name (third Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
component) name display mode

Patient name (first Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
component) name display mode

Birthday

Age

510
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Default display
Item Remarks
position

Sex

Height

Weight

Only when the Patient info 1 field is enabled in the

PatientInfo.1
Select list setting

Only when the Patient info 2 field is enabled in the

PatientInfo.2
Select list setting

Only when the Patient info 3 field is enabled in the

PatientInfo.3
Select list setting

Accession No.

Study date

Study time

Study description

Patient orientation

Reference Physician
Name

Reference physician
Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
name (second
name display mode
component)

Reference physician
Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
name (third
name display mode
component)

Reference physician
Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
name (first
name display mode
component)

Reading Physician
Name

Reading physician
Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
name (second
name display mode
component)

Reading physician
Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
name (third
name display mode
component)

Reading physician
Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
name (first
name display mode
component)

Operator name

511
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Default display
Item Remarks
position

Operator name Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
(second component) name display mode

Operator name (third Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
component) name display mode

Operator (first Only when "Divide into three groups" is set for the
component) name display mode

Institution name

Comment

FreeText1

FreeText2

Only when the Study info 1 field is enabled in the

StudyInfo.1
Select list setting

Only when the Study info 2 field is enabled in the

StudyInfo.2
Select list setting

Only when the Study info 3 field is enabled in the

StudyInfo.3
Select list setting

Sensor model name

Protocol name

BodyPart

View position

Series description

Tube voltage Top right

Exposure time Top right

Tube current Top right

mAs Top right

Exposure mode Top right RF only

Frame No. Top right RF only

FPS Top right RF only

Binning RF only

Series date Bottom left

Series time Bottom left

Acquisition date

512
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Default display
Item Remarks
position

Acquisition time

Grid name

Focal spot size

Code meaning

Image processing
parameter

SID

SOD

Only when the Image info 1 field is enabled in the

ImageInfo.1
Select list setting

Only when the Image info 2 field is enabled in the

ImageInfo.2
Select list setting

Only when the Image info 3 field is enabled in the

ImageInfo.3
Select list setting

REX

EIt

Absorbed dose
Bottom right
(mGy)

Absorbed dose
(µGy)

Area dose product

Bottom right
(mGycm2)

Area dose product

(µGym2)

Air kerma (mGy) Bottom right

Air kerma (µGy)

EI Bottom right

DI Bottom right

Window Width (WW)

Window Level (WL)

Magnification for
Print Output

513
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.3.4. Storage annotation

On this tab, edit the annotation settings to embed in storage images.
There are six areas that can be set (top left, top center, top right, bottom left, bottom center, and
bottom right). The list of items that can be set is the same for all the areas.
[Fig.2.3.3.4.-1 Storage tab of the Annotation setting screen]

(1) Storage tab

Set storage annotations here.
For details of the setting screen, refer to "2.3.3.2. Film box annotation."
Setting items
Refer to "2.3.3.3. Image box annotation."
The frame No., binning, FPS (frame rate), window width (WW), window level (WL), and
magnification for print output are excluded.

514
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.3.5. Caption
On this tab, display a list of captions to display before and after annotation items and set
captions.
[Fig.2.3.3.5.-1 Caption tab of the Annotation setting screen]

(1) Caption tab

Display a list of captions, and edit prefixes and suffixes.
(2) Caption list
A list of captions is displayed here.
Setting items

Ed Item Prefix default value Suffix default value

Patient ID Patient ID

Patient name Patient Name

Patient Name (first

Patient name (first component)
component)

Patient name (second Patient Name (second

component) component)

Patient Name (third

Patient name (third component)
component)

Birthday Birth

Age Age

515
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Ed Item Prefix default value Suffix default value

Sex Sex

Height Height cm

Weight Weight kg

Accession No. Accession No.

Study date Study Date

Study time Study Time

Study description Study Description

Reading Physician Name Reading Physician

Reading physician name (first Reading Physician (first

component) component)

Reading physician name Reading Physician (second

(second component) component)

Reading physician name (third Reading Physician (third

component) component)

Reference Physician Name Referring Physician

Referring Physician (first Referring Physician (first

component) component)

Referring Physician (second Referring Physician

component) (second component)

Referring Physician (third Referring Physician (third

component) component)

Operator Operator Name

Operator Name (first

Operator (first component)
component)

Operator Name (second

Operator (second component)
component)

Operator Name (third

Operator (third component)
component)

Comment Comment

Total Exposure Time Total exposure time msec

Total area dose product

Total DAP mGycm2
(mGycm2)

Total area dose product

Total DAP µGym2
(µGym2)

Detector Name Detector name

516
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Ed Item Prefix default value Suffix default value

Protocol Name Protocol name

Body Part Body Part

View Position View Position

Series Description Series description

KVP Tube Voltage kV

Exposure Time Exposure time msec

X-ray Tube Current Tube current mA

mAs mAs mAs

Series Date Series date

Series Number Series No.

Series Time Series time

Grid Grid

Focal Spot Size Focal spot size

Code Meaning Code meaning

Free HDD Space Remaining HDD space MB

Absorbed Dose Absorbed dose (mGy) mGy

Absorbed Dose Absorbed dose (µGy) µGy

Total Absorbed Dose Total absorbed dose (mGy) mGy

Total Absorbed Dose Total absorbed dose (µGy) µGy

DAP DAP (mGycm2) mGycm2

DAP DAP (µGym2) µGym2

REX REX

EI EI

DI DI

Eit EIt

AirKerma Air Kerma (mGy) mGy

AirKerma Air Kerma (µGy) µGy

Total AirKerma Total air kerma (mGy) mGy

517
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Ed Item Prefix default value Suffix default value

Total AirKerma Total air kerma (µGy) µGy

Acquisition Date Acquisition date

Acquisition Time Acquisition time

Exposure Mode Exposure mode

Frame No. Frame number

Binning Binning

FPS Frame rate fps

Institution Name Institution Name

FreeText1-FilmBox FreeText1

FreeText2-FilmBox FreeText2

FreeText1-ImageBox FreeText1

FreeText2-ImageBox FreeText2

StorageAnnotationFreeText1 FreeText1

StorageAnnotationFreeText2 FreeText2

Image processing
IP Parameter
parameter

SID (Source imaging

SID mm
receptor distance)

SOD (Source object

SOD mm
distance)

Patient Orientation Patient Orientation

Instance Number Instance No.

Window Width (WW)

Window Level (WL)

Magnification for Print

%
Output

518
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.3.6. Free annotation/laterality marker

[Fig.2.3.3.6.-1 Free annotation/Laterality marker tab of the Annotation setting screen]

(1) Free annotation/Laterality marker tab

Set laterality markers and free annotations here.
(2) Font
Set the font size and the font size of laterality markers.
(3) Display character
Enter the character string to display.
(4) Synchronized with the rotation of the image
When you set it to ON, the character string is linked with the rotation of the screen.
(5) Synchronized with the movement of the crop frame
When you set it to ON, the character string is linked with the movement of the crop frame.
(6) Font
Set the font type and the font size of free annotations.
(7) Free annotation arrangement
Set the number of rows and the number of columns of the free annotation candidate list.
(8) Free annotation list
Registered free annotations are displayed here.
(9) Add
The [Add free annotation] dialog box appears.
You can register up to 100 free annotations. You cannot add any if the number of registered
free annotations has reached the upper limit of 100.

519
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(10) Edit
You can click it if you select the item you want to edit from [Free annotation list].
The [Edit free annotation] dialog box appears.

2.3.3.6.1. Add/Edit free annotation dialog box

[Fig.2.3.3.6.1.-1 Add/Edit free annotation dialog box]

(1) Free annotation text

Enter a free annotation or edit a registered free annotation here.

520
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.4. Log Setting

2.3.4.1. Log setting confirmation screen

On this screen, make the settings for outputting various logs. Log output must be set for each
application. On this screen, display a list of current settings and edit log output settings.
[Fig.2.3.4.1.-1 Log setting confirmation screen]

(1) Log setting list

A list of existing log output settings is displayed here.
(2) Edit
You can click it if you select the item you want to edit from [Log setting list].
The [Edit log setting] dialog box appears.
Logs
• The output destination is fixed to [installation folder]¥Log¥AppLog.
(For CCS-NE, it is C:¥CCS-S¥Log¥AppLog¥, and for CCS-RF, it is C:¥CCS-
D¥Log¥AppLog¥.)
• Output files have the format of [application name][yyyyMMdd].txt.
(A file for a CCS log dated May 24, 2012 is CCS20120524.txt.)
• If the total file size (excluding the folders) at the output destination exceeds 5 GB when
CCS is shut down, files will be deleted sequentially starting with the file that has the oldest
generation date until the total file size falls below 5 GB.

521
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.4.1.1. Edit log setting

[Fig.2.3.4.1.1.-1 Edit log setting dialog box]

(1) Application name

The name of the application for outputting the logs is displayed here.
(2) Output error log
You cannot set this item.
(3) Output info log
You cannot set this item.
(4) Output debug log
When you set it to ON, debug log level logs are output.

2.3.5. Add-in Setting

Make the settings for installed optional software.

2.4. Utility Setting

2.4.1. Protocol Editor

This tool (Protocol Editor) is used to create and edit protocols, create and edit workspaces, and
edit image processing parameters, and is displayed modally.
For details of Protocol Editor, refer to "2. Protocol Editor" in Part 3.

2.4.2. Protocol Import and Export

This tool (EX2DB) is used to output (export) protocol information in the databases to Excel files
(.xlsx) and input (import) protocol information from Excel files (.xlsx) to the databases, and is
displayed modally.
For details of Protocol Import and Export, refer to "3. EX2DB/CCR2EX" in Part 3.

2.4.3. Data Collection

The data collection tool is used to acquire the necessary information at such times as when
problems occur and when migration is performed, and is displayed modally.
For details of data collection, refer to "Maintenance" in Part 5.

522
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.4.4. Migration
This tool (MigrationTool) is used to automatically perform restoration work if the environment is to
be migrated, and is displayed modally.
For details of migration, refer to "8. Migration" in Part 2.

2.4.5. Image Import and Export

The tool for importing and exporting images taken using CCS appears.
For details of Image Import and Export, refer to "Appendix 8. Image Import Export Tool."

2.4.6. License
The tool (Set Up Licenses) is used to create the license request files for CCS and optional
software requiring license authorization and to perform license authorization, and is displayed
modally.
For details of licenses, refer to the "CXDI Software License issue service manual."

2.5. Input Assist Setting

2.5.1. Barcode Reader

On this screen, make the connection settings for using the barcode reader, and specify the
scanning method.
[Fig.2.5.1.-1 Barcode reader setting screen]

523
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(1) Enable barcode reader

To use the barcode reader, place a check mark.
When you set it to ON, you can set items (2) to (4).
(2) Port
Set the COM port to use.
The connection port is allocated from the OS after the drivers are installed. The port
recognized by the OS is automatically detected as a connection port setting candidate.
To set the port number before connection, enter it directly.
(3) Reading method
Select between Read as Accession No. (ACC#) and Read as Patient ID.
The value that is read with the barcode reader is entered for the item that is set.
If using barcodes on the manual screen, select [Read as Patient ID].
(4) Auto C-FIND when no study found
When you set it to ON, and the narrowed-down search results are zero, worklists are
acquired using the barcode input as the search key.
Worklist acquisition is not performed in the following cases.
• The system is offline.
• The study input type is other than MWL.
• The study input type is MWL, but is disabled.
When worklist acquisition is performed using barcode input, operation transfers to the
examination screen if [Application setting] > [Operation] > [Auto show exam screen
on single study] is ON and the conditions for automatically transferring to the examination
screen are met.

2.5.2. Magnetic Card Reader

Use the settings on this screen to use the input from a magnetic card reader, etc.
The only supported format is JIS2. A total of 72 characters are stored on a single recorded
track. These 72 characters include the start code, end code, and error detection code, so the
number of characters that can actually be used as data is 69. These 69 characters are divided in
accordance with the specified format and input as patient information.
The magnetic card reading processing of CCS recognizes the beginning of the data that is
read to a line feed code (0x0d) as a single record. If a control code (such as a header code) is
provided at the beginning or if the data does not contain any line feed code, the data cannot be
read properly.
To use a magnetic card reader, make the following settings, using the utility software supplied
with the magnetic card reader, the DIP switches of the device itself, or other means.
• Do not provide a control code at the beginning.
• Specify 0x0d (which may be represented by CR or ¥r as a termination code.
* The only magnetic card data formats supported by CCS are those in which the position and
the length of each field are fixed. Formats in which the field lengths are made variable using
separators are not supported.

524
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.5.2.1. General setting

On this screen, make the connection settings for using a magnetic card reader and set the era
name to use.
[Fig.2.5.2.1.-1 General setting tab of the Magnetic card reader setting screen]

(1) Enable magnetic card reader

To use a magnetic card reader, place a check mark.
When you set it to ON, you can set items (2) to (7).
(2) Port
Select the COM port to use.
The connection port is allocated from the OS after the drivers are installed. The port
recognized by the OS is automatically detected as a connection port setting candidate.
To set the port number before connection, enter it directly.
(3) Default
Specify the format to use if the scanned value does not match the registered system code.
You can select from the items registered on Format list.
(4) Format list
A list of scanning formats of the registered magnetic card reader is displayed here.
(5) Add
The [Add format] dialog box appears.
(6) Edit
You can click it if you select the item you want to edit from the [Format list].
The [Edit format] dialog box appears.

525
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(7) Copy
You can click it if you select the item you want to copy from the [Format list].
The [Copy format] dialog box appears.
(8) Japanese calendar era list
A list of registered era settings is displayed here.
(9) Add
The [Add Japanese calendar era] dialog box appears.
(10) Edit
You can click it if you select the item you want to edit from [Japanese calendar era list].
The [Edit Japanese calendar era] dialog box appears.

Reference
• Input correction for 2-digit Western year
When you make the setting for entering a date of birth without using an era, if 2 digits are
entered for the year for a date of birth from a magnetic card, 2000 is added to the year and
the sum is treated as the patient's date of birth. If the date of birth is a future date, 100 is
subtracted from the year.
Example: The current date is September 8, 2010

Input date of birth Date of birth resulting from conversion

10/9/8 2010/9/8

10/9/9 1910/9/9

• Automatic detection of gender (sex)

The gender entered from a magnetic card is automatically detected, and is reflected in patient
information. The character strings automatically detected are as below.

Input character string Detection result

1, M, MAN, MALE Male

2, F, W, FEMALE,
Female
WOMAN

3, O, OTHER Other

Other than the above None

*) Not case-sensitive.

526
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.5.2.1.1. Add/Edit/Copy format

On this screen, set the scanning formats of the card reader to use.
[Fig.2.5.2.1.1.-1 Add format dialog box]

(1) Start position

Set the column of the reading start position of each item.
(2) End position
Set the column of the reading end position of each item.
(3) System code
To use the system codes, place a check mark.
For End position, value calculated from the number of Start position + System code value
characters is displayed.
(4) System code value
Enter a system code value.
You can enter it when you set [System code] to ON.
You cannot set an existing system code value.
(5) Patient name
To use the patient name, place a check mark.
Set the reading start position/end position of the patient name.
(6) Patient name (second component)
To use the patient name (second component), place a check mark.
Set the reading start position/end position of the patient name (second component).
(7) Patient name (third component)
To use the patient name (third component), place a check mark.
Set the reading start position/end position of the patient name (third component).

527
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(8) Patient ID
To use the patient ID, place a check mark.
Set the reading start position/end position of the patient ID.
(9) Accession No.
To use the accession number (ACC#), place a check mark.
Set the reading start position/end position of the accession number (ACC#).
(10) Sex
To use the sex of the patient, place a check mark.
Set the reading start position/end position of the sex.
(11) Birth
To use the patient's date of birth, place a check mark.
(12) Japanese calendar era
To use the patient's date of birth (era), place a check mark.
Set the reading start position/end position of the era.
You can set it if you set [Birth] to ON.
(13) Year/Month/Date
To use the year, month, and date, place a check mark.
Set the reading start position/end position of the year, month, and date.

2.5.2.1.2. Add/Edit Japanese calendar era

You can set any era code, as well as the offset to add to the Western year that corresponds to
the era code.
[Fig.2.5.2.1.2.-1 Add Japanese calendar era dialog box]

(1) Japanese calendar era code

Enter an era code or edit an existing era code.
You cannot set an existing era code.
(2) Japanese calendar era offset
Enter the offset to add to the Western year that corresponds to the era code.

528
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• Examples of era code settings

Code Offset

M 1867

T 1911

S 1925

H 1988

The settings established above are processed as indicated below.

M1/9/8 →1868/9/8
T1/7/30 →1912/7/30
S1/12/25 →1926/12/25
H1/1/8 →1989/1/8

2.5.2.2. Input setting

On this screen, make the settings for the input correction to use.
[Fig.2.5.2.2.-1 Input setting tab of the Magnetic card reader setting screen]

(1) Enable input correction

To enable input correction, place a check mark.
When you set it to ON, you can set items (2) to (5).

529
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(2) Input correction rules

A list of existing input correction rules is displayed here.
(3) Add
The [Add correction rule] dialog box appears.
You can register up to 20 correction rules. You cannot add any if the number of registered
correction rules has reached the upper limit of 20.
(4) Edit
You can click it if you select the item you want to edit from [Input correction rules].
The [Edit correction rule] dialog box appears.
(5) Enable input correction with script file
To perform input correction by using a script file, place a check mark.
Click the Browse button, and specify the script file to use.

2.5.2.2.1. Add/Edit correction rule

You can set the replacement rules to apply to the inputs from magnetic cards.
For samples of regular expressions, refer to "Samples of regular expressions" in CXDI
WORKFLOW NE.
[Fig.2.5.2.2.1.-1 Add correction rule dialog box]

(1) Input correction target

Specify a correction target.
You can select from [Accession No.], [Patient name], [Patient name (second
component)], [Patient name (third component)], [Patient ID], [Study description], and
[Sex].
(2) Search string
Enter the character string to search for, using the regular expression format.
(3) Replacement string
Enter a replacement character string. (The regular expression format can also be used.)

530
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Appendix 1. Overview of the DICOM Standard

This appendix provides an overview of the DICOM standard as necessary to configure the CXDI
system.
To learn more, go to the URL below and read the DICOM standard document.
➡➡http://medical.nema.org/

1. Overview

DICOM stands for Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine and was developed by the
American College of Radiology (ACR) and National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
The purpose of developing DICOM is to standardize the method of exchanging diagnostic images
between different medical information systems.
The standard is therefore centered on image capturing devices (modalities) and finely specifies
the contents and methods of communication for each type of existing product.
The DICOM standard defines the Service Object Pair (SOP) Classes, each of which is
determined by the union of an Information Object Definition (IOD) that specifies the data to
be handled by products of the same type and a group of DICOM Message Service Elements
(DIMSE) that summarizes the role to be played by the data, as well as service classes identified
as collections of related SOP classes.
To implement its product functions via DICOM communication, the CXDI system uses the service
classes and SOP classes that perform the tasks mentioned below.
• Acquiring patient information from the ID written on a patient ID card or request form (Modality
Worklist SOP Class)
• Reporting on the progress of image capturing (Modality Performed Procedure Step SOP
Class)
• Transmitting captured images and the consistent information accompanying those images to
a server (Storage Service Class)
• Requesting storage commitment of images transmitted to a server (Storage Commitment
Service Class)
• Printing captured images (Print Management Service Class)
• Verifying that communication is possible (Verification Service Class)
The following sections briefly describe typical examples of the communication protocols that use
these SOP classes and service classes.

531
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Acquisition of patient information (Modality Worklist SOP Class)

Patient information is acquired by using the Modality Worklist SOP Class in accordance with the
communication protocol shown below.

(1) The A-ASSOCIATE-RQ command establishes DICOM communication.

(2) Upon successful reception of the A-ASSOCIATE-RQ command, the Worklist Server returns
the A-ASSOCIATE-AC command. This establishes a communication channel, making it possible
to send and receive the C-FIND command.
(3) To acquire patient information, the modality sends the C-FIND-RQ command including the
key information used to find the target patient.
(4) The Worklist Server creates a worklist of patient information that matches the search key
contained in the C-FIND-RQ command and sends it with the C-FIND-RSP command to the
modality. If this response has any message remaining to be sent, the C-FIND-RSP command is
sent with Pending set in Status.
(5) When the Worklist Server sends the final message, it changes the Status to Success.
(6) To end the communication, the modality sends the A-RELEASE-RQ command to the Worklist
Server.
(7) The communication ends when the Worklist Server returns the A-RELEASE-RP command.

532
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. Reporting on the progress of study (Modality Performed Procedure

Step SOP Class)

The progress of study is reported by using the Modality Performed Procedure Step SOP Class in
accordance with the communication protocol shown below.

(1) and (2) DICOM communication is established.

(3) - (6) When the study starts, N-CREATE (In Progress) is issued and the communication is
closed temporarily.
(7) - (12) The communication is established again, and the N-SET command is issued when the
study is complete or discontinued.

533
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. Storage of captured images on the server (Storage Service Class

and Storage Commitment Service Class)

The Storage Service Class is used to send images to the server, and the Storage Commitment
Service Class is used to request storage commitment later.

After communication is established, an image is sent. When the Grayscale Softcopy Presentation
State (GSPS) is enabled, GSPS data is sent after the image is sent.
When there are two or more images to be sent, steps (1) to (6) are repeated as many times as
the number of images.

534
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

When Storage Commitment is enabled, storage commitment is requested after the image is sent.
Upon reception of this request, the image server ensures that the image is stored in the local
disk or other appropriate media. As the image server is committed to storage, the image stored in
the modality can be deleted. As the result of the storage processing, the status (success, failure,
etc.) is sent with the N-EVENT-REPORT command to the modality.

5. Printing of images (Print Management Service Class)

The Print Management Service Class, which is used to print images, uses many commands. So,
command responses other than that for the association used for connection establishment are
omitted here.

(1) and (2) A connection is established.

(3) The N-GET command of the Printer SOP Class acquires the printer status information. If the
status is Failure, the print job ends with an error.
(4) The N-CREATE command of the Film Session SOP Class establishes a film session. This
command sets the number of copies to be printed, the type of printing paper, etc.
(5) The N-CREATE command of the Presentation LUT SOP Class sends the Presentation LUT data.
(6) The N-CREATE command of the Film Box SOP Class creates film box data that is linked
to the film session established in (4). This command sends information about the direction of
printing, film size, etc.
(7) The N-SET command of the Image Box SOP Class sends the pixel value and other relevant data.
(8) The N-ACTION command of the Film Box SOP Class sends a print instruction to the printer.
(9) The session established in (4) is deleted to disconnect the printer.

535
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

6. Connectivity verification (Verification Service Class)

The TCP/IP protocol has the ping command to verify connectivity.

Similarly, the C-ECHO command is defined that plays the same role as ping to verify connectivity
between DICOM devices.
For CCS, both the ping command and the C-ECHO command can be used.
[Fig.A1.6-1 Connectivity verification screen]

The ping command does not produce a normal result if it is sent to a device that does not
respond to the ICMP protocol. Likewise, the C-ECHO command cannot verify connectivity if it is
sent to a device that does not support the C-ECHO command response.

536
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Appendix 3. Detector Catalog

The detector catalog is a catalog file that records the unique information about each detector
that CCS-NE and CCS-RF need. This screen allows you to display, add, and delete the detector
catalog information.
The detector catalogs of all the supported detectors are registered when CCS is installed. This
screen only displays the detector catalog information and is not used to add or delete detector
catalogs during service work.
To check the detector catalog information, click [Sensor] in the service tool menu and go to the
[Detector Catalog] tab.

537
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Appendix 4. Printer Catalog

1. Overview of the printer catalog

A printer catalog contains a collection of information unique to each type of DICOM-compatible

printer and information necessary for setup. It is referenced when CCS-NE or CCS-RF is set up.
In the CCS-NE or CCS-RF setup screen, "Printer Type” is displayed.
A printer catalog can be imported and exported as an xml file.
To import, export, or create a printer catalog, use the service tool.
[Fig.A4.1-1. Printer catalog reference screen]

538
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Data structure

The data structure of a printer catalog is as follows.

[Fig.A4.2-1. Structure of a printer catalog]

As many Film Info (film information) objects as the number of types supported by the printer can
be added.
As many Image Box Info (image information) objects as the number of image boxes supported by
the layout function of the printer can be added.

539
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.1. CS Info
CS Info contains the values that are assigned to the DICOM tags listed in the table below.
[Table A4.2.1-1. Tags contained in CS Info]

CSInfo

- Pixel Pitch

2000,0010 Number of copies

2000,0020 Print Priority

2000,0030 Medium Type

2000,0040 Film Destination

2010,0010 Image Display Format

2010,0060 Magnification Type

2010,0080 Smoothing Type

2010,0100 Border Density

2010,0120 Min Density

2010,0130 Max Density

2010,0140 Trim

2010,0150 Configuration Information

2010,015E Illumination

2010,0160 Reflective Ambient Light

2020,0040 Requested Decimate / Crop Behavior

- Magnification Limit

As the exceptions, the settings of Pixel Pitch and Magnification Limit are also included in CS Info.
Pixel Pitch: Pixel pitch of the printer
Magnification Limit: Upper limit of magnification
If the value obtained by multiplying this value by the pixel count of the image box size exceeds
the printable film size, it is reduced to the image box size on the CCS-NE side.

540
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. Setting of the printer catalog

To set a printer catalog, select the service tool [DICOM Setting] > [Printer] > [Printer catalog
name].

3.1. Printer catalog name screen

The printer catalogs that are set are listed.
The displayed items are Manufacturer and Printer model name.
[Fig.A4.3.1-1. Printer catalog name screen]

• Import:
Imports a printer catalog from an xml format file.
• Property:
Displays the advanced setting screen used to set the print parameters and other information
for the selected printer catalog.
• (Delete):
Deletes the printer catalog of the printer selected in the list.

541
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

If you add a printer and then click the Export catalog button in the [Printer property] screen,
you can export the printer catalog as an xml format file. The [Printer property] screen appears if
you display the General setting screen by selecting the service tool [DICOM Setting] >
[Printer] > [General setting], select a printer from the printer list, and then click the Property
button.
[Fig.A4.3.1-2. Printer property screen]

542
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.2. Printing parameter setting screen

The advanced setting screen of a printer catalog has two tabs: [Printing parameter] and [Film
list]. These tabs allow you to display and set the related items.
The printing parameter setting screen is mainly used to set the DICOM-defined items that are
necessary as the setting values for the printer.
Before setting these items, refer to the "DICOM Conformance Statement" of the printer or
contact the printer vendor engineer to check which items to set.
[Fig.A4.3.2. Printing parameter setting screen]

543
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.3. Film list setting screen

The film list setting screen lets you set the film size, the resolution of images printable on the film,
and the orientation of printing.
[Fig.A4.3.3. Film list setting screen]

4. Printer setting procedure using a printer catalog

Since there is no printer catalog at the time of installation, the catalog of a printer similar to the
one you install needs to be imported from the installation medium.
1. Click the Import button and, from the resulting Explorer screen, select the printer catalog file
you want to import.
[Fig.A4.4.-1 Selecting the printer catalog file to be added]

544
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

The printer catalog is added to the list.

[Fig.A4.4-2. Printer catalog name screen]

2. If the values you want to set for your printer catalog are different from those of the added
printer catalog, click the Export catalog button in the [Printer property] screen.
Export the printer catalog as an xml format file to create a new printer catalog file.
[Fig.A4.4-3. Printer property screen]

545
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. Enter [Manufacturer] and [Printer model name] of the printer.

[Fig.A4.4.-4 Catalog information editing dialog box]

4. Click the OK button.

In the resulting dialog box, save the catalog in a desired location with a desired name. A new
catalog file is created.
[Fig.A4.4.-5 Printer catalog save dialog box]

5. Import the catalog file again.

Perform step 1. A newly created catalog file is not registered in the service tool list unless you
import it.
6. Select the imported printer catalog that is displayed in the list and, if necessary, set the
relevant parameters in [Printing parameter] and [Film list].
7. Delete the unnecessary catalog file you imported in step 1.

546
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

5. Printer adjustment with the D-value set (when setting a printer that
does not support the P-value)

In V1.40 or later, CCS supports output to a printer that does not support the P-value.
With a printer that does not support the P-value, it is necessary to check the linearity of the
printed image density after the setting.

Purpose of the adjustment

The purpose is to check that the density linearity of the image transferred by CCS matches that
of the image output by the printer, by using an SMPTE image.

Before doing this task

Before doing this task, make sure that the adjustments and checks mentioned below are
complete.
• Make sure that the printer is connected, set, and adjusted. Select LINEAR for the image
output setting on the printer side.
• Make sure that the printer has been calibrated individually.
• From the [Printer list] in the [DICOM Setting] > [Printer] > [General setting] tab of the
service tool, select the printer you want to adjust, click the Property button, and select
the [Printing parameter] tab. For [Printer type], set [D-value], and enter values in [Min
density], [Max density], [Lightbox illumination], and [Reflected ambient light].

Rough adjustment method

1. Start the service tool.
2. From the [Printer list] in the [DICOM Setting] > [Printer] > [General setting] tab of the
service tool, select the printer you want to adjust, and click the Property button.
3. Select the [Film list] tab.

547
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. From the [Film list], select the film size you want to adjust, and click the Printing test chart
button.

5. Click the Printing button.

Transfer the SMPTE pattern image to the printer.

6. Measure density at 11 points on the gray scale of the test image on the film or monitor (the
image of step 5).

548
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• To measure the density of the SMPTE image on a film, use a densitometer. To measure
the density of the SMPTE image on a high-definition monitor, use gradation analysis
software.
• The gray scale data of the SMPTE test image transferred by the CXDI consists of the
values obtained by evenly dividing the maximum density set for the printer into 11 steps.

7. Create a graph based on the data measured in step 6.

The measured values need to be lined almost linearly, from the minimum density to the
maximum density, as shown in the graph above. It is important that the measured values be
lined linearly and that the specified maximum density be output.
If any value significantly deviates from the linear line or the specified maximum density is
not output, it is necessary to adjust the output linearity, calibration, and other settings for the
printer and monitor.

Reference
• The above graph shows an example of measuring a film printed with the maximum
density set to 3.2D and 3.1D by using a densitometer.
• Depending on the type of printer, linear output may not be able to be set. In that case,
select an output setting as close to linear output as possible.
Ideal density values for a linear line

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

3.2D 0 0.32 0.64 0.96 1.28 1.60 1.92 2.24 2.56 2.88 3.20

3.1D 0 0.31 0.62 0.93 1.24 1.55 1.86 2.17 2.48 2.79 3.10

• The possible reasons that the measured values are not lined linearly are:
»» Incorrect printer calibration
»» Printer failure

Fine adjustment method

1. Perform steps 1 to 5 of the rough adjustment method, and then transfer the SMPTE pattern
image to the printer.

549
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Measure density at 32 points on the gray scale of the test image on the film.

Reference
• To measure the density of the SMPTE image on a film, use a densitometer. To measure
the density of the SMPTE image on a high-definition monitor, use gradation analysis
software.
• The gray scale data of the SMPTE test image transferred by the CXDI consists of the
values obtained by evenly dividing the maximum density set for the printer into 32 steps.

3. Create a graph based on the data measured in step 2, as in step 7 of the rough adjustment
method.
Check that the measured values are lined almost linearly, from the minimum density to the
maximum density.

550
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Ideal density values for a linear line

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

3.2D 0 0.10 0.21 0.31 0.41 0.52 0.62 0.72 0.83 0.93 1.03

3.1D 0 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00

Step 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

3.2D 1.14 1.24 1.34 1.45 1.55 1.65 1.75 1.86 1.96 2.06 2.17

3.1D 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.10

Step 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

3.2D 2.27 2.37 2.48 2.58 2.68 2.79 2.89 2.99 3.10 3.20

3.1D 2.20 2.30 2.40 2.50 2.60 2.70 2.80 2.90 3.00 3.10

Reference
• The data and graph below are based on the values obtained by measuring an SMPTE
test image printed using KODAK MLP 190 with the curve shape (density linear) set to 0
and the maximum density set to 3.20.
As can be seen from the graph, the data values are lined almost linearly, from the
minimum density (film base density) to the maximum density.
SMPTE density data

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Percentage 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Density (D) 0.17 0.46 0.75 1.03 1.36 1.66 1.98 2.29 2.59 2.90 3.20

* Parameter settings of the printer in this case: -A 320 -T NO -M CUBIC -m NORMAL -S CS000

551
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• Example in which values are not lined linearly in the graph
The data and graph below are based on the values obtained by measuring an SMPTE
test image printed using KODAK MLP 190.
A: Normal value
B: CXDI printer parameter not set to linear
C: Printer not calibrated correctly
SMPTE density data

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Percentage 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

A: Normal 0.17 0.46 0.75 1.03 1.36 1.66 1.98 2.29 2.59 2.90 3.20

B: Incorrect
parameter 0.17 0.29 0.45 0.61 0.80 1.02 1.26 1.59 2.02 2.53 3.19
setting

C: Incorrect
0.17 0.33 0.55 0.81 1.08 1.36 1.66 1.97 2.28 2.59 2.94
calibration

* The incorrect parameter setting refers to when the printer is set without the printer parameter "-S CS000."
* Incorrect calibration refers to when any of the calibration data of the printer is set to a lower value than
allowed.

552
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Appendix 5. Gamma Adjustment Tool

1. Overview of the Gamma Adjustment Tool

The Gamma Adjustment Tool is a measurement tool used to set the gamma value for
implementing an image reading environment similar to that of a monitor that supports the DICOM
Grayscale Standard Display Function (GSDF), even when the monitor in use does not support
the DICOM GSDF.

Note
• This function is intended to implement an environment similar to that of a DICOM GSDF-
compatible monitor, not to achieve conformance with DICOM; to be precise, it does not
provide DICOM gradation. When presenting the function to a user, keep this in mind and be
careful about the words you use.
• The function has been developed for "users who hesitate to purchase CXDI because it
is expensive due to the very high price of a DICOM GSDF-compatible monitor." Use this
function only when the user insists on keeping the price low. For users who have leeway in
their budgets, recommend the use of a DICOM GSDF-compatible monitor.

The function is available in two types. Select one of the types at the time of installation.

Type A Type B

Indication on the service tool With_Luminance_Meter Without_Luminance_Meter

Luminance meter Required Not required

DICOM curve accuracy High Low

Difficulty of installation High Low

553
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.1. Starting the Gamma Adjustment Tool

1. Start the service tool.
2. In the [Menu selection] screen, select [System Setting] > [Application Setting].

3. In the [Application setting] screen, select [Display].

554
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. Click [Monitor gamma] > Adjust monitor gamma button to start the Gamma Adjustment
Tool.
• CCS-NE

• CCS-RF

555
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

5. For [Gamma adjustment type], select one of the values shown below.
Select one of the three values shown in the drop-down list.

Value Meaning

OFF A DICOM GSDF-compatible monitor is used.

A general-purpose monitor is used, and gamma

With_Luminance_Meter
adjustment is performed with the function of type A.

A general-purpose monitor is used, and gamma

Without_Luminance_Meter
adjustment is performed with the function of type B.

556
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• If a dual monitor configuration is set with the service tool, the [Gamma Adjustment Tool]
screen displays the [Primary] and [Secondary] tabs. To perform gamma adjustment for
the second monitor or live monitor, set a dual monitor configuration with the service tool.

557
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Setting the monitor (type A)

This section describes the procedure for performing gamma adjustment by using a luminance
meter (With_Luminance_Meter).

2.1. Technical description

The service engineer should bring a luminance meter to the installation site. The meter is used to
measure the monitor gamma by measuring the luminance of a general-purpose monitor. Here is
how it works.
P-value→[DICOM gradation curve]→[Inverse gamma curve]→[Monitor gamma]→Luminance
Shown above is the series of monitor displays given when a general-purpose monitor is
connected. The values in blue are displayed for CXDI, and the values in red are displayed for the
general-purpose monitor. When the inverse gamma curve and monitor gamma offset each other,
a DICOM gradation curve is implemented as follows.
P-value →[DICOM gradation curve] → Luminance
The key point of this technology is "how accurately the gamma of a general-purpose monitor
can be measured." Measure the monitor gamma of a general-purpose monitor, and CXDI will
generate the inverse function of that monitor gamma, generating a gradation with the gamma of
1. If the gamma cannot be measured accurately, the monitor gradation deviates from the DICOM
gradation curve. There is a mechanism for making a check if the gradation deviates significantly.
This checking mechanism employs a subjective approach and requires some experience.

2.2. Notes
• Either a telephoto type luminance meter or a contact type luminance meter may be used.
This section assumes the use of a telephoto type luminance meter. The use of a tripod is
recommended for luminance measurement.
• The specifications are such that monitor gamma measurement is not available on the GUI.
However, a mechanism is provided that checks for a significant deviation from the DICOM
gradation curve. The mechanism notifies the service engineer if the user judges that there is
a significant deviation.
• There are two methods to measure luminance.
(1) When the CXDI installation environment can be put in complete darkness
• Example) When the room in which CXDI is installed has no windows
• The monitor gamma can be measured accurately.
• Prepare a flashlight; otherwise, you will not be able to see things at hand during luminance
measurement.
(2) When the CXDI installation environment cannot be put in complete darkness
• Measurement accuracy slightly decreases due to external noise.
• The colors of the clothes of the measuring operator are reflected in the monitor screen,
causing measurement unevenness. To reduce measurement unevenness, avoid wearing
checked clothes when conducting a measurement.
• The background of the measuring operator is reflected in the monitor screen. To reduce
measurement unevenness, make sure that no one walks behind the measuring operator.
Measurement unevenness will result if a person walks behind the measuring operator
during the measurement.

558
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3. Preparations
Determine the position of the luminance meter in advance. Position the luminance meter at eye
level for luminance measurement. Be careful not to move the position of the luminance meter.

When luminance is measured using a luminance

When the operator looks at the monitor
meter

2.4. Operating procedure

1. Start gamma adjustment.
1. Start the service tool. In the [Menu selection] screen, select [System Setting] >
[Application Setting] > [Display].
2. Click the Adjust monitor gamma button to start the Gamma Adjustment Tool.
3. For [Gamma adjustment type], select [With_Luminance_Meter].
2. Close the confirmation dialog box.
When the confirmation dialog box appears, click the OK button to close it.

559
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

When the CXDI installation environment can be put in complete darkness, put the room in
complete darkness before clicking the OK button.

3. Display the measurement pattern selection dialog box.

When you close the confirmation dialog box, the measurement pattern selection dialog box
appears.

560
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. Start measurement.
In the measurement pattern selection dialog box, select [Test ID 1] and click the Measure
button.
The measurement pattern is displayed.

The message shown below appears at the bottom right of the luminance measurement
pattern screen.

Measure the luminance at the center of the screen by using a luminance meter.
5. Enter the luminance.
After the measurement, press the [Esc] key on the keyboard.
When the luminance entry dialog box appears, enter the measured luminance and click the
Next button.

6. Repeat the process of displaying a measurement pattern and conducting a luminance

measurement.
After entering the luminance for the 11th pattern, click the Finish button.

561
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

7. Check the measurement results.

The measured luminance values are listed.
If there is any pattern for which you want to redo a measurement, select the corresponding ID
and click the Measure button.
If there is no problem, click the OK button.

8. Check the calculation results.

If you click the OK button in step 7, a screen as shown below appears.
When the measurements have been conducted in a completely dark CXDI installation
environment, turn on the lights of the room now.
Based on the luminance measurements, the maximum luminance (Max luminance), minimum
luminance (Min luminance), contrast ratio (Contrast ratio), and gamma value (Gamma) are
calculated.

562
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

9. Enter the value for reflected ambient light.

Measure the reflected ambient light, and enter the measured value in the [Reflected ambient
light] field.
The reflected ambient light refers to the ambient light that is reflected from the monitor screen
into the eye. To measure the reflected ambient light, put the CXDI installation environment in
complete darkness.
When the CXDI installation environment cannot be put in complete darkness, the
measurement of reflected ambient light is unnecessary, because reflected ambient light is
measured during the measurement for the 11 patterns. Set "0" in the [Reflected ambient
light] field.

Measuring luminance when the CXDI Measuring luminance with the monitor
installation environment cannot be put in powered off
complete darkness (→ reflected ambient light is measured)

Measure the luminance at the center of the screen in the conditions mentioned below.
• Make the room as bright as the CXDI operating environment.
× Do not close curtains during the operation; close curtains during the measurement of
reflected ambient light.
× Turn the lights down during the operation; turn the lights up during the measurement of
reflected ambient light.
• Turn off the power of the monitor.
10. Complete the gamma adjustment.
Click the OK button or Apply button.
This completes the measurement of luminance.
The following steps are for checking the settings.
11. Start the CCS-NE or CCS-RF software.
• To check whether the measurement data is correct, use the CCS-NE or CCS-RF
software. Exit the service tool, and start the CCS-NE or CCS-RF software.
• If incorrect measurement data is found through this check, perform steps 1 to 11 again.
• If performing the steps again does not solve the problem, select type B.

563
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

12. Start [Gamma Adjustment].

Go to the [System Settings] tab, and click the Gamma Adjustment button under [Monitor
Gamma].
* The Gamma Adjustment button is not displayed when [Gamma adjustment type] is set to
[OFF] for the Gamma Adjustment Tool.

Note
• In the case of type A, the CCS-NE/CCS-RF software only allows you to check the
displayed data.

13. Check the displayed patterns.

Select the Normal mode, and observe the patterns without moving the slider at the bottom of
the screen.
While two contrast patterns and an SMPTE pattern are available, the SMPTE pattern is not
used for the check.

564
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

The displayed slider value is that measured in step 9. Write it down for later use when you
check for differences from visual measurements.

Explain the following to the user.

• Each of the eight contrast patterns has a small square in the center. The monitor gamma
is appropriately adjusted when these eight small squares all look the same in contrast. If
the contrast of only one of the small squares is distinct or indistinct, the monitor gradation
is not appropriately adjusted. (Refer to the examples of inappropriate adjustment below.)
• In Normal mode, each pattern has a 1.5% difference in level in the center.
• In Tight mode, each pattern has a 1.2% difference in level in the center.
• In the DICOM gradation curve, when the height of level difference is the same, the
contrast can be perceived similarly, regardless of whether the background is dark or
bright. These contrast patterns are used to determine whether the gradation curve of the
monitor is like the DICOM gradation curve.
• With the Normal mode patterns, the contrast is perceived clearly because of the large
difference in level. This makes the eight patterns look almost the same in contrast, even
if the gradation is not precisely adjusted. Therefore, the Tight mode patterns have less
distinct contrast.

Note
• The user may use not only the two contrast patterns but the SMPTE pattern as well.
• The user references Appendix 7 in the Setup Guide. Read Appendix 7 in advance.

14. Adjust the contrast using the slider.

Move the slider and adjust so that the small squares in the eight contrast patterns all look the
same in contrast.
After coarsely adjusting the gamma in Normal mode, select the Tight mode and make fine
adjustments.

565
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

If the difference between the value obtained after making adjustments in step 14 and
the value written down in step 13 is 0.4 or greater, the luminance measurement data is
considered to be incorrect. If so, perform steps 1 to 10 again.

Example of inappropriate adjustment 1

The small square in the center of the leftmost pattern in the bottom row is invisible because it
is almost the same color as the background. Conversely, the contrast of the small square in the
center of the leftmost pattern in the top row can be clearly perceived because its color is different
from that of the background. If the gradation is adjusted appropriately, the eight small squares
can be perceived to have almost the same contrast.

Example of inappropriate adjustment 2

The small squares in the center of the three patterns in the top row cannot be seen.

566
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. Setting the monitor (type B)

This section describes the procedure for performing gamma adjustment without using a
luminance meter (Without_Luminance_Meter).

3.1. Operating procedure

1. Start gamma adjustment.
1. Start the service tool. In the [Menu selection] screen, select [System Setting] >
[Application Setting] > [Display].
2. Click the Adjust monitor gamma button to start the Gamma Adjustment Tool.
3. For [Gamma adjustment type], select [Without_Luminance_Meter].
2. Close the confirmation dialog box.
When the confirmation dialog box appears, click the OK button to close it.

567
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. Set the maximum luminance and contrast ratio.

Based on the performance specifications of the monitor, set the maximum luminance and
contrast ratio.
The items to be set are as follows.
• Luminance
• Contrast ratio

4. Set the gamma value.

Set the gamma value.
• Gamma: Gamma value
• The value you set here will be used as the default gamma value when the user
performs the gamma adjustment. The closer the default value is to the gamma value
of the monitor, the less the user needs to do for the adjustment.
• This gamma value should be as correct as possible. Note, however, that it is intended
as the default value for the adjustment. The right value should be decided by the user
who performs the adjustment.
• It is said that the gamma value is 2.2 for a Windows monitor and 1.8 for a Mac monitor.
Since it is assumed that a Windows monitor is used for CXDI, set 2.2.
• Some recent monitors have a setup menu that lets you select 2.2 or 1.8 as the gamma
value. If you use such a monitor, select 2.2 and set the gamma value to 2.2 in the
service tool.
Example: When 2.2 is selected in the setup menu of a monitor that allows you to
select a gamma value

5. Click the OK button to save the settings.

Exit the monitor setting tool.

568
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

6. Perform the check.

Perform steps 11 to 14 of "Appendix 5.2.4 Operating procedure."

Note
• In the case of type B, the confirmation dialog box does not appear in step 12 above.
• In the case of type B, you can adjust gamma by performing the above procedure with the
CCS-NE or CCS-RF software.

4. Reference information

4.1. Selection of the monitor

LCD monitors come in two types: one with a matte LCD and the other with a glossy LCD.
A matte LCD has microscopic indentations to protect the screen from the glare caused by
extraneous light. While these indentations are an effective way of preventing glare, they diffuse
the light, resulting in the whole screen taking on a whitish cloudy appearance. A glossy LCD,
which employs no such anti-glare measure, prevents the loss of color caused by the dispersion
of light.
For this reason, a glossy LCD reproduces colors vividly and the color of black in particular
appears crisp. However, since this LCD gives rise to glare, as CRT displays do, care must be
taken about the positional relationship with lighting. The glossy LCD is also said to be relatively
tiring on the eyes.
When a monitor is to be installed under fluorescent lighting, a matte LCD is recommended
because it is subject to less glare.
However, which type is superior depends on the circumstances. Select a monitor based on the
reading environment, images to be observed, subjectivity of the reading individual, etc.

569
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.2. DICOM gradation

The DICOM gradation is defined in Part 14 of the DICOM standard. It ensures visual consistency
between display devices with different dynamic ranges by using the Grayscale Standard Display
Function (GSDF) based on the visual sense characteristics of a human being.
Suppose, for example, that you have one monitor with a maximum luminance of 600 [cd/m2] and
another with a maximum luminance of 250 [cd/m2]. Use the DICOM gradation to ensure that
you get the same results from the diagnosis of chest images regardless of which of these two
monitors you use. The DICOM gradation makes the images look similar no matter which monitor
you use for the diagnosis.
The visual sensitivity of a human being is high when the surrounding is dark. It is low when the
surrounding is bright.
Both patterns (A) and (B) below have a difference in luminance of 1 [cd/m2]. While a human
being can perceive the difference in level of (A), the difference in level of (B) is not perceptible.

(A) (B)

For a human being to perceive the difference in level, the central area of (B) must have a
brightness of 1006 [cd/m2]. Since the visual sensitivity is low when the surrounding is bright, a
significant difference in luminance is required.
Suppose that there is an image with shadows that may indicate cancer and that these shadows
have a difference of 1 in the pixel value compared with the surroundings. Also suppose that the
shadows are present in two areas, one where the surroundings are dark such as a lung and
another where the surroundings are bright such as a bone. Since the difference in the pixel value
is the same in both areas, it is possible for a person who can detect the shadows in one area
to detect the shadows in the other area. The monitor gradation designed to achieve this is the
DICOM gradation.
The DICOM gradation is as shown in the figure below. The curve seen here is called the GSDF
curve. The X axis represents visual stimulation and its value corresponds to the pixel value.
The Y axis represents luminance. When the surroundings are dark, the luminance difference
becomes smaller and the slope of the curve is gentle. Conversely, when the surroundings are
bright, the luminance difference becomes smaller, resulting in a sharp slope of the curve.

570
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

The DICOM gradation makes an image displayed on a monitor with a maximum luminance of
600 [cd/m2] appear similar to that displayed on a monitor with a maximum luminance of 250 [cd/
m2].
The light emitted by the monitor is not the only light that enters the human eye. Lights from
lighting fixtures as well as from outside windows are reflected on the monitor surface and reach
the eye. This type of light is called reflected ambient light. (Refer to the figure below.)

* The lights that reach the eye are the monitor light and reflected ambient light.
The less the reflected ambient light, the better. If there is a high level of reflected ambient light,
the contrast ratio of the maximum luminance and minimum luminance is reduced, making it
difficult to see images.
Suppose that the maximum luminance and minimum luminance of a monitor are 250 [cd/m2] and
1 [cd/m2], respectively. In this case, the contrast ratio is 250:1. If there is reflected ambient light
of 1 [cd/m2], then the contrast ratio becomes 251:2 [(250+1):(1+1)], which is roughly equivalent
to a ratio of 125:1. Reflected ambient light is the light that is reflected by the monitor surface.
Therefore, when a matte LCD and a glossy LCD are compared, the level of reflected ambient
light is lower for the matte LCD.
When the maximum luminance and minimum luminance of a monitor are 600 [cd/m2] and 0.1
[cd/m2], respectively, and there is reflected ambient light of 1 [cd/m2], the DICOM gradation is
as shown in (1) of the figure below. When the maximum luminance and minimum luminance of a
monitor are 250 [cd/m2] and 0.1 [cd/m2], respectively, and there is reflected ambient light of 1 [cd/
m2], the DICOM gradation is as shown in (2). According to the pixel value, an image is displayed
with the luminance in the range indicated by the blue arrow. When the pixel value is normalized
to 0 to 1, point A is 0.0 and point B is 1.0. The pixel value is referred to as the P-value.

(1)

571
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(2)

With the DICOM gradation, the human eye receives the same stimulation if the difference in
the P-value is the same. By utilizing this principle, a function has been developed that allows a
general-purpose monitor to be used as if the DICOM gradation is in use.
The figure below shows a P-value pattern. There are eight patches, each having a small square
in its center. x represents the patch background, and y the small square. At x, the difference
between the P-value of x and that of y is 1.5% in Normal mode and 1.2% in Tight mode. When
the monitor has the DICOM gradation, the eight small squares y1 to y8 of this pattern can be
perceived similarly. If y1 cannot be seen clearly although y2 to y8 are clearly visible, it means
that the monitor gradation has not been adjusted as the DICOM gradation. However, since the
visual sense characteristics differ from one individual to another, it is impossible to adjust the
monitor gradation so that all the eight patches can be seen with the same level of clarity.
Under the DICOM standard, the GSDF is achieved using a luminance meter. The GSDF is
defined in Part 14 of the DICOM standard. DICOM-compliant monitors come with a luminance
calibration function to achieve the GSDF. Some monitor manufacturers sell the luminance
calibration function as an option.

572
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Appendix 6. AP/LNK Configuration Tool

1. Overview of the AP/LNK Configuration Tool

The AP/LNK Configuration Tool is used to configure the settings for using the function to link
with a Ferry type wireless connection detector (wireless detector), the parameters necessary for
wireless communication, and the access point settings.
To link with a wireless detector, use one of the following devices:
• Infrared data communication unit
• Ready indicator
• Detector cable

Note
• The link function is not supported for the CXDI-70C/G or CXDI-80C detector cable.

573
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Linking procedure

1. In the service tool menu, click [AP/LNK] to start the AP/LNK Configuration Tool.
Enter appropriate values for all the parameters of the AP/LNK Configuration Tool.
2. Only the necessary parameters are displayed according to the settings. For the individual
setting values, refer to "Appendix 6.4 Setting procedures."
3. To change the wireless communication settings for the access point (manufactured by Cisco),
click the Send button to send the setting values to the access point.
It takes two to three minutes before the access point setup is complete.
4. Click the Finish button, and check that LNKController.exe has been started (refer to the figure
below).
[Fig.A6-2. Taskbar icon when LNKController.exe is started]

Reference
• Right-click the icon and select [Show]. The LNKController screen appears.

5. Perform the link operation in accordance with the procedure below.

When the link operation is performed for the first time, the detector information is
automatically registered in CCS.
When using the infrared data communication unit
Bring the infrared data communication unit close to the infrared data port of the wireless
detector, and tap the power button to initiate an infrared link.

574
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

When using the ready indicator

Bring the infrared data port of the ready indicator close to that of the wireless detector,
and tap the power button to initiate an infrared link.

When using the detector cable

Connect the detector cable to the cable connector of the wireless detector to initiate the
wired link.

575
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

6. In the service tool menu, click [Sensor]. In the resulting [Detector] screen, select [Ferry
Static Detector] > [Registered Detectors] to check that the wireless detector is registered.

Reference
• If the detector cannot be found in the service tool when the link operation has successfully
been performed, restart the service tool.
• To change the IP addresses for the wireless connection, perform the procedure below.
1. Select [Ferry Static Detector] > [Registered Detectors] > [IP] tab, and set the IP
addresses under [Wireless].
• Local IP Address: IP address of the PC in use (normally, 192.168.100.10)
• Target IP Address: IP address of the wireless detector (An unused IP address is
automatically assigned.)
2. Click the OK button.
3. Perform the link operation again to register the detector.
4. In the service tool menu, click [Protocol Editor], and make settings in [Workspace].
• When using a wiring unit, perform the procedure below.
1. Select [Ferry Static Detector] > [Registered Detectors] > [IP] tab. Set [Use wired
option] to ON under [Wired], and set the IP addresses.
2. Click the OK button.
3. Perform the link operation again to register the detector.
4. In the service tool menu, click [Protocol Editor], and make settings in [Workspace].

576
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. Notes on settings

• The infrared data communication unit used for the link function must be connected before
CCS is started. Do not disconnect it while CCS is running.
• The link operation can be performed with the infrared data communication unit, ready
indicator, and detector cable all connected. Note, however, that the link is established only for
the device that receives the link start notification first. In the case of a wireless detector that
supports the wired link function, an infrared link is not available, because the power button is
disabled when the detector cable is connected. In the case of a wireless detector that does
not support the wired link function, an infrared link is also available when the detector cable is
connected.
• Only the ready indicator (RI-3A), which is an optional unit, supports an infrared link.
• When a wired link is established by connecting the detector cable via an ACDC box, the
power of the ACDC box does not need to be turned on.
• If a wired link fails to be established due to an error, the problem can be solved by
establishing an infrared link using the infrared data communication unit or ready indicator.
Likewise, if the ready indicator fails to establish an infrared link, the problem can be solved
by other means (establishing an infrared link using the infrared data communication unit or
establishing a wired link).

4. Setting procedures

Since the items that need to be set differ depending on the system configuration (access point
type) to be installed, the AP/LNK Configuration Tool displays only those items necessary for the
configuration. When Non Generator Connection is enabled, the available system configurations
are limited. In that case, refer to the service manual of the detector in use.
If the detector is used as the child wireless unit (client) in the system configuration to be installed,
refer to "Appendix 6.4.1 Using the detector as the child unit." If the detector is used as the parent
wireless unit (access point), refer to "Appendix 6.4.2 Using the detector as the parent unit."
When multiple X-ray generators coexist in the system, you can make communication settings for
the X-ray interface unit connected to each generator. For information about enabling the units
and the communication settings, refer to "Appendix 6.4.3 Enabling multiple X-ray generators and
communication settings."

577
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.1. Using the detector as the child unit

1. From the service tool, open the [AP/LNK] setting.

2. In the resulting AP/LNK Configuration Tool screen, make the necessary settings.

578
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

ApLnk.exe
Display and update of the version of the channel file
You can update the channel file by clicking the Update button and selecting an update
file. Use this function in such cases as when changes have been made in the radio laws
and regulations of the country or region concerned.
Link Module
Use Link Module
Setting of whether to use the link function (ON) or not (OFF)
Normally, the link function is used. So select [ON]. When you have made all the
settings and click the Finish button, the link controller starts and becomes resident.
Default: OFF

Note
• If you use the wired option, do not set this setting to [OFF] even after the
check-in is complete. If the setting is set to [OFF], the switch from wireless
connection to wired connection may become slow.

COM port
Setting of the COM port used by the infrared data communication unit
Default: Not set
When using the infrared data communication unit
Set the COM port number assigned to the infrared data communication unit.
The combo box displays the COM port detected by the system at the startup of the
AP/LNK Configuration Tool. For this to happen, the infrared data communication unit
needs to be connected when the PC is started.
When using the ready indicator or detector cable
Set [Not set].
Access Point Type
Select the wireless adapter to be used for the communication with the detector.
Cisco AP: When a Cisco AP is used
Other Configuration: Other cases
Use W53/W56 band
Specify whether to use the 5.3 GHz and 5.6 GHz bands (ON) or not (OFF).
3. Click the Next button.

579
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. In the resulting screen, make the necessary settings.

Local IP Address
IP address of the PC that communicates with the access point
Default: 192.168.100.10
An address whose fourth value is 254 or 253 is not used.
ESSID
ESSID of the access point
Default: Blank (32 half-size alphanumeric characters or less)
PSK
Setting of the pre-shared key used for WPA encryption
This key is sent together with the ESSID and other data to the access point when Send is
clicked or to the connected wireless detector when a link is established. Setting the same
key enables WPA encrypted communication.
Default: Blank (8 to 63 half-size alphanumeric characters)
Channel range
Setting of the channel range
The available channel range differs depending on the laws and regulations of the country
or region concerned. Refer to "Appendix 6.5.1 Available regions and restrictions" and set
the appropriate channel range.
Default: Disable
Use 2.4G / 5G Channel
Set the frequency band to be used for the communication with the detector.
If you select [ON] for both 2.4G and 5G, the behavior differs depending on the detector to
be used.

580
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

X-ray IF IP Address
IP address of the X-ray generator interface unit (192.168.100.96)
An address whose fourth value is 254 or 253 is not used.
5. If [Cisco AP] is selected in step 2, click the Next button. If [Other configuration] is selected,
click the Finish button.
If you click the Finish button, perform the link operation for the detector to be used.
6. In the resulting screen, make the necessary settings (only when [Cisco AP] is selected in
step 2).

Target IP Address
IP address of the access point
Default: 192.168.100.200
An address whose fourth value is 254 or 253 is not used.
Subnet mask
Subnet mask of the access point
Default: 255.255.255.0
Channel bonding (2.4G / 5G)
Setting of channel bonding (a function that bonds multiple channels to increase speed)
Default: Below 40MHz
From the [Channel bonding] drop-down list, select the side on which the extended
channels are to be used (Above 40MHz or Below 40MHz). If you select 20 MHz, the
extended channels are not used (channel bonding is disabled).
If [Use 2.4G / 5G Channel] is not set to [ON], this is excluded from the setting items.

581
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Channel (2.4G / 5G)

The channel you set here should be within the range specified in [Channel range].
Depending on whether [Channel bonding] is enabled or disabled, the [Channel] drop-
down list changes. If [Use 2.4G / 5G Channel] is not set to [ON], this is excluded from the
setting items.
Default: Disable
7. To send the settings to a Cisco access point, click the Send button.
8. To finish the settings, click the Finish button.
9. Perform the link operation for the detector to be used.

4.2. Using the detector as the parent unit

1. From the service tool, open the [X-Ray Generator] setting.

582
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Under Operation setting, select [Non generator connection mode].

3. From the service tool, open the [AP/LNK] setting.

583
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. Make the settings as shown below, and click the Next button.
Use Link Module: ON
Access Point Type: Detector AP

5. In the resulting screen, make the necessary settings.

584
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Local IP Address
IP address of the PC that communicates with the detector via wired connection
Default: 192.168.100.10
An address whose fourth value is 254 or 253 is not used.
Channel range
Setting of the channel range
The available channel range differs depending on the laws and regulations of the country
or region concerned. Refer to "Appendix 6.5.1 Available regions and restrictions" and set
the appropriate channel range.
Default: Disable
Wireless network adapter
Built-in PC wireless adapter (child unit) that communicates with the detector
Use 2.4G / 5G Channel
Set the frequency band to be used.
If you select ON for both 2.4G and 5G, the behavior differs depending on the detector to
be used.
Channel
Channel over which the detector operates as the wireless parent unit
6. Click the Finish button.
7. Perform the link operation for the detector to be used.

585
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

8. Disable the unnecessary settings.

When a built-in PC wireless adapter or USB adapter was used as the parent unit (AP), there
may be unnecessary settings remaining. Disable the unnecessary settings by disabling the
hosted network adapter, uninstalling the driver of the USB wireless adapter, deleting the bat
file, etc.

Note
• When this function is enabled ([Detector AP] is selected), note the following:
»» The function cannot be used with a detector that does not support the detector AP
function.
»» Since the ESSID is automatically issued, you cannot specify it.
»» When the link operation is performed, all the profiles (connection settings) that are set
in the target wireless adapter are deleted. Therefore, when using the function, exercise
due care not to select a wireless adapter used for some other purpose such as hospital
LAN connection.

Reference
• If the settings are invalid ([Synchronize the detector with the generator to perform
exposure] and [Detector AP] are selected), a fatal error occurs when CCS starts up.

586
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.3. Enabling multiple X-ray generators and communication settings

1. From the service tool, open the [X-Ray Generator] setting.

587
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Under Operation setting, select [Synchronize the detector with the generator to perform
exposure].

3. From the service tool, open the [AP/LNK] setting.

588
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. Make the setting as shown below, and click the Next button.
X-ray IF Type: Multi mode

5. In the resulting screen, make the necessary settings.

589
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Multi X-ray IF Info

The settings for up to four X-ray generators (settings for X-ray interface units) can be
registered.
Name
Names of X-ray interface units Nos. 1 to 4
Up to six half-size alphanumeric characters can be set.
Default: Tube1 (No. 1 only)
IP Address
IP address of X-ray interface units Nos. 1 to 4
Default: 192.168.100.96 (No. 1 only)
An address whose fourth value is 254 or 253 is not used.

Note
• In [Name] and [IP Address], any identical name or address cannot be registered.
• The settings must always be entered for No. 1 in [Multi X-ray IF Info].
• The X-ray interface unit settings that have already been set for the detector in the
service tool > [Detector] screen > [IP] tab cannot be left out.
• Do not leave any empty row between the rows containing the settings.

Refer to "Appendix 6.4.1 Using the detector as the child unit" and continue with the
settings.

Note
• To assign the X-ray interface unit settings you have registered with this setting procedure
to a detector, refer to "Appendix 10. Detectors.”

590
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

5. Channel settings

5.1. Available regions and restrictions

The CXDI-Wireless series detectors have wireless devices built in them that have been certified
under the radio law of the country concerned, and they need to comply with the radio signal-
related laws of the relevant country or region. Depending on the radio law of the country
concerned, the frequency bands (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) and channels (channels 1 to 13, 36 to 48,
and 149 to 165) that are set for indoor use may not be available outdoors. Before making the
settings, check the service manual of the hardware and the country code table contained in the
SMR to find out which channels are available in a specific country.

5.2. Channel settings

The channels supported by the access point and the frequencies corresponding to the channels
are included in the drop-down list for channel settings. The values included in the channel setting
drop-down list change according to the channel bonding setting.
The channels supported by the access point are as follows.
(1) 2.4 GHz band

Channel Bonding Channel Applicable standard

Above Channel1 - 2412 MHz

Above Channel2 - 2417 MHz

Above Channel3 - 2422 MHz

Above Channel4 - 2427 MHz

Above, Below Channel5 - 2432 MHz

Above, Below Channel6 - 2437 MHz

Above, Below Channel7 - 2442 MHz IEEE802.11n

Below Channel8 - 2447 MHz

Below Channel9 - 2452 MHz

Below Channel10 - 2457 MHz

Below Channel11 - 2462 MHz

- Channel12 - 2467 MHz

- Channel13 - 2472 MHz

Above, Below Auto (*1) IEEE802.11n

Above, Below Disable Communication disabled

*1 This is set so that the AP automatically selects a channel within the range of channels
specified in Channel range. Auto is displayed and can be set when two or more channels exist
within the specified channel range.

591
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(2) 5 GHz band (5.2 GHz and 5.8 GHz bands; 5.3 GHz and 5.6 GHz bands are available only
for Auto.)

Channel Range Channel Bonding Channel Applicable standard

W52 Above Channel36 - 4180 MHz

W52 Below Channel40 - 5200 MHz

IEEE802.11n
W52 Above Channel44 - 5220 MHz

W52 Below Channel48 - 5240 MHz

W58_a
Above Channel149 – 5745 MHz
W58_b

W58_a
Below Channel153 – 576.4 MHz
W58_b

W58_a IEEE802.11n
Above Channel157 – 5785 MHz
W58_b

W58_a
Below Channel161 – 5805 MHz
W58_b

W58_a Channel16.4 – 5825 MHz

W52
W58_a
W58_b
W53 Above, Below Auto (*1) IEEE802.11n
W56_a
W56_b
W56_c

Disable Communication disabled

*1 This is set so that the AP automatically selects a channel within the range of channels
specified in Channel range. When [Use W53/W56 band] is set to [ON], the AP is set to
automatically select a channel inside the 5.3 GHz or 5.6 GHz frequency band within the specified
channel range. Auto is displayed and can be set when two or more channels exist within the
specified channel range.

592
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• Frequency bands used for the individual channels and regulations of the individual countries
The channel settings are used to avoid interference between adjacent imaging rooms.
Note that, when channel bonding is used with the 2.4 GHz band, only two channels are
available as non-interference channels.
In the IEEE 802.11n standard, two frequency bands are available: 2.4 GHz band and 5 GHz
band. However, the available frequency bands and channels differ for each country and
region, due to their national and regional radio laws and regulations. Therefore, the AP/LNK
Configuration Tool enables the channel setting files to be updated, taking into consideration
the possibility of different laws, regulations, and specifications being applied.
If the channel bonding function is enabled when [Use W53/W56 band] is set to [ON], the
DFS function will detect twice as many interference waves. It is therefore recommended to
use 20 MHz.
The frequency bands used by the channels are shown below.
1) 2.4 GHz

• In the 2.4 GHz band, there are originally only three channels that can be used without
interference. When the band is expanded to 40 MHz by channel bonding in order to
increase the throughput, the number of channels that can be used without interference is
reduced to 2.
• In North America where there are 11 channels, the number of channels that can be used
without interference is 1. In some cases, therefore, the channels may be used with some
interference, with specific channels, such as channel 3 and channel 9, being in the center.
• Both in Japan and Europe, the specifications of the access point are such that it is not
possible to use more than 12 channels with channel bonding. This means that only one
channel can be used without interference, as in North America.
• When 40 MHz is used by channel bonding, the number of channels that can be used
without interference is practically only 1. When considering the effects on exposure and
image transfer, another method may be employed whereby 20 MHz is used with another
channel set as a non-interference channel. Since no radio interference is preferable,
it may be better in some cases to use 20 MHz only and allocate it to non-interference
channels.
• In cases where interference is unavoidable, the adverse effect on image transfer is
smaller when radio interferences completely match than when they are slightly displaced
from one another.

593
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
2) 5 GHz band

• The 5 GHz band breaks down into W52 (5.2 GHz band), W53 (5.3 GHz band), W56 (5.6
GHz band), and W58 (5.8 GHz band).
• In Japan, the 5.25 GHz to 5.35 GHz bands are used by weather radars. Therefore,
to prevent adverse effects on an access point using W53 or W56, DFS (Dynamic
Frequency Selection), which dynamically selects the frequency to be used for frequency
switching, and TPC (Transmitter Power Control), which reduces the radio output to avoid
interference, are required. Note that W52 and W53 are restricted to indoor use. Also, the
5.8 GHz band is used for ETC and other applications.
• Since communication is interrupted while the frequency is switched by DFS, there is
no guarantee of real-time performance for generator/detector synchronization, preview
display, etc. W52 is the only frequency band that can avoid this. The number of channels
that can be used without interference is 2 if channel bonding is used in this band.
• If channel bonding is set to 40 MHz when [Use W53/W56 band] is set to [ON], the
possibility of an interference wave being detected by the DFS function doubles. It is
therefore recommended to set channel bonding to 20 MHz.

6. Link controller (reference information)

The link controller (LNKController.exe) is software that performs detector link operations.
It starts when you set [Use Link Module] to [ON] in the AP/LNK Configuration Tool and click the
Finish button to save the settings. Also, at the startup of the OS, the link controller automatically
starts and resides in the taskbar.

Reference
• To display the link module screen, right-click the icon in the taskbar and select [Show].

594
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Appendix 8. Image Import Export Tool

The Image Import Export Tool features the function to export images captured with CCS-NE
and CCS-RF for the purpose of image collection in case of a problem, as well as the function to
import exported images to the same or another CCS.

1. Starting the Image Import Export Tool

To start the Image Import Export Tool, click [Image Import and Export] in [Utility Setting] in
the [Menu selection] screen of the CCS service tool.

You can also directly start the tool by using imexwiz.exe in the CCS folder.
In this case, when the login screen appears, log in with the service account.

595
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

After you successfully log in, the following screen appears.

596
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Operating procedure for the image export function

1. In the Select operation screen, select [Export] (default).

The export data selection screen appears.
If you conduct a search based on a patient ID, patient name, study date, image processing
data (anatomical part and direction), whether to include rejected images, whether to include
rejected studies, and/or whether to include protected images, the search results are listed in
the [Search result] field.

2. In the search results, click the row corresponding to the study whose data you want to export.
The image contained in the selected study appears below the list.

597
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. Check the image. To export the image contained in the study, click the Select button.
The check box is turned on.
To unselect the image, click the Unselect button. When the image is unselected, the check
box is turned off.

If the selected study contains any image that does not need to be exported, open the [Selected
data] tab. Select the unnecessary image, and click the Remove button to remove that image
from the data to be exported.

Reference
• The minimum unit that can be selected is a series. If multiple images are contained in a
series, it is not possible to select only one or some of those images.

4. After selecting a study and image, click the Next button.

598
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

5. In the resulting selected data confirmation screen, make the output-related settings.

Output folder: Set the folder to which to output the data (required).
Select the output folder.
You can create a new folder and set it as the output folder.
Label (optional): Set the label of the output data.
This label is used to indicate the output data when it is imported. Make sure that the label
has an appropriate name.
Comment (optional): Enter a comment about the output data.
Remove personal information: Specify whether to remove personal information.
If you turn on this check box, the personal information contained in the study data is
removed. When you take out any image from the hospital to deal with a problem or for
some other reason, be sure to turn on this check box to remove personal information.
In cases where you are using the data for internal use and need to leave patient
information, such as when backing up the data or transferring the data between CXDI
systems, output the data with this check box turned off.
6. Click the Export button.
The Progress log field displays the details of your operation.

599
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

When the export is complete, Export complete appears.

7. Click the Exit button.

In the confirmation dialog box, click the Yes button to exit the tool.

600
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.1. Export data structure

The files of the exported data are managed with the folder structure shown below.

The following data files are saved.

(1) Image files
These are files of the images collected from the detector.
They are saved in the [SOPInstanceUID].chi or [SOPInstanceUID].crw format.
(2) Thumbnail images
These are files of the thumbnail images to be displayed on the protocol list of CCS.
The files are generated immediately after the images are received from the detector.
They are saved in the [SOPInstanceUID].jpg format.
(3) Pixel correction data
Corrected pixel data of the detector.
There are three types: DefPix.dps, DefPix.dpsc, and DefPix.dpsc2.
(4) Database file
This file is used to store the examination information.
The file name is ExpExam.bak.

601
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. Operating procedure for the image import function

1. In the Select operation screen, select [Import].

The Import screen appears.

2. Specify the folder that contains the study data you want to import.
3. Check the displayed label, export date, and other data, and click the Import button.

Reference
• The Merge data into existing study list option lets you specify whether to add the imported
data to the existing CCS list (select the option) or to manage it in a separate list (unselect
the option).

The [Progress log] field displays the details of your operation.

602
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

When the import is complete, [Import complete] appears.

4. Click the Exit button.

In the confirmation dialog box, click the Yes button to exit the tool.

603
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.1. Import data structure

The imported data is saved in the imported folder created directly below the CCS installation
folder.

4. Viewing imported images

When you import images, a database is created for the imported images.
When you start up CCS, the past study list displays the options for selecting the database to be
loaded (Local or Import).

If you select [Import DB], the label button becomes available.

604
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

If you click the label button, you can switch to the imported image database.

5. Detailed specifications of the Image Import Export Tool

• When you export an image, a thumbnail of that image is created and the image file, pixel
correction data, and database file are output to the output folder.
• The export processing continues until there is no free space in the output destination HDD.
If the HDD runs out of free space while images are exported, an error generated by .NET
Framework appears.
• There is no limit to the number of times images can be imported. Each time a different
package is imported, it is added to the drop-down list. Similarly, there is no limit to the number
of labels to be displayed on the drop-down list on the main unit side.
• If any image having the same SOPInstanceUID already exists in the import destination, the
study information is overwritten by the information that is imported later (accession number,
study description, etc.). While the image processing data is also overwritten, the image file is
not copied.

Note
• Do not perform an operation like the one described below. Suppose that you capture
an image on a PC (let's call it study A) and export its data. Later that day, you uninstall
the system from that PC and reinstall it. If you capture another image (let's call it
study B) and import the data of study A, the images of both studies will have the same
SOPInstanceUID, resulting in the data of study B being handled as that of study A.

605
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• If different series of the same study are separately exported and then imported, the study that
is imported first will be allocated to the package imported later (refer to the figure below). The
same applies when the study information is overwritten.

• It is not allowed to import or export images between different products (CCS-NE and CCS-
RF).
• If the amount of memory set at the import destination is less than that set in the environment
of the export source when multi-frame images (digital cine) are to be imported, it may not
be possible to play back all the imported frames. In this case, only the frames that can be
handled with the memory size available at the import destination will be played back.
• To prevent the immediate automatic deletion of imported images, it is not allowed to import
an amount of images that exceeds the HDD automatic deletion start memory size. Images
cannot be imported, either, if the set database memory size minus 1 [GB] is reached.
• If only partial images collected by stitch imaging are imported, stitched images cannot be
generated at the import destination. This tool is simply designed to load created images for
checking purposes and does not import the stitch protocol required to generate stitched
images. Therefore, such an attempt results in an error message to the effect that stitched
images cannot be generated since the protocol does not exist.
• If the sum of the number of studies to be imported and the number of studies held in the
database exceeds 20,000, no study can be imported. In this case, an error message appears.

606
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Appendix 10. Detectors

This appendix describes the items that can be set for each individual detector in the [Detector]
screen of the service tool. The [Detector] screen opens if you click [Sensor] in the service tool
menu.
The [QC] tab in the lower part of the [Detector] screen is displayed only when the user account
is that of a service engineer (sales company).
• [CCS-NE]

607
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• [CCS-RF]

1. Static Detector / Ferry Static Detector

1.1. Items that can be set for each different detector

■
■Ethernet connection detector

Embedded Grid

CXDI-40EG / EC

CXDI-40G Compact ✔

CXDI-50G/C

CXDI-55G/C

CXDI-60G/C

608
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

■
■Ferry type wireless connection detector and Ferry type wired connection detector

Wireless Auto Fast Auto

QC Embedded X-ray Cycle
& Wired IP Sleep Preview Rotation
Grid Grid IF Type
Address Enable Enable Enable

CXDI-
✔
401G/C

CXDI-
401G/C ✔ ✔
Compact

CXDI-
✔ ✔
501G/C

CXDI-
70G/C ✔ ✔
Wireless

CXDI-
80C ✔ ✔ ✔
Wireless

CXDI-
401G/C ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Wireless

CXDI-
701G/C ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Wireless

CXDI-
801G/C ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Wireless

CXDI-
410C ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Wireless

CXDI-
710C ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Wireless

CXDI-
810C ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Wireless

609
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2. Receive IP Address (Static Detector)

The [Static Detector] > [Receive IP Address] tab is used to set an IP address assigned to a
detector.
[Static Detector/Receive IP Address setting screen]

If you click the ADD button, the [Add receive IP address] dialog box appears that lets you add
IP addresses. You can add up to four IP addresses. An IP address that is already in the list
cannot be added.
[Add receive IP address dialog box]

No.:
The position of the detector in the registration order is displayed here.
IP Address:
Set the IP address that is assigned to the detector. By default, this field contains the IP
address 192.168.100.11. When you register a second or subsequent detector, you need to
change its IP address.

610
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.3. IP address settings (Ferry Static Detector)

To set the detector-related IP addresses to be registered in Ferry Static Detector, switch to the [IP]
tab in the lower part of the Registered Detectors screen.
[Ferry Static Detector/IP address setting screen (example for CXDI-710C Wireless at the left and
example for CXDI-401G at the right)]

In the [IP] tab in Ferry Static Detector, you can set the items mentioned below.
For a wireless detector
• Wireless: Set the IP addresses for a wireless connection.
Local IP Address: IP address of the PC
Target IP Address: Wireless LAN IP address of the wireless detector
• Wired: Set whether to use the wired option and the IP addresses to be used for the wired
connection.
Used wired option: Select ON when using the wired option or OFF when not using this
option.
Local IP Address: IP address of the PC
Target IP Address: Wired LAN IP address of the wireless detector
For a wired detector
Local IP Address: IP address of the PC
Target IP Address: IP address of the detector
When X-ray IF Type is set to Multi mode
X-ray IF: X-ray interface setting of the device to which the detector is connected

Note
• X-ray IF is available only when [X-ray IF Type] is set to [Multi mode] in the AP/LNK
Configuration Tool. For details, refer to "Appendix 6. AP/LNK Configuration Tool."

611
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.4. QC grid and embedded grid settings

[QC grid and embedded grid setting screen (left: CXDI-70C; right: CXDI-401G Compact)]

QC grid tab
When a performance test is performed with the grid placed on the detector, the grid lines
are removed from the image by using the values entered in this tab. However, since a
performance test is performed without using the grid, these parameters will never be used.
The default values are those taken from the detector catalog.
Embedded grid tab
• Frequency: Set the grid frequency (cyc/mm).
For CXDI-40G Compact, the default value is 4. Normally, do not change this value.
For CXDI-401G/C Compact, the default value is 5.2. Set the grid frequency as appropriate
for the number of lines of the grid used. For example, when you use a grid with 52 lines/
cm, set the grid frequency to 5.2 lines/mm in line with the actual number of lines of the
grid used. If you set an invalid value, you may be unable to output normal images to
PACS.
• Quality: Set the grid quality.
The default value is 3. Normally, do not change this value.

Reference
• The CXDI-501G/C detectors, wireless detectors, and Compact detectors do not
have a hardware-based grid detection function and cannot identify the grid type.

612
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.5. Auto Sleep setting

[Auto Sleep setting (left: CXDI-401G; right: CXDI-80C)]

Cycle Type:
• Standard Cycle (short cycle mode)
In this mode, the cycle time is reduced by reducing the standby time of the detector after
imaging.
(The default is Standard Cycle.)
• Conventional Cycle (long cycle mode)
In this mode, priority is given to image quality by having the detector stand by for a longer
time after imaging.

Reference
• The default mode is Standard Cycle (short cycle mode). However, if this mode is selected
and the X-ray storage time (approx. 1 second) is long for imaging (these conditions are likely
to be met in stitch imaging), an afterimage may result.
Consult with the user and change to Conventional Cycle (long cycle mode) if necessary.

Auto Sleep Enable:

If ON is selected, the detector automatically switches to the sleep mode after each imaging
session.
(The default is ON.)

Reference
• When both [Cycle Type] and [Auto Sleep Enable] can be set for a detector, the setting of
[Cycle Type] is valid only if [Auto Sleep Enable] is set to ON.
If [Non Generator Connection Mode] is set to ON in the [X-Ray generator setting] screen
of the service tool, the [Auto Sleep] tab is not displayed.
➡➡Refer to "CXDI-501 series of detectors supported" in V1.40 New Function Descriptions.
➡➡Refer to "Improvement in cycle time of CXDI-401 series of detectors" in V1.40 New
Function Descriptions.
➡➡Refer to "Improvements in imaging cycle time" in V2.10 New Function Descriptions.

613
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.6. Image Preview settings

[Image Preview settings (CXDI-701G)]

• Fast Preview Enable: (The default is ON.)

When this item is set to [ON], simplified processing is performed to provide a preview faster
(within 1 second or so) than in the normal mode (approx. 3 seconds) so that the preview can
be displayed immediately after X-ray exposure is complete.

Note
• In fast preview mode, part of the image processing is omitted, giving priority to reducing
the time from the completion of exposure to the display of the preview. Therefore, in an
image in which a small object is captured or no object is present, there may be cases
when artifacts stand out.
• When an image is captured with a grid installed, interference fringes caused by the grid
may appear in the fast preview, depending on imaging conditions.

If the fast preview quality is unacceptable, set Fast Preview Enable to [OFF].
• Auto Rotation Enable: (The default is OFF.)
When this item is set to [ON], the image display is automatically rotated using the rotation
information provided from the detector (0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees is detected when
the detector is positioned upright; 0 degrees is reported when the detector is positioned
horizontally). This is ignored if the detector rotation information is included in the imaging
conditions that are received with the communication command from the X-ray generator.

Reference
➡➡Refer to "Fast preview" in V2.10 New Function Descriptions.
➡➡Refer to "Auto rotation and impact detection" in V2.10 New Function Descriptions.

614
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Dynamic Detector (for CCS-RF only)

2.1. Sensor Mode setting

[Sensor Mode setting (CXDI-50RF)]

• Static Drive Mode Selectable: (The default is OFF.)

When this item is set to ON, you can select the Fast mode (conventional 400-ms storage
time) or Ultrafast mode (200-ms storage time) on a protocol-by-protocol basis for static image
capturing while taking dynamic images using a protocol whose exposure type is Stitch,
Positioning Fluoro, or RF. (The default is the Fast mode.)

615
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2. Power Box

[Dynamic Detector/Power Box screen]

This screen is used to set power boxes for the 50RF detector. A list of the power boxes for the
50RF detector used is displayed.
Clicking the ADD button displays the [PowerBox Add] dialog box, which lets you add 50RF
detector power box settings.
Clicking the DEL button deletes the selected 50RF detector power box setting.
You can add up to four power box settings. An IP address that is already in the list cannot be
added.
[PowerBox Add dialog box]

Power Box Name:

Set the name to be displayed in CCS and the service tool.
Target IP Address:
Set the IP address to be assigned to the power box.
Initially, this field contains the default IP address 192.168.104.130.

616
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Local IP Address:
Set the IP address to be assigned to the PC. Normally, set 192.168.104.129.
Image Receive IP Address:
Set the IP address for receiving images. Normally, this address is the same as the local IP
address.

Reference
• IP address settings when multiple 50RF detector power boxes are connected to a single PC

Item Value

Local IP address of the PC 192.168.104.129

Target IP address 192.168.104.130

of the first 50RF detector power box

Local IP address of the PC 192.168.105.129

(LAN card addition) Change the number shown in red.

Target IP address 192.168.105.130

of the second 50RF detector power box Change the number shown in red.

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0

When multiple power boxes are connected, change the third columns of the local IP address
and target IP address.
For information about how to change the IP addresses of power boxes, refer to "2.5. Setting
the IP addresses of detectors and power boxes" in Part 5.

617
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Appendix 11. Password Policy Enhancement

1. Overview of the password policy enhancement function

The password policy enhancement function is used to set the password policy concerning the
password complexity, password time-out period, minimum password length, and number of
previous passwords to check against the current password for duplication.

Note
• This function is not applicable to accounts that are originally included in the CCS software
(CxdiAdmin, CxdiService, and Cxdiuser).

2. Starting the password policy setting tool

To change the password policy, start the password policy setting tool (spcnfg.exe) located in the
CCS installation folder (CCS-S or CCS-D).
Note that you can start this program only when the same folder contains SecurityPolicy.dll (located
in the Extension folder in the installation media).
Using spcnfg.exe requires login authorization. Only a user with the service account (CxdiAdmin
or CxdiService) can log in.
The procedure for starting the password policy setting tool (spcnfg.exe) is described below.
1. Copy SecurityPolicy.dll from the Extension folder in the installation media to the CCS
installation folder (CCS-S or CCS-D).
Enable the password policy enhancement function.

2. Start the password policy setting tool (spcnfg.exe) located in the CCS installation folder
(CCS-S or CCS-D).

618
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. When the login screen appears, log in with the service account.
[Fig.A11.2-1. Login screen for the password policy setting tool]

3. Changing the password policy

If you start the password policy setting tool (spcnfg.exe), the Password policy editor screen
appears. Use this screen to edit the password policy.
[Fig.A11.3-1. Password policy editor screen]

■
■Definitions of the controls

ID Description Validation

Enable password complexity requirements

Turning on this check box enables the
Chb password complexity check. Default: Off
For the complexity requirements that may
apply, refer to "Password complexity" below.

Lbl Password Time-out(days):

Default: 0
Set the period during which the password Range: 0 to 200
Nud
remains valid. The unit is in days.
If 0 is set, the password will
remain valid infinitely.

Lbl Minimum password length:

Set the minimum required length of the Default: 4

Nud
password. The unit is in characters. Range: 4 to 20

Lbl Track previous passwords:

619
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

ID Description Validation

Default: 0
Specify whether to check the previous
Range: 0 to 10
Nud passwords for duplication and how many
previous passwords to be checked. If 0 is set, the duplication check
will not be performed.

OK
Click this button to save the current settings
and exit the program.
Before the settings are saved, a confirmation
Btn message appears that lets you make final
confirmation about your intention to save those
settings.
When none of the values has been changed,
this button is disabled.

Cancel
Click this button to exit the program without
saving the changes.
Btn A confirmation message appears before you
exit the program.
When none of the values has been changed,
the program ends without displaying the
message.

The ID column in the table above contains one of the following identifiers depending on the
type of control.
Btn: Button
Chb: CheckBox
Lbl: Label
Nud: NumericUpdown
■
■Password complexity

No. Requirement

1 The password must include at least two uppercase characters.

2 The password must include at least two lowercase characters.

3 The password must include at least two numbers.

The password must include at least two special symbols (!, @, #, $, %, ^, &, *, _, -, +,
4
=, ‘, :, ;, ., and ,).

5 The password must not start with the dollar sign $.

6 The password must not include two consecutive identical characters.

The new password must have at least two characters different from the previous
7
password.

620
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. What happens when this function is enabled

4.1. Checks performed at the start of CCS

When the password policy enhancement function is enabled, one of the checks described below
is performed at the start of CCS.

Conditions What happens when the conditions are met

After the login, an alert is displayed to notify you how

The password policy enhancement
many days you have before the password expires. A
function is enabled, and the password
message also appears that prompts you to change
will expire in less than 10 days.
the password.

An alert is displayed.
The password policy enhancement
function is enabled, and the password This alert dialog box has text boxes for entering a
has already expired. new password and confirming that new password so
as to change the current password.

If you log in again after logging out by clicking the Logout button or using the auto logout
function, the password time-out period is checked as when you initially log in.

4.2. Image processing privilege authentication

If the login account used when you click the Level 2 button in the Image Processing panel does
not have the image processing privilege, user authentication is performed using a user account
with that privilege.
When the password policy enhancement function is enabled, if the password for the login
account used when you click the Level 2 button has expired, an alert dialog box appears, as in
the case of user authentication failure, and you cannot change to level 2.

4.3. Property screen for a user account

In the [User Administration] tab of the system screen, you can edit an existing user account or
add a new one.
When the password policy enhancement function is enabled, if the password entered after
clicking the Apply or OK button does not meet the requirements, an alert is displayed and you
cannot complete the processing.

621
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

[Fig.A11.4.3-1. Alert message displayed when the complexity check is enabled]

622
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Appendix 12. Original Data Acquisition Function

This appendix describes the original data acquisition function of the QC tool.
The original data acquisition function has been added to V2.11 and later versions (refer to V2.11
new functions s12050). It enables the output of data that can be used to conduct inspections
based on the laws and regulations of the country concerned (e.g., when carrying out constancy
tests).
The acquisition of original data can be executed only by a user with the calibration privilege.
Original data can be acquired after calibration. Only radiographic images in the same exposure
mode as that for calibration can be acquired. (In the case of the CXDI-50RF, only radiographic
images in radiography mode can be acquired and, when Non Generator Connection Mode is set,
only radiographic images in manual synchronization mode can be acquired.)
The output original data can be displayed with generally available image display software (such
as ImageJ).

Additional information
• In the case of a detector capable of Non Generator Connection, when [Non Generator
Connection Mode] is set to ON in the [X-Ray generator setting] screen of the service
tool, calibration is set to manual synchronization mode. The same applies to a performance
test conducted when Non Generator Connection Mode is set to ON. (For information about
calibration when Non Generator Connection Mode is enabled, refer to "Appendix N3. Using
Non Generator Connection.") Also, in this case, it is recommended that calibration be
executed by a service engineer. Likewise, when Non Generator Connection Mode is enabled,
it is recommended that original data be acquired by a service engineer.

1. Overview of the QC tool

1.1. Overview
The QC tool enables quality control for an X-ray imaging system manufactured by Canon.
In addition to the following three types of tool, original data acquisition can be executed in V2.11
or later.
• Calibration
• Performance test
• Self-diagnosis
• Original data acquisition (supported in V2.11 or later)
The QC tool is intended for routine control and can be executed by a general operator from the
GUI screen. However, since calibration affects the image quality, it can be executed only by an
operator who logs in as a user with the privilege to execute calibration. Similarly, original data
acquisition can be executed only by a user with the privilege to execute calibration.

623
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2. Terms and definitions

The terms used in this manual are defined below.

Term Definition

Detector characteristics Image processing for correcting the characteristics of a detector

correction processing (gain, offset, etc.).

70C, 70G, 80C, 401C, 401G, 401C Compact, 401G Compact,

Static detector compatible
501C, 501G, 701C, 701G, 801C, 801G, 401C Wireless, 401G
with Ferry
Wireless, 710C, 810C, 410C

Static detector
40EC, 40EG, 40G Compact, 50C, 50G, 55C, 55G, 60C, 60G
incompatible with Ferry

Dynamic detector 50RF

Detectors capable of Non 701C, 701G, 801C, 801G, 401C Wireless, 401G Wireless, 710C,
Generator Connection 810C, 410C

An image obtained by performing the detector characteristics

correction processing on a raw image received from a detector.
Original data Original data is output as linear images in which the detector
characteristics have been corrected. The pixel values are in
proportion to the X-ray doses.

The terms are defined below.

Raw data = raw image
Raw images are those obtained by LANMIT and not relevant to the end user at all.
Original data = original image (pre-processed image)

Reference
• The figure below shows the flow of image processing by CXDI. In the CXDI image
processing, pre-processing is performed first to equalize the characteristics of the individual
pixels of the FPD, using the images obtained by performing A/D conversion on the output
of the FPD as the input (here, these images are referred to as raw images). Next, image
processing for diagnostic purposes is performed to convert the pre-processed images
(here, these images are referred to as original images) into images suitable for diagnostic
purposes.

624
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Original data acquisition

2.1. Overview of original data acquisition

Original data acquisition refers to the function that outputs original data to check the constancy
of a detector.
It mainly involves the following two functions.
1. To receive raw images from a detector and create original data
2. To save the created original data in the folder path mentioned in "Appendix 12.2.4. Folder
structure"

2.2. Operating procedure and considerations

For the operating procedure and other relevant information, refer to the section about the QC tool
of the User Operation Manual.
The operating procedure is outlined below.
1. Preparations
• By default, the original data is saved in the default path "C:¥[OriginalData]¥[detector serial
number]." In order to change the save destination, a service engineer needs to specify
a new output folder (external media or network drive) by using the service tool. (Refer to
"Appendix 12.2.5. Service tool settings.")
• The detector from which to acquire original data needs to be calibrated in advance.
• The detector needs to be connected in advance.
2. Click the Original Data Acquisition button of the QC tool, and select a detector.
• The Original Data Acquisition button is displayed when the login user has the calibration
privilege.
3. Click the Start button.
4. Start image capturing.
5. Click the End button.
• The Results field shows the path to which the acquired original data has been saved.
When using this function, note the following:
• Do not capture images of a patient's body using the original data acquisition function. Since
image processing for diagnostic purposes cannot be performed on the images of the original
data obtained this way, those images cannot be used for diagnostic purposes.
• Since the imaging conditions used for original data acquisition are not recorded, you need to
make notes of the conditions if necessary.
• Original data is output as linear images. The pixel values are in proportion to the X-ray doses.

625
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3. Operation flow of original data acquisition

For the operating procedure and other relevant information, refer to the section about the QC tool
of the User Operation Manual.
The operation flow of original data acquisition is outlined below.
• If you click the Start button, the original data acquisition preparation window appears.
• If the detector becomes ready for imaging while the original data acquisition preparation
window is displayed, the original data acquisition ready window appears.
• While the original data acquisition ready window is displayed, images captured by X-ray
exposure are obtained.
• The images captured by X-ray exposure while the original data acquisition ready window
is displayed undergo the image processing described in "Appendix 12.2.1. Overview of
original data acquisition" and output to the folder path mentioned in "Appendix 12.2.4. Folder
structure."
• The images captured by X-ray exposure while the original data acquisition ready window is
displayed undergo the image processing described in "Appendix 12.2.1. Overview of original
data acquisition," and the results are displayed in the original data acquisition results window.
• If you click the End button while the original data acquisition results window is displayed, the
window is closed and the operation flow of original data acquisition ends.
• The history of original data acquisition is not managed.
The figure below outlines the operation flow of original data acquisition.

626
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.1. Setting and execution (Mode to be executed)

• If you click the Start button, the original data acquisition preparation window appears.
• If you click the Start button in one of the conditions described below, an error dialog box
appears.
• The selected detector is not connected.
• The cooling unit of the selected dynamic detector is not attached.
• The selected wireless detector is connected wirelessly and the remaining battery power is
insufficient.
• The selected wireless detector does not have a battery installed.
• The selected detector has not been calibrated yet.
• The selected wireless detector does not have a docking station installed.
• If you click the Start button, a folder is created to store original data. For the folder name and
structure, refer to "Appendix 12.2.4. Folder structure."
• If original data cannot be output to the folder path set with the service tool when you click
the Start button, an error dialog box appears and the original data acquisition preparation
window is not displayed. The following items are checked:
• When the drive letter of the folder path does not exist
• When the free space of the drive to which to output original data is below 50 MB

627
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.2. Original data acquisition preparation window

This window lets the user know that the detector is preparing for imaging.

• Although the window has the Cancel button, it cannot be clicked (it is disabled).
• When Non Generator Connection Mode is set to ON, the behavior of the original data
acquisition preparation window is the same as for calibration when Non Generator
Connection Mode is enabled. Refer to "Appendix N3. Using Non Generator Connection."
• When "Use Overwrap” is set to ON in the service tool, the overwrap software of the generator
manufacturer is displayed in the upper right. When "Use Overwrap” is set to OFF, the detector
status bar is right-justified.
• When the detector becomes ready for imaging, the original data acquisition ready window
appears.
• If a docking station being charged is installed when the detector status bar indicates that the
detector is preparing for imaging, an error message appears indicating that the preparation
for imaging has failed and the screen displayed before the start of original data acquisition
appears again.

628
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.3. Original data acquisition ready window

This window lets the user know that the detector is ready for imaging.

• The window has the Cancel button.

• Clicking the Cancel button displays a confirmation dialog box, and the acquisition of original
data is stopped according to the response to that dialog box.
• When Non Generator Connection Mode is set to ON, the behavior of the original data
acquisition ready window is the same as for calibration when Non Generator Connection
Mode is enabled. Refer to "Appendix N3. Using Non Generator Connection."
• When "Use Overwrap” is set to ON in the service tool, the overwrap software of the generator
manufacturer is displayed in the upper right. When "Use Overwrap” is set to OFF, the detector
status bar is right-justified.
• When the imaging ends and the output of original data is complete, the original data
acquisition results window appears.
• If a docking station being charged is installed for a detector when the detector status bar
shows the ready status, a dialog box appears indicating that a docking station has been
installed. The detector status bar indicates that the detector is not ready, and the Cancel
button in the QC tool screen is enabled.
• If the detector is removed from the docking station in the condition mentioned above, the
detector status bar shows Ready again indicating that the detector is preparing for imaging.

629
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.4. Original data acquisition results window

This window displays the results of acquiring original data.

• Although the window has the Cancel button, it cannot be clicked (it is disabled).
• When "Use Overwrap” is set to ON in the service tool, the overwrap software of the generator
manufacturer is displayed in the upper right. When "Use Overwrap” is set to OFF, the detector
status bar is right-justified.
• The images captured by X-ray exposure undergo the image processing described in
"Appendix 12.2.1. Overview of original data acquisition" and are output as original data.
• For the folder path to which to save the original data and the file name, refer to "Appendix
12.2.4. Folder structure."
• The original data acquisition results window displays original data.
• The Results field displays the following information:
• A message indicating that the output of the original data is complete
• The path to which the original data has been saved
• If the original data fails to be saved, a dialog box appears that lets you know that the attempt
to save the original data has failed.
• If the original data fails to be saved, the Results field displays the following information:
• A message indicating that the output of the original data has failed
• If the original data fails to be saved, the original data acquisition results window displays
nothing.
• If you click the End button, the original data acquisition results window is closed.
• If the following event occurs, the detector status bar indicates that the detector is not ready
and the Cancel button in the QC tool screen is enabled.
• Disconnection of the communication with the detector (including switching between wired
and wireless connections)

630
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.4. Folder structure

• When original data is acquired, a folder named "[folder path specified as the original data
output destination with the service tool]¥[detector serial number]" is created and the output
files are saved in it. The default path is "C:¥[OriginalData]¥[detector serial number]."
(Example of the CXDI-70C series: C:¥OriginalData¥1800FF01)
• If the output files fail to be saved in the folder mentioned above when original data is
acquired, a backup folder named "detector serial number" is created in "[Installfolder]¥[QCOu
tputdata]¥[OriginalData]" and the files are saved in it.
• The files that are output when original data is acquired are saved with the name
"[HHHHMMDDMMSSS]_[detector serial number]_[image width pixel count]x[image height
pixel count].raw."
(Example of the CXDI-70C series: 20130819101010_1800FF01_2800x3408.raw)

2.5. Service tool settings

By default, the original data is saved in the default path "C:¥[OriginalData]¥[detector serial
number]." In order to change the save destination, a service engineer needs to specify a new
output folder (external media or network drive) by using the service tool. This change can be
made only through the use of the service tool.
Start the service tool (ServiceTool.exe), and specify the path to save original data by selecting
[System Setting] > [Application Setting] > [Operation] > [Save path setting] in the service
tool.
[Fig.A12.2.5 Operation setting screen]
• CCS-NE

631
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• CCS-RF

632
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Appendix 13. WS Succession, Protocol Replacement, and

Automatic Circular Mask Adjustment

1. Overview

The following functions have been added to V2.12 and later versions of CCS-NE and CCS-RF.
S21322: WS succession
When replacing the protocol and changing the WS, you can also change the other protocol
information collectively, thus reducing the time and effort needed to replace the protocol and
change the WS.
S21327: Candidate replacement protocols
When the protocol is replaced, the candidate replacement protocols registered in advance
are displayed, making it easy to change the protocol.
s22083-related function: Automatic circular mask adjustment based on the recognized
circular exposure field
The position and size of a circular mask can be automatically adjusted based on the result of
circular exposure field recognition.

Note
• To enable WS succession and automatic circular mask adjustment based on the recognized
circular exposure field, the files mentioned below need to be placed directly below the CCS
installation folder. These files may be empty. If you place the files during the startup, they
will become valid the next time you start CCS.

S21322: How to enable the WS succession function

1. Workspace succession function

For CCS-NE

C:¥CCS-S¥UseCollectiveWSChange.xml

For CCS-RF

C:¥CCS-D¥UseCollectiveWSChange.xml

2. Function to sort code values for a new study

For CCS-NE

C:¥CCS-S¥UseCodeValueSort.xml

For CCS-RF

C:¥CCS-D¥UseCodeValueSort.xml

S21327: Candidate replacement protocols

In V2.16 or later, this function is always enabled. It is therefore unnecessary to place the file.

633
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

s22083-related function: How to enable the automatic circular mask adjustment function
based on the recognized circular exposure field

For CCS-NE

C:¥CCS-S¥AutoCircleMask.xml

For CCS-RF

C:¥CCS-D¥AutoCircleMask.xml

For details, refer to SMR Report No.14-017, "CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF
Ver.2.12 Guidance of a release of new functions."

634
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Appendix N2. Using Second Monitor

1. Overview of the second monitor

CCS-NE supports a single monitor configuration (in which one monitor is provided for one control
PC) and a dual monitor configuration (in which two monitors are provided for one control PC).
Configurations where three or more monitors are connected are not supported. It is, however,
possible to expand the monitor configuration using a display distributor.
Use the primary monitor as the main monitor for displaying the CCS-NE screen, including the
user operation window, and the secondary monitor as the second monitor for displaying high-
resolution images. The second monitor is supported only in an environment with a GPU capable
of executing radiographic image processing.
For the operating procedures for the dual monitor configuration, refer to the User Operation
Manual. This appendix describes how to set the second monitor to operate with CCS-NE.

2. Hardware environment

2.1. Setting the monitor

When using the monitor in the dual monitor configuration, set it so that the following requirements
are met.
• As the second monitor, both a DICOM-compliant monitor and a consumer monitor are
supported.
• When using a consumer monitor, click System Settings and perform gamma adjustment for
the main monitor and second monitor. To start Gamma Adjustment Tool, go to the service
tool > [Application setting] > [Display], and click the Adjust monitor gamma button.
For information about gamma adjustment, refer to "Appendix 5. Gamma Adjustment Tool."
• Use in span mode (function that treats two screens as a single one) is not supported.

635
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2. Video board

When using the dual monitor configuration, make sure that the video board meets the following
requirement.
• The video board must have two DVI output terminals, one for the main monitor and the other
for the second monitor.

Note
• Configurations with two or more video boards installed are not supported.
• NVIDIA Quadro 600, Quadro K600, and Quadro K620 each have only one DVI output
terminal. In the dual monitor configuration, two DVI output terminals must be provided by
converting the Display Port to DVI.

3. Second monitor setting method

3.1. Establishing the dual monitor configuration

1. Connect the second monitor to the DVI output terminal for the second monitor that is located
on the video board of the control PC.
2. Select [Control Panel] > [Appearance and Personalization] > [Screen Resolution].
3. In [Multiple displays], select [Extend these displays].
4. Make sure that the monitor to be used as the main monitor is set as the primary monitor and
that the monitor to be used as the second monitor is set as the secondary monitor.
The screens shown below are example screens displayed in the case of a portrait second monitor.
[Fig.AN2.3.1-1. Secondary monitor settings]

636
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

[Fig.AN2.3.1-2. Primary monitor settings]

3.2. Setting the second monitor

1. Start up the service tool, and log in using the service account.
2. From [System Setting] > [Application Setting], open the [Static image] setting screen.
For [Image processing algorithm for main monitor] in Image processing, turn on [GPU -
higher speed] or [GPU - higher quality] to enable the GPU processing setting.
If you enable this setting, the [Display] setting screen displays the items to be set under
Second monitor.
3. From [System Setting] > [Application Setting], open the [Display] setting screen. In
[Second monitor], turn on [Use second monitor].
4. Click the Set connected second monitor size button. Then, click the OK or Apply button to
save the settings.
The second monitor can be used when CCS.exe is run.

637
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Note
• When installing the second monitor, be sure to register the resolution of the second monitor
in the CCS database, by clicking the Set connected second monitor size button and then
the OK or Apply button.
• If you change [Orientation] from [Portrait] to [Landscape] in [Fig.AN2.3.1-1. Secondary
monitor settings], [Resolution] is set to [1920 x 1080], instead of [1080 x 1920]. It is therefore
necessary to register the resolution of the second monitor again using the service tool.
• Set Preview annotation, Do not display, Grid suppression algorithm, and other items as
necessary for the second monitor.
• The second monitor is a function intended to display high-resolution images. The use of a
larger DPI value is not assumed. Therefore, if the DPI value is changed, the image may not fit
into the second monitor, resulting in parts of it being off the screen.

Reference
• The figure below shows the screen that appears when you register the second monitor
resolution by clicking the Set connected second monitor size button and then the Apply
button in the service tool, with [Orientation] set to [Portrait] and [Resolution] set to [1080 x
1920].

[Fig.AN2.3.2-1. Service tool setting screen (CCS-NE only)]

(1) Second monitor

This is not displayed when the image processing is performed with the CPU.
(2) Use second monitor
If you turn on this check box, you can use the second monitor.
Also, you can set items (3) to (8).
These items cannot be set when [CPU] is selected for [Image processing algorithm for
main monitor] in [Static image].

638
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(3) Second monitor size

Set the width and height of the second monitor.
After setting the monitor size, be sure to click the Set connected second monitor size
button and, in the resulting screen, click the OK or Apply button.

Note
• To use the second monitor, you need to register its resolution in the CCS
database.

(4) Display annotations

Select the annotations to be displayed on the second monitor.
(5) Grid suppression algorithm
[Higher speed]:
The simplified version is used for the grid line suppression of the second monitor.
[Higher quality]:
The full version is used for the grid line suppression of the second monitor.
(6) Show laterality marker
If you turn on this check box, the laterality marker is displayed on the second monitor.
(7) Show peripheral mask
If you turn on this check box, the peripheral mask is displayed on the second monitor.
(8) Show measurement object
If you turn on this check box, the measurement object is displayed on the second monitor.

4. Description of operations when the second monitor is used

4.1. Checks performed at the start of CCS

If [Use second monitor] is on in the service tool, a check is made at the start of CCS to see
whether two or more monitors are connected.
If this condition is not met, the alert "No second monitor is connected. Check the display
settings." is displayed after the login.

4.2. Starting the screen saver

When the second monitor is used for CCS-NE, the screen saver is started and closed at the
same time on both the main monitor and second monitor.

4.3. Operating specifications of the second monitor screen

The area where an image is displayed on the main monitor is called the Image View, and the
area where an image is displayed on the second monitor is called the Second Image View.
It takes about four seconds for an image to be displayed on the second monitor after the Image
View preview operation.

639
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

[Fig.AN2.4.3-1. Second monitor screen]

[Fig.AN2.4.3-2. Main monitor screen]

• The Second Image View consists of the image display area and preview annotation display
area.
• When one of the images mentioned below is displayed in the image display area of the main
monitor, the high-resolution radiographic image of its preview image is displayed in the image
display area of the Second Image View.
• Preview image after imaging in the examination stage (including when an examination is
restarted)
• Preview image after preview switching in the examination stage (including when an
examination is restarted)
• Preview image when past images are played
• Reference image on the Image Processing screen
• When images on a disk are displayed, those images are not displayed in the Second Image
View.
• The magnification percentage of the image displayed in the image display area is that applied
when the whole cropping area is displayed in the image display area. When the fit function is
enabled, the magnification percentage is that applied when the cropping area fits the Second
Image View. In both cases, the magnification percentage is limited to the actual pixel size and
digital zoom is disabled.
• The three-step fixed rate zoom function is used to control the magnification percentage of
an image displayed on the second monitor. However, the fit function is also available that
displays the cropping area with an appropriate magnification percentage so that it fits the
screen, instead of using the three-step fixed rate zoom function. To enable the fit function, start
IPSettingTool.exe in the CCS installation folder (CCS-S) and log in with administrator privileges.

640
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

[Fig.AN2.4.3-3. IPSettingTool login screen]

After logging in, remove the check mark next to [Use three step zoom] in the [Three step
zoom] tab. Clicking the Save button enables the fit function.
[Fig.AN2.4.3-4. IPSetting tool screen]

• You can disable the three-step fixed rate zoom function and enable the fit function, by
using a setting file. To enable the fit function, edit "SecondMonitorSettings.xml" stored in
the SecondMonitor folder in the CCS installation folder (CCS-S) and restart CCS with the
<IsEnableFitZoom> tag set to True. While "SecondMonitorSettings.xml" is not automatically
generated at the time of installation, it is automatically generated when you start CCS with
the Use second monitor option selected.

641
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• The magnification is displayed as an annotation at the bottom center of the screen. The font
and font size are fixed to "Segoe UI" and "20," respectively, and the value is an integer in %.
Whether the magnification is displayed or not is linked with whether Preview annotation is
turned on or off for [Second monitor] in System Setting.

• When image processing is performed on the image displayed on the main monitor, the
image displayed in the image display area of the Second Image View is updated accordingly.
However, if the performed image processing is enlargement, reduction, panning, fitting, HQ,
or pixel-to-pixel display, the change is not reflected in the Second Image View.
• If [Preview annotation] or [Storage annotation] is selected for Display annotations of
Second monitor in System Setting, the selected annotation is displayed in the annotation
display area. The items to be displayed depend on the system settings, and the same items
as on the main monitor are displayed. The same settings as those for the main monitor are
also used for the character color, character font, and character size. The items are displayed
at the left and right ends of the top and bottom parts of the screen area, respectively.
• If Show laterality marker (L and R marks) is turned on for Second monitor in System Setting,
the laterality and free annotations are displayed in the same positions in the image display
area as on the main monitor.
• If Show peripheral mask is turned on for Second monitor in System Setting, the peripheral
mask is displayed in the same position in the image display area as on the main monitor.
• If Show measurement object is turned on for Second monitor in System Setting, the
measurement object is displayed in the same position in the image display area as on the
main monitor.
• The displayed image and annotations are cleared when:
• The End Exam or Suspend Exam button is clicked in the examination screen;
• The examination screen is switched to the PAST tab;
• Past View is switched to Past List;
• Past View is switched to the [EXAM] tab;
• OK, Cancel, or Back button is clicked in the parameter adjustment screen for Image
Processing;
• The system setup button is clicked; or
• Auto-logout is initiated.
• If the ROI is set or modified in ROI edit mode on the main screen, the image processing
result due to the ROI modification is immediately reflected in the second monitor.
• If the cropping area is modified in cropping mode on the main screen, the modification is
reflected immediately in the cropping area displayed on the second monitor.
• If the mask area is modified in mask edit mode on the main screen, the modification is not
reflected in the mask area displayed on the second monitor. It is reflected when the mask edit
mode is finished.
• If the cropping area is modified in mask edit mode on the main screen, the modification is
reflected immediately in the cropping area displayed on the second monitor.

642
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• If the patient information, study information, or series/image information is updated when the
same image as the one displayed on the second monitor is selected in Multi View mode, the
annotations currently displayed on the second monitor are updated as well.
• If the patient information, study information, or series/image information is updated when a
different image is selected, the annotations currently displayed on the second monitor are not
updated. (They are updated after the mode is changed to Single View.)
• If "Storage annotation" is selected for Display annotations of Second monitor in System
Setting, storage annotations are shown on the displayed image.
• Storage annotations are not shown when no image is displayed.
• The items to be displayed depend on the system settings.
• The same items as on the main monitor are displayed, and the same settings as those for the
main monitor are also used for the character color and character font.
• The items are displayed at six places in the cropped image: the left and right ends and the
center of the top and bottom parts.
• The part of a character string that extends off the cropping area is cut off at the boundary.
• If the cropping area on the main screen is edited and the image is displayed again on the
second monitor, the storage annotations are placed again.
• The character size of storage annotations depends on the system settings. Since the font
size is specified on a full screen basis, it is reduced in accordance with the magnification
percentage of the image.
• If Show measurement object is turned on for Second monitor in System Setting and the
measurement object is displayed on the main monitor, the measurement object is displayed
on the second monitor.
• The part of an object or character string that extends off the cropping area is cut off at the
boundary.
• When the measurement object is updated on the main screen or when you toggle between
showing and hiding the measurement object, the second monitor is updated.
• The fiducial mark indicating the upper left that shows the exposure direction is displayed.
(For information about the fiducial mark indicating the upper left, refer to V2.10 new functions
s21071. If the fiducial mark indicating the upper left is set to be displayed in the Storage
setting of the service tool, it is displayed when the storage annotations are displayed.)
Examples of annotations displayed on the second monitor image:

643
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.3.1. Enlarging an image on the second monitor

This section describes how to enlarge an image in the Second Image View.
• Clicking the Second Image View enlarges the currently displayed image. Note that, if the
magnification percentage determined by the cropping frame size is 100%, the image is not
enlarged.
• When an image is enlarged, the clicked coordinates will be located at the center of the
screen. If the clicked coordinates are located outside the displayed image, the coordinates
nearest to them on the image will be located at the center of the screen.
• If the enlargement operation is performed three times, the magnification becomes equal
to the actual pixel size. Clicking again with the pixel magnification resets the magnification
percentage and the display coordinates (the magnification percentage and display
coordinates of the originally displayed image are restored).
Also, if the image is right-clicked after being enlarged one or more times, the magnification
percentage and display coordinates are reset.

Reference
• The magnification percentage to be added by each enlargement is calculated by the
following formula:
Magnification percentage to be added = (100% - Initial display magnification percentage) / 3

• If the image processing of image rotation, horizontal flip, vertical flip, or cropping frame
adjustment is performed on the main monitor, the magnification percentage and display
coordinates are reset.
When the image in the Second Image View is updated due to other image processing, that
image remains enlarged.
• If the image in the Second Image View is changed to another image, the magnification
percentage and display coordinates are reset and not carried over to the image that is
displayed next. Also, if the displayed image is cleared, the magnification percentage and
display coordinates are reset. The magnification percentage and display coordinates are not
carried over even if the same image is displayed again.

Reference
• The following is an example of the Second Image View display transition that may occur
with the enlargement operations.

644
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• The figure below is a diagram of the Second Image View status transition that may occur with
the enlargement operations.

4.4. Gamma adjustment for the second monitor

To start Gamma Adjustment Tool, go to the service tool, [Application setting] > [Display], and
click the Adjust monitor gamma button.
If you start the Gamma Adjustment Tool from the service tool, the [Primary] tab (for the main
monitor) and [Secondary] tab (for the second monitor) are displayed. To adjust the gamma of the
second monitor, use the [Secondary] tab.
For information about the gamma adjustment method, refer to "Appendix 5. Gamma Adjustment
Tool."

645
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

[Fig.AN2.4.4-1. Gamma Adjustment Tool screen (for the second monitor)]

A DICOM monitor is used.

(1) OFF (default) Even if OFF is selected, an SMPTE image is displayed
on the monitor.

A consumer monitor is used with a luminance meter.

Since the gamma value is determined by the luminance

(2) With_Luminance_Meter measured by the Gamma Adjustment Tool, CCS
displays each pattern on the monitor to check the
gamma value.

A consumer monitor is used without a luminance meter.

(3) Without_Luminance_Meter Each pattern is displayed on the monitor, and the
gamma value is adjusted visually.

If you select the monitor for which you want to perform gamma adjustment in [Monitor Gamma]
in System Settings of CCS and click the SMPTE or Gamma Adjustment button, an SMPTE
image or pattern appears on the selected monitor.
[Fig.AN2.4.4-2. System settings in the case of (1) (Monitor Gamma)]

646
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

[Fig.AN2.4.4-3. System settings in the case of (2) or (3) (Monitor Gamma)]

• Select [Main Monitor] or [Second Monitor] as the monitor for which you want to perform
gamma adjustment. By default, [Main Monitor] is selected. If Use second monitor is not
selected or the number of connected monitors is not 2, the radio button is not displayed and
only the main monitor can be selected.
• If you click the SMPTE or Gamma Adjustment button with [Main Monitor] selected, the
gamma adjustment screen appears on the main monitor.
• If you click the SMPTE or Gamma Adjustment button with [Second Monitor] selected,
the gamma adjustment screen appears on the second monitor. The main monitor becomes
entirely disabled.

4.5. Second monitor display settings

• For the annotation display setting, select [Preview Annotation], [Storage Annotation], or [Do
not display]. By default, [Preview Annotation] is selected.
• Specify whether to show the laterality markers, peripheral mask, and measurement object, by
using the corresponding check boxes. By default, the check boxes for the laterality markers
and peripheral mask are turned on. Only the check box for the measurement object is turned
off by default.
• The items in the second monitor display setting area can be selected only when the second
monitor is used. Therefore, if Use second monitor is not selected, these setting items are
hidden. The setting of Use second monitor can be made only using the service tool.
• In CCS-RF, this setting area is hidden.
• The setting items can also be set using the service tool, and these settings are linked with the
system settings of CCS.
When setting the items using the GUI of the system screen
[System screen] > [System Settings] > [Second Monitor Display]
• [Annotation] (Default: [Preview Annotation])
• [Show laterality markers] (Default: On)
• [Show peripheral mask] (Default: On)
• [Show measurement object] (Default: Off)

When setting the items using the service tool

[System Setting] > [Application Setting] > [Display] > [Second monitor]

647
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

5. Image display on the second monitor

The second monitor displays images with the optimum magnification for each of the two different
types of detector (0.160 mm or 0.125 mm pixel pitch) using the three-step fixed rate zoom function.
As described in "Appendix N2.3. Second monitor setting method," the three-step fixed zoom ratio
is automatically calculated by registering the second monitor resolution using the service tool,
which determines the magnification and threshold.

5.1. Three-step fixed zoom ratios, thresholds, and input range restrictions

Item name Value Input range restrictions

160um
(1) First phase First phase
1 1 ≥ (1) ≥ (7)
magnification magnification
(2) First phase First phase threshold
Monitor height ÷ (1) (2) ≤ monitor height ÷ (1)
threshold height height
(3) First phase First phase threshold
Monitor width ÷ (1) (3) ≤ monitor width ÷ (1)
threshold width width
(4) Second phase Second phase Monitor short side
(1) ≥ (4) ≥ (7)
magnification magnification direction ÷ 2208

(5) Second phase Second phase * Monitor height ÷ (2) ≤ (5) ≤ 2688 and
threshold height threshold height (4) (5) ≤ monitor height ÷ (4)

(6) Second phase Second phase (3) ≤ (6) ≤ 2688 and

* Monitor width ÷ (4)
threshold width threshold width (6) ≤ monitor width ÷ (4)

(7) Third phase Third phase Monitor short side (7) ≤ monitor short side
magnification magnification direction ÷ 2688 direction ÷ 3408

125um
(8) First phase First phase
1 1 ≥ (8) ≥ (14)
magnification magnification
(9) First phase First phase threshold
Monitor height ÷ (8) (9) ≤ monitor height ÷ (8)
threshold height height
(10) First phase First phase threshold
Monitor width ÷ (8) (10) ≤ monitor width ÷ (8)
threshold width width
(11) Second phase Second phase Monitor short side
(8) ≥ (11) ≥ (14)
magnification magnification direction ÷ 3320

(12) Second phase Second phase * Monitor height ÷ (9) ≤ (12) ≤ 3408 and
threshold height threshold height (11) (12) ≤ monitor height ÷ (11)

(13) Second phase Second phase * Monitor width ÷ (10) ≤ (13) ≤ 3408 and
threshold width threshold width (11) (13) ≤ monitor width ÷ (11)

(14) Third phase Third phase Monitor short side (14) ≤ monitor short side
magnification magnification direction ÷ 3408 direction ÷ 3408

648
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Monitor short side direction: Monitor height or monitor width, whichever is the shorter.

Reference
• If the calculated value exceeds the maximum detector width, the maximum detector width is
applied.

5.2. Image cropping sizes and second monitor display magnifications

This section describes image cropping sizes and second monitor display magnifications.
The descriptions are based on examples in which the second monitor resolution is registered
by clicking the Set connected second monitor size button and then the Apply button in the
service tool, with [Orientation] set to [Portrait] and [Resolution] set to [1080 x 1920].
The magnifications and thresholds are determined as shown in the table below.

Item name Reference value

160um

(1) First phase magnification First phase magnification 1

(2) First phase threshold height First phase threshold height 1920

(3) First phase threshold width First phase threshold width 1080

(4) Second phase magnification Second phase magnification 0.4891304347826087

(5) Second phase threshold height Second phase threshold height 2688

(6) Second phase threshold width Second phase threshold width 2208

(7) Third phase magnification Third phase magnification 0.4017857142857143

125um

(8) First phase magnification First phase magnification 1

(9) First phase threshold height First phase threshold height 1920

(10) First phase threshold width First phase threshold width 1080

(11) Second phase magnification Second phase magnification 0.3253012048192771

(12) Second phase threshold height Second phase threshold height 3408

(13) Second phase threshold width Second phase threshold width 3320

(14) Third phase magnification Third phase magnification 0.3169014084507042

649
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

The operation is performed as follows according to these values.

(Fig. A)
If the image cropping size is 2800 x 3408 (full screen), it is less than the second phase
thresholds (3320, 3408). Therefore, the image is displayed with the second phase
magnification of 33%.
(Fig. B)
If an image is cropped to a size larger than the first phase thresholds (1080, 1920) and
smaller than the second phase thresholds (3320, 3408) (in this example, the image is
cropped to 136 mm in width and 241 mm in height (1088 x 1928)), it is displayed with the
second phase magnification of 33%.
(Fig. C)
If the image cropping size is smaller than 135 mm in width x 240 mm in height (1080 x 1920),
it is less than the first phase thresholds (1080, 1920). Therefore, the image is displayed with
the first phase magnification of 100%.
The descriptions are based on examples in which the second monitor resolution is registered
by clicking the Set connected second monitor size button and then the Apply button in the
service tool, with [Orientation] set to [Landscape] and [Resolution] set to [1920 x 1080].

650
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

The magnifications and thresholds are determined as shown in the table below.

Item name Reference value

160um

(1) First phase magnification First phase magnification 1

(2) First phase threshold height First phase threshold height 1080

(3) First phase threshold width First phase threshold width 1920

(4) Second phase magnification Second phase magnification 0.4891304347826087

(5) Second phase threshold height Second phase threshold height 2208

(6) Second phase threshold width Second phase threshold width 2688

(7) Third phase magnification Third phase magnification 0.4017857142857143

125um

(8) First phase magnification First phase magnification 1

(9) First phase threshold height First phase threshold height 1080

(10) First phase threshold width First phase threshold width 1920

(11) Second phase magnification Second phase magnification 0.3253012048192771

(12) Second phase threshold height Second phase threshold height 3320

(13) Second phase threshold width Second phase threshold width 3408

(14) Third phase magnification Third phase magnification 0.3169014084507042

651
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

The operation is performed as follows according to these values.

(Fig. A)
If the image cropping size is 2800 x 3408 (full screen), it is larger than the second phase
thresholds (3408, 3320). Therefore, the image is displayed with the third phase magnification
of 32%.
(Fig. B)
If an image is cropped to a size larger than the first phase thresholds (1920, 1080) and
smaller than the second phase thresholds (3408, 3320) (in this example, the image is
cropped to 241 mm in width and 136 mm in height (1928 x 1088)), it is displayed with the
second phase magnification of 33%.
(Fig. C)
If the image cropping size is smaller than 240 mm in width x 135 mm in height (1920 x 1080),
it is less than the first phase thresholds (1920, 1080). Therefore, the image is displayed with
the first phase magnification of 100%.

652
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Appendix N3. Using Non Generator Connection

1. Overview of Non Generator Connection imaging

In CCS-NE V2.10 or later, Non Generator Connection imaging is supported in environments

where only detectors capable of Non Generator Connection (e.g., CXDI-701 series detectors) are
used.
This appendix describes the setting method and specifications of Non Generator Connection
imaging.

A detector capable of Non Generator Connection operates in the following three modes.
Non Generator Connection mode
In this mode, the detector starts the imaging operation when an X-ray is detected, without
connecting an X-ray interface with the X-ray generator for synchronization.
Manual Synchronization mode
In this mode, a human operator performs X-ray imaging by starting X-ray exposure manually
so that the exposure and the imaging by the detector occur simultaneously, without
connecting an X-ray interface with the X-ray generator for synchronization.
This mode is used for calibration and performance tests when Non Generator Connection is
used.
Standard (synchronous) mode
In this mode, an X-ray interface is connected and the detector and X-ray generator perform
X-ray imaging in synchronization.

1.1. Flow of imaging in Non Generator Connection mode

The flow of imaging in Non Generator Connection mode is as follows.
1. Ready for exposure
The ready indicator notifies the operator that the detector is ready for exposure, by lighting
LEDs and giving a sound alert.

653
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Exposure
The X-ray exposure time in Non Generator Connection mode is 1 or 3 seconds.
3. Automatic detection of X-ray exposure
4. Accumulation
5. Transfer of images from the detector to the PC

Note
• In step 1 of the imaging flow above, make sure that the detector is ready for exposure (Ready
status), before starting X-ray exposure. For details, refer to "Appendix N3.1.2. Considerations
for imaging in Non Generator Connection mode."

1.2. Considerations for imaging in Non Generator Connection mode

When imaging in Non Generator Connection mode, note the following:
• If the detector is exposed to an X-ray when it is not ready for exposure (not in the Ready
status) (e.g., immediately before the transition to the Ready status), the X-ray cannot be
detected and no image is displayed after imaging, leaving the electrical charges accumulated
in the detector. If the next image is captured when the electrical charges remain accumulated
in the detector, an undesirable phenomenon such as adverse effects remaining on the
image or the inability to detect an X-ray may occur. In this case, it is necessary to clear the
accumulated electrical charges by clicking the Refresh button.

Reference
• If inappropriate exposure is detected before the transition to the Ready status, an alert
shown below appears. If you click the OK button, the image resulting from the inappropriate
exposure is automatically acquired. Since this image was captured when the detector was
not in the Ready status, check the image for errors.

654
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
There are two X-ray detection sensitivity modes that can be set for a detector: High
Sensitivity mode and Impact Resistant mode. If you click [Sensor] in the service tool menu,
the [Detector] screen appears. In the [DetailName] column of the [Detector] screen, the
modes of the registered detectors can be checked.

655
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
X-ray detection sensitivity Indication in the catalog
Target detector
mode (DetailName)
High Sensitivity mode CXDI701C-Wireless-HS
CXDI-701C Wireless
Impact Resistant mode CXDI701C-Wireless
High Sensitivity mode CXDI701G-Wireless-HS
CXDI-701G Wireless
Impact Resistant mode CXDI701G-Wireless
High Sensitivity mode CXDI801C-Wireless-HS
CXDI-801C Wireless
Impact Resistant mode CXDI801C-Wireless
High Sensitivity mode CXDI801G-Wireless-HS
CXDI-801G Wireless
Impact Resistant mode CXDI801G-Wireless
High Sensitivity mode CXDI401C-Wireless-HS
CXDI-401C Wireless
Impact Resistant mode CXDI401C-Wireless
High Sensitivity mode CXDI401G-Wireless-HS
CXDI-401G Wireless
Impact Resistant mode CXDI401G-Wireless
High Sensitivity mode CXDI710C-Wireless-HS
CXDI-710C Wireless
Impact Resistant mode CXDI710C-Wireless
High Sensitivity mode CXDI810C-Wireless-HS
CXDI-810C Wireless
Impact Resistant mode CXDI810C-Wireless
High Sensitivity mode CXDI410C-Wireless-HS
CXDI-410C Wireless
Impact Resistant mode CXDI410C-Wireless

For information about how to change the mode, refer to the service manual or service manual
report of the detector in use.
If you change the X-ray detection sensitivity mode of a detector, you need to delete the
detector information and then register it again. For information about how to delete and
register detector information, refer to "4.3. Registering static detectors" in Part 2.

1.3. Considerations for using the Non Generator Connection mode

When using the Non Generator Connection mode, note the following:

Reference
• For considerations for imaging in this mode, refer to "Appendix N3.1.2. Considerations for
imaging in Non Generator Connection mode."
• For general information about installation and the product specifications such as the
operation times in Standard (synchronous) mode and Non Generator Connection mode, refer
to the service manual of the detectors capable of Non Generator Connection.
• For the operating procedure when using the Non Generator Connection mode, refer to
“Exposure auto detection imaging” in the User Operation Manual.

656
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• When the Non Generator Connection mode is used, the Manual Synchronization mode is
applied to calibration and performance tests. In principle, calibration and performance tests
must be performed by a service engineer.
• When calibration or a performance test is performed in Non Generator Connection mode,
the exposure enabled notification dialog box is closed and the image check result screen
is displayed after the lapse of time equivalent to Accumulate Time from the display of the
exposure enabled notification dialog box, even if exposure is not in progress. (For details,
refer to "Appendix N3.5.1. Transition of the calibration screen when the Non Generator
Connection mode is used.")
• When using a 34 lp/cm grid or 40 lp/cm grid in Non Generator Connection mode, be careful
about the direction of grid installation.
• For CXDI-701 series detectors, install the grid so that the grid lines are parallel to the long
sides of the detector. (V2.10.0 and later; CXDI-701 series detectors supported)
• For CXDI-801 series detectors, install the grid so that the grid lines are parallel to the
short sides of the detector. (V2.10.2 and later; CXDI-801 series detectors supported)
• For CXDI-401 wireless detectors (CXDI-401G Wireless and CXDI-401C Wireless), install
the grid so that the directions of the grid lines and detector are as shown below. (V2.11
and later; CXDI-401 wireless detectors supported)
For CXDI-401 wireless detectors

• When the Non Generator Connection mode is used, only detectors capable of Non Generator
Connection can be used. Detectors that are not capable of Non Generator Connection cannot
be used. If a detector not capable of Non Generator Connection is set for the workspace, an
error occurs when CCS is started.

2. Hardware environment

2.1. Detectors capable of Non Generator Connection

Non Generator Connection can be used in environments where only detectors capable of Non
Generator Connection are used.

2.2. Ready indicator

When Non Generator Connection is used, the use of the ready indicator is recommended.
However, it is not necessarily required.

3. Non Generator Connection setting method

3.1. Enabling Non Generator Connection

1. Start up the service tool, and log in using the service account.

657
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. On the service tool menu, click [X-Ray Generator].

The [X-Ray generator setting] screen appears.
3. In [Operation setting], turn on [Non generator connection mode].
[Fig.AN3.3.1-1. X-Ray generator setting screen (CCS-NE only)]

4. For [CCS <-> Generator and DAP meter connection settings], select [Communicate with
the DAP meter] or [Not communicate with the DAP meter].
5. Click the OK or Apply button to save the settings.
A setting change warning message appears.
If you click the OK button, [Show image analysis error] and [Show grid warning] are
turned off in the screen that appears when you select [System Setting] > [Application
Setting] > [Examination screen 1], the settings are saved, and the menu screen appears
again. If you click the Cancel button, the setting change warning message is closed.
[Fig.AN3.3.1-2. Setting change warning message]

658
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

6. Close the service tool.

Reference
• If you exit the service tool when [Non generator connection mode] is selected and a
detector not capable of Non Generator Connection is set for the workspace, the warning
message shown below appears.
Clicking the OK button lets you exit the service tool. Clicking the Cancel button closes
the warning message.
[Fig.AN3.3.1-3. Warning message]

This completes the setting of Non Generator Connection imaging.

Reference
• When Non Generator Connection imaging is enabled, the [Auto Sleep] tab (refer to V2.10
new functions s12034-003) is not displayed in the setting screen for detectors capable of
Non Generator Connection (e.g., CXDI-701 series detectors) that appears when you select
the service tool > [Sensor].

4. Operations performed when the Non Generator Connection mode is

used

4.1. Checks performed at the start of CCS

If [Non generator connection mode] is selected in the service tool, a check is made at the
start of CCS to see whether only detectors capable of Non Generator Connection are set for the
workspace.

659
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

If this condition is not met, a dialog box appears notifying you of the fatal error shown below.
Error code:
F040300053
Description:
Cannot start the system because Non Generator Connection Mode is enabled under the
presence of workspaces for the detector which does not support Non Generator Connection.
Cause:
Non generator connection mode is selected in the service tool, but there is a workspace for
which a detector not capable of Non Generator Connection is set.
Service troubleshooting:
Delete the workspace for which a detector not capable of Non Generator Connection is set,
by using Protocol Editor of the service tool.
If you click the OK button, the system screen appears and you cannot switch to the examination
screen.

4.2. Refresh button

If you enable Non Generator Connection, the Refresh button appears in the upper right of the
examination screen.

Note
• The Refresh button appears only when the detector is active.
• Clicking this button clears the electrical charges accumulated in the detector.
• If you click the button, the Ready status of the detector is canceled and then restored
automatically.
• The Refresh button is available only when the detector status shown by the system status
indicator is Ready.
• The Refresh button is hidden when:
»» Ready is unselected; or
»» Exposure is performed.

[Fig.AN3.4.2-1. Header menu (second row) of the examination screen when the Non Generator
Connection mode is used]

[Fig.AN3.4.2-2. Examination tool bar of the examination screen when the Non Generator
Connection mode is used (Expand image view pane is enabled)]

660
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.3. Operation of the ready indicator

This section describes the operating specifications of the ready indicator.
• The ready indicator notifies the operator of the status that is displayed as the detector status,
by lighting LEDs and giving a sound alert.
• When the ready indicator is connected at the time of CCS login authentication, the LEDs are
lit and a sound alert is given to check the connection.
• If the link (detector registration) operation is performed using the infrared notification module
built in the ready indicator, the success of the link operation is indicated by lighting the LEDs
and giving a sound alert, regardless of the detector status.
• The ready indicator notifications are provided regardless of the protocol type.
• The table below shows the correspondence between the detector statuses and the ready
indicator notifications.
Table AN3.4.3-1. Detector statuses and the ready indicator notifications (standard synchronization
mode/Non Generator Connection mode)

Ready indicator
Ready notification
Detector
Abbreviation Description indicator Remarks
status LED
status Sound (*1)
(*1)
Including
immediately after
No protocol
the detection of the
Default D is selected NotReady Off Off
indicator connection
(default).
(after the completion
of initialization)
The detector is
Not Ready N NotReady Off Off
not ready.
The detector
WaitReady W is waiting to NotReady Off Off
become ready.

661
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Ready indicator
Ready notification
Detector
Abbreviation Description indicator Remarks
status LED
status Sound (*1)
(*1)
Standard
synchronization
mode or Non
ReadyA Generator
(Refer to the Single beep Connection
On (1)
Remarks (1) mode (when the
column.) remaining time for
Non Generator
Connection is more
than 5 minutes)
Non Generator
Connection
ReadyB mode (when the
(Refer to the Single beep remaining time for
On (1)
Remarks (2) Non Generator
The detector column.) Connection is 5
is ready for minutes or less and
Ready R exposure; the more than 1 minute)
ready status is
displayed. Non Generator
Connection
mode (when the
ReadyC
remaining time for
(Refer to the Single beep
On (2) Non Generator
Remarks (3)
Connection is 1
column.)
minute or less
and more than 10
seconds)
Non Generator
Connection
ReadyD
mode (when the
(Refer to the Blinking Continuous
remaining time for
Remarks (1) beeps (1)
Non Generator
column.)
Connection is 10
seconds or less)

Exposing E Exposure is in Exposing On (3) Single beep

progress. (5)

Capturing C The detector Exposing On (3) Single beep

is capturing an (5)
image.

Not NA Connection NotReady Off Off

Available with the
detector
cannot be
established,
because the
detector is
detached, the
signal strength
level is 0, etc.

Sensor SE The detector NotReady Off Off

Error cannot
become ready
because of a
detector error,
the battery out
of power, etc.

662
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Ready indicator
Ready notification
Detector
Abbreviation Description indicator Remarks
status LED
status Sound (*1)
(*1)
Sensor S The detector is NotReady Off Off
AutoSleep in auto sleep
mode.

When On (4) Melody (1)

logging in

When On (5) Melody (2)

a link is
established
successfully

663
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Table AN3.4.3-2. Detector statuses and the ready indicator notifications (manual synchronization
mode)
Ready indicator
Ready notification
Detector
Abbreviation Description indicator Remarks
status LED
status Sound (*1)
(*1)
Including
immediately
after the
No protocol detection of
Default D is selected NotReady Off Off the indicator
(default). connection
(after the
completion of
initialization)
Including during
the countdown
The detector
Not Ready N NotReady Off Off in manual
is not ready.
synchronization
mode
The detector
is waiting
WaitReady W NotReady Off Off
to become
ready.
The detector
ReadyA
is ready for
(Refer
exposure; Single
Ready R to the On (1)
the ready beep (1)
Remarks
status is
column.)
displayed.
Exposure is Continuous
Exposing E Open On (1)
in progress. beeps (2)
The detector
Continuous During
Capturing C is capturing Open On (1)
beeps (2) accumulation
an image.
Connection
with the
detector
cannot be
established,
Not because the
NA NotReady Off Off
Available detector is
detached,
the signal
strength
level is 0,
etc.

664
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Ready indicator
Ready notification
Detector
Abbreviation Description indicator Remarks
status LED
status Sound (*1)
(*1)
The detector
cannot
become
ready
Sensor because of
SE NotReady Off Off
Error a detector
error, the
battery out
of power,
etc.
The detector
Sensor
S is in auto NotReady Off Off
AutoSleep
sleep mode.
When
On (4) Melody (1)
logging in
When
a link is
On (5) Melody (2)
established
successfully
*1 For details of the lighting of the LEDs and sounds, refer to Table AN3.4.3-3.

Table AN3.4.3-3. Ready indicator notification method (reference)

Indications provided
Imaging status
LED Sound

Off
Imaging is not
Upper LED: Off Off
possible.
Lower LED: Off

On (1) Single beep (1)

Imaging is possible.
Upper LED: Dimly lit A short beep is generated as a sound alert
The remaining time is
when the detector has switched to this
more than 5 minutes. Lower LED: Dimly lit status from another one.

On (1) Single beep (2)

Imaging is possible.
Upper LED: Dimly lit Two short beeps are generated as a sound
The remaining time is
alert when the detector has switched to
5 minutes or less. Lower LED: Dimly lit this status from another one.

On (2) Single beep (3)

Imaging is possible.
Upper LED: Dimly lit Three short beeps are generated as a
The remaining time is
sound alert when the detector has switched
1 minute or less. Lower LED: Off to this status from another one.

665
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Indications provided
Imaging status
LED Sound

Blinking (1) Continuous beeps (1)

Imaging is possible. Upper LED: Dimly Continuous beeps are generated
The remaining time is blinks at 1-second repeatedly as a sound alert in
10 seconds or less. intervals. synchronization with the blinking of the
Lower LED: Off LED.

On (1) Continuous beeps (2)

During accumulation
in manual Upper LED: Dimly lit A long continuous beep is generated
synchronization mode during accumulation.
Lower LED: Dimly lit

During imaging
On (3) Single beep (5)
in standard
synchronization mode Upper LED: Brightly lit A sound alert "ding-dong" is generated
or Non Generator when imaging is performed.
Lower LED: Brightly lit
Connection mode

Event Indications provided

On (4)
The upper and lower
Melody (1)
LEDs are lit, with the
When logging in brightness changing A "doe-me-sew" melody is generated as a
with the sound alert sound alert.
(dim → moderately
bright → bright).

On (5)
The upper and lower
When a link Melody (2)
LEDs are lit with the
is established sound alert in the A "doe-me-ray" melody is generated as a
successfully following order: upper sound alert.
LED → lower LED →
upper LED.

Note
• The above specifications are subject to change. For the specifications of the ready indicator,
refer to the service manual of the CXDI-701 series detectors.

4.4. Sleep warning icons

If no exposure is performed or the detector status does not change for 10 minutes after the ready
status is displayed, the detector automatically enters the sleep mode. To prevent the user from
performing exposure while the detector is in sleep mode, sleep warning icons are displayed,
starting one minute before the detector enters the sleep mode, to warn the user.

666
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Note
• The sleep warning icons are displayed only when the detector is active.
[Fig.AN2.4.4-1. Header menu (second row) of the examination screen when the Non
Generator Connection mode is used]

• The sleep warning icons are displayed as shown below.

»» Auto sleep warning status 1 (1 minute remaining)
[Fig.AN2.4.4-2. 1 minute remaining]

»» Auto sleep warning status 2 (10 seconds remaining)

[Fig.AN2.4.4-3. 10 seconds remaining]

• The table below shows the status transition of the Non Generator Connection icon display.
Table AN3.4.4-1. Status transition of the Non Generator Connection icon display

Auto sleep Auto sleep

Display status/trigger event Not displayed
warning 1 warning 2

Ready protocol selection Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed

Protocol selection cancellation - Not displayed Not displayed

Start of exposure - Not displayed Not displayed

Detector powered off - Not displayed Not displayed

Detector entering sleep mode - Not displayed Not displayed

Detector error - Not displayed Not displayed

Notification of time before sleep

- Not displayed Not displayed
mode (5 minutes remaining)

Notification of time before sleep Auto sleep Auto sleep

-
mode (1 minute remaining) warning 1 warning 1

Notification of time before sleep Auto sleep

- -
mode (10 seconds remaining) warning 2

667
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

5. Calibration when the Non Generator Connection mode is used

5.1. Transition of the calibration screen when the Non Generator Connection mode
is used
When the Non Generator Connection mode is used, calibration is performed in manual
synchronization mode.
This section describes the transition of the calibration screen when the Non Generator
Connection mode is used. The same applies to the performance test performed when the Non
Generator Connection mode is used.
[Fig.AN3.5.1-1. Transition of the calibration screen when the Non Generator Connection mode is
used]

668
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(1) Main screen of the QC tool

[Fig.AN3.5.1-2. Main screen of the QC tool]

• This is the main screen of the QC tool that appears when the Non Generator Connection
mode is used.
• If you click the Start button in the main screen of the QC tool, the detector ready
notification dialog box appears.
(2) Detector ready notification dialog box
[Fig.AN3.5.1-3. Detector ready notification dialog box]
• (Detector preparation in progress)

669
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• (Detector preparation complete)

• The detector ready notification dialog box notifies you that the detector preparation is in
progress or complete as the detector switches to the manual synchronization mode.
• After the detector starts to prepare, it takes about 50 seconds before the preparation is
complete.
• The countdown time [seconds] is displayed in the dialog box. The countdown time cannot
be edited.
• The accumulate time [seconds] is displayed in the dialog box. The accumulate time
cannot be edited.

Reference
• The accumulate time for the CXDI-701 series detectors is 3 seconds. In CCS,
however, one second is reserved to give leeway and the accumulate time is fixed
to 2 seconds.

• If you click the Cancel button, the detector ready notification dialog box closes and the
main screen of the QC tool appears again.
• If you click the Start button when the countdown can be started, the countdown dialog
box appears. When the countdown cannot be started, an alert appears without displaying
the countdown dialog box.

Reference
• If the time remaining before the detector enters the sleep mode is less than the
"set countdown time + detector accumulation time" when you click the Start button,
you cannot continue imaging in manual synchronization mode. In this case, it is
considered that the countdown cannot be started.

• The Start button is not available while the detector preparation is in progress. The button
becomes available when the detector preparation is complete.
• If the communication with the detector is disconnected (including switching between wired
and wireless connections) while the detector preparation is in progress, an error dialog
box is displayed and the main screen of the QC tool appears again.

670
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• If the communication with the detector is disconnected (including switching between wired
and wireless connections) while the detector ready notification dialog box is displayed
after the detector preparation is complete, the detector status bar indicates that the
detector is not ready, the detector ready notification dialog box closes, and the main
screen of the QC tool appears again.
• If the detector automatically enters the sleep mode while the detector ready notification
dialog box is displayed after the detector preparation is complete, the detector status bar
indicates that imaging is not possible, the detector ready notification dialog box closes,
and an alert message appears. Clicking the OK button displays the detector ready
notification dialog box that is shown while the detector preparation is in progress.
(3) Countdown dialog box
[Fig.AN3.5.1-4. Countdown dialog box]

• The countdown dialog box counts down the time before the detector becomes ready for
exposure, showing the progress.
• The countdown automatically starts at the same time the countdown dialog box appears.
• When the countdown ends (the remaining time becomes 0), the exposure enabled
notification dialog box appears.
• Once the remaining countdown time reaches 3 seconds, the Cancel button is disabled.
The button remains disabled unless you change the countdown setting.
• If the communication with the detector is disconnected (including switching between wired
and wireless connections) while the countdown dialog box is displayed, the detector status
bar indicates that the detector is not ready, the countdown dialog box closes, and the main
screen of the QC tool appears again.
• If the detector automatically enters the sleep mode while the countdown dialog box is
displayed, the detector status bar indicates that imaging is not possible, the countdown
dialog box closes, and an alert message appears. Clicking the OK button displays the
detector ready notification dialog box that is shown while the detector preparation is in
progress.

671
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(4) Exposure enabled notification dialog box

[Fig.AN3.5.1-5. Exposure enabled notification dialog box]

• The exposure enabled notification dialog box notifies the user that exposure is enabled,
prompting him/her to start exposure.
• If the time equivalent to Accumulate Time lapses from the display of the exposure enabled
notification dialog box, the exposure enabled notification dialog box closes and the image
check result screen appears.

Reference
• The accumulate time for the CXDI-701 series detectors is 3 seconds. In CCS,
however, one second is reserved to give leeway and the accumulate time is fixed
to 2 seconds.
Even if exposure is performed, the exposure enabled notification dialog box does
not close until the time equivalent to Accumulate Time lapses.

• If the communication with the detector is disconnected (including switching between wired
and wireless connections) while the exposure enabled notification dialog box is displayed,
the detector stop notification dialog box appears.

672
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(5) Image check result screen

[Fig.AN3.5.1-6. Image check result screen (1/4)]

If you click the Next button and perform exposure four times, the screen shown below
appears. Click the End button to close the screen.
[Fig.AN3.5.1-7. Image check result screen (4/4)]

673
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(6) Detector stop notification dialog box

[Fig.AN3.5.1-8. Detector stop notification dialog box]

• The detector stop notification dialog box appears if an image fails to be transferred from
the detector due to a communication failure or some other problem.

Reference
• The detector stop notification dialog box appears in the following cases:
1. When you click the Start button in the detector ready notification dialog box,
imaging reservation fails or times out (no response is received for three seconds
or more).
2. When the detector does not notify the user of the start of exposure within one
second after the exposure enabled notification dialog box appears.

• If you click the Exit Manual Sync. button, the detector stop notification dialog box closes
and the main screen of the QC tool appears.

674
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Appendix R1. Using a Jog/shuttle Device

1. Overview of a jog/shuttle device

CCS-RF supports a jog/shuttle device (ShuttleXpress manufactured by Contour Design) as an

input auxiliary device. Brightness, contrast, and other settings can be changed by using the jog/
shuttle device. (For information about the image operations, refer to the User Operation Manual.)
This appendix describes how to set a jog/shuttle device to operate with CCS-RF and how to use
its buttons.
In a dual monitor configuration in which a second monitor (called the live monitor) is used, a jog/
shuttle device is always required for the processing of images on the live monitor.

2. Jog/shuttle device setting method

1. Connect the jog/shuttle device to a USB port of the PC.

2. Install the latest driver.
The latest driver can be downloaded from the website of Contour Design.
[Fig.AR1.2-1. Contour Shuttle setup screen]

Reference
• The driver that is installed by Software Installation Disk that comes with the jog/shuttle
device is not supported by Windows 7.

Note
• Do not change the installation path of the driver. Since the default path is built in the
CCS program to fix bugs of the driver, changing the installation path may make the driver
unable to operate normally.

3. From the CCS-RF folder [CCS-D] > [Preference] > [Contour Shuttle], copy "ccs-d.pref" to
the folder [Settings] > [ShuttleXpress] in the folder in which the accessory software of the
jog/shuttle device is installed.

675
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

[Fig.AR1.2-2. Copying and pasting ccs-d.pref]

4. From the icon in the notification area of the taskbar in the lower right of the screen, select
[Open Control Panel].
[Fig.AR1.2-3. Opening the Control Panel of the jog/shuttle device]

5. In the Control Panel screen of the jog/shuttle device, click the Options button.
Select [Import settings] from the menu; the Explorer menu appears.
6. Select the "ccs-d.pref" file you copied and pasted in step 3 (under C:¥Program Files
(x86)¥Contour Shuttle¥Settings¥ShuttleXpress).
[CCS-D] is added as an option to the combo box above the Options button.
[Fig.AR1.2-4. Control Panel screen of the jog/shuttle device]

7. In the combo box, select [CCS-D].

8. Click the Options button again, and select [Change target application] from the menu.
The Explorer menu appears.

676
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

9. Specify CCS.exe in the CCS-D folder.

In the Control Panel screen of the jog/shuttle device, click the Apply and OK buttons to close
the screen.
[Fig.AR1.2-5. Control Panel screen of the jog/shuttle device]

This makes the jog/shuttle device operate according to the above settings when CCS.exe is
executed.

677
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. Description of the operation of each button of the jog/shuttle device

3.1. Name and description of each part

[Fig.AR1.3.1-1. Jog/shuttle device]

Programming buttons:
Clicking one of these programming buttons corresponds to the pressing of the keyboard key
assigned to that button.
Jog dial (used for micro operations):
Each time you turn the dial clockwise or counterclockwise a specified distance, the assigned
keyboard key is pressed once. By turning the dial repeatedly, you can have the key pressed
repeatedly.
Shuttle dial (used for macro operations):
Turning the dial clockwise or counterclockwise a specified distance and stopping it there
causes the assigned keyboard key to be pressed at the set intervals. The time interval is
determined by the position at which the shuttle dial is stopped.
Table 1 Assignment of the jog/shuttle device buttons (when the live monitor is not used)

Item name Assigned key Number Button position *1

Not assigned [Ctrl] + [F1] 1 Left

Not assigned [Ctrl] + [F2] 2 Center left

Brightness [Ctrl] + [F3] 3 Center

Contrast [Ctrl] + [F4] 4 Center right

Frame specification *2
(Frame-by-frame forward/ [Ctrl] + [F5] 5 Right
frame-by-frame reverse)
*1: Location of the button to which each individual item is mapped
*2: Clicking the frame specification button during fluoroscopic or digital cine image playback stops the playback.
When the fluoroscopic or digital cine image playback is stopped, clicking the button starts the playback. The button
does not respond in cases other than the fluoroscopic and digital cine image previews.

678
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Table 2 Unit amount of movement when the jog dial (for micro operations) is operated *1
(when the live monitor is not used)

Fluoroscopic
Radiographic
Fluoroscopic image for
image (common Digital cine image
image Positioning
to DX and RF)
Fluoro

Clockwise Clockwise Clockwise

rotation: +1 rotation: +1 rotation: +1
Brightness No response
Counterclockwise Counterclockwise Counterclockwise
rotation: -1 rotation: -1 rotation: -1

Clockwise Clockwise Clockwise

rotation: +1 rotation: +1 rotation: +1
Contrast No response
Counterclockwise Counterclockwise Counterclockwise
rotation: -1 rotation: -1 rotation: -1

Frame
specification Clockwise Clockwise
(frame- rotation: Forward rotation: Forward
by-frame by 1 frame by 1 frame
No response No response
forward/ Counterclockwise Counterclockwise
frame- rotation: Reverse rotation: Reverse
by-frame by 1 frame by 1 frame
reverse)
*1: The keys assigned to the jog dial (for micro operations) are the [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [U] keys when the dial is turned
clockwise and the [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [D] keys when the dial is turned counterclockwise.
Table 3 Assignment of the jog/shuttle device buttons (when the live monitor is used)

Item name Assigned key Number Button position

Rotation [Ctrl] + [F1] 1 Left

Horizontal flip [Ctrl] + [F2] 2 Center left

Brightness [Ctrl] + [F3] 3 Center

Contrast [Ctrl] + [F4] 4 Center right

Negative/
positive [Ctrl] + [F5] 5 Right
inversion

679
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Table 4 Unit amount of movement when the jog dial (for micro operations) is operated
(when the live monitor is used)

Fluoroscopic
Radiographic
Fluoroscopic image for
image (common Digital cine image
image Positioning
to DX and RF)
Fluoro

Rotation *1 N/A N/A N/A N/A

Horizontal flip
N/A N/A N/A N/A
*1

Clockwise Clockwise
rotation: +1 rotation: +1
Brightness No response No response
Counterclockwise Counterclockwise
rotation: -1 rotation: -1

Clockwise Clockwise
rotation: +1 rotation: +1
Contrast No response No response
Counterclockwise Counterclockwise
rotation: -1 rotation: -1

Negative/
positive N/A N/A N/A N/A
inversion *1
*1: Rotation, horizontal flip, and negative/positive inversion are done by clicking the relevant programming buttons.
Table 5 Jog/shuttle device processing (when the live monitor is used)
During exposure After exposure
Neg- Neg-
ative/ ative/
Expo- Expo- Hor- Hor-
Rota- Bright- Con- pos- Rota- Bright- Con- pos-
sure sure izon- izon-
tion ness trast itive tion ness trast itive
type mode tal flip tal flip
inver- inver-
sion sion
Radiog-
Static,
raphy, × × × × × × × × × ×
Stitch
Stitch
Posi- Fluoro × × ✔ ✔ × × × × × ×
tion-
ing Radiog-
× × × × × × × × × ×
Fluoro raphy
Radiog-
× × × × × ✔ ✔ × × ✔
raphy
RF Fluoro × × ✔ ✔ × ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Digi-
× × ✔ ✔ × ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
tal-Cine

680
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Table 6 Pressing interval determined by the position where the shuttle dial (for macro
operations) is stopped

Initial
Stopped position *1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
position

Keys assigned to the [Ctrl] [Ctrl] [Ctrl] [Ctrl] [Ctrl] [Ctrl] [Ctrl]
shuttle dial (used for + + + + + + +
None
macro operations): [Alt] [Alt] [Alt] [Alt] [Alt] [Alt] [Alt]
Clockwise rotation + [0] + [1] + [2] + [3] + [4] + [5] + [6]

Keys assigned to the

[Ctrl] [Ctrl] [Ctrl] [Ctrl] [Ctrl] [Ctrl]
shuttle dial (used for [Ctrl]
+ + + + + +
macro operations): None + [Alt]
[Alt] [Alt] [Alt] [Alt] [Alt] [Alt]
Counterclockwise + [X]
+ [7] + [8] + [9] + [W] + [Y] + [Z]
rotation

Rotation N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Horizontal flip N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Negative/positive
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
inversion

Brightness 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Contrast 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Frame specification
(frame-by-frame forward/ 0 1 1 2 5 10 15 30
frame-by-frame reverse)
*1: A larger value represents a larger clockwise or counterclockwise turning distance.

3.2. Operation features of the jog/shuttle device

• The jog dial and shuttle dial are enabled when one of the programming buttons is clicked.
If none of these buttons is selected, turning the jog dial or shuttle dial causes nothing to
happen.
• The jog/shuttle device is enabled only in the following cases:
• The Examination screen is displayed when an exam is in progress.
The dials are disabled if the [Past Exam] tab is selected and the list is displayed during
an exam.
• The playback screen is displayed while a past exam is being played back.
The dials are disabled if the [Exam] tab is selected and the worklist is displayed when a
past exam is being played back.
• When the live monitor is used, the images displayed on the live monitor are valid only if
the Examination screen is displayed.
• When the live monitor is not used, each programming button has either the on or off state.
Clicking a button when it is in the off state turns on the assigned function, making the editing
with the jog/shuttle device possible. When the live monitor is used, rotation, horizontal flip,
and negative/positive inversion are done by clicking the relevant programming buttons and
the editing with the jog/shuttle device is not possible.
• The programming buttons are mutually exclusive, meaning that, when one programming
button is in the on state, all the other buttons are in the off state.
• Only frame specification is unavailable during dynamic image exposure.

681
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• During radiographic image exposure, none of the jog/shuttle device processing can be done.
• Brightness is selected by default immediately after the transition to a new Examination screen
or playback screen. (When the live monitor is used, no jog/shuttle device operations can be
performed on the playback screen.)
• The processing selected with the jog/shuttle device on the Examination screen or playback
screen is enabled only during one exam. When the exam or playback is finished, all the
selected jog/shuttle device states are reset to off. When the live monitor is used, the selected
states are maintained until the next startup.
• When the live monitor is not used, the selected jog/shuttle device states on the Examination
screen are differentiated from those on the playback screen.
• When the live monitor is not used, the playback is stopped if the frame specification operation
is performed while a dynamic image is being played back.
• The mapping and settings of the programming buttons of the jog/shuttle device are
differentiated depending on whether the live monitor is used or not. The mapping and settings
of the programming buttons are fixed as shown in Tables 1 to 4 above. Note that, since
rotation, horizontal flip, and negative/positive inversion are done by clicking the relevant
programming buttons, no processing is performed for their micro or macro operations.
• Also, the enabling and disabling of the buttons based on the exposure mode and screen
display status are linked to the respective controls.
• When the live monitor is used, the jog/shuttle device processing is applied only to the images
displayed on the live monitor. Note that, depending on the combination of the exposure type
and exposure mode and the exposure conditions, the operations of the jog/shuttle device
processing are differentiated. (Refer to Table 5 in Appendix R1.3.1. Name and description of
each part; ✔ : Can be performed, ×: Cannot be performed.)
• When images on a disk are displayed, the jog/shuttle device is unavailable.

Note
• The operation features described above may change as the version of CCS-RF is upgraded.
• With the jog/shuttle devices released in March 2010 or earlier, the screen saver of CCS-RF
may fail to start depending on the combination of the USB controller and the 64-bit operating
system. This problem does not occur with the jog/shuttle devices released in April 2010 or
later.

Released in Serial number

Products with the problem unsolved March 2010 or earlier 8 digits

Products with the problem solved April 2010 or later 5 digits

682
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Appendix R2. Using Live Monitor

1. Overview of the live monitor

CCS-RF supports a single monitor configuration (in which one monitor is provided for one control
PC) and a dual monitor configuration (in which two monitors are provided for one control PC).
In the dual monitor configuration, use one monitor as the live monitor for displaying live images
(mainly dynamic images) during exposure and the other as the reference monitor for displaying
reference images, including the user operation window, and post-exposure images.
For the operating procedures for the dual monitor configuration, refer to the User Operation
Manual. The dual monitor configuration requires a jog/shuttle device for the processing of images
on the live monitor.
For information about the jog/shuttle device, refer to "Appendix R1. Using a Jog/shuttle Device"
and make it ready for use. This appendix describes how to set the live monitor to operate with
CCS-RF.

683
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Hardware environment

2.1. Setting the monitor

When using the monitor in the dual monitor configuration, set it so that the following requirements
are met.
• As the live monitor, only a DICOM-compatible monitor is supported. As the reference monitor,
a consumer monitor may be used. Gamma adjustment can be performed only on a consumer
monitor.
• The two monitors must have a resolution of SXGA (1280 x 1024) or above, but not greater
than WUXGA (1920 x 1200), and have the same size and display gradation (24-bit color
or above) settings to ensure that the images displayed on the monitors match in size and
appearance. Using different settings can result in the images displayed on the two monitors
being different in size and appearance.
Additional information
• Use in span mode (function that treats two screens as a single one) is not supported.
• Configurations where three or more monitors are connected are not supported. It is, however,
possible to expand the monitor configuration using a display distributor.

2.2. Video board

When using the dual monitor configuration, make sure that the video board meets the following
requirement.
• The video board must have two DVI output terminals, one for the live monitor and the other
for the reference monitor.

Note
• Configurations with two or more video boards installed are not supported.

3. Live monitor setting method

3.1. Establishing the dual monitor configuration

1. Connect the live monitor to the DVI output terminal for the live monitor that is located on the
video board of the control PC.
2. Select [Control Panel] > [Appearance and Personalization] > [Screen Resolution].
3. In [Multiple displays], select [Extend these displays].
4. Make sure that the monitor to be used as the reference monitor is set as the primary monitor
and that the monitor to be used as the live monitor is set as the secondary monitor.

684
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

[Fig.AR2.3.1-1. Secondary monitor settings]

[Fig.AR2.3.1-2. Primary monitor settings]

3.2. Setting the live monitor

1. Start up the service tool, and log in using the service account.
2. From [System Setting] > [Application Setting], open the Display setting screen. In [Live
monitor], turn on the [Use live monitor] check box.
3. Click the OK or Apply button to save the settings.

685
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• If you turn on this setting, the [Expand image view pane] check box is turned on in the
service tool. (The setting of [Expand image view pane] itself cannot be changed.)
• If the setting is changed, the number of fluoroscopic exposure frames and the number of
digital cine exposure frames are recalculated. For example, when the memory size is 8 GB,
both the number of fluoroscopic exposure frames and the number of digital cine exposure
frames are changed from 108 to 98.

This makes CCS-RF operate with the live monitor when CCS.exe is executed.

686
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. Description of operations when the live monitor is used

Images displayed on the live monitor are those captured using a dynamic detector (CXDI-50RF).
When any other detector is used, images are displayed on the reference monitor.
[Fig.AR2.4-1. Live monitor screen]

[Fig.AR2.4-2. Reference monitor screen]

4.1. Checks performed at the start of CCS

If [Use live monitor] is on in the service tool, a check is made at the start of CCS to see:
• Whether the resolution of the live monitor is within the supported range; and
• Whether two or more monitors are connected.
If these conditions are not met, an alert is displayed after the login.

Note
• If you disconnect the monitor cable of the live monitor while CCS is running, it may become
impossible to operate the reference monitor screen.

687
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.2. Starting the screen saver

When the live monitor is used, the screen saver is started and closed at the same time on both
the live monitor and reference monitor.

4.3. Using the jog/shuttle device

For information about the jog/shuttle device operations, refer to "Appendix R1. Using a Jog/
shuttle Device."
• Operations on images displayed on the live monitor can be performed only with the jog/
shuttle device.
• For images that are displayed on the live monitor after exposure, the rotation and flip
operations are available. Note that horizontal flip is the only flip operation that is supported.
Therefore, if you want to flip an image vertically, you need to perform both the rotation and
horizontal flip operations.
• The negative/positive inversion operation is possible for images that are displayed on the live
monitor after exposure, only when the RF protocol is used.
• The brightness and contrast operations are enabled only during dynamic image capturing.
• For images that are displayed on the live monitor during exposure, only the brightness and
contrast operations can be performed.

4.4. Reference image fixed preview button

In addition to the Single View, Multi View, and Frame View buttons, the reference image fixed
preview button is added to the examination tool bar in the upper right of the reference monitor to
enable the fixed preview operation.

Additional information
• You can hide the reference image fixed preview button by selecting [System Setting] >
[Application Setting], opening the Display setting screen, turning off the [Fixed preview
mode] check box (default: on) in [Live monitor], and then clicking the OK or Apply button to
save the setting.

The operating specifications of the reference image fixed preview button are as follows.
• The reference image fixed preview button is a toggle button used to change the reference
image display mode.
• The reference image fixed preview button is displayed when the settings of [Use live
monitor] and [Fixed preview mode] in the system tool are both on. The button is hidden
when the setting of [Fixed preview mode] is off.
• The reference image fixed preview button cannot be operated during exposure.
• When the reference image fixed preview button is on, reference images are displayed in
"fixed preview mode."
• The "fixed preview mode" continues to display the images of the same examination that
are selected to be previewed.
• In "fixed preview mode," even if exposure is performed, the Image View display method
and the images to be previewed do not change.

688
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

[Fig.AR2.4.4-1. Fixed preview mode]

• When the reference image fixed preview button is off, reference images are displayed in
"display switching mode."
• The "display switching mode" switches the preview image with the captured image each
time exposure is performed.
• In the "display switching mode," the Image View display method returns to Single View
and the preview of the captured image is displayed each time exposure is performed.
Note that, if exposure is performed in fluoro mode with Use live monitor on, the switch to
Single View does not occur even in "display switching mode."
• Even if the setting of [Use live monitor] is off, the "display switching mode" is enabled.
[Fig.AR2.4.4-2. Display switching mode]

• The change in the reference image display mode is applied starting with the next exposure
after the reference image fixed preview button is turned on or off.
• By default, the reference image fixed preview button is off ("display switching mode").
• The on or off state of the reference image fixed preview button is maintained while
exposure is performed continuously using the same one protocol. The on or off state is
aborted and returned to the default when the Ready selection is changed. Note that the on or
off state is maintained if the Ready selection is changed between RF protocols.
• When a protocol whose exposure type is RF is selected for Ready, the reference image
fixed preview button is enabled, making it possible to switch between the on and off states.
• When a protocol whose exposure type is other than RF is selected for Ready, the reference
image fixed preview button is automatically returned to the default and disabled.
• When no preview image is selected, the reference image fixed preview button is disabled
in the default state.

689
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.5. Live monitor screen

The area where an image is displayed on the reference monitor is called the Image View, and
the area where an image is displayed on the live monitor is called the Live Image View.
• The Live Image View consists of the image display area and preview annotation display area.
• The image display area displays fluoroscopic images or digital cine images captured using
the CXDI-50RF detector. Images displayed in this area differ depending on the combination
of the exposure type and exposure mode and the exposure conditions. (Refer to Table 1
below.)
• When a detector other than the CXDI-50RF is used, the image display area and preview
annotation display area do not display images and preview annotations.
• The image display area of the Live Image View is the same size as that of the Image View.
• The images and preview annotations displayed in the Live Image View are cleared when the
examination ends or is suspended.
• The images and preview annotations displayed in the Live Image View are cleared when you
log out from the system setup screen.
Table 1 Live Image View display during and after exposure

Live Image View display

Detector Exposure type Exposure mode
During exposure After exposure

Other than Radiography or

Static or Stitch Not displayed Not displayed
CXDI-50RF Stitch

Radiography or
Static or Stitch Not displayed Preview image
Stitch

Fluoroscopic LIH display or

Positioning Fluoro
image not displayed
Fluoro
Radiography Not displayed Preview image
CXDI-50RF
Fluoroscopic LIH display or
Fluoro
image not displayed

RF Radiography Not displayed Preview image

Digital cine LIH display or

Digital-cine
image not displayed

690
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Table 2 Additional information displayed in the Live Image View

Radiographic Additional information

image or View Exposure
No. Status Preview Cropping Virtual
dynamic position field
image annotation range collimator
mask mask

Not
1 ✔
captured

Radiographic Image
2 ✔ ✔ ✔ *3) ✔
image display

During
3 ✔ ✔ *1)
exposure
Dynamic
image After
4 exposure ✔ ✔ *3) ✔ ✔ *1)
*2)
*1) Displayed only when the setting of Show virtual collimator is on.
*2) Only when the Live Image View is set to display LIH images after exposure.
*3) Displayed only when the setting of Show peripheral mask is on.

4.6. Reference monitor screen (additional information)

• If exposure is performed with Multi View or Frame View displayed when the setting of Use
live monitor is off, the display method is switched to Single View.
• If exposure is performed with Multi View displayed when the setting of Use live monitor is on,
the captured image is added to the Multi View screen. If exposure is performed with Frame
View displayed, the image switches to the one captured on the Frame View screen. Note that
the display method is switched to Single View only when a radiographic image is captured
with Frame View displayed.
• When the live monitor is used, the image processing performed on the tool palette tool bar or
reference monitor is applied to the image displayed on the reference monitor.
• When the live monitor is used, if you switch to Preview Annotation, Storage Annotation, or
Do not display by using the Info button, the change is applied only to the annotations on the
reference monitor.

691
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Table 1 Reference monitor display for Radiography or Stitch after exposure

Single monitor Dual monitor

configuration configuration
Exposure Display Exposure
Detector After After After
type mode mode After
exposure exposure exposure
exposure (at
(at 2nd (at 1st (at 2nd
1st preview)
preview) preview) preview)

Always
Other 2nd 2nd
Static or display Radiography 1st preview No
than preview preview
Stitch switching or Stitch image change
50RF image image
mode

Always
2nd 2nd
Static or display Radiography Equivalent to No
preview preview
Stitch switching or Stitch 2nd preview change
image image
mode

Always
2nd 2nd
Positioning display Equivalent to No
Radiography preview preview
Fluoro switching 2nd preview change
50RF image image
mode

Display 2nd 2nd

Equivalent to No
switching Radiography preview preview
2nd preview change
mode image image
RF
Fixed
No No No
preview Radiography No change
change change change
mode
Table 2 Reference monitor display for Fluoro and Digital-Cine during and after exposure
(single monitor configuration)

After exposure
Exposure Exposure During
Detector No Image Loop Playback
type mode exposure LIH setting
setting setting

Loop playback
Positioning Fluoroscopic Fluoroscopic
Fluoro No image of fluoroscopic
Fluoro image image LIH
image

Loop playback
Fluoroscopic Fluoroscopic
50RF Fluoro No image of fluoroscopic
image image LIH
image
RF
Loop playback
Digital cine Digital cine
Digital-Cine No image of digital cine
image image LIH
image

692
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Table 3 Reference monitor display for Fluoro and Digital-Cine during and after exposure
(dual monitor configuration)

After exposure
Exposure Exposure During Loop
Detector Display mode
type mode exposure LIH setting Playback
setting

Positioning Always display

Fluoro No change No change No change
Fluoro switching mode

Fluoro No change No change No change

Display switching Loop

50RF mode Digital cine playback of
Digital-Cine No change
RF image LIH digital cine
image

Fixed preview Fluoro No change No change No change

mode Digital-Cine No change No change No change

4.7. Preview annotations (when the live monitor is used)

Where preview annotations are displayed

Live monitor Reference monitor

Preview annotation display area

Image display area

Screen area

• Preview annotations are displayed on both the live monitor and reference monitor.
• The items to be displayed in preview annotations depend on the system settings, and the
same items are displayed on the live monitor and reference monitor.
• Captions and units to be displayed are also the same for the live monitor and reference
monitor.

693
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• The settings of the character color, character font, and character size for preview annotations
are also the same for the live monitor and reference monitor.
• Different values are displayed for the individual items in preview annotations, depending on
the images displayed on the respective monitors.
• On the live monitor, preview annotations are displayed at the left and right ends of the top and
bottom parts of its screen area, respectively. On the reference monitor, preview annotations
appear at different positions because they are displayed at the left and right ends of the top
and bottom parts of its image display area.
• Preview annotations on the live monitor stay displayed all the time, unlike those on the
reference monitor.
• If the setting of Show patient information on StartExam is on, the resulting information is
displayed on the live monitor and reference monitor when the protocol uses the CXDI-50RF
detector. When the protocol uses any other detector, the information is displayed only on the
reference monitor.
• When the live monitor is used, the displayed frame number is cleared after the end of
exposure, if "No Image" is selected in Dynamic Image Reproduction Settings on the live
monitor.

4.8. Live monitor image processing UI

[Fig.AR2.4.8-1. After fluoroscopic imaging (left: live monitor; right: reference monitor)]

[Fig.AR2.4.8-2. After clicking the "LIH Save" button (left: live monitor; right: reference monitor)]

694
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• When the live monitor is used, the live monitor image processing UI allows a fluoroscopic
image displayed on the live monitor to be rotated clockwise by 90 degrees or flipped
horizontally or vertically before saving the image.
When a fluoroscopic image is captured in non-subdivisional acquisition mode, the tool bar
consists of the Rotate 90° Clockwise, Horizontal Flip, Vertical Flip, LIH Save, and Fluoro
Save buttons.
When a radiographic image or digital cine image is captured in non-subdivisional acquisition
mode, the tool bar consists of the Rotate 90° Clockwise, Horizontal Flip, and Vertical Flip
buttons.

• Normally, the live monitor image processing UI is hidden. It is displayed after the capturing of
a digital cine image or fluoroscopic image or the capturing of a radiographic image using an
RF protocol when the live monitor is used.
• The LIH Save and Fluoro Save buttons are hidden when:
• Exposure starts;
• The examination screen switches to another screen;
• The current image is switched in the Multi View screen;
• The current image is switched in the Frame View screen;
• The study ends;
• The preview protocol is switched;
• The preview thumbnail is switched;
• The format is changed to other than 1 x 1 during subdivisional acquisition;
• The Fluoro Save operation is complete;
• A fluoroscopic image saved using LIH Save is transferred immediately after the save
operation; or
• The live monitor image is hidden in any case other than the above.

695
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• The Rotate 90° Clockwise, Horizontal Flip, and Vertical Flip buttons are hidden when:
• Exposure starts;
• The examination screen switches to another screen (*1);
• The study ends; or
• The live monitor image is hidden in any case other than the above.
• The Rotate 90° Clockwise button is hidden when:
• The format is changed to other than 1 x 1 during subdivisional acquisition (*2).
(*1) If the transition to the examination screen occurs in this condition, the Rotate 90° Clockwise, Horizontal
Flip, and Vertical Flip buttons are displayed again.
(*2) If the format is changed to 1 x 1 in this condition, the Rotate 90° Clockwise button is displayed again.
• By default, the live monitor image processing UI is displayed in the center of the left side of
the Live Image View.
• While the live monitor image processing UI is displayed, you can always move it by dragging
it.
• The position of the live monitor image processing UI is stored even after the software is
restarted.
• The save processing performed when the LIH Save or Fluoro Save button is clicked is the
same as that initiated by the LIH Save or Fluoro Save button involved in the fluoroscopic
playback. Differences are as follows.
• When the reference image display mode is the "fixed preview mode" and the LIH Save or
Fluoro Save button is clicked, the preview selection is not switched even if "LIH Save" or
"Fluoro Save" is successfully executed.
• Even if "LIH Save" or "Fluoro Save" is being executed, no animation is displayed on the
timeline that indicates that the save processing is in progress.
• If "LIH Save" or "Fluoro Save" is executed in the Multi View or Frame View, the switch to
the Single View does not occur.
• When the LIH Save or Fluoro Save button is clicked, the rotation, horizontal flip, vertical
flip, brightness, and contrast settings of the live monitor are applied to the saved image
and the preview image on the reference monitor. (Negative/positive inversion is not
applied.) Note that, when the Fluoro Save button is clicked after the LIH Save button
is clicked, the image processing for the preview image on the reference monitor is not
affected.
• When the Rotate 90° Clockwise button is clicked, the image displayed on the live
monitor is rotated clockwise by 90 degrees. Clicking the Horizontal Flip button flips the
image horizontally, and clicking the Vertical Flip button flips the image vertically.
• When the NoDisplayRotateButton.xml file is placed in the CCS-D folder, the Rotate 90°
Clockwise button is not displayed if the setting of Subdivisional acquisition is on in the
service tool settings and an RF protocol is selected. In the case of normal installation, the
NoDisplayRotateButton.xml file is not found in this folder.
• When the NoDisplayFlipVertical.xml file is placed in the CCS-D folder, the Vertical Flip
button is not displayed. In the case of normal installation, the NoDisplayFlipVertical.xml file is
not found in this folder.
• An alert is displayed if the switch to the subdivisional acquisition mode occurs when the
image is rotated by 90 or 270 degrees as a result of "default image rotation angle for the
protocol" or "image rotation using the Rotate 90° Clockwise button." If this alert is displayed,
the image rotation is returned to 0 degrees.
• The preview after imaging reflects the condition resulting from clicking the Horizontal Flip or
Vertical Flip button.
According to the setting you make by selecting the service tool >
[X-ray Generator and Sensor] > [X-Ray Generator] > [Option setting] > [Enable flip
operation from console] check box (default: off), the Vertical Flip and Horizontal Flip button
work as described below. (For details, refer to V2.02 new functions s21127.)

696
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

■ When the setting of [Enable flip operation from console] is off

• If you click the Horizontal Flip button after imaging, the image is displayed with the default
horizontal flip setting applied to the protocol.
• If you click the Vertical Flip button after imaging, the image is displayed with the default
vertical flip setting applied to the protocol.
• When imaging is performed using the same protocol, clicking the Vertical Flip or Horizontal
Flip button after imaging displays the image by applying the vertical or horizontal flip setting
used in the last imaging performed with that same protocol.
■ When the setting of [Enable flip operation from console] is on
• When the preview image during fluoroscopy is displayed on the live monitor and the vertical
or horizontal flip information is sent from the X-ray generator
If you click the Vertical Flip or Horizontal Flip button, the vertical or horizontal flip
information sent from the X-ray generator is applied to the flip setting specified with the
Vertical Flip or Horizontal Flip button for the currently displayed image.
• When the vertical or horizontal flip setting is sent from the X-ray generator during fluoroscopy
The preview image during fluoroscopy on the live monitor reflects the condition resulting from
clicking the Vertical Flip or Horizontal Flip button.
• When the preview image during digital cine imaging is displayed on the live monitor and the
vertical or horizontal flip information is sent from the X-ray generator
If you click the Vertical Flip or Horizontal Flip button, the vertical or horizontal flip
information sent from the X-ray generator is applied to the flip setting specified with the
Vertical Flip or Horizontal Flip button for the currently displayed image.
• When the vertical or horizontal flip setting is sent from the X-ray generator during digital cine
imaging
The preview during digital cine imaging reflects the condition resulting from clicking the
Vertical Flip or Horizontal Flip button.
• When the preview image is displayed on the live monitor and the vertical or horizontal flip
information is sent from the X-ray generator
If you click the Vertical Flip or Horizontal Flip button, the vertical or horizontal flip
information sent from the X-ray generator is not applied.
• When the preview image is displayed on the live monitor and the vertical or horizontal flip
information is sent from the X-ray generator
The preview image after imaging does not reflect the vertical or horizontal flip information
sent from the X-ray generator.

4.9. Dynamic Image Reproduction Common Settings (System Settings)

The Dynamic Image Reproduction Common Settings area allows you to select the image
reproduction status separately for fluoroscopic images and digital cine images when dynamic
image exposure is finished or when preview images are selected.
• The dynamic image reproduction statuses that can be selected for fluoroscopic images and
digital cine images are as follows.

Setting of Use live monitor: Setting of Use live monitor: On

Off Reference monitor Live monitor

• No image
• LIH • No image
• LIH
• Loop Playback • LIH
• Loop Playback

697
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• Depending on the value of "Use live monitor," the display of the Dynamic Image Reproduction
Common Settings area changes. When on, the reference monitor setting UI and live monitor
setting UI are displayed. When off, only one setting UI is displayed.
• Only one image reproduction status can be selected for fluoroscopic images and digital cine
images, respectively.
• During a study, this setting is disabled and cannot be edited.
• The items of Dynamic Image Reproduction Common Settings can also be set using the
service tool, and these settings are linked with the system settings of CCS.
When setting the items using the GUI of the system screen
[System screen] > [System settings] > [Dynamic Image Reproduction Common
Settings]
> [Reference Monitor]
Fluoro: "LIH (default)" or "Loop Playback"
Digital-cine: "LIH" or "Loop Playback (default)"
> [Live Monitor]
Fluoro: "No Image" or "LIH (default)"
Digital-cine: "No Image" or "LIH (default)"

When setting the items using the service tool

[System Setting] > [Application Setting] > [Dynamic image] > [Live monitor]

4.10. Dynamic Image Reproduction Settings (Protocol Workspace Settings)

The Dynamic Image Reproduction Settings area allows you to select the image reproduction
status for each protocol workspace when dynamic image exposure is finished or when preview
images are selected. This setting area is displayed when the [Fluoro] or [Digital cine] tab is
selected. You can also select between "Protocol Preset" for applying the settings for each
protocol workspace and "Generic Preset" for applying the dynamic image reproduction common
settings.
• When the live monitor is used, you can select the dynamic image reproduction settings for
the reference monitor.
• The dynamic image reproduction settings you can select for each protocol workspace are
shown below.

698
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Setting of Use live monitor: On

Setting of Use live monitor: Off
Reference monitor Live monitor

• No image
• LIH
• LIH • Not available.
• Loop Playback
• Loop Playback

5. Additional information about live monitor operations

5.1. Information about version upgrading

The use of the live monitor is supported in V2.00 and later.
• Dynamic Image Reproduction Common Settings (System Settings)
• When V2.00 is installed or the version is upgraded from V1.30 or earlier, the default
settings are as shown below.

Setting of Use live Setting of Use live monitor: On

Exposure type
monitor: Off Reference monitor Live monitor

Fluoro LIH LIH LIH

Digital-cine Loop Playback Loop Playback LIH

• When the version is upgraded from V1.40 or later, the default settings are as shown
below.

Setting of Use live monitor: On

Setting of
Setting of the Setting of the Setting of the
Exposure Use live
previous version: previous version: previous version:
type monitor:
No Image LIH Loop Playback
Off
Live Reference Live Reference Live Reference

The
setting
in effect
when the No Loop
Fluoro LIH LIH LIH LIH
version is Image Playback
upgraded
is
inherited.

The
setting
in effect
Digital- when the No Loop Loop
LIH LIH LIH
cine version is Image Playback Playback
upgraded
is
inherited.

699
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• Dynamic Image Reproduction Settings (Protocol Workspace Settings)

• When V2.00 is installed or the version is upgraded from V1.30 or earlier, the "Generic
Preset" settings are selected by default. As the dynamic image reproduction settings for
each protocol workspace, "LIH" and "Loop Playback" are selected for Fluoro and Digital-
cine, respectively.
• When the version is upgraded from V1.40 or later, the default settings are as shown
below.

Setting of Use live monitor: On

Setting of Use live Setting of Setting of

Exposure type Setting of
monitor: Off the previous the previous
the previous
version: No version: Loop
version: LIH
Image Playback

The setting in
effect when
Loop
Fluoro the version is LIH LIH
Playback
upgraded is
inherited.

The setting in
effect when
Loop Loop
Digital-cine the version is LIH
Playback Playback
upgraded is
inherited.

5.2. Automatic expansion of the panel buttons

In the case of a radiographic image, the "Image Processing (default)," "Measurement," and
"Annotation" panel buttons are displayed in the lower right of the reference monitor screen. In
the case of a dynamic image, the "Image Processing," "Measurement," "Annotation," and "View
(default)" panel buttons are displayed in the lower right of the screen. With the default settings,
the "Image Processing" panel is automatically expanded after radiographic image capturing and
the "View" panel is automatically expanded after dynamic image capturing. ([System screen] >
[Customize Display] > [Examination Screen Display] > [Auto-Expanding Panels])
• When the exposure mode is Fluoro or Digital-cine, the "View" panel is automatically
expanded at the start of exposure.
Note that the panel is not automatically expanded if any of the following conditions is met.
Condition 1: The setting of Use live monitor is on, and the "fixed preview mode" is selected
for displaying reference images.
Condition 2: The setting of Use live monitor is off, and "No Image" is selected in Dynamic
Image Reproduction Settings.

5.3. Digital cine playback

When the live monitor is used, if exposure starts with digital cine or fluoroscopic images being
played back for the preview on the reference monitor, the playback of digital cine images is
automatically stopped.

700
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

5.4. Behavior of the image processing parameters

• When the live monitor is used, only the parameters that are changed for the image in the
Live Image View of the live monitor are inherited, regardless of whether the display mode is
"display switching" or "fixed preview." The parameters that are changed for the image in the
Image View of the reference monitor are not inherited.
When the live monitor is used, the parameters mentioned below cannot be inherited as they
are normally inherited.
Fluoro: Image processing parameters for fluoroscopic imaging, except Vertical Flip,
Brightness, and Contrast
Digital-cine: Image processing parameters for digital cine imaging, except Vertical Flip,
Brightness, and Contrast
* Vertical Flip can be implemented by using Rotation and Horizontal Flip in combination.
• When the live monitor is used, parameter changes made using the jog/shuttle device are
intended for the image displayed on the live monitor. The image displayed on the reference
monitor cannot be changed using the jog/shuttle device.
• When the live monitor is used, only the parameters that can be changed for the image in
the Live Image View of the live monitor are inherited (Rotation, Horizontal Flip, Vertical Flip,
Brightness, and Contrast). Negative/Positive Inversion is not inherited, as before.
According to the setting you make by selecting the service tool >
[X-ray Generator and Sensor] > [X-Ray Generator] > [Option setting] > [Enable flip
operation from console] check box (default: off), the parameters are inherited as described
below. (For details, refer to V2.02 new functions s21127.)
• When the setting of [Enable flip operation from console] is on and the live monitor is
used, only the Brightness and Contrast parameters that are changed for the image in the
Live Image View of the live monitor are inherited, regardless of whether the display mode is
"display switching" or "fixed preview." The parameters that are changed for the image in the
Image View of the reference monitor are not inherited.
When the live monitor is used, the parameters mentioned below cannot be inherited as they
are normally inherited.
Fluoro: Image processing parameters for fluoroscopic imaging, except Brightness and
Contrast
Digital-cine: Image processing parameters for digital cine imaging, except Brightness and
Contrast
• When the setting of [Enable flip operation from console] is on and the live monitor is used,
only the Brightness and Contrast parameters that are changed for the image displayed on the
live monitor are inherited. Negative/Positive Inversion is not inherited, as before.

5.5. Virtual collimator

• When the live monitor is used, the virtual collimator is displayed on the live monitor during
dynamic image exposure or after exposure, according to the system setting.
• When the live monitor is used, the virtual collimator is not displayed on the reference monitor.

5.6. View position mask

When the live monitor is used, the view position mask is displayed both on the live monitor and
reference monitor after radiographic image exposure. During and after dynamic image exposure,
the view position mask is always hidden because there is no image outside the view position.

701
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

5.7. Masking
When the live monitor is used, the images on the live monitor are masked when they are
displayed after imaging. This is not affected by the Mask button of the reference monitor.
Table 1 Mask display on the live monitor (radiographic images)

Setting of Show peripheral mask Peripheral mask operation

Off -

On ●
-: The peripheral mask is not applied to images after imaging.
●: The peripheral mask is applied to images after imaging.
Table 2 Mask display on the live monitor (dynamic images)

Setting of Show Dynamic Image Reproduction Settings

peripheral mask No Image LIH

Off - -

On - -
-: The peripheral mask is not applied to images after imaging.
●: The peripheral mask is applied to images after imaging.

5.8. Free annotations

When the live monitor is used, all free annotations are displayed only on the reference monitor.

5.9. Measurement objects

When the live monitor is used, all measurement objects are displayed only on the reference
monitor.

5.10. Past study image reference function

The use of the past study image reference function with the live monitor is supported in V2.02
and later.
When this function is enabled, you can have the captured image and a past study image
displayed on different monitors during imaging and reference a past study image even while
imaging is in progress.

5.10.1. Past Image pane

• The Past Image pane displays images from past studies that can be referenced in the
examination screen.
• When the past study image reference function is enabled, the Past Image pane is displayed.
When the function is disabled, the Past Image pane is hidden.
<How to enable the past study image reference function>
In V2.02, the past study image reference function is enabled only when the
"UsePastImageReference.xml" file is found in the CCS installation folder (CCS-D) at the
start of CCS. When the file is not found, the function is disabled. By default, since the
CCS-D folder does not contain the "UsePastImageReference.xml" file, this function is
disabled. It is not necessary to write any data in the "UsePastImageReference.xml file."

702
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

[Fig.AR2.5.10.-1. After fluoroscopic imaging (left: live monitor; right: reference monitor)
with the past study image reference function enabled]

[Fig.AR2.5.10.-2. When a past study image thumbnail button is clicked after fluoroscopic
imaging (left: live monitor; right: reference monitor) with the past study image reference
function enabled]

• The Past Image pane is hidden in screens other than the examination screen.
• The following controls are provided in the Past Image pane.
• Past study image thumbnail button
• Change button
[Fig.AR2.5.10.-3. Past Image pane]

Past study image thumbnail button

• The past study image thumbnail button displays a thumbnail image, exposure mode,
instance number, rejection information, and copy information (an icon in the case of a copied
image).
Icons are not displayed when RF rejection is used for output selection. (Since past study
images are not output during a study, no icon needs to be displayed for choosing whether to
output images or not.)
• A thumbnail button is displayed, regardless of the exposure mode of the selected image.

703
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• When a past study image is selected, a thumbnail image is displayed. Also, the past study
image thumbnail button is enabled and a preview image can be selected.
• When a past study image is not selected, a thumbnail image is hidden. Also, the past study
image thumbnail button is disabled and a preview image cannot be selected.

Change button
• This button lets you select a past study image manually.

5.10.2. Selecting a past study image

• Automatic selection of a past study image
• When the past study image reference function is enabled, the most recent past study
image of the same patient is automatically selected in the following cases.
• A study is started.
• The information of a patient being studied is edited.
The "same patient" mentioned above refers to a patient having the same patient name
and patient ID.
• The "most recent past study image of the same patient" mentioned above refers to the
first image of the first protocol contained in the latest past study implemented for the same
patient.
First protocol:
Of the protocols contained in the latest past study, this refers to the one whose
series number is 1.
First image:
Of the images contained in the first protocol, this refers to the one whose instance
number is 1.
• If the first protocol contained in the latest past study implemented for the same patient is
the Stitch protocol, a stitched image is selected. If the Stitch protocol does not contain any
stitched image, the study starts with no past study image selected.
• If there is no past study for the same patient, the Past Image pane is hidden.
• Manual selection of a past study image
• When the past study image reference function is enabled, you can select and change a
past study image manually.
• Clicking the Change button displays the past study image selection screen. When the
live monitor is used, the past study image selection screen is always displayed on the
reference monitor.
• When you complete the selection of a past study image in the past study image selection
screen, the screen closes and the thumbnail image is changed.
• After the past study image is changed, the preview image selection in effect when you
click the Change button is applied.

704
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

5.10.3. Past study image selection screen

• The past study image selection screen allows you to select and change past study images of
the same patient. The controls described below are provided in this screen.
[Fig.AR2.5.10.3-1. Past study image selection screen displayed after the Change button is
clicked]

Past List
• The Past List shows all the past studies in which images are found for the patient being
studied. Note that the studies in the imported database are excluded.
• The same conditions that are used during the automatic selection of a past study image are
used to judge whether the patient is the same.
• When the past study image selection screen is displayed, the past studies found using the
current patient ID and patient name as search conditions are listed.
• If all the search results cannot be displayed in the Past List, a scroll bar appears.
• The Past List shows past studies on an order-by-order basis.
• In the Past List, you can select or deselect a single past study. Multiple studies cannot be
selected.
• Immediately after the past study image selection screen is displayed, no study is selected.
• The columns displayed in the Past List are fixed as shown below, regardless of the study list
settings.
• Accession Number
• Study DateTime
• Study Description
• The sorting function and the rearrangement of the columns are based on the patient list rules
of other screens.
A column remains sorted even after you switch to another screen. If you shut down, the
column you sorted last and its sorting direction are retained and applied at the next startup.
If the sorted column that was retained is set to be hidden, the first column is sorted in
ascending order.
• The default sorting order is the descending order of the study date and time.

705
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Protocol list
• When a past study is selected in the Past List, the protocol list displays the study information,
protocol information, and image information of that selected past study.
• When no past study is selected, the protocol list is empty.
• Selecting a single image by clicking the protocol or thumbnail button expanded in the
protocol list completes the selection of a past study image.
• When you complete the selection of a past study image, the past study image selection
screen closes.

Cancel button
• Clicking the Cancel button closes the past study image selection screen. The selected past
study image remains unchanged from the one selected before you clicked the Change
button.
• If exposure starts while the past study image selection screen is displayed, the same
operation that occurs when the Cancel button is clicked is automatically performed.

5.10.4. Other operating specifications applicable when the past study image
reference function is enabled
• Annotation display
• If a past study image is selected as a preview image in the examination screen, "--" is
displayed for the following annotation items of the study information group.
• Total Exposure Time
• Total DAP (mGycm2)
• Total DAP (μGym2)
• Total Absorbed Dose (mGy)
• Total Absorbed Dose (μGy)
• Total AirKerma (mGy)
• Total AirKerma (μGy)
• Multi View screen
• A past study image cannot be selected to be displayed in the Multi View. A past study
image does not appear in the Multi View.
• When the Multi View is displayed in the examination screen, the Past Image pane is
hidden.
• Tool palette tool bar
• When the preview of a past study image is displayed in the examination screen, all the
operations, except the annotation display switching using the Info button, are disabled.
• Image Processing panel
• When the preview of a past study image is displayed in the examination screen, the Image
Processing panel cannot be edited. All the controls contained in the image processing are
disabled.
• Annotation panel
• When the preview of a past study image is displayed in the examination screen, free
annotations cannot be edited using the Annotation panel. All the controls contained in free
annotations are disabled.
• Measurement panel
• When the preview of a past study image is displayed in the examination screen, the
Measurement panel cannot be edited regardless of the exposure mode of the past study
image. All the controls contained in the measurement processing are disabled.

706
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• View panel
• When the preview of a past study image is displayed in the examination screen, the
trimming operation area of the View panel for digital cine and fluoroscopy is disabled.
• Output image
• Past study images cannot be selected for image output immediately after transfer or upon
completion of a study.
• Past List
• If the order selected in the Past List includes a study that contains the image currently
selected as a past study image, the Restart Exam button is disabled. When the study
containing the image currently selected as a past study image is deselected from the Past
List, the Restart Exam button is enabled.
• "No past study image is selected in the examination screen" has been added as a
condition for removing an image.

707
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

5. Maintenance

1. Overview
This part describes the matters that the service engineer requires when conducting maintenance.

708
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Maintenance by Using Various Tools

CCS-NE and CCS-RF are equipped with tools required for various maintenance operations. This
chapter describes the functions of the tools and how to use them.
Tools other than the QC tool and the DB management tool can be called from the [Menu
selection] screen of the service tool.
[Fig.2.-1 Menu selection screen of the service tool]

2.1. Maintenance using the QC tool

To check the functions of detectors, use the QC tool of CCS-NE and CCS-RF. The QC tool has
four functions: calibration, performance test, self-diagnosis, and original data acquisition.

709
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2. Maintenance tool

2.2.1. Overview of the maintenance tool

There are two types of maintenance tool: Ferry Type FPD maintenance tool and 50RF
maintenance tool. The maintenance tool can be called from the [Menu selection] screen of the
service tool.

Ferry Type FPD maintenance tool

This tool is an application for updating the firmware and FPGA of detectors that use the Ferry
protocol for their connection protocol, for downloading logs, and for performing other operations.
Ferry protocol connection detectors with which the Ferry Type FPD maintenance tool can be
used are CXDI-401C/G, CXDI-401C/G Compact, CXDI-501C/G, CXDI-70C/G Wireless, CXDI-
80C/G Wireless, CXDI-701C/G Wireless, CXDI-801C/G Wireless, CXDI-401C/G Wireless, CXDI-
710C Wireless, CXDI-810C Wireless, and CXDI-410C Wireless.

CXDI50RF maintenance tool

This tool is an application for updating the firmware and FPGA of CXDI-50RF detectors and
power boxes, for downloading logs, and for performing other operations.
The detector with which the CXDI50RF maintenance tool can be used is CXDI-50RF.
The conventional tool software is used to update the firmware and FPGA of Ethernet connection
type detectors (CXDI-40EC/EG, CXDI-40G Compact, CXDI-50C/G, CXDI-55C/G, and CXDI-
60C/G) and perform other operations.
For details of how to operate this software, refer to the "Tool Software Operation Manual"
contained in the Option Unit Manual.

710
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.2. Starting the maintenance tool

To start the maintenance tool, click [Maintenance Tool] of the service tool.
[Fig.2.2.2.-1 Menu selection screen of the service tool]

711
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

For CCS-NE, the Ferry Type FPD maintenance tool modal screen is displayed after the menu
selection.
[Fig.2.2.2.-2 Ferry type FPD maintenance tool screen]

For CCS-RF, the following window is displayed after the menu selection.
[Fig.2.2.2.-3 Maintenance Tool Select Window]

712
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.3. Ferry Type FPD maintenance tool

2.2.3.1. GUI of the Ferry Type FPD maintenance tool

On the screen shown in [Fig.2.2.2.-3], click the Ferry Type FPD Maintenance Tool button to
start the [Ferry type FPD maintenance tool] screen.
[Fig.2.2.3.-1 Ferry type FPD maintenance tool screen]

The settings of the Ferry Type FPD maintenance tool are as follows.
• Local IP address:
Enter the IP address of the control PC to connect to the detector.
Usually, it is 192.168.100.10.
• Target IP address:
Enter the IP address of the detector to be connected (Ferry protocol connection detector).
It is 192.168.100.11 by default.
• Detector type:
Enter the type of the detector to be connected (Ferry protocol connection detector).
• Data type:
Select the type of data to update.
dp write (static-1x1):
Writes the detector information file for the static detector.
firm program (normal):
Updates the firmware (normal side).
firm program (backup):
Updates the firmware (backup side).

713
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

fpga config data (normal):

Updates the FPGA code (normal side).
fpga config data (backup):
Updates FPGA code (backup side).
firm boot program:
Writes the firmware start program.
amp ic data write:
Writes the AMP IC data. (This is the menu item for a service engineer of the Canon sales
company to which repair is transferred. It need not be changed in the conduct of normal
service.)
fast fpn data write:
Writes the FPN data for Fast Preview.
gain data write:
Writes gain data.
• Update file:
Click the ... button, and specify the update file or file name and the path from the Explorer
screen.
• From:
This setting can be made if one of the following is selected for [Detector type].
• CXDI-710C-Wireless / CXDI-710C-Wireless-HS
• CXDI-810C-Wireless / CXDI-810C-Wireless-HS
• CXDI-410C-Wireless / CXDI-410C-Wireless-HS
Downloads logs containing data on and after the specified date.
Date:
Specify a day.
Month:
Specify a month.
Year:
Specify a year.
The operation buttons are as described below.
• Update button:
Use this button to update the firmware and FPGA based on the settings of [Detector type],
[Data type], and [Update file].
• Download Log button:
Use this button to download detector logs from detectors. Collect the downloaded detector
logs with the Collection Tool as needed.
A progress bar is displayed until the completion of downloading.
Clicking the Cancel button during downloading cancels the downloading, and deletes the log
being downloaded. This does not delete the logs in the detectors.
If the log size is large, the download time will be long. If a timeout occurs, either improve the
communication environment or specify a shorter period before downloading.
• Detector Version button:
Use this button to read the firmware and FPGA versions and display them. Before performing
an update, use this function to check the versions.

714
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• Detector Setting button:

Use this button to set the speaker volume and the upper limit on the battery charging of a
detector.
Specify the settings for [Local IP address], [Target IP address], and [Detector type] for the
desired detector, and click the Detector Setting button to start the Detector Setting screen.
This is displayed if one of the following is selected for [Detector type].
• CXDI-710C-Wireless / CXDI-710C-Wireless-HS
• CXDI-810C-Wireless / CXDI-810C-Wireless-HS
• CXDI-410C-Wireless / CXDI-410C-Wireless-HS
For each operation, a progress bar is displayed until the completion.
[Fig.2.2.3.-2 Detector Setting screen]

The settings on the Detector Setting screen are as described below.

• Sound Volume:
Select the speaker volume of the detector from [High], [Mid], and [Low].
• Battery Charging Limits:
Select the upper limit on the battery charging of the detector from [100%], [80%], and [60%].
The operation buttons on the Detector Setting screen are as described below.
• Apply button:
Use this button to set each item on the Detector Setting screen for the detector.
• Cancel button:
Use this button to close the Detector Setting screen without setting the items for the detector.
A progress bar is displayed until the completion of settings for the detector.

Reference
• For the detectors handled with this tool, the software (firmware and FPGA) is duplexed
(normal and backup sides) when installed in case a problem occurs such as an update
failure during installation. Usually, the software (firmware and FPGA) on the normal side
runs. Thus, only the software on the normal side must be updated, and the software on the
backup side need not.
Do not update the software on the backup side unless instructed to do so in a service
manual report, etc.

715
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.3.2. Firmware updating operations

[Fig.2.2.3.-3 Firmware updating operations]

At the time of a firmware and FPGA update, the detector model is checked using the update file
name (extension) as shown in [Fig.2.2.3.-3] to prevent malfunctions.

716
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.4. CXDI50RF maintenance tool (function available only in CCS-RF)

2.2.4.1. Starting the CXDI50RF maintenance tool

On the screen shown in [Fig.2.2.2.-3], click the 50RF Maintenance Tool button to start the
[CXDI50RF Maintenance tool] screen.
[Fig.2.2.4.-1 CXDI50RF Maintenance tool screen]

2.2.4.2. CXDI50RF maintenance tool screen configuration

• Detector Info
The detector serial number of the detected CXDI-50RF detector, as well as the firmware and
FPGA version information, is displayed here.
• Power Box Info
The IP address (Target IP) of the detected power box, as well as the firmware and FPGA
version information, is displayed here.
• UpdateControl
Firmware and FPGA updating operations can be performed here.
Target:
Target to which to apply the update program
(Select from the displayed detectors or power boxes.)
Update Program:
Type of the update program
(Refer to "2.2.4.5. Update program types and restrictions on file names.")
Update File:
Set an update file.

717
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.4.3. Updating procedure using the CXDI50RF maintenance tool

1. Obtain the file required for an update from the CXDI website.
2. Set the file obtained in step 1 in a state in which it can be recognized in the PC in which CCS-
RF is installed.
Use Explorer to check the path to this file.
3. Start the 50RF maintenance tool.
4. Specify the [Target] and [Update Program] from the drop-down boxes.
5. Click the Browse button next to the [Update File] item.
The Explorer screen is displayed.
6. Open the path that was checked in step 2, and specify the update file.
The file name is checked, and if it matches the format described in "2.2.4.5. Update program
types and restrictions on file names," the Start button is enabled.
7. Click the Start button.
The update is performed. During the update, a dialog box is displayed.
When the update is completed, the detector connection information is acquired again. If the
connection information is acquired, the end updating dialog box appears.
8. Click the OK button.
The display returns to the [CXDI50RF Maintenance tool] screen.

Reference
• If the firmware is updated, it will be automatically reset (restarted) and the CXDI50RF
Maintenance Tool display is refreshed. (For details of the displayed items, refer to "2.2.4.4.
Displays after updating.")
It takes about three minutes to update the firmware.
• If the FPGA code and the PLD code are updated, they will not automatically restart. Turn on
the power to the power box again, access from the CXDI50RF Maintenance Tool, and check
that the displayed items have been refreshed.
It takes about ten minutes to update the FPGA code.
It takes about three minutes to update the PLD code.

Note
• Keep in mind that if the power is disconnected or a cable is detached and attached during
the operation of the CXDI50RF maintenance tool, you may not be able to access from the
CXDI50RF maintenance tool.
For details of the measures to take in such a case, refer to Chapter 4, "Repair Standards," in
the CXDI-50RF service manual.

718
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.4.4. Displays after updating

• If the information recognized at startup is updated
The updated information is displayed in red to indicate that it is updated normally.
[Fig.2.2.4.-2 Normal update]

• If the Target information recognized at startup is not successfully acquired

The information is displayed in gray to indicate that it is not successfully acquired.
[Fig.2.2.4.-3 Display shown if connection information is not successfully acquired]

• If Target information not recognized at startup is acquired

The information is displayed in red to indicate that a new connection is confirmed.
[Fig.2.2.4.-4 Display shown if Target information not recognized is acquired]

719
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2.4.5. Update program types and restrictions on file names

Detector and power box update programs are of the five types below.
Each file name is subject to naming rules (extension and the character string that must always be
contained).
Files not conforming to the rules are treated as illegal and cannot be used for updating.
[Fig.2.2.4.-5 Update program types and restrictions on file names]

Naming rule/Character string to

Target Update Program Extension
be contained in the file name

Power Box E_Firmware .ehex e_firm

Power Box E_FPGA .erpd e_fpga

CXDI-50RF C_Firmware .ehex c_firm

CXDI-50RF C_FPGA .erpd c_fpga

CXDI-50RF A_CPLD .ejbc a_gather

2.2.4.6. Downloading detector log and power box log

Click the Download Log button on the bottom left of the screen to download detector and power
box logs and save them in ¥SnsPBInf¥SnsLog in the CCS installation folder. For details of the
CCS installation folder, refer to "3.5.3. Deleting the installation folder" in Part 2. This data can be
collected with the Collection Tool.
When the logs are downloaded and saved successfully, the dialog box below will be displayed.
[Fig.2.2.4.-6 Dialog box indicating the successful collection of detector log and power box log]

720
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3. Collection Tool

2.3.1. Overview of the Collection Tool

The Collection Tool is used to collect the various files about CCS-NE and CCS-RF at once.
Select between the two collection modes below according to the collection purpose.
Information collection mode (Collection Mode):
Used to collect the information necessary for analysis if a problem occurs in CCS-NE and
CCS-RF.
Migration mode (Migration Mode):
Used to collect the information necessary for the PC migration of CCS-NE and CCS-RF.
The following types of information can be acquired using the Collection Tool.
1. Various logs, environmental information, settings, language resource files, and files collected
additionally with setting files
* For details of the setting files, refer to 2.3.1.1.
2. DB Backup File: Database backup
(The database to be collected differs depending on the collection mode.)
3. Captured images and information associated with the captured images
4. QC data
(Calibration, self-diagnosis, and performance test results, One Shot LL data)

Reference
• Of the information collected with the Collection Tool, personal information is anonymized
before recorded.
The information is not suitable for use as backups of hospital data for restoration purposes.

721
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.1.1 Additional collection option

The additional collection option can be enabled by placing a setting file. Create the "Thief.xml"
setting file in the CCS installation folder and set the information you want to collect. The set
information will be collected along with other information at the time of information collection.
Given below is an example of the "Thief.xml" format and settings.

<?xml version="1.0"?>
<CollectionThiefSettings xmlns:xsi=http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance
xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema">
<collect>
<sourceDirPath>C:\ProgramData\temp</sourceDirPath>
<destDirName>collect1</destDirName>
<searchPatterns>
<pattern>*.txt</pattern>
<pattern>setting.ini</pattern>
</searchPatterns>
</collect>

<collect>
<sourceDirPath >C:\ProgramData\tool</sourceDirPath >
<destDirName>collect2</destDirName>
<searchPatterns>
<pattern>*.bak</pattern>
</searchPatterns>
</collect>
</CollectionThiefSettings>

collect:
A parent tag added for each collection target. Use this tag once when specifying one
collection target only. When specifying multiple collection targets, add the <collect> tag as in
the example above.
sourceDirPath:
Specify the folder path of the information you want to collect.
destDirName:
Creates a folder with the specified value and stores the collected files into the folder.
If the folder has already been created, a new folder will not be created and the collected
files will be stored into that created folder. In such a case, if a file with the same name as the
collected file exists, the file will be overwritten.
searchPatterns (optional):
An optional setting. Specify the files to collect. Fuzzy search using wildcards (*) is possible.
To specify multiple conditions, add the <pattern> tag.
When the <searchPatterns> and <pattern> tags are omitted, all the files (including those in the
subfolders) under the folder specified in the <sourceDirPath> tag will be targeted.

722
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.2. Starting the Collection Tool

To start the Collection Tool, click [Utility Setting] > [Data Collection] of the service tool.
[Fig.2.3.2. Menu selection screen of the service tool]

723
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.3. Selecting the information to collect

[Fig.2.3.3. Screen for selecting the information to collect]

Select a collection mode.

• Collection Mode (information collection)
• Migration Mode (migration)
Select the information to collect.
Place a check mark next to the desired items.
• Log files and setting information (various logs, environmental information, settings, language
resource files)
This item is required, so the check mark cannot be removed.
• DB back up data (database backup files)
For [Migration Mode], this item is required, so the check mark cannot be removed.
• Exposure image (information associated with captured images)
• QC result (execution results of QC including calibration, One Shot LL data)
For [Migration Mode], this item is required, so the check mark cannot be removed.

724
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.4. Refining a search for the images to collect

2.3.4.1. Entering refined search conditions

[Fig.2.3.4.1.-1 Entering the refined search conditions for the images to collect]

If you place a check mark next to [Exposure Image] in 2.3.3., enter the refined search conditions
for the images to collect.
Patient information and study dates can be used as refined search conditions.
• Patient ID
• Patient Name
As refined search conditions, enter a patient ID and a patient name.
The entries made for these items must perfectly match the patient information registered in
the database.
• Study Date From
• Study Date To
As refined search conditions, enter a range of study dates.
The search is refined to the studies whose images were taken on the dates between [Study
Date From] and [Study Date To].
If you click the drop-down button during input, you can set a specific date from the calendar
display.
After entering refined search conditions and clicking the Next button, a refined search is
performed, and relevant data is displayed.

725
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

[Fig.2.3.4.1.-2 Calendar display]

726
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.4.2. Refined search result display

[Fig.2.3.4.2.-1 Refined search result display screen]

The studies matching the refined search conditions are displayed. On the list, place a check
mark next to the study containing the images to collect.
The images contained in the study are displayed as thumbnails.
If the images concerned are dynamic ones, they are displayed with a blue frame as shown on
the right side of [Fig.2.3.4.2.-2].
[Fig.2.3.4.2.-2 Difference between thumbnail displays]

Clicking the Check All button causes a check mark to be placed on all displayed studies, so that
all studies are subject to collection.

727
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.5. Collecting QC results

[Fig.2.3.5. QC Result display screen]

If you place a check mark next to [QC Result] in 2.3.3., the quality check test result data is
collected.
On this screen, a history of QC tests conducted with CCS so far is listed.
Place a check mark next to the necessary items.
Clicking the Check All button causes a check mark to be placed next to all items. Clicking it
again causes all check marks to be removed.
When you click the LatestOnly button, a check mark is placed next to the latest QC history item
for each detector.
In Migration Mode, the Check All and LatestOnly buttons are disabled.

728
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.6. Setting the output destination for the data to collect

[Fig.2.3.6.-1 Output destination setting screen]

Specify the output destination for the data to collect.

Either enter the path directly in the [Folder] field, or click the Browse button and specify the
output destination folder from the Explorer screen.
[Fig.2.3.6.-2 Output destination specification GUI screen]

By clicking the Make New Folder button, you can create a new folder in the current path and
specify its name. (Screen on the right side of Fig.2.3.6.-2)
After specifying the output destination, click the Start button.
By changing the date in [From] next to [Date], you can specify the past log collection start date.
In the initial display, the date is 60 days before the current date and time.

729
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.7. Operation during collection

[Fig.2.3.7.-1 Screen displaying the progress during collection]

[Fig.2.3.7.-2 Screen displaying results after collection is completed]

When collection starts, the collection results are displayed according to the progress of processing.
[Success] is displayed for those items for which the collection was successful. [Failed] is
displayed for those items for which the collection failed.
When the collection is completed, Explorer starts, displaying the folder specified as the storage
location. Recover the collected data from the folder.

730
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.3.8. Details of collected data

Data items to be collected are as listed below.

Information
Item to collect Category Migration mode
collection mode

Log files and setting

A Required Required
information

DB Backup B Optional Required

Exposure image C Optional Optional

QC result D Optional Required

731
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

[Fig.2.3.8. Details of collected data]

Collection folder configuration Category Migration target

OutputFolder
YYYYMMDDHHMMSS_Collect
*.xml A ✔
*.config A ✔
*.ini A ✔
*.bat A ✔
screwcap.log A ×
cxdcap.log A ×
cgbig3*.log A ×
cginst*txt A ×
chstudix* A ✔
LiveToolWindowPos.xml A ×
ApLnk
*.ini A ✔
*.txt A ✔
*.config A ✔
*.xml A ✔
CxdiCLCoreLog
*.log A ×
DB
CLIENT.bak B ×
EXAM.bak B ×
MPPS.bak B ×
PRINT.bak B ×
PROTOCOL.bak B ✔
STORE.bak B ×
WORKFLOW.bak B ✔
en-US
*.resources A ✔
*.resources.dll A ✔

732
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Collection folder configuration Category Migration target

Images
YYYYMMDDHHMMSS*
SOP Instance UID.* C ×
SOP Instance UID_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.xml C ×
AddtionalInfo_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.xml C ×
ja-JP
*.resources A ✔
*.resources.dll A ✔
Log
AppLog
*.txt A ×
CruiseGCOMConverter
*.log A ×
LibLog
*.log A ×
*.txt A ×
*.dat A ×
MppsServer
*.txt A ×
*.log A ×
*.dat A ×
PrintServer
*.txt A ×
*.log A ×

*.dat A ×

733
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Collection folder configuration Category Migration target

QCOutputData

Calibration

SerialNumber_SensorInfoID_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS

*CalibrationData.xml D ×

DefPix.dps* D ✔

DefPix.dpsc* D ✔

Gain.gns* D ✔

Gain.gnsc* D ✔

TestResult.xml D ×

ExpMemo.xml D ✔

master D ✔

images

*.* D ×

Failure

Failure*.qrw D ×

SerialNumber_SensorInfoID_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS

*CalibrationData.xml D ×

DefPix*.dps D ✔

DefPix*.dpsc D ✔

DefPix*.dph D ✔

Gain*.gns D ✔

Gain*.gnsc D ✔

Gain*.gnh D ✔

TestResult.xml D ×

images

Mode*.qrw D ×

734
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Collection folder configuration Category Migration target

Constancy
SerialNumber_SensorInfoID_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
*ConstancyData.xml D ×
FlatImage*.qrw D ✔
stSerialNumber_SensorInfoID.txt D ✔
TestResult.xml D ×
SelfDiagnosis
SerialNumber_WorkspaceSensorMapID_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
DefPix*.dps D ✔
stSerialNumber_SensorInfoID.txt D ✔
stSerialNumber_SensorInfoIDSelfDiagnosisData.
D ×
xml
Test*.qrw D ✔
TestResult.xml D ×
SecondMonitor
SecondMonitorSettings.xml A ✔
SnsPBInf
DP
*.dp A ✔
*.ampc A ✔
*.gnc A ✔
SnsLog
PowerboxID_SerialNumber.log A ×
PowerBoxID_SerialNumber
*.zip A ×
SnsLog
*.shk A ✔
StitchOverLapData
OLP_*.raw D ✔
ScrewData_*.xml D ✔

735
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Collection folder configuration Category Migration target

StoreServer
*.txt A ×
*.log A ×
*.dat A ×
zh-CN
*.resources A ✔
*.resources.dll A ✔
Localization resource folder for languages other than Japanese, English, and Chinese
*.resources A ✔
*.resources.dll A ✔
OtherInformation
YYYYMMDD-HHMMSS.xlsx A ×
ccs_registry.xml A ×
dxdiag_ouput.txt A ×
energy-report.html A ×
fileversion_output.txt A ×
ipconfig_output.txt A ×
netsh_output.txt A ×
AntiVirusSoft.txt A ×
AntiSpywareSoft.txt A ×
Smart.txt A ×
CCS_CurrentState.txt A ×
CompleteCollection.txt A ×
CardReader
Input calibration script file A ✔
CrashDumps
*.* A ×

736
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Collection folder configuration Category Migration target

elog
elog_app_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.xml A ×
elog_sec_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.xml A ×
elog_setup_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.xml A ×
elog_system_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.xml A ×
InstallLog
CXDI Controller RF Installer_YYYYMMDD_
A ×
HHMMSS.log
CXDI_MSI_Setup_YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS.log A ×
DBSetup_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.log A ×
Overwrap
ExposureCondition.exe A ✔
ExposureCondition.exe.config A ✔
XdGenConfig.dll A ✔
XdGenConfig.Parameters.xml A ✔
Sedecal.Common.dll A ✔
Log folder A ✔
Studix
Input calibration script file (automatic selection screen) A ✔
csv
All files in the CSV file storage folder A ✔
Input calibration script file (CSV setting screen) A ✔
SqlServer
Dblog
ERRORLOG A ×
ERRORLOG.N A ×
log_NNN.trc A ×
system_health_N_NNNNN.xel A ×
SQL2005LOG
ERRORLOG A ×
ERRORLOG.N A ×
log_NNN.trc A ×

737
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Collection folder configuration Category Migration target

Dbmg
YYYYMMDD
DBMgmt.log A ×
WORKFLOW
Input calibration script file A ✔
Security
securitylog_defender_operational_
A ×
YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.evtx
securitylog_defender_whc_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.
A ×
evtx
Thief
*
*.* A ×

738
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.4. DB management tool

2.4.1. Overview of the DB management tool

The DB management tool is used exclusively by the service engineer to manage the following
databases, used with CCS-NE and CCS-RF.
• STORE (storage output data)
• PROTOCOL (protocol data)
• PRINT (printer output data)
• MPPS (progress management notification data)
• EXAM (examination data)
• CLIENT (patient information acquisition data)
* The LOG database, which existed in earlier versions of the software, is no longer managed in V2.02 or later.
For CCS-NE and CCS-RF, these databases are attached to the CANONDRSYSTEM instance of
the SQL server.
[Fig.2.4.1. Databases]

To execute the DB management tool, execute DBMgmt.exe in the CCS installation folder. For
details of the CCS installation folder, refer to "3.5.3. Deleting the installation folder" in Part 2.
The DB management tool can restore not only databases from the backups made by itself but
also databases backed up with the automatic backup function of CCS-NE and CCS-RF.

Reference
• The database backup data made with the Collection Tool cannot be restored with the DB
management tool.
For the purpose of personal information protection, the Collection Tool anonymizes
patient information. If you need backup data for management in the hospital, use the DB
management tool.
• If CXDI Workflow NE is installed, the WORKFLOW database is added.

739
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.4.2. Functional overview

In addition to the automatic backup function (which is usually enabled), CCS-NE and CCS-RF
have a function for backing up databases manually, and do not require a dedicated backup tool
in normal operation.
Use the DB management tool to restore databases when a fault occurs.
[Table 2.4.2. Functional overview]

Classification Functional overview

Database information reference Referencing of the current status of each database.

Database backup, restoration, detachment, attachment,

Database management
transaction log file compression, and index optimizing

Setting Minimum/maximum memory size of the server

Fault recovery Recovery when a database is damaged

2.4.3. Starting the DB management tool in normal mode

The DB management tool, "DBMgmt.exe," is in the CCS installation folder. For details of the CCS
installation folder, refer to "3.5.3. Deleting the installation folder" in Part 2.
Execute the exe file to read the databases. Log in to start the DB management tool.
While the databases are being read, a status bar is displayed.
[Fig.2.4.3.-1 Status bar at startup]

When the reading of the databases is completed, the [Login] dialog box appears.
[Fig.2.4.3.-2 DB management tool login screen]

You can log in with the following service account.

User name Password Remarks

CxdiService Canonsrvc Default service engineer (dealer)

For details of the password, refer to "1.1. User accounts" in Part 2.
When you log in with the service account, the DB management tool starts.

740
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

[Fig.2.4.3.-3 DB management tool database screen]

2.4.4. DB management tool operation modes

The DB management tool checks the status of the databases when it starts up, and starts up in
the mode suitable for the status.
At startup, the tool checks to see if all the databases attached to the CANONDRSYSTEM
instance can be accessed.
If there is a database that cannot be accessed → The tool starts up in fault recovery (damage)
mode.
If all the databases can be accessed → The tool starts up in normal mode.
The functions that can be used differ depending on which mode the DB management tool starts
up in.
[Table 2.4.4. Functions that can be used in each DB management tool mode]

Mode Function provided

Normal All functions excluding fault recovery

Fault recovery Fault recovery

741
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.4.5. Screens and operations for each function

2.4.5.1. Fault recovery screen (fault recovery mode)

[Fig.2.4.5.1. Fault recovery screen]

If at least one of the databases cannot be accessed normally, the DB management tool starts up
in fault recovery mode.
• Database status:
The status of each database is displayed here.
• Source folder:
If the folder containing the latest backups is successfully acquired from the master database
or the setting file, the path is displayed, and the Browse... button is disabled. If it is not
successfully acquired, click the Browse... button to specify the folder containing the backups.
• Backup files:
Displayed here are the contents (backup times and file names) of the backup files acquired
from the path indicated in the [Source folder] field.
By clicking the Recovery button while backup files are displayed below [Backup files], the
databases will be restored from the backup files.

Note
• When Recovery is performed, all the data including the data in the normal databases is restored
to the contents of the backup files at once in order to prevent inconsistencies in the databases.
• This operation deletes the data that was recorded in the databases after backup.
• In fault recovery mode, only this screen can be accessed. This screen cannot be accessed
in any other mode.

742
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.4.5.2. Database reference screen (normal mode initial screen)

[Fig.2.4.5.2. DB management tool database reference screen (normal mode)]

When the DB management tool starts up in normal mode, the statuses of the databases are
displayed.
Left panel: List of databases
The names of the databases targeted by the DB management tool and their status icons are
displayed here. Information for the database selected here is displayed on the right panel.
The status icons are as shown below.
: Normal status icon
: Detached status icon
: Damaged status icon
Right panel: Database status display field
• Database name:
Displayed here is the name of the database selected from the left panel.
If the database is detached, (Detached) is displayed after the database name.
• Database file information:
Displayed here are the statuses of the database files (with the .mdf extension) and transaction
files (with the .ldf extension) of the database concerned.
The file names, file sizes, file usage rates, and file storage paths are displayed.
• Collation:
Displayed here is the collation sequence of the database referenced.
• Recovery model:
Displayed here is the recovery model (Simple or Full) of the database referenced.
• Active transaction count:
Displayed here is the number of transactions connected to the database referenced.
• Last backup date:
Displayed here is the date and time when the last backup was performed.
• Maintenance – DBCC Reindex:
Displayed here is the maximum index fragmentation rate in a percentage figure with up to
two decimal points. When you click the Re index button, the index is optimized. When the
fragmentation rate is 0%, the Re index button is disabled and appears gray.

743
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• Maintenance – Truncate data / transactionlog:

Transaction log files are compressed here.
• Maintenance – Detachdatabase:
The referenced database is detached here. When a detached database is selected, its status
cannot be referenced, and a display such as the one shown in the right figure of [Fig.2.4.5.2]
appears.
Reference
• Maintenance DBCC Reindex and Maintenance Truncate transaction log are now
performed automatically at the end of CCS if the fragmentation rate exceeds 30% in
V2.15.1 "HB357: Defragmentation”. Therefore, in V2.16.0, this operation is normally not
required.

2.4.5.3. Menucontrols

[Fig.2.4.5.3. Menu controls]

To perform backup (Backup), restoration (Restore), attaching (Attach), and setting change
(Setting), click the corresponding menu control at the top of the screen.
In fault recovery mode, all controls are disabled.

2.4.5.4.Backup
When you click the menu control Backup, the [Backup] screen shown in the left figure of
[Fig.2.4.5.4.-1] is displayed.
Important
• When the databases are backed up while jobs still remain in the process viewer, these jobs
will not be backed up, and only their unprocessed statuses will be backed up. When the
databasesarerestoredfromsuchbackups,inconsistencieswillarisewhereattemptswillbe
madetoprocessnon-existentjobsandthetransferindicatorwillcontinuetoflashtoindicate that
jobs are beingprocessed.
To prevent such inconsistencies from arising, check that no jobs are held in the process
viewer before backing up the databases.

[Fig.2.4.5.4.-1 Backup screen]

744
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

• Database:
The attached databases are displayed here. If not all the databases to be managed that are
listed in 2.4.1. are displayed here, a message appears prompting the user to attach the non-
attacheddatabasesatthebottomofthe[Description]field,andtheBackupbuttonisdisabled.

[Fig.2.4.5.4.-2 Message display]

• Destinationfolder:
The storage destination folder path of the previous backup is displayed here.
The backup destination can be specified with the Browse... button.
• Description:
Memos that can be referenced when the databases are restored can be recorded here. By
default, the field is blank.
• Backupbutton:
When all the databases to be managed are attached and [Destination folder] is set
normally, the Backup button is enabled.
Backup is performed when the Backup button is clicked. During backup, the names of the
databases being backed up and a progress bar are displayed as shown in the right figure of
[Fig.2.4.5.4.-1].
A backup file is stored with the file name [database name]-[YYYYMMDD]-[hhmmss].bak in a
folder in the [YYYYMMDD-hhmmss] format acquired from the execution date and time inside
the Destination folder.

2.4.5.5.Restore
On this screen, the databases can be restored from backup files individually.
This can be performed only if backup files of the same version as that of the installed CCS are
referenced.

Important
• Restoringthedatabasesindividuallygivesrisetoinconsistenciesinthedatabases.Besure
torestoreallthesimultaneouslybackedupdatabasesatonce.
Before restoring the databases, back them up in the current status, just to be on the safe
side.

745
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1. Click the menu control Restore.

The [Restore] screen is displayed.
[Fig.2.4.5.5.-1 Restore screen]

2. On the screen displayed by clicking the Browse... button for [Source folder], specify the
folder containing the backup files to be restored.
[Fig.2.4.5.5.-2 Backup source path specification]

The contents of the backup files in [Source folder] are read, and a list of backup files
contained is displayed in the [Backup files] field. The contents of the file selected from the
[Backup files] field are displayed in the [Backup file header] field.

746
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. Place a check mark next to the backup files to be restored.

[Fig.2.4.5.5.-3 Backup file specification]

Important
• To prevent inconsistencies, be sure to place a check mark next to all the files.
No guarantee is provided for operation if only some of the files are specified and
restored.

4. Click the Restore button.

The databases are restored from the backup files. During restoration, the names of the
databases being restored and a progress bar are displayed.
When the restoration is completed normally, the display returns to the database reference
screen of the DB management tool.

747
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

[Fig.2.4.5.5.-4 Screen displayed during restoration]

(Other specifications related to restoration)

• The backup files created on a system running version V2.01 or earlier contain LOG database
files, but restoring them on a system running V2.02 or later does not restore the LOG
database files.
• It is not possible to restore the WORKFLOW database to an environment in which CXDI
WORKFLOW NE is not installed. (This also applies to attaching.)
• When an attempt is made to execute Restore when not all the databases to be managed are
selected for restoration, the following warning message appears about the risk of restoring
the databases individually.
You are not selecting all files.
This operation may cause the serious problem.
Are you sure you want to do this?

Note
• Only officially released versions (major, minor, and build version changes (for example, 1.0.0.0
→ 2.0.0.0, 1.0.0.0 → 1.1.0.0, and 1.0.0.0 → 1.0.1.0)) are the targets of database restoration.
Such a downgrade that will restore backups with an upper version to a lower version is not
supported, and a warning message is displayed for the user.
• Releases due to revision changes (for example, 1.0.0.0 → 1.0.0.1) are not supported,
either. Because releases due to revision changes can only occur during development, no
messages or anything similar will be output. Restoration between different models, for
example, CCS-RF ⇔ CCS-NE, is not supported, either.
• It is possible to restore the databases created with CCS of a version older than that of the
currently installed CCS, but doing so may cause the detector catalog to return to an older
state. After restoring the databases created with CCS of an older version, be sure to run the
following file, located in the CCS installation folder, to update the detector catalog.
Canon.Medical.DR.ServiceTool.Utility.DetectorUtility.UpDtcCtg.exe
For details of the CCS installation folder, refer to "3.5.3. Deleting the installation folder" in
Part 2.

748
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.4.5.6. Attach
You can re-attach a detached database to the CANONDRSYSTEM instance.
1. Click the menu control Attach.
The [Attach] screen is displayed.
[Fig.2.4.5.6.-1 Attach screen]

2. From the Explorer screen, displayed by clicking the Add button, specify the database file to
be attached.
[Fig.2.4.5.6.-2 Database file specification]

749
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. From the [Attach database] field, select the database contained in the specified database
file.
The database file and transaction file paths are displayed, as shown in the right figure.
[Fig.2.4.5.6.-3 Specification of the database to be attached]

4. Click the Attach button.

The database is attached. When the attaching is completed normally, the display returns to
the database reference screen of the DB management tool.

2.4.5.7. Setting
On this screen, you can set the memory size to be provided by the SQL Server.
1. Click the menu control Setting.
The [Setting] screen is displayed. The minimum and maximum memory sizes of the SQL
Server can be set here.
[Fig.2.4.5.7.-1 Setting screen]

2. Click the Apply button.

The settings are saved.

750
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.4.6. Log output

The DB management tool stores operation logs in the following format.
• Format: [Date/time] [Log type] [Class name] [API name] [Message]

Item Description

Date/time Date and time when the log was output

Log type.
I: Information log
Log type
E: Error log
D: Debugging log

Class name Name of the class for which the log was output.

API name Name of the API for which the log was output.

Message Exceptions, user operation and other information

• Log file output destination: ProgramData¥DBMgmt¥Log¥YYYYMMDD

• Log file name: Fixed at "DBMgmt.log".
If the log file already exists, the new log will be added to the existing log file.
One log file is generated per day.

2.5. Setting the IP addresses of detectors and power boxes

2.5.1. Setting the IP address of the CXDI-50RF power box (only for facilities where
CXDI-50RF is installed)
Connection of only one CXDI-50RF detector is supported by CCS-RF. Usually, therefore, only
one power box is required, and its IP address need not be changed.
If, however, using multiple power boxes with one CXDI-50RF detector, you must change the IP
address of the power box (E board). In this case, an additional LAN card must be added to the
PC at the same time.
The IP address of the 50RF power box can be checked and changed with the method below.
1. On the PC, start the command prompt.
[All Programs] > [Accessories] > [Command Prompt]
2. Enter data for "telnet <IP address>".
The default IP address is "192.168.104.130."
3. Log in to the E board with telnet.
You need not enter the user name or password.
4. After login, enter the following command, and set the IP address.
"ipadr -ip XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX"
Replace XXXX... with the IP address to change.
The IP address that is set here will take effect after the power is turned off → on to the power
box.

751
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

[Fig.2.5.1. Telnet screen]

Reference
• For the IP address to be allocated to the second power box, do not change the fourth
column (do not set the IP address to the same subnet) but change the third column (set the
IP address to another subnet).
IP address of the first power box: 192.168.104.130 (default value)
IP address of the second power box: 192.168.105.130
• By entering the "ipadr" command, you can check the IP address.

2.5.2. Setting the IP addresses of wired connection detectors (CXDI series)

If connecting only one wired connection type detector (CXDI-40EC/EG, CXDI-40G Compact,
CXDI-50C/G, CXDI-55C/G, CXDI-60C/G, CXDI-401C/G, CXDI-401C/G Compact, or CXDI-
501C/G), you need not change the IP address because the default setting is registered as the
predefined setting.
You must change the IP addresses of the second and subsequent detectors only if connecting
multiple wired connection type detectors.
To change the IP address of a detector, access the detector with the Telnet command while the
detector is connected. For details of the setting method, refer to the "Tool Software Operation
Manual" contained in the Option Unit Manual.

2.5.3. Setting the IP addresses of wireless connection detectors (CXDI-Wireless series)

For a wireless connection type detector (CXDI-Wireless series), the service tool (AP/LNK
Configuration Tool) automatically assigns a unique IP address (192.168.100.**) based on the
database registration status when the detector is registered with the link operation.
If you have any problems with the use of this IP address at the installation site, contact Canon.

752
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.6. Sensor Activation Tool

2.6.1. Overview of the Sensor Activation Tool

The Sensor Activation Tool is used to allocate a detector not allocated to a workspace to the
same workspace as that of an allocated detector, using information about the allocated detector.

2.6.2. Functional overview

(1) Allocation
The tool allocates an unallocated detector to the workspace to which a detector registered in
the system is allocated.
[Fig.2.6.2.-1 Outline of the allocation function]

753
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

(2) Replacement
The tool allocates an unallocated detector to the workspace to which a detector registered in
the system is assigned, and deletes the registered detector from the system.
[Fig.2.6.2.-2 Outline of the replacement function]

Reference
• For replacement, the detector information is deleted. Use this function only if the detector is
no longer used in the system, as in the examples below.
Examples)
»» Introduce a new purchased detector, and discard the old one
»» Replace the alternative detector used during repair with the repaired one

754
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.6.3. Starting the tool

Execute "SnsActv.exe" in the CCS installation folder to start the Sensor Activation Tool. For
details of the CCS installation folder, refer to "3.5.3. Deleting the installation folder" in Part 2.

2.6.4. Screen and operation

2.6.4.1. Login screen

When you start the Sensor Activation Tool, the login screen is displayed. You can log in with the
default service account.

Note
• The Sensor Activation Tool cannot be started if CCS, service tool, or DB management tool
installer is running. It is not possible to start multiple instances of the tool.

[Fig.2.6.4.1-1 Login screen]

Service account

User name Password Remarks

CxdiAdmin Canononac Default service engineer (corporation)

CxdiService Canonsrvc Default service engineer (dealer)

For details of the password, refer to "1.1. User accounts" in Part 2.

Reference
• After login, an error dialog box appears and the tool terminates in either of the following
cases.
»» No detectors are registered in the system.
»» There are no detectors not allocated to a workspace.

755
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.6.4.2. Screen for selecting a detector not allocated to a workspace

If the login is successful on the login screen, the screen for selecting a detector not allocated to a
workspace is displayed.
On this screen, select the detector to be allocated to a workspace.
[Fig.2.6.4.2-1 Screen for selecting a detector not allocated to a workspace]

(1) Detector which workspace is not allocated to

Of the detectors registered in the system, those that are not allocated to a workspace are
listed.
From the list, select the detector to allocate to a workspace.
The displayed items are as described below.

The name of a detector that is set is displayed here.

Detector name
A detector name can be set with Service tool > Sensor.

Model name The model name of the detector is displayed here.

Detail name The detail model name of the detector is displayed here.

Detector group The detector group of the detector is displayed here.

The date and time when the detector settings were last
Last updated date and time
updated is displayed here.

(2) Next
You can click this button after selecting a detector from the list under [Detector which
workspace is not allocated to].
The screen for selecting an allocated detector is displayed.
(3) Cancel
Use this button to interrupt the processing and terminate the tool.

756
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Reference
• In the following case, clicking the Next button causes a message dialog box to appear.
»» Detectors allocated to a workspace do not include detectors that are in the same
detector group as that of the selected unallocated detector.
In this case, the tool does not terminate, but you cannot allocate the detector selected
on this screen or replace another detector with it.

2.6.4.3. Screen for selecting an allocated detector

On this screen, you can allocate the detector selected from the screen for selecting a detector
not allocated to a workspace to the same workspace as that of the detector selected from this
screen, and replace the latter detector with the former.
[Fig.2.6.4.3-1 Screen for selecting an allocated detector]

(1) Selected detector information display

Displayed here is information about the detector selected from the screen for selecting a
detector not allocated to a workspace.
Displayed information includes a detector name, detail model name, and detector group.
(2) Detector which workspace is already allocated to
Of the detectors registered in the system, those that meet the following conditions are listed.
• Detector that is in the same detector group as that of the detector selected from the
screen for selecting an unallocated detector
• Detector allocated to a workspace
From the list, select the detector to allocate to a workspace.

757
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

The displayed items are as described below.

The name of a detector that is set is displayed here.

Detector name
A detector name can be set with Service tool > Sensor.

Model name The model name of the detector is displayed here.

Detail name The detail model name of the detector is displayed here.

Detector group The detector group of the detector is displayed here.

Last updated date The date and time when the detector settings were last updated
and time is displayed here.

The name of the workspace to which the detector is allocated is

Workspace name displayed. If two or more workspaces exist, they are delimited by
a comma.

(3) Allocate
The detector displayed in (1) is allocated to the same workspace as that of the detector
selected in (2).
When the allocation process is completed, a message appears and the tool terminates.
(4) Replace
The detector displayed in (1) is allocated to the same workspace as that of the detector
selected in (2).
The detector selected in (2) is deallocated from the workspace and is deleted from the
system.
When the replacement process is completed, a message appears and the tool terminates.
(5) Back
Click this button to return to the screen for selecting a detector not allocated to a workspace.
(6) Cancel
Use this button to interrupt the processing and terminate the tool.

2.6.5. Log output

This tool outputs operation logs.

* For details of the CCS installation folder,

[CCS installation
Output destination refer to "3.5.3. Deleting the installation
folder*]¥Log¥AppLog
folder" in Part 2.

Example) For a 2012/05/24 log

File name SnsActv[yyyyMMdd].txt
SnsActv20120524.txt

2.6.6. Considerations
• Note the differences from detector-dependent system settings.
Examples) X-IF Multi Mode, W53/56 band, addition of an incompatible detector to a Non
Generator Connection environment
• To use the detector deleted with replacement, you must register it in the system again.

758
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

6. Description of Errors

1. Definitions of Errors
Types of CCS-NE and CCS-RF errors are listed below, together with descriptions.

Error level classification Description

This is a fatal condition. It requires a service call.

Imaging cannot be continued.
FATAL (Fatal Error)
Examples:
Fatal error
The detector does not respond.
No connection can be made to the DB.

In this condition, the user must take some kind of action.

Imaging can be continued once the fault is remedied.
Imaging failed.
ERROR
Immediate display error Examples:
(imaging cannot be continued) X-ray exposure was performed, but no images were
transferred.
An error condition occurred in the detector, and imaging
could not be continued.

It is advisable for the user to take some kind of action.

ERROR In this condition, imaging can be continued even if no action
is taken.
Check later error
(imaging can be continued) Example:
DICOM communication error

In this condition, user action is not absolutely necessary.

The user need not take any immediate action.
Imaging can be continued.
WARNING
Examples:
Warning
There is not enough film left.
A database backup is required.
The detector temperature is slightly high.

759
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Error Indication

2.1. Error button and warning button

When a "FATAL," "ERROR," or "WARNING" error occurs, the error button or the warning button
appears in the GUI header area. The button display flashes for five seconds.

Error button Warning button

760
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2. Error dialog box

If a "FATAL" or "ERROR" error occurs, an error dialog box appears.

If a "WARNING" error occurs, an error dialog box appears by clicking the warning button.
If the "ERROR" error that occurs is a check later error (imaging can be continued), the error
dialog box will not appear immediately, but only the error button will appear. By clicking the error
button, the error dialog box will appear.
[Error dialog box]

Items to be displayed in an error dialog box

Error Code Code that identifies the error

Date Date on which the error occurred

Time Time at which the error occurred

Category FATAL / ERROR / WARNING

Description Information about the error that occurred

Additional Information Detailed information about the error that occurred

761
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. Operations Performed When Errors Occur

3.1. Operations performed when a FATAL error occurs

If a FATAL error occurs, an error dialog box will appear no matter which status the operation GUI
is in.
1. The error button appears in the header area, and an error dialog box appears. FATAL is
shown as the category.
2. If you click the OK button, the error dialog box closes, and the display transfers to the system
screen.
3. If no other errors have occurred, the error button does not appear while the error dialog box
is displayed.
* If, in step 2 above, a FATAL error occurs while an exam is in progress, the exam is suspended after the error dialog
box is closed, and the display transfers to the system screen.
* If an exception occurs during the suspension of the exam or the transfer to the system screen, the user is notified
by a message box that the system must be shut down immediately, and after the message box is closed, the system
shuts down automatically.

While the error dialog box is displayed, the GUI in the background of the error dialog box cannot
be operated. An OK button is placed in the dialog box.
If you switch to the system screen, the error button appears.
The following controls cannot be operated on the system screen.
• Cancel and OK buttons
• QC Tool button
• Logout button

The error level of a calibration error is ERROR, but the operation is the same as that of a FATAL
error.
The following controls cannot be operated on the system screen, in addition to the above.
• Connect GEN button
• Process Viewer button
• Protocol Editor button
• Image Proc button
• DB Backup button

If a FATAL or immediate display error occurs while the screen saver is running, the screen saver
ends.
The screen saver will not start up after a FATAL error occurs.

762
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.2. Operations performed when an ERROR error (immediate display

error) occurs

1. The error button appears in the header area, and an error dialog box appears. ERROR is
shown as the category.
2. If you click the OK button in the error dialog box, the error dialog box closes.
3. After closing the error dialog box, if no other errors have occurred, the error button does not
appear.

Even when the error dialog box is closed, it will re-appear if the error status is not removed. The
time at which the error dialog box re-appears differs depending on the type of the ERROR error
concerned.
Information that can be acquired with the Collection Tool is as described below.
• If another immediate display error has occurred, the next error dialog box appears
immediately after closing the currently displayed error dialog box.
• If multiple immediate display errors have occurred, the error dialog boxes for the immediate
display errors appear in a FILO (first in, last out) sequence. That is, the immediate display
error displayed first is the latest immediate display error. This operation is performed if
multiple immediate display errors occur while an error dialog box is displayed.
• If a FATAL error occurs while an error dialog box is displayed, the operations performed for
the FATAL error take precedence.

While the error dialog box is displayed, the GUI in the background of the error dialog box cannot
be operated. An OK button is placed in the dialog box.
• The error dialog box does not appear while a stitch screen is displayed.
• The error condition and the error button display are cleared when the system is shut down.
• If a FATAL or immediate display error occurs while the screen saver is running, the screen
saver ends.
• You can use the service tool or CCS itself to specify whether to display or hide the error
dialog box for MWL errors E040500005, E040500006, and E040500008.

Setting method
• Setting method using the service tool
[DICOM Setting] > [MWL] > [Detail setting 2] > [WorkList Acquisition Setting] > [Show
DICOM Violation Error Dialog on receiving illegal data]: ON (default)
ON:
Displays an error dialog box when an MWL error (E040500005, E040500006, or
E040500008) occurs.
OFF:
Does not display the error button or error dialog box.
• Setting method using CCS itself
[Connection Settings] > [MWL] > [Show errors in reception data injustice]
ON:
Displays an error dialog box when an MWL error (E040500005, E040500006, or
E040500008) occurs.
OFF:
Does not display the error button or error dialog box.

763
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.3. Operations performed when an ERROR error (check later error)

occurs

While an error dialog box is displayed on the examination screen, fluoroscopic and other kinds
of X-ray exposure cannot be performed because the exposure ready status of the detector has
been canceled. For an error where imaging can be continued, operations can be performed
without interfering with the X-ray exposure by turning off the display of the error dialog box.
• An error code that is defined as an error code with which imaging can be continued is treated
as a check later error.
• If a check later error occurs, an error dialog box does not appear automatically.
• If a check later error occurs, the error button appears.
• When the error button is clicked, an error dialog box appears.
• If another check later error occurs while the error button is displayed, an error dialog box
does not appear, either.
• The error button remains displayed while there is a check later error that has not been
displayed yet.
• The error button is no longer displayed if there is no more check later error that has not been
displayed.
• The check later error that is displayed by clicking the error button is the latest check later
error. That is, errors appear in a FILO (first in, last out) sequence.
• If a check later error occurs, but a check later error with the same error code is already
in the display queue, the former check later error will not be added to the display queue.
Thus, errors with the same error code are displayed only once. This is referred to as "error
suppression."
• Error suppression is also performed on the check later error for which an error dialog box is
displayed.
• If error suppression is performed, the following alert appears after you check the error on
which suppression is performed: "N identical error(s) occurred. Check the Log Viewer. OK,"
where N is a natural number representing the number of errors suppressed.
• Even if check later errors with the same error code do not occur in succession, the errors will
be grouped together for error suppression if they exist in the display queue.
• If a FATAL error occurs while an error dialog box is displayed, the operations performed for
the FATAL error take precedence.
• If an immediate display error occurs while a check later error dialog box is displayed, the
immediate display error appears after closing the check later error dialog box.
• The error condition and the error button display are cleared when the system is shut down.
• You can use the service tool to specify whether to display or hide the error dialog boxes for
image analysis errors.

Setting method
• Setting method using the service tool
[System Setting] > [Application Setting] > [Examination screen 1] > [Display setting] >
[Show image analysis error]: ON (default)
ON:
Displays an error dialog box when an image analysis error (E040E01000) occurs.
OFF:
Displays the error button. By clicking the error button, an error dialog box appears.

764
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.4. Operations performed when a WARNING error occurs

1. The warning button appears in the header area.

2. If you click the warning button, an error dialog box appears. WARNING is shown as the
category.
3. If you click the OK button in the error dialog box, the error dialog box closes. If no other
warnings have occurred, the warning button does not appear.

If you click the warning button, the warnings that are waiting in the display check queue inside
the system appear, as well as the warnings that occurred while the displays were being checked.
After closing the error dialog box, if another warning has occurred, the warning button appears.
Click the warning button again to check the remaining warnings. The sequence in which
the warnings appear when the warning button is clicked is the sequence in which they are
generated. That is, they appear in a FIFO (first in, first out) sequence.
Basically, when the error dialog box is closed, the same warning will not appear. It can happen,
however, that the same warning appears because the warning check is performed again.
While the error dialog box is displayed, the GUI in the background of the error dialog box cannot
be operated. An OK button is placed in the dialog box.

If an error occurs while an error dialog box is displayed, the error dialog box for this error appears
at the end of the warning check.
If a FATAL error occurs while an error dialog box is displayed, the operations performed for the
FATAL error take precedence.
• The warning condition and the warning button display are cleared when the system is shut
down.
• You can use the service tool to specify whether to display or hide a grid warning
(W050501005).

Setting method
• Setting method using the service tool
[System Setting] > [Application Setting] > [Examination screen 1] > [Display setting] >
[Show grid warning]: ON (default)
ON:
Displays a grid warning.
OFF:
Does not display a warning on the examination screen, but does display the grid name of
the detector status in red.

765
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. Error Codes
The error code table is separated from the service manual and supplied as Excel sheets.

766
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

7. Image Processing Techniques

1. Overview
Details of the image processing featured in Canon CXDI Control Software NE and CXDI
Controller RF are presented in the image processing technical manual.
This chapter first describes the basic principle of CXDI and then gives an overview of image
processing.

1.1. Basic Principle of CXDI

The basic principle of CXDI is shown in Fig.1.

The FPD (flat panel detector), which is the heart of the CXDI, consists of fluorescent material and
Canon's own amorphous silicon (a-Si) sensor called “LANMIT” (Large Area New MIS Sensor
and TFT), and the X-rays exposed from the X-ray tube are received at the FPD after undergoing
absorption, scattering and other interactions by the subject.
In response to the X-rays, the fluorescent material of the FPD generates fluorescence. LANMIT,
which is placed directly underneath the fluorescent material, receives this fluorescence, and
converts it into electrical signals.
The electrical signals are then converted into digital signals by the analog/digital (A/D) converter,
and after having been subjected to various forms of image processing, they are output to the
various output media and provided as the images used for diagnosis purposes.
[Fig.1 Basic principle]

767
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

1.2. Overview of Image Processing

The CXDI image processing flow is shown in Fig.2.

The initial stage in this flow is the pre-processing where the characteristics of the pixels of the
FPD are first made uniform using the images obtained by the A/D conversion of the output from
the FPD (referred to here as “raw images”(*1) as the input.

The next stage, diagnosis-use image processing, consists in processing the pre-processed
images (referred to here as “original images”) so that they are turned into the images suited for
diagnosis.
During diagnosis-use image processing, a multiple number of image processing parameters(*2)
can be adjusted interactively to provide the diagnosis images tailored to a variety of requirements.

The CXDI also has an automatic analysis function for analyzing the features of the images using
the original images. At the diagnosis-use image processing stage, the results of this analysis are
used to carry out image processing which is optimally suited to the X-ray dose and physique of
the subjects.
*1: The raw images are the images obtained by LANMIT, and they are of absolutely no concern to the end users.
*2: For details on the parameters which can be adjusted, refer to the operation manual.

[Fig.2 Image processing flow]

As described above, the image processing undertaken by the CXDI can be broadly divided into
three stages: pre-processing, automatic analysis and diagnosis-use image processing. In the
subsequent sections, each of these three stages will be described in detail.

768
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2. Pre-processing
The FPD used by the CXDI is subject to stringent control during the production process, and its
performance is extremely uniform. Nevertheless, a comparison between the pixels which number
several million pixels will reveal some very minor differences in their characteristics. It is the task
of pre-processing to compensate for these characteristics.
This section describes the typical pre-processing carried out by the CXDI.

2.1. Offset Compensation Processing

Even when there is no exposure to the X-rays, the signals output by the FPD have a level which
is not perfectly zero because of the effects of the dark current inside the photodiodes, and the
FPD has a finite offset.
The extent of this offset differs slightly from one pixel to another, and it causes variations in the
level of the signals output and appears as fixed pattern noise on the images.
It is the task of the offset compensation processing to compensate for this offset and make the
level of the signals, which are output when the X-ray dose is zero, uniform for all the pixels.

Fig.3 shows the general concept behind offset compensation processing.

At this processing stage, the offset is compensated for by subtracting the offset images obtained
when there is no X-ray exposure from the raw images which have been taken.
[Fig.3 General concept behind offset compensation processing]

769
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

2.2. Gain Compensation Processing

In the FPD, the gain (sensitivity) of the pixels differs slightly from one pixel to the next. As a
result, the level of the signals which are output vary even when the FPD is exposed to uniform
X-rays.
It is the task of gain compensation processing to compensate for these variations in the gain of
the pixels and ensure that the level of the signals output vis-a-vis the X-ray dose is made uniform
for all the pixels.

Fig.4 shows the general concept behind gain compensation processing.

At this processing stage, the FPD is exposed to virtually uniform X-rays, and treating this X-ray
distribution as uniform, a gain image indicating the differences in the gain among the pixels is
created.
The gain is then compensated for by dividing the gain image from the raw image (or subtracting it
after logarithmic transformation) which has already undergone offset compensation processing.
With the CXDI, the task of creating the gain image described above is referred to as
“calibration”(*3).
*3: For details on calibration, refer to the operation manual.

[Fig.4 General concept behind gain compensation processing]

770
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3. Automatic Analysis
The images taken by the CXDI have a wide dynamic range which extends to about 4 digits.
In order to obtain images suitable for diagnosis, therefore, it is necessary to determine which
part of the dynamic range is valid for diagnosis purposes and to adjust the photographic density
(brightness) appropriately.

Furthermore, the areas which are exposed to the X-rays differ depending on the type of
photography undertaken.
In order to determine which part of the dynamic range is valid for diagnosis purposes, therefore,
it is necessary to recognize which areas on the images were exposed to the X-rays.

The CXDI performs automatic analysis also for the purpose of calculating the exposure index
which has been standardized by the IEC 62494-1(Ed.1.0).

In this way, the CXDI automatically analyzes the various features of the images.
This section describes the typical automatic analysis which is performed by the CXDI.

771
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.1. Radiation Field Recognition

The FPD used by the CXDI has a large effective area and, depending on the type of photography
undertaken, the area actually subjected to X-ray exposure may be limited to an area which is
small in comparison with the effective area of the FPD.
In cases like this, it is the task of radiation field recognition to automatically recognize only those
areas which were subjected to the X-ray exposure.

Fig.5 shows the general concept behind radiation field recognition.

With radiation field recognition, the original images which have been pre-processed are provided
as the input, and the straight lines forming the edges of the radiation field are extracted from
among the multiple number of edge components existing within the images using their positions,
intensity and other restrictive criteria.
The area enclosed by the edges of radiation field thus extracted is then recognized as the
radiation field.
Although, with radiation field recognition, it is possible for the radiation field to be recognized
correctly even when the photographs are taken with the radiation field diaphragm tilted at an
angle, photography involving a multiple number of radiation fields as with multiple exposures is
not supported.
[Fig.5 General concept behind radiation field recognition]

The time and effort involved in establishing the photography-related settings are saved and
the throughput can be improved by using the radiation field area recognized here as the initial
value for the cropping process and peripheral mask process (which masks the parts outside the
radiation field)(*4).
*4 If radiation field recognition has failed, the end user must manually set the area for the cropping and peripheral
mask processes. For details on how to do this manually, refer to the operation manual.

772
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.2. Amount of Characteristics Analysis

The CXDI implements gray scale conversion processing so that the photographic density
(brightness) of the ROI (Region of Interest) is made virtually constant regardless of the subject
and dose.
In order to implement processing in this way, the typical pixel value (referred to here as the
“reference pixel value”) of the ROI must be ascertained from the exposure images.
It is the task of amount of characteristics analysis to calculate the reference pixel value
automatically.

Figs. 6 and 7 show the general concept behind amount of characteristics analysis.

Standard pixel value, which is the region to be analyzed, differs from one exposed region to
another so an algorithm suited to each region is used by the CXDI for amount of characteristics
analysis.
The analysis accuracy is improved(*5) by using a method where, for instance, the ROI is
determined directly from the image regions exposed to the X-rays and the ROI average is used
as the reference pixel value as shown in Fig.6 or a method where the ROI is determined from
a histogram of the image regions exposed to the X-rays and its center of mass is used as the
reference pixel value as shown in Fig.7 or by using a combination of both methods.
For details on the gray scale conversion processing, refer to the next section.
*5: If amount of characteristics analysis has failed, the end user must set the ROI manually. For details on how to do
this manually, refer to the operation manual.

[Fig.6 General concept behind amount of characteristics analysis]

[Fig.7 General concept behind amount of characteristics analysis (Histogram analysis)]

773
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.3. Dynamic Range Analysis

To adjust the dynamic range, the CXDI implements processing to ensure that the dynamic range
of the subject is used as the photographic density (brightness) range regardless of the subject's
physique.
In order to undertake this processing, it is necessary to ascertain which part of the dynamic
range is the part that supports the dynamic range of the subject.
It is the task of the dynamic range analysis to calculate automatically the part that supports the
dynamic range of the subject.

Fig.8 shows the general concept behind dynamic range analysis.

In this analysis, the region obtained by subtracting the areas not pertaining to the subject (such
as X-ray shielding or where the X-rays have reached the FPD directly) from the areas exposed to
the X-rays is extracted.
The range from the minimum value to the maximum value in this area is calculated(*6) as the
area that supports the dynamic range of the subject.
Details of the dynamic range adjustment processing will be presented in the next section.
*6: If the dynamic range analysis has failed, the end user must manually set the area that supports the dynamic
range of the subject. For details on how to do this manually, refer to the operation manual.

[Fig.8 General concept behind dynamic range analysis]

774
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

3.4. EI (Exposure Index)

For the general examinations performed by the CXDI, the EI (exposure index) as standardized by
the IEC 62494-1(Ed.1.0) is calculated.
EI is a value which stands in proportion to the exposure dose for a sensor, and it is defined as in
formula 1 below.
[Formula 1]
EI = c0 • g(V)
c0 = 100μGy-1

In this formula, “V” is defined as the value which indicates the central tendency of the relevant
image region.
“g()” is the function for converting V into air kerma K (μGy).
This function is set for each sensor in accordance with the correlation between air kerma KCAL
and VCAL under the calibration conditions.

Here, there are no clear-cut stipulations concerning the method used to calculate V but, as
shown in Fig.9, the region obtained by subtracting the areas not pertaining to the subject (such
as X-ray shielding or where the X-rays have reached the FPD directly) from the areas exposed to
the X-rays is automatically extracted by the CXDI as the relevant image region.
V is the average of this region.
Therefore, EI is the index(*7) that indicates the average exposure dose which has passed
through the subject and arrived at the sensor.
*7: When extraction of the relevant image region has failed, it may not be possible to calculate EI correctly.

[Fig.9 Method of the calculate V]

775
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4. Diagnosis-use Image Processing

The original images which have been pre-processed are not always satisfactory as the images
to be used for diagnosis.
For this reason, they must be converted into images which are suitable for diagnosis.
With the CXDI, this processing is referred to as “diagnosis-use image processing”.

This section describes the typical type of processing conducted by the CXDI.

4.1. Grid Stripe Reduction Processing

Fixed grids are sometimes used in X-ray photography in order to eliminate scattered radiation.

However, with X-ray photography that uses a fixed grid, a stripe pattern caused by the grid may
be formed on the images, and this interferes with the diagnosis.
It is the task of grid stripe reduction processing to reduce this stripe pattern that are caused by
the grid where necessary.

With the logarithmic transformation of the output signals whose X-rays photographs have been
taken using a fixed grid, the CXDI creates a model where the output signals are the product
of the subject signals with the grid stripe signals added as shown in Fig.10 and, based on this
model, the grid stripe reduction processing is performed.
More specifically, the grid stripe is reduced by estimating the grid stripe signals from the output
signals based on this model and subtracting these estimated grid stripe signals from the output
signals.
In this way, by the creating of a model, the CXDI estimates the grid stripe signals which are
virtually equivalent to the actual grid stripe signals, and it reduces only the grid stripe signals.
This being the case, the occurrence of artifacts such as ringing or the deterioration of the subject
signals due to image defocusing can be minimized compared with a method that uses a low-
pass filter or notch filter to reduce the frequencies which correspond to the grid stripe signals.
[Fig.10 Creating a model of the grid stripe]

776
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.2. Gray Scale Conversion Processing

The images taken by the CXDI have a wide dynamic range which extends to about 4 digits.
In order to obtain images suitable for diagnosis, therefore, it is necessary to determine which
part of the dynamic range is valid for diagnosis purposes and to allocate the gray scale which is
appropriate for that part.
Furthermore, the diagnosis standards have been systematized on the basis of the screen film
type of images which have been used for some time now so that adjustment must also be made
to the gray scale which is equivalent to that of the screen film type of images.

With the CXDI, this processing is referred to as “gray scale conversion processing”.

Fig.11 shows the general concept behind gray scale conversion processing.

[Fig.11 General concept behind gray scale conversion processing]

On logarithmically transformed original images, whether the dose is high or low can be identified
by the simple sideways shift of the gray scale curve.
As shown in Fig.11, the gray scale curve is shifted sideways in response to the dose so that the
reference pixel value is set to the prescribed photographic density (brightness).
As was explained in 3.2, the reference pixel value is calculated from the same ROI for each
region regardless of the subject or dose.
This means that the gray scale conversion processing of the CXDI automatically adjusts the ROI
to the prescribed photographic density (brightness) regardless of the subject or dose.
The gray scale conversion processing of the CXDI uses the gray scale curve which resembles
the characteristics curve for the screen film type to provide diagnosis images which are
equivalent to the screen film type.

777
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.3. Dynamic Range Adjustment Processing

The gray scale conversion processing described in "4.2. Gray Scale Conversion Processing"
provides diagnosis images which are equivalent to the screen film type regardless of the subject
or dose.

With this processing alone, however, it is difficult to portray the whole subject while maintaining
the contrast level because of the subject's wide dynamic range in those regions where the
differences in the subject depth are great.
It is the task of dynamic range adjustment processing to portray the whole subject while
maintaining the contrast level.
As shown in Fig.12, the gray scale curve which was set by gray scale adjustment processing
(referred to here as the “reference gray scale curve”) is adjusted in such a way that the dynamic
range of the subject is brought within the prescribed range of visibility.

By adjusting the reference gray scale curve in this way, even those subject regions which are
normally overexposed or where there is loss of dark detail can be brought within the prescribed
range of visibility.
Furthermore, the gray scale curve is adjusted while maintaining the correlation between the
reference pixel value and prescribed photographic density (brightness) and maintaining the
gradient of the gray scale curve around the reference pixel value.
This means that the dynamic range of the subject can be brought within the prescribed range
of visibility without changing the photographic density (brightness) or local contrast (the partial
difference between structures is referred to here as the “local contrast”) of the ROI. As was
explained in "3.3. Dynamic Range Analysis", the dynamic range of the subject is calculated
automatically by the dynamic range analysis so the reference gray scale curve is adjusted
automatically in line with the dynamic range of the subject.
[Fig.12 Adjusting the gray scale curve]

778
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Adjusting the gray scale curve in this way alone, however, will cause the local contrast to be low
in those places where the gradient of the gray scale curve is slight, as is the case with the profile
signals shown in Fig.13, and make the structures difficult to view.
For this reason, the CXDI implements the process that compensates for the local contrast
together with the dynamic range adjustment processing so that the dynamic range of the
subject is brought within the range of visibility without reducing the local contrast of the principal
structures existing in the subject, as is shown in Fig.14.
[Fig.13 Local contrast transformation]

[Fig.14 General concept behind local contrast compensation]

779
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Fig.15 shows the general concept behind the dynamic range adjustment processing.

As has already been explained, this processing compensate local contrast to the image gray
scale conversion image.
The local contrast compensation is performed by adding the gray scale conversion image to
the local control compensation image which is created by extracting the principal structural
component in each frequency band from the image produced after breaking down the input
image into a multiple number of different frequency bands.
[Fig.15 General concept behind the dynamic range adjustment]

780
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.4. Accentuation Processing

Many different factors including scattering of the X-rays and light cause the images taken by the
CXDI to become blurred.
It is the task of accentuation processing to make the images clearer and easier to see.

Fig.16 shows the general concept behind the accentuation processing.

With this processing, an accentuated image produced by extracting the structures to be

accentuated in each frequency band is created from the image produced after breaking down the
input image into a multiple number of different frequency bands.
Accentuation processing is implemented by adding the accentuated image to the input image.
[Fig.16 General concept behind the accentuation processing]

With the accentuation processing implemented by the CXDI, the edges and local contrast are
accentuated by changing the structures which are to be accentuated.

781
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Edge accentuation is achieved by accentuating the edges of the structures by generating

overshoot and undershoot in the edge areas, as is shown in Fig.17.
Local contrast accentuation is achieved by amplifying the partial differences in the structures, as
is shown in Fig.18.
[Fig.17 General concept behind accentuation processing (the edges)]

[Fig.18 General concept behind accentuation processing (local contrast)]

782
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

4.5. Noise Reduction Processing

System noise, X-ray quantum noise and various other types of noise are superimposed onto the
images taken by the CXDI.
It is the task of noise reduction processing to reduce these types of noise and improve the
granularity of the images.

Fig.19 shows the general concept behind noise reduction processing.

This method creates a noise image which is obtained by extracting the noise superimposed in
each frequency band from one of the images obtained by breaking down the input image into a
multiple number of different frequency bands.
The noise is reduced according to the dose by subtracting this noise image from the input image.
[Fig.19 General concept behind noise reduction processing]

783
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

8. Glossary

Glossary
Accession # / Accession no.
The number which is used to identify the studies.
AE
DICOM Application Entity (DICOM)
A general term for the printers, computers, examination devices and other applications
involved in DICOM communication.
AEC
An abbreviation which stands for Auto Exposure Control. Refer to Photo-Timer.
AK
An abbreviation which stands for Air Kerma.
Air kerma; used to calculate the dose at the IVR reference point (surface of skin).
This normally refers to the amount of energy per unit mass of a small tissue sample absorbed
by the uncharged X-rays. It is the amount obtained by dividing the sum of the initial kinetic
energy of all the charged particles occurring in the sample mass due to the uncharged
X-rays by the sample mass. In the SI system of units, kerma is expressed in grays (Gy) (or in
kilograms per joule (J/kg)).
Angio exposure mode
A type of imaging consisting of single exposures using Angio protocols but further sub-
classified by exposure mode.
The following combinations are available.

Exposure mode Angio exposure mode

Fluoro *1
Fluoro
Road map fluoroscopy

DA *2

Digital-Cine DSA

Road map mask exposure

*1: This has the same meaning as Fluoro set as the Exposure Mode with RF set as the Exposure Type.
*2: This has the same meaning as Digital-Cine set as the Exposure Mode with RF set as the Exposure Type.

Angio protocol
A protocol with Angio set as the exposure type.
Binning
A function to add multiple pixels together and read them out at once.
It is referred to as line binning when the sensor panel activates multiple lines for readout.

784
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Calibration
An operation to associate the output value with the input value properly.
This refers to the adjustment of the electronic circuitry or the software adjustment to
harmonize with the ratings or standards; it includes the color adjustments of the scanners,
displays and printers.
With the CXDI, it refers to the X-ray sensitivity adjustment and shading correction of the
detector.
CsI
An abbreviation which stands for cesium iodide.
Used as the fluorescent material of the CXDI-50RF, CXDI-40EC, CXDI-55C etc.
Fluorescent material with higher sensitivity.
DA image
An abbreviation which stands for Digital Angiography.
It refers to dynamic images taken by DA in the Angio exposure mode using Angio protocols.
It has the same meaning as Digital-Cine set as the Exposure Mode with RF set as the
Exposure Type.
DAP / Dose area product
An abbreviation which stands for Dose Area Product.
Detector
Flat panel type of X-ray detector.
Also called FPD (Flat Panel Detector) or Sensor Unit.
DI
An abbreviation which stands for Deviation Index.
An index of the log scale of the differences between EIt and EI.
DI is calculated by 10 x log 10 (EI/EIt). For clinic images, about –40 to 40 will be an index.
When exposure is made with the equal dose of EIt, the value will be 0. If DI is away from 0,
the exposure dose is not appropriated. The value will be positive number (+) if the exposure
dose is higher than EIt, and will be negative number if the exposure does it less than EIt.
DICOM
Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine
Standards for digital images and communication which were created in order to support the
sharing of medical information.
DICOMDIR
An index file, or its format, required for saving DICOM files in a storage media.
Digital cine examinations
This refers to angiography using a contrast medium and to imaging using multiple frames of
the dynamic states of moving parts of the body (such as the digestive organs, heart, legs and
arms, and joints), and the images taken are saved as dynamic images.
DSA image
An abbreviation which stands for Digital Subtraction Angiography.
It refers to moving images taken by digital subtraction in the Angio exposure mode using
Angio protocols.

785
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

DSA mask
A mask image used for subtraction by DSA.
DQE / Detective quantum efficiency
An abbreviation which stands for Detective Quantum Efficiency.
This refers to noise characteristics. It includes X-ray quantum noise and amp noise.
DX protocol
A protocol whose exposure type is Static, Stitch or Positioning Fluoro.
Dynamic image
This refers to the Fluoro and Digital-Cine modes, and the images taken in the Fluoro mode
and Digital Cine mode.
EI
An abbreviation which stands for Exposure Index.
The measure of the amount of exposure received by the image receptor. 100 means 1μGy.
EI will not vary depending on the image processing parameters under the same subject and
the same X-ray exposure conditions.
REX is one of the measure, but it also varies depending on the image processing parameters.
By changing the image processing parameters, the value will vary.
EIt
An abbreviation for which stands for Target Exposure Index.
Elt is determined by professional societies such as AAPM, and responsible organization
(institutions or hospitals that are responsible for the use of device and maintenance).
• Elt is to be determined by a. user, but not determined by a service engineer or a
developer.
• It is not set by default, but should be set for each protocol and detector respectively.
• Elt is set in the image processing adjustment screen. Comparing the EI with the past
image, set appropriate one. To reduce the radiation exposure, the small value is preferred
as long as there is no problem with image diagnostics.
• Elt must be determined for each sensor. Csl sensor is higher than GOS sensor in its
sensitivity. Thus, with Csl sensor, Elt can be set smaller than the one for GOS sensor.
Exam / Examination (on a patient by patient basis)
An abbreviation for the word “Examination”; a unit in which the studies of a patient are all
lumped together.
Exposure
This refers to exposing organisms, substances, etc. to X-rays.
“Irradiation” is used for fluoroscopic or digital cine examinations.
Exposure mode
A type of imaging consisting of single exposures.
It refers to Fluoro (fluoroscopic), Digital-Cine, Radiography or Stitch (stitching images together
to form composite images).

786
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Exposure Type
A combination of exposure modes.
Protocols have one exposure type. Exposure types include RF, Static, Positioning Fluoro,
Stitch, Angio and Tomography.
• With the Static type, imaging is possible in the Radiography mode.
• With the Positioning Fluoro type, imaging is possible in the Radiography mode and Fluoro
mode.
• With the RF type, imaging is possible in the Radiography mode, Fluoro mode and Digital-
Cine mode.
• With the Stitch type, imaging is possible in the Radiography mode, and this type has the
stitch mode which is used for forming composite images.
• With the Angio type, imaging is possible in the Fluoro mode and Digital-Cine mode
Fluoroscopic examinations
This examination is used when providing medical treatment or carrying out examination
proceedings while mainly making observations inside the human body. The fluoroscopic
X-ray images are not stored as a general rule, but there are times when they are stored on
media such as video tape for recording purposes rather than for diagnostic applications.
Fluoro-loop
A function which, in the course of fluoroscopic examinations, repeatedly displays each of the
frames taken after the fluoroscopic examinations have been performed.
FPD
An abbreviation which stands for Flat Panel Detector.
Flat panel type of X-ray detector.
Also called Detector or Sensor Unit.
FPGA
An abbreviation which stands for Field Programmable Gate Array.
A type of PLD.
FPN
An abbreviation which stands for Fixed Pattern Noise.
This refers to the output images–also called dark images or dark current images–of the
detector when there is no X-ray exposure. It consists mainly of the output noise of the
detector and system noise. It is used for compensation where the noise components of X-ray
images are reduced by subtracting FPN from the projection images.
Frame
This refers to one image in a series of fluoroscopic images or digital-cine images.
Frame rate
The number of frames of the X-rays acquired per second by the detector panel; it is
expressed in fps (frames per second) units.
F-F
Read as “F minus F.” When FPN is subtracted from FPN, all the images approach zero with
an ideal model having a stable FPN. It is implemented with self-diagnosis.
GOS
An abbreviation which stands for Gadolinium Oxide Sulphur.
Used as the fluorescent material of the CXDI-40EG, CXDFI-55G, etc.

787
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

GSDF
An abbreviation which stands for Grayscale Standard Display Function.
It is defined in chapter 14 of the DICOM standard. It ensures consistency in the way the
entire system is viewed by converting the pixel values, when they are output to a monitor and
printer, into values to achieve a sense of linearity based on the Barten vision model. In order
to support GSDF, both GSPS which is output to the monitor and the Presentation LUT which
is output to the printer must be supported.
GSPS
An abbreviation which stands for Grayscale Softcopy Presentation State.
A DICOM standard used for sending the P-Value, Modality LUT, VOI LUT, rotation, flipping,
annotation (graphics and text) overlays, magnification methods, etc. separately from the
images. With IHE activities, an attempt is made to ensure consistency in the displays using
GSDF and GSPS by CPI.
HIS / RIS
“HIS” stands for Hospital Information System; it refers to a system inside a clinic or hospital
which brings together all the processes from receiving the patients when they check in to the
clinic or hospital to managing their personal information and processing the medical bills.
“RIS” stands for Radiology Information System; it refers to a system used for all information
on the X-ray examinations inside a clinic or hospital from the appointments made and
acceptance of the studies to the storage of the study data, etc.
HIPAA
An abbreviation which stands for Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act.
This law pertaining to the carrying of and responsibility for medical insurance was enacted
in the United States in April 2003. It contains stipulations for promoting the computerization
of medical information and for protecting the privacy and maintaining the security related to
such promotion.
IHE
An abbreviation which stands for Integrating the Healthcare Enterprise.
Activities for creating an integrated system for hospitals and clinics; the work flow of the
medical establishment is analyzed.
IM
An abbreviation which stands for Image Manager.
One of the actors of IHE. Normally, this plays the role of PACS.
Issuing the Storage Commitment events is a duty of the IM.
LIH
An abbreviation which stands for Last Image Hold.
In fluoroscopic imaging, this function displays on a monitor the image of the last frame or the
average image of a multiple number of frames which include the last frame.
Live monitor
A monitor in a dual monitor configuration used to display the live images (mainly dynamic
images) which are being taken.
LUT
An abbreviation which stands for Look-Up-Table.
In CXDI, it refers to the gray scale curve which is used for gradation processing.

788
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Modality
A general term for imaging devices.
MTF
Modulation Transfer Function
Modality transfer function; an indicator used to express the sharpness and resolution of
images. It indicates the extent to which the contrast of the input image is reproduced in the
contrast of the output image using a number from 0 to 1 or from 0% to 100%. Generally, it is
expressed in the form of a graph with the fineness of the target image as the horizontal axis
(spatial frequency: Ip/mm) and MTF as the vertical axis. The response function expresses the
correlation of the output to the input. In image engineering, MTF expresses the response to
the input signals in each frequency in view of the sinusoidal waves using the strength input
as 1. When this is done, the unit used for the frequency is not cycle/s, which would apply with
a time base approach, but the inverse of the distance in the form of a spatial frequency. The
unit of cycle/mm is frequently used, and the resolution limit of the human being is said to be
about 5 cycle/mm. When the response is viewed with the spatial frequency factored in, the
unit is sometimes displayed as MTF(u).
MWL / MWM
An abbreviation which stands for Modality Worklist and Modality Worklist Management.
This refers to the Modality Worklist SOP Class of the DICOM standards. It specifies the
method used by the modality (CXDI) to obtain the study information worklist from RIS (C-Find)
and the type of information concerned.
MPPS
An abbreviation which stands for Modality Performed Procedure Step.
This refers to the Modality Performed Procedure Step SOP Class of the DICOM standards. It
returns the study progress of the modality to the RIS side. It is used for the billing information.
OF
An abbreviation which stands for Order Filler.
An IHE term. It serves to fill the orders. At the RIS side operated by the technicians.
OP
An abbreviation which stands for Order Placer.
An IHE term. It serves to create the orders. At the HIS side operated by the doctor.
PACS
An abbreviation which stands for Picture Archiving and Communication System.
A system which stores the X-ray images, CT images, MRI images and other image data used
in medical applications and transfers them using a network.
Patient Orientation
This indicates the orientation of the patient's body in respect of the image.
On the right side and the under side of the image, the orientation of the patient's body in
respect of each side of the image is indicated. L/F, A/H etc.
PDI
An abbreviation which stands for IHE Portable Data for Imaging.
A portable medium profile for images.

789
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

Photo-Timer
Also referred to as an automatic exposure device or AEC (Auto Exposure Control). This
device is installed in order to ensure that the X-ray exposure level is appropriate during
radiographic examinations, and it automatically controls the exposure time in order to blacken
the exposure images to a standardized degree.
PLD
An abbreviation which stands for Programmable Logic Device.
PPS
An abbreviation which stands for Performed Procedure Step.
This refers to an examination which has been carried out for SPS.
PPSM
An abbreviation which stands for Performed Procedure Step Manager. One of the actors of
IHE. This manages the PPS issued by the modality. It is linked with IM.
Preview Image
This is an image which is displayed after it has been shot so that it can be checked.
Program
This refers to the preparation of a complete photography protocol list for one patient. For the
technician, it is the menu for taking images.
Protocol / Imaging protocol
Unit used to implement imaging. Whenever the term “protocol” is used on its own, it refers
to an imaging protocol. Using a Code Value, it may be expanded into a multiple number of
imaging sessions. It has a default workspace and workspaces which can be selected. It also
has image processing parameters and X-ray imaging linkage codes.
P-Value
This is the value which is obtained by normalizing the JND index, and it is linear to the sense
of sight. “P” comes from the word “perception”. Whether it is sent to PACS and displayed
on the LCD monitor or it is sent to an imager and set on film, its purpose is to provide
compensation so that the same kind of output is produced.
Since it is affected by the diagnosis environment, it can be output at a photographic density
normalized by the imager by sending brightness L0 of the digital light box and brightness La
of the peripheral light.
QA
An abbreviation which stands for Quality Assurance.
This refers to assuring the image quality, and all the image processing undertaken by the
CXDI is referred to as QA processing.
Radiation field
Area in which the subject is exposed to the X-rays when radiographs are taken.
Radiographic image
This refers to the Radiography mode, and the images taken in the Radiography mode.
Reference monitor
A monitor in a dual monitor configuration used to display the CCS which includes user
operation screens.

790
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

REX
An abbreviation which stands for Reached Exposure Index.
A number serving as a guideline as to whether an image was taken using the appropriate
X-ray dose. When the photographic density of the images output is constant, the REX value
will be lower if the imaging dose is low and higher if it is high. The REX value is defined as the
detector output equivalent value of the part with the reference photographic density (=0.75D)
when the film is output from the CXDI. REX will not be an index of exposure dose under the
REX mode where the image density is adjusted by changing a value of REX.
RF protocol
A protocol whose exposure type is RF or Positioning Fluoro.
Road map fluoroscopic image
A dynamic image taken with road map fluoroscopy as the Angio exposure mode using an
Angio protocol.
Road map mask
A mask image used for subtraction by road map fluoroscopy. An image created by adding the
dynamic images taken with road map mask exposure as the Angio exposure mode using an
Angio protocol. Alternatively, an image created by adding DSA images.
ROI
An abbreviation which stands for Region of Interest.
In CXDI, it refers to region of interest which is subject to diagnosis.
RP
An abbreviation which stands for Requested Procedure.
This is an examination which has already been requested. It has SPS.
SCP
An abbreviation which stands for Service Class Provider.
The default is the side which receives the DICOM messages.
SCU
An abbreviation which stands for Service Class User.
The default is the side which issues the DICOM messages. An exception to this is when
N-EVENT-REPORT-RQ is received and N-EVENT-REPORT-RSP is sent. The Association
has the role of SCU.
Series
In the case of CTs or moving images, this term refers to taking a number of X-ray images at
one time. In the case of radiographic images, one series has one image.
SPS / Scheduled procedure step
An abbreviation which stands for Scheduled Procedure Step.

791
 CXDI Control Software NE/CXDI Controller RF Service Manual
Ver2.16

SSL
An abbreviation which stands for Secure Socket Layer.
This is the framework for the encryption protocol developed by Netscape. It combines
security technologies covering such aspects as public key codes, secret key codes, digital
certificates and hash functions to prevent data theft, falsification and impersonation. The
actual encryption algorithm is used by AES, 3DES, etc.
In terms of what is installed, the Open SSL open source toolkit is well-known.
SSL is supported by .NET 2.0.
Study / Study (order unit)
Unit used for the studies ordered by the doctor.
Storage
Refers to PACS or other external storage systems.
SWF
An abbreviation which stands for IHE Scheduled Work Flow.
This is a profile which specifies the normal study work flow, and specifications are provided
for Simple Case, Unscheduled Case, Append Case, Abandoned Case, Group Case, etc.
UID
A unique identifier which determines objects uniformly. Under the DICOM standards, it is
expressed in a format up to 64 characters (1.2.840....).
View Position
Direction in which the patient is exposed to the X-rays.
AP, PA, LL, RL, RLD, LLD, RLO, LLO etc.
White image
Image which is produced by exposing the entire surface of the detector to X-rays and which
is used for gain compensation. It is generated when calibration has been undertaken.
Workspace
A combination of detector and imaging position; it is stored with each imaging protocol.

References:
• Dictionary of Television Terms (Corona Publishing Co., Ltd.)
• McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Scientific and Technical Terms (Nikkan Kogyo Shimbun, Ltd.)
• Comprehensive Dictionary of JIS Industrial Terms (Japanese Standards Association)
• IT Term Dictionary e-Words

792